Donate
   
Select your preferred input and type any Sanskrit or English word. Enclose the word in “” for an EXACT match e.g. “yoga”.
Root Search
sun has 1 results
        Root Word (Pāṇini Dhātupāṭha:)Full Root MarkerSenseClassSutra
√śunśunaagatau646
 
 
sun has 1 results
Root WordIAST MeaningMonier Williams PageClass
√शुन्śungoing, moving / gati347/3Cl.6
Amarakosha Search
Apte Search
Results for sun
abhinirmukta अभिनिर्मुक्त a. 1 Left or quitted (by the sun when it sets). -2 One asleep at sunset and thus not doing the duties to be then performed. सूर्येणाभ्युदितो यश्च ब्रह्मचारी भवत्युत । तथा सूर्याभिनिर्मुक्तः कुनखी श्यावदन्नपि ॥ Mb.12.34.3.
abhyastamayaḥ अभ्यस्तमयः Setting of the sun during or with reference to some act.
abhyastamita अभ्यस्तमित a. One on whom the sun has set while asleep.
abhyudita अभ्युदित p. p. 1 Risen; occurred. -2 Elevated, risen to prosperity. -3 Asleep at sunrise, over whom the sun has risen; सूर्येण ह्यभिनिर्मुक्तः शयानो$भ्युदितश्च यः Ms.2.221. -4 Celebrated as a festival. -ता N. of a religious ceremony. -तम् Rising, sunrise.
abja अब्ज a. [अप्सु जायते, जन्-ड] Born in or produced from water Ms.5.112. अब्जेषु चैव रत्नेषु 8.1 -ब्जः 1 The conch; गाण्डीवं व्याक्षिपत्पार्थः कृष्णो$प्यब्जमवादयत् Mb.7. 129.38. (n. also). -2 The moon. -3 Camphor. -4 N. of a tree, Barringtonia Acutangula (निचुल). -5 Dhanvantari, physician of the gods, said to be produced at the churning of the ocean along with other jewels. cf. अब्जस्तु निचुले शङ्खे पद्मे धन्वन्तरावपि । वैद्येन्दोरपि ... Nm. -ब्जम् 1 A lotus. -2 One thousand millions. -Comp. -कर्णिका the seed vessel of lotus. -जः, -भवः, -भूः, -योनिः epithets of Brahmā, (being supposed to have sprung from the lotus which arose form the navel of Viṣṇu) -कान्तः a class of ten-storyed buildings. Māna.28.18. -दृश्, -नयन, -नेत्र, -लोचन &c. a. lotuseyed, having large beautiful eyes. -बान्धवः 'a friend of lotuses,' the sun. -भोगः 1 the root of a lotus. -2. a cowrie (वराटक) as large as a conch. -वाहनः 'carrying the moon on his forehead,' epithet of Śiva. (-ना) 'having the lotus for her seat,' N. of Lakṣmī. -स्थितः N. of Brahmā. -हस्तः the sun (represented as holding a lotus in one hand).
adhvan अध्वन् m. [अत्ति बलं; अद्-क्वनिप् धादेशः Uṇ.4.115; perhaps from अत् also] 1 (a) A way, road; passage, orbit (of planets &c.); मुक्ताध्वानं ये लङ्घयेयुर्भवन्तम् Me.54. (b) Distance, space (traversed or to be traversed); पञ्चदशयोजनमात्रमध्वानं जगाम K.119,12; कियत्यध्वनि सा उज्ज- यिनी 27; Dk.13; अपि लङ्धितमध्वानं बुबुधे न बुधोपसः R.1. 47; उल्लङ्घिताध्वा Me.45; कालाध्वनोरत्यन्तसंयोगे &c. (c) Journey, travel, course, march; नैकः प्रपद्येताध्वानम् Ms.4.6 undertake a journey; अध्वसु त्रिषु विसृष्टमैथिलः R.11.57 after three marches; परिक्लान्तः किलाध्वना Ki.11.2 wayworn; अध्वश्रमपरिगतम् Me.17.4; अध्वा वर्णकफस्थौल्यसौकुमा- र्यविनाशनः Suśr. -2 A recension of the Vedas and the school upholding it (शाखा, अवयव) एकविंशत्यध्वयुक्त- मृय्वेदमृषयो विदुः । सहस्राध्वा सामवेदो यजुरेकशताध्वकम् ॥ अध्वा देवगतिः शाखा इति पर्यायवाचकाः । -3 Time (Kāla), time personified, (being the eater of all) दुर्मरं पुरुषेणेह मन्ये ह्यध्वन्यनागते Mb.14.8.24. -4 Air; sky, atmosphere. -5 Place. प्रस्थितं दीर्घमध्वानं स्वबन्धुमिव बान्धवाः Rām.5.1.45. -6 Means, resource; method. -7 Attack (अधिकदुरारोह- णम्). अध्वन् is changed to अध्व after prepositions; प्राध्वः, व्यध्वः &c. -Comp. -अतिः [अध्वानमतति, अत्-इ] 1 a traveller. -2 an intelligent person. -अधिपः, -ईशः [ष. त.] an officer in charge of the public roads. -अयनम् [अध्वन्ययनम्] journey, travel. -गः 1 one who travels; a traveller, way-farer; Av.13.1.36. सन्तानकतरुच्छाया- सुप्तविद्याधराध्वगम् Ku.6.46 (˚गामिन्). -2 a camel. -3 a mule. -4 the sun; ˚भोग्यः N. of a tree, Spondias Mangifera (आम्रातकवृक्ष) अध्वगैः अयत्नलम्यफलत्वात् भोग्यः (Mar. आंबाडा). (-गा) the Ganges. -गत् m. [अध्वानं गच्छति; गम्-क्विप् P.VI.4.4] a traveller. -गत्यन्तः गन्तव्यः [ष. त.] measure of length applicable to roads; कालभावा- ध्वगन्तव्यः Mbh. Vārt. on P.1.4.51. -जा [अध्वनि जायते; जन्-ड] A plant (स्वर्णुली or स्वर्णपुष्पी). -पतिः 1 the sun (दिवैव पथिकानां गमनात् रात्रौ च गमननिषेधात् सूर्यस्य अध्वपालकत्वम् or अध्वनः आकाशस्य पतिः). -2 inspector of the road. -रथः [अध्वने हितः पर्याप्तो रथः शाक. त.] 1 a travelling coach. -2 [अध्वैव रथो यस्य] a messenger skilled in travelling (पथि प्रज्ञो दूतः). -शल्यः [अध्वनि शल्यमिव आचारतीति क्विप्- अच् Tv.] N. of a tree (अपामार्ग) (अध्वगानां पादवस्त्रादौ शल्यवद्वेधकारकत्वात् तथात्वम्) (Mar. आघाडा). अध्वनीन adhvanīna अध्वन्य adhvanya अध्वनीन अध्वन्य a. [अध्वानम् अलं गच्छति, अध्वन्-ख- यत् वा; अध्वनो यत्खौ P.V.2.16] Able to undertake a journey, speeding on a journey; क्षिप्रं ततो$ध्वन्यतुरङ्गयायी Bk.2.44. -नः -न्यः A traveller going fast, way-farer.
āditya आदित्य a. [अदितेरपत्यं ण्य P.IV.1.85.] 1 Solar, belonging to, or born in, the solar line; आदित्यैर्यदि विग्रहो नृपतिभिर्धन्यं ममैतत्ततो U.6.18. -2 Devoted to, or originating from, Aditi; आदित्यं चरुं निर्वपेत् Yaj. Ts.2.2.6.1. -3 Belonging to, or sprung from, the Ādityas. -त्यः 1 A son of Aditi; a god, divinity in general. (The number of Ādityas appears to have been originally seven, of whom Varuṇa is the head, and the name Āditya was restricted to them (देवा आदित्या ये सप्त Rv.9.114.3.). In the time of the Brāhmaṇas, however, the number of Ādityas rose to 12, representing the sun in the 12 months of the year; धाता मित्रो$र्यमा रुद्रो वरुणः सूर्य एव च । भगो विवस्वान् पूषा च सविता दशमः स्मृतः ॥ एकादशस्तथा त्वष्टा विष्णुर्द्वादश उच्यते ।); आदित्यानामहं विष्णुः Bg.1.21; Ku. 2.24. (These 12 suns are supposed to shine only at the destruction of the universe; cf. Ve.3.8; दग्धुं विश्वं दहनकिरणैर्नोदिता द्वादशार्काः). -2 The sun; Vāj.4.21. -3 A name of Viṣṇu in his fifth or dwarf-incarnation; स्वयंभूः शंभुरादित्यः V. Sah. -4 N. of the Arka plant (Mar. रुई). -त्यौ (dual) N. of a constellation, the seventh lunar mansion (पुनर्वसु). -Comp. -केतुः 1 N. of a son of Dhṛitarāṣtra. -2 The charioteer of the sun. -चन्द्रौ (dual) the sun and the moon. -दर्शनम् 'Showing the sun' (to a child of 4 months), one of the संस्काराs. -पत्र्यः N. of a plant. (-त्र्यम्) the leaf of the Arka tree. -पर्णिनी a creeping plant with gold-coloured flowers, growing near the bank of water. -पुराणम् N. of an Upapurāṇa. -पुष्पिका red swallow wort (Mar. शिरदोडी). -बन्धुः N. of Śākyamuni. -भक्ता [आदित्ये भक्ता] N. of a plant. see अर्कभक्ता. -मण्डलम् the disc or orb of the sun. -व्रतम् 1 worship of the sun; a व्रत or rite. -2 N. of a Sāman. -सूनुः 'the son of the sun', N. of Sugrīva, Yama, Saturn, Manu and Karṇa &c.
aga अग a. [न गच्छतीति; गम्-ड. न. त.)] 1 Unable to walk, not going, not in a position to go; अगो वृषलः शीतेन P.VI.3.77 Sk. अगजगदोकसामखिलशक्त्यवबोधक ते Bhāg. 1.87.14. -2 Unapproachable. -गः 1 A tree; सदानतो येन विषाणिना$गः Śi.4.63. -2 A mountain; ध्वनिरगविवरेषु नूपुराणाम् Ki.1.4. also a stone; प्रत्यापगं प्रत्यगम् Mahānāṭaka. -3 A snake. -4 The sun (न गच्छति वक्रगत्या पश्चिमम्, तस्य हि वक्रगत्यभावो ज्योतिषप्रसिद्धः or, 'not going' the earth by its diurnal rotation causing day and night). -5 A water-jar, as in अगस्त्य (कुम्भस्त्यान). -6 The number seven (from the seven कुलाचलs) cf. ... _x001F_+अथ पन्नगे । नगाः अगाः पर्वते$र्के पादपे स्यात्...। Nm. -Comp. -आत्मजा the daughter of the mountain, N. of Pārvatī. -ओकस् m. [अगः पर्वतः ओको यस्य] 1 a mountain-dweller. -2 a bird (वृक्षवासी). -3 the animal शरभ supposed to have 8 legs. -4 a lion. -ज a. (अगात् पर्वतशिलातो जायते; जन्-ड,) produced on a mountain or from a tree; roaming or wandering through mountains, wild (गिरिचर); कचाचितौ विष्वगिवागजौ गजौ Ki.1.36. (-जम्) bitumen. [शिलाजित] -जा Born From the mountain, Pārvatī. अगजाननपद्मार्कं गजाननमहर्निशम् । अनेकदं तं भक्तानामेकदन्तमुपास्महे ॥ Subhā. -जानिः Śiva, सर्वं तद्भगवन् त्वदीयमगजाजाने समस्तार्तिहन् । चोल- चम्पूकाव्य P.9, Verse 12.
agiraḥ अगिरः (नः ?) [न गीर्यते दुःखेन; गॄ. बा. ˚क. न. त. Tv.] 1 Heaven. -2 The sun or fire ? -3 A Rākṣasa. -Comp. -ओकस् a. [अगिरः स्वर्गः ओको वासस्थानं यस्य] dwelling in the heaven (as a god); जीराश्चिदगिरौकसः Rv.1.135.9; not to be stopped by threatening shouts (?)
agniḥ अग्निः [अङ्गति ऊर्ध्वं गच्छति अङ्ग्-नि,नलोपश्च Uṇ.4.5., or fr. अञ्च् 'to go.'] 1 Fire कोप˚, चिन्ता˚, शोक˚, ज्ञान˚, राज˚, &c. -2 The God of fire. -3 Sacrificial fire of three kinds (गार्हपत्य, आहवनीय and दक्षिण); पिता बै गार्हपत्यो$ ग्निर्माताग्निर्दक्षिणः स्मृतः । गुरुराहवनीयस्तु साग्नित्रेता गरीयसी ॥ Ms. 2.232. -4 The fire of the stomach, digestive faculty, gastric fluid. -5 Bile (नाभेरूर्ध्व हृदयादधस्तादामाशयमाचक्षते तद्गतं सौरं तेजः पित्तम् इत्याचक्षते). -6 Cauterization (अग्नि- कर्मन्). -7 Gold. -8 The number three. शराग्निपरिमाणम् (पञ्चत्रिंशत्) Mb.13.17.26. -9 N. of various plants: (a) चित्रक Plumbago Zeylanica; (b) रक्तचित्रक; (c) भल्लातक Semicarpus Anacardium; (d) निम्बक Citrus Acida. -1 A mystical substitute for the letter र्. In Dvandva comp. as first member with names of deities, and with particular words अग्नि is changed to अग्ना, as ˚विष्णू, ˚मरुतौ, or to अग्नी, ˚पर्जन्यौ, ˚ वरुणौ, ˚षोमौ -11 पिङगला नाडी; यत्र तद् ब्रह्म निर्द्वन्द्वं यत्र सोमः, (इडा) सहाग्निना (अग्निः पिङ्गला) Mb.14.2.1. -12 Sacrificial altar, अग्निकुण्ड cf. Rām. 1.14.28. -13 Sky. अग्निर्मूर्धा Muṇḍ 2.1.4. [cf. L. ignis.] [Agni is the God of Fire, the Ignis of the Latins and Ogni of the Slavonians. He is one of the most prominent deities of the Ṛigveda. He, as an immortal, has taken up his abode among mortals as their guest; he is the domestic priest, the successful accomplisher and protector of all ceremonies; he is also the religious leader and preceptor of the gods, a swift messenger employed to announce to the immortals the hymns and to convey to them the oblations of their worshippers, and to bring them down from the sky to the place of sacrifice. He is sometimes regarded as the mouth and the tongue through which both gods and men participate in the sacrifices. He is the lord, protector and leader of people, monarch of men, the lord of the house, friendly to mankind, and like a father, mother, brother &c. He is represented as being produced by the attrition of two pieces of fuel which are regarded as husband and wife. Sometimes he is considered to have been brought down from heaven or generated by Indra between two clouds or stones, created by Dyau, or fashioned by the gods collectively. In some passages he is represented as having a triple existence, which may mean his three-fold manifestations as the sun in heaven, lightning in the atmosphere, and as ordinary fire on the earth, although the three appearances are also elsewhere otherwise explained. His epithets are numberless and for the most part descriptive of his physical characteristics : धूमकेतु, हुतभुज्, शुचि, रोहिताश्व, सप्तजिह्व, तोमरधर, घृतान्न, चित्रभानु, ऊर्ध्वशोचिस्, शोचिष्केश, हरिकेश, हिरण्यदन्त, अयोदंष्ट्र &c. In a celebrated passage he is said to have 4 horns, 3 feet, 2 heads, and 7 hands. The highest divine functions are ascribed to Agni. He is said to have spread out the two worlds and _x001F_+ produced them, to have supported heaven, formed the mundane regions and luminaries of heaven, to have begotten Mitra and caused the sun to ascend the sky. He is the head and summit of the sky, the centre of the earth. Earth, Heaven and all beings obey his commands. He knows and sees all worlds or creatures and witnesses all their actions. The worshippers of Agni prosper, they are wealthy and live long. He is the protector of that man who takes care to bring him fuel. He gives him riches and no one can overcome him who sacrifices to this god. He confers, and is the guardian of, immortality. He is like a water-trough in a desert and all blessing issue from him. He is therefore constantly supplicated for all kinds of boons, riches, food, deliverance from enemies and demons, poverty, reproach, childlessness, hunger &c. Agni is also associated with Indra in different hymns and the two gods are said to be twin brothers. Such is the Vedic conception of Agni; but in the course of mythological personifications he appears as the eldest son of Brahmā and is called Abhimānī [Viṣṇu Purāṇa]. His wife was Svāhā; by her, he had 3 sons -Pāvaka, Pavamāna and Śuchi; and these had forty-five sons; altogether 49 persons who are considered identical with the 49 fires. He is also represented as a son of Aṅgiras, as a king of the Pitṛs or Manes, as a Marut and as a grandson of Śāṇḍila, and also as a star. The Harivaṁśa describes him as clothed in black, having smoke for his standard and head-piece and carrying a flaming javelin. He is borne in a chariot drawn by red horses and the 7 winds are the wheels of his car. He is accompanied by a ram and sometimes he is represented as riding on that animal. Agni was appointed by Brahamā as the sovereign of the quarter between the south and east, whence the direction is still known as Āgneyī. The Mahābhārata represents Agni as having exhausted his vigour and become dull by devouring many oblations at the several sacrifices made by king Śvetaki, but he recruited his strength by devouring the whole Khāṇḍava forest; for the story see the word खाण्डव]. -Comp. -अ (आ) गारम् -रः, -आलयः, -गृहम् [अग्निकार्याय अगारम् शाक˚ त.] a fire-sanctuary, house or place for keeping the sacred fire; वसंश्चतुर्थो$ग्निरिवाग्न्यगारे R.5.25. रथाग्न्यगारं चापार्चीं शरशक्तिगदे- न्धनम् Mb.11.25.14. -अस्त्रम् fire-missile, a rocket, -आत्मक a. [अग्निरात्मा यस्य] of the nature of fire सोमा- त्मिका स्त्री, ˚कः पुमान्. -आधानम् consecrating the fire; so ˚आहिति. -आधेयः [अग्निराधेयो येन] a Brāhmana who maintains the sacred fire. (-यम्) = ˚आधानम्. -आहितः [अग्निराहितो येन, वा परनिपातः P.II.2.37.] one who maintains the sacred fire; See आहिताग्नि. -इध् m. (अग्नीध्रः) [अग्निम् इन्द्धे स अग्नीध्] the priest who kindles fire (mostly Ved). -इन्धनः [अग्निरिध्यते अनेन] N. of a Mantra. (नम्) kindling the fire; अग्नीन्धनं भैक्षचर्याम् Ms.2.18. -उत्पातः [अग्निना दिव्यानलेन कृतः उत्पातः] a fiery portent, meteor, comet &c. In Bṛ. S.33 it is said to be of five kinds: दिवि भुक्तशुभफलानां पततां रूपाणि यानि तान्युल्काः । धिष्ण्योल्का- शनिविद्युत्तारा इति पञ्चधा भिन्नाः ॥ उल्का पक्षेण फलं तद्वत् धिष्ण्याशनिस्त्रिभिः पक्षैः । विद्युदहोभिः ष़ड्भिस्तद्वत्तारा विपाचयति ॥ Different fruits are said to result from the appearances of these portents, according to the nature of their colour, position &c. -उद्धरणम्, -उद्धारः 1 producing fire by the friction of two araṇis. -2 taking out, before sun-rise, the sacred fire from its cover of ashes previous to a sacrifice. -उपस्थानम् worship of Agni; the Mantra or hymn with which Agni is worshipped (अग्निरुपस्थीयते$नेन) अग्निस्त्रिष्टुभ् उपस्थाने विनियोगः Sandhyā. -एधः [अग्निमेधयति] an incendiary. -कणः; -स्तोकः a spark. -कर्मन् n. [अग्नौ कर्म स. त.] 1 cauterization. -2 action of fire. -3 oblation to Agni, worship of Agni (अग्निहोत्र); so ˚कार्य offering oblations to fire, feeding fire with ghee &c.; निर्वर्तिताग्निकार्यः K.16.; ˚र्यार्धदग्ध 39, Ms.3.69, अग्निकार्यं ततः कुर्यात्सन्ध्ययोरुभयोरपि । Y.1.25. -कला a part (or appearance) of fire; ten varieties are mentioned धूम्रार्चिरुष्मा ज्वलिनी ज्वालिनी विस्फु- लिङ्गिनी । सुश्री: सुरूपा कपिला हव्यकव्यवहे अपि ॥ यादीनां दश- वर्णानां कला धर्मप्रदा अमूः ।). -कारिका [अग्निं करोति आधत्ते करणे कर्तृत्वोपचारात् कर्तरि ण्वुल्] 1 the means of consecrating the sacred fire, the Ṛik called अग्नीध्र which begins with अग्निं दूतं पुरो दधे. 2. = अग्निकार्यम्. -काष्ठम् अग्नेः उद्दीपनं काष्ठं शाक ˚त.] agallochum (अगुरु) -कुक्कुटः [अग्नेः कुक्कुट इव रक्तवर्णस्फुलिङ्गत्वात्] a firebrand, lighted wisp of straw. -कुण्डम [अग्नेराधानार्थं कुण्डम्] an enclosed space for keeping the fire, a fire-vessel. -कुमारः, -तनयः; सुतः 1 N. of Kārttikeya said to be born from fire; Rām.7. See कार्त्तिकेय. -2 a kind of preparation of medicinal drugs. -कृतः Cashew-nut; the plant Anacardium occidentale. [Mar.काजू] -केतुः [अग्नेः केतुरिव] 1 smoke. -2 N. of two Rākṣasas on the side of Rāvaṇa and killed by Rāma. -कोणः -दिक् the south-east corner ruled over by Agni; इन्द्रो वह्निः पितृपतिर्नौर्ऋतो वरुणो मरुत् । कुबेर ईशः पतयः पूर्वादीनां दिशां क्रमात् ॥ -क्रिया [अग्निना निर्वर्तिता क्रिया, शाक. त.] 1 obsequies, funeral ceremonies. -2 branding; भेषजाग्निक्रियासु च Y.3.284. -क्रीडा [तृ. त.] fire-works, illuminations. -गर्भ a. [अग्निर्गर्भे यस्य] pregnant with or containing fire, having fire in the interior; ˚र्भां शमीमिव Ś 4.3. (--र्भः) [अग्निरिव जारको गर्भो यस्य] 1 N. of the plant Agnijāra. -2 the sun stone, name of a crystal supposed to contain and give out fire when touched by the rays of the sun; cf Ś2.7. -3 the sacrificial stick अरणि which when churned, gives out fire. (-र्भा) 1 N. of the Śamī plant as containing fire (the story of how Agni was discovered to exist in the interior of the Śamī plant is told in chap. 35 of अनु- शासनपर्व in Mb.) -2 N. of the earth (अग्नेः सकाशात् गर्भो यस्यां सा; when the Ganges threw the semen of Śiva out on the Meru mountain, whatever on earth &c. was irradiated by its lustre, became gold and the earth was thence called वसुमती) -3 N. of the plant महा- ज्योतिष्मती लता (अग्निरिव गर्भो मध्यभागो यस्याः सा) [Mar. माल- कांगोणी] -ग्रन्थः [अग्निप्रतिपादको ग्रन्थः शाक. त.] the work that treats of the worship of Agni &c. -घृतम् [अग्न्युद्दीपनं घृतं शाक. त.] a kind of medicinal preparation of ghee used to stimulate the digestive power. -चित् m. अग्निं चितवान्; चि-भूतार्थे क्विप् P.III.2.91] one who has kept the sacred fire; यतिभिः सार्धमनग्निमग्निचित् R.8.25; अध्वरे- ष्वग्निचित्वत्सु Bk.5.11. -चयः, -चयनम्, -चित्या. arranging or keeping the sacred fire (अग्न्याधान); चित्याग्निचित्ये च P.III.1.132. -2 (-यः, -यनः) the Mantra used in this operation. -3 a heap of fire -चित्वत् [अग्निचयनम् अस्त्यस्मिन् मतुप्; मस्य वः । तान्तत्वान्न पद- त्वम् Tv.] having अग्निचयन or अग्निचित्. -चूडः A bird having a red tuft. -चर्णम् gunpowder. कार्यासमर्थः कत्यस्ति शस्त्रगोलाग्निचूर्णयुक् Śukranīti 2.93. -ज, -जात a. produced by or from fire, born from fire. (-जः, -जातः) 1 N. of the plant अग्निजार (अग्नये अग्न्युद्दीपनाय जायते सेवनात् प्रभवति). 1 N. of Kārttikeya पराभिनत्क्रौञ्चमिवाद्रिमग्निजः Mb.8.9. 68.3. Viṣṇu. (-जम्, -जातम) gold; so ˚जन्मन्. -जित् m. God; Bhāg.8.14.4. -जिह्व a. 1 having a fiery tongue. -2 one having fire for the tongue, epithet of a God or of Visṇu in the boar incarnation. (-ह्वा) 1 a tongue or flame of fire. -2 one of the 7 tongues of Agni (कराली धूमिनी श्वेता लोहिता नीललोहिता । सुवर्णा पद्मरागा च जिह्वा: सप्त विभावसोः -3 N. of a plant लाङ्गली (अग्नेर्जिह्वेव शिखा यस्याः सा); of another plant (जलपिप्पली) or गजपिप्पली (विषलाङ्गला) (Mar. जल-गज पिंपळी) -ज्वाला 1 the flame or glow of fire. -2 [अग्नेर्ज्वालेव शिखा यस्याः सा] N. of a plant with red blossoms, chiefly used by dyers, Grislea Tomentosa (Mar. धायफूल, धायटी). -तप् a. [अग्निना तप्यते; तप्-क्विप्] having the warmth of fire; practising austerities by means of fire. -तपस् a. [अग्निभिः तप्यते] 1 practising very austere penance, standing in the midst of the five fires. -2 glowing, shining or burning like fire (तपतीति तपाः अग्निरिव तपाः) hot as fire -तेजस् a. having the lustre or power of fire. (अग्नेरिव तेजो यस्य). (-स् n.) the lustre of fire. (-स् m.) N. of one of the 7 Ṛiṣis of the 11th Manvantara. -त्रयम् the three fires, See under अग्नि. -द a. [अग्निं दाहार्थं गृहादौ ददाति; दा. -क.] 1 giving or supplying with fire -2 tonic, stomachic, producing appetite, stimulating digestion. -3 incendiary; अग्निदान् भक्तदांश्चैव Ms.9.278; अग्निदानां च ये लोकाः Y.2.74; so ˚दायक, ˚दायिन्. यदग्निदायके पापं यत्पापं गुरुतल्पगे. Rām.2.75.45. -दग्ध a. 1 burnt on the funeral pile; अग्निदग्धाश्च ये जीवा ये$प्यदग्धाः कुले मम Vāyu. P. -2 burnt with fire. -3 burnt at once without having fire put into the mouth, being destitute of issue (?); (pl.) a class of Manes or Pitṛis who, when alive, kept up the household flame and presented oblations to fire. -दमनी [अग्निर्दम्यते$नया; दम्-णिच् करणे ल्युट] a narcotic plant, Solanum Jacquini. [Mar. रिंगणी] -दातृ [अग्निं विधानेन ददाति] one who performs the last (funeral) ceremonies of a man; यश्चाग्निदाता प्रेतस्य पिण्डं दद्यात्स एव हि. -दीपन a. [अग्निं दीपयति] stimulating digestion, stomachic, tonic. -दीप्त a. [तृ. त्त.] glowing, set on fire, blazing (-प्ता) [अग्निर्जठरानलो दीप्तः सेवनात् यस्याः सा] N. of a plant ज्योतिष्मती लता (Mar. मालकांगोणी), which is said to stimulate digestion. -दीप्तिः f. active state of digestion. -दूत a. अग्निर्दूत इव यस्मिन् यस्य वा] having Agni for a messenger, said of the sacrifice or the deity invoked; यमं ह यज्ञो गच्छत्यग्निदूतो अरंकृतः Rv.1.14.13. -दूषितः a. branded. -देवः [अग्नि- रेव देवः] Agni; a worshipper of Agni. -देवा [अग्निर्देवो यस्याः] the third lunar mansion, the Pleiades (कृत्तिका). -द्वारम् the door on the south-east of a building; पूर्व- द्वारमथैशाने चाग्निद्वारं तु दक्षिणे । Māna.9.294-95. -धानम् [अग्निर्धियते$स्मिन्] the place or receptacle for keeping the sacred fire, the house of अग्निहोतृ; पदं कृणुते अग्निधाने Rv. 1.165.3. -धारणम् maintaining the sacred fire; व्रतिनां ˚णम् K. 55. -नयनम् = ˚प्रणयनम्. -निर्यासः [अग्नेर्ज- ठरानलस्येव दीपको निर्यासो यस्य] N. of the plant अग्निजार. -नेत्र a. [अग्निर्नेता यस्य] having Agni for the leader or conveyer of oblations, an epithet of a god in general. -पदम् 1 the word Agni. -2 fire-place. -3 N. of a plant. -परिक्रि-ष्क्रि-या care of the sacred fire, worship of fire, offering oblations; गृहार्थो$ग्निपरिष्क्रिया Ms.2.67. -परिच्छदः the whole sacrificial apparatus; गृह्यं चाग्निपरिच्छदम् Ms.6. 4. -परिधानम् enclosing the sacrificial fire with a kind of screen. -परीक्षा [तृ. त.] ordeal by fire. -पर्वतः [अग्निसाधनं पर्वतः] a volcano; महता ज्वलता नित्यमग्निमेवाग्नि- पर्वतः Rām.5.35.43. -पुच्छः [अग्नेः अग्न्याधानस्थानस्य पुच्छ इव]. tail or back part of the sacrificial place; the extinction of fire. -पुराणम् [अग्निना प्रोक्तं पुराणम्] one of the 18 Purāṇas ascribed to Vyāsa. It derives its name from its having been communicated originally by Agni to the sage Vasiṣṭha for the purpose of instructing him in the two-fold knowledge of Brahman. Its stanzas are said to be 145. Its contents are varied. It has portions on ritual and mystic worship, cosmical descriptions, chapters on the duties of Kings and the art of war, a chapter on law, some chapters on Medicine and some treatises on Rhetoric, Prosody, Grammar, Yoga, Brahmavidyā &c. &c. -प्रणयनम् bringing out the sacrificial fire and consecrating it according to the proper ritual. -प्रणिधिः Incendiary. Dk.2.8. -प्रतिष्ठा consecration of fire, especially the nuptial fire. -प्रवेशः; -शनम [स. त.] entering the fire, self-immolation of a widow on the funeral pile of her husband. -प्रस्कन्दनम् violation of the duties of a sacrificer (अग्निहोमाकरण); ˚परस्त्वं चाप्येवं भविष्यसि Mb.1.84.26. -प्रस्तरः [अग्निं प्रस्तृणाति अग्नेः प्रस्तरो वा] a flint, a stone producing fire. -बाहुः [अग्ने- र्बाहुरिव दीर्घशिखत्वात्] 1 smoke. -2 N. of a son of the first Manu; Hariv. N. of a son of Priyavrata and Kāmyā. V. P. -बीजम् 1 the seed of Agni; (fig.) gold (रुद्रतेजः समुद्भूतं हेमबीजं विभावसोः) -2 N. of the letter र्. -भम [अग्नि- रिव भाति; भा-क.] 1 'shining like fire,' gold. -2 N. of the constellation कृत्तिका. -भु n. [अग्नेर्भवति; भू-क्विप् ह्रस्वान्तः] 1 water. -2 gold. -भू a. [अग्नेर्भवतिः भू-क्विप्] produced from fire. (भूः) 1 'fire-born,' N. of Kārttikeya. -2 N. of a teacher (काश्यप) who was taught by Agni. -3 (arith.) six. -भूति a. produced from fire. (-तिः) [अग्निरिव भूतिरैश्वर्यं यस्य] N. of a pupil of the last Tīrthaṅkara. (-तिः) f. the lustre or might of fire. -भ्राजस् a. Ved. [अग्निरिव भ्राजते; भ्राज्-असुन्] shining like fire. अग्निभ्राजसो विद्युतः Ṛv.5.54.11. -मणिः [अग्नेरुत्थापको मणिः शाक. त.] the sunstone. -मथ् m. [अग्निं मथ्नाति निष्पादयति; मन्थ्-क्विप्- नलोपः] 1 the sacrificer who churns the fuel-stick. -2 the Mantra used in this operation, on the अरणि itself. -मन्थः, -न्थनम्, producing fire by friction; or the Mantra used in this operation. (-न्थः) [अग्निर्मथ्यते अनेन मन्थ्-करणे घञ्] N. of a tree गणिकारिका (Mar. नरवेल) Premna Spinosa (तत्काष्ठयोर्घर्षणे हि आशु वह्निरुत्पद्यते), -मान्द्यम् slowness of digestion, loss of appetite, dyspepsia. -मारुतिः अग्निश्च मरुच्च तयोरपत्यं इञ् ततो वृद्धिः इत् च; द्विपदवृद्धौ पृषो. पूर्वपदस्य ह्रस्वः Tv.] N. of the sage Agastya. -मित्रः N. of a king of the Śunga dynasty, son of Puṣypamitra who must have flourished before 15 B. C. -the usually accepted date of Patañjali-as the latter mentions पुष्यमित्र by name. -मुखः a. having Agni at the head. (-खः) [अग्निर्मुखमिव यस्य] 1 a deity, god, (for the gods receive oblations through Agni who is, therefore, said to be their mouth; अग्निमुखा वै देवाः; अग्निर्मुखं प्रथमं देवतानाम् &c; or अग्निर्मुखे अग्रे येषाम्, for fire is said to have been created before all other gods.) -2 [अग्निर्मुखं प्रधानमुपास्यो यस्य] one who maintains the sacred fire (अग्निहोतृद्विज) -3 a Brāhmaṇa in general (अग्निर्दाहकत्वात् शापाग्निर्मुखे यस्य for Brāhmaṇas are said to be वाग्वज्राः). -4 N. of two plants चित्रक Plumbago Zeylanica and भल्लातक Semicarpus Anacardium अग्निरिव स्पर्शात् दुःखदायकं मुखमग्रम् यस्य, तन्निर्यासस्पर्शेन हि देहे क्षतोत्पत्तेस्थयोस्तथात्वम्) -5 a sort of powder or चूर्ण prescribed as a tonic by चक्रदत्त -6 'fire-mouthed, sharp-biting, an epithet of a bug. Pt. 1. (-खी) अग्निरिव मुखमग्रं यस्याः; गौरादि-ङीष्] 1 N. of a plant भल्लातक (Mar. बिबवा, भिलावा) and लाङ्गलिका (विषलाङ्गला). -2 N. of the Gāyatri Mantra (अग्निरेव मुखं मुखत्वेन कल्पितं यस्याः सा, or अग्नेरिव मुखं प्रजापतिमुखं उत्पत्ति- द्वारं यस्याः, अग्निना समं प्रजापतिमुखजातत्वात्; कदाचिदपि नो विद्वान् गायत्रीमुदके जपेत् । गायत्र्याग्निमुखी यस्मात्तस्मादुत्थाय तां जपेत् ॥ गोभिल). -3 a kitchen [पाकशाला अग्निरिव उत्तप्तं मुखं यस्याः सा]. -मूढ a. [तृ. त.] Ved. made insane or stupefied by lightning or fire. -यन्त्रम् A gun अग्नियन्त्रधरैश्चक्रधरैश्च पुरुषैर्वृतः Śivabhārata 12.17. -यानम् An aeroplane. व्योमयानं विमानं स्यात् अग्नियानं तदेव हि । अगस्त्यसंहिता. -योगः See पञ्चाग्निसाधन. अग्नियोगवहो ग्रीष्मे विधिदृष्टेन कर्मणा । चीर्त्वा द्वादशवर्षाणि राजा भवति पार्थिवः ॥ Mb.13.14,2.43. -योजनम् causing the sacrificial fire to blaze up. -रक्षणम् 1 con-secrating or preserving the sacred (domestic) fire or अग्निहोत्र. -2 [अग्निः रक्ष्यते अनेन अत्र वा] a Mantra securing for Agni protection from evil spirits &c. -3 the house of an अग्निहोतृ. -रजः, -रजस् m. [अग्निरिव रज्यते दीप्यते; रञ्ज्-असुन् नलोपः] 1 a scarlet insect by name इन्द्रगोप. -2 (अग्नेः रजः) the might or power of Agni. -3 gold. Mb.3. 16.86.7 -रहस्यम् mystery of (worshipping &c.) Agni; N. of the tenth book of Śatapatha Brāhmaṇa. -राशिः a heap of fire, burning pile. -रुहा [अग्निरिव रोहति रुह्-क] N. of the plant मांसादनी or मांसरोहिणी (तदङ्कुरस्य वह्नितुल्य- वर्णतया उत्पन्नत्वात्तथात्वं तस्याः). -रूप a. [अग्नेरिव रूपं वर्णो यस्य] fire-shaped; of the nature of fire. -रूपम् the nature of fire. -रेतस् n. the seed of Agni; (hence) gold. -रोहिणी [अग्निरिव रोहति; रुह्-णिनि] a hard inflammatory swelling in the armpit. -लोकः the world a Agni, which is situated below the summit of Meru; in the Purāṇas it is said to be in the अन्तरिक्ष, while in the Kāśī Khaṇḍa it is said to be to the south of इन्द्रपुरी; एतस्या दक्षिणे भागे येयं पूर्दृश्यते शुभा । इमामर्चिष्मतीं पश्य वीतिहोत्रपुरीं शुभाम् ॥ -वधूः Svāhā, the daughter of Dakṣa and wife of Agni -वर्चस् a. [अग्नेर्वर्च इव वर्चो यस्य] glowing or bright like fire. (n.) the lustre of Agni. (-m.) N. of a teacher of the Purāṇas. -वर्ण a. [अग्नेरिव वर्णो यस्य] of the colour of fire; hot; fiery; सुरां पीत्वा द्विजो मोहादग्निवर्णां सुरां पिबेत् Ms.11.9; गोमूत्रमग्निवर्णं वा पिबेदुदकमेव वा 91. (र्णः) 1 N. of a prince, son of Sudarśana. -2 N. of a King of the solar race, See R.19.1. the colour of fire. (-र्णा) a strong liquor. -वर्धक a. stimulating digestion, tonic. (-कः) 1 a tonic. -2 regimen, diet (पथ्याहार). -वल्लभः [अग्नेर्वल्लभः सुखेन दाह्यत्वात्] 1 the Śāla tree, Shorea Robusta. -2 the resinous juice of it. -वासस् a. [अग्निरिव शुद्धं वासो यस्य] having a red (pure like Agni) garment. (n.) a pure garment. -वाह a. [अग्निं वाहयति अनुमापयति वा] 1 smoke. -2 a goat. -वाहनम् a goat (छाग). -विद् m. 1 one who knows the mystery about Agni. -2 an अग्निहोत्रिन् q. v. -विमोचनम् ceremony of lowering the sacrificial fire. -विसर्पः pain from an inflamed tumour, inflammation. -विहरणम्, -विहारः 1 taking the sacrificial fire from आग्नीध्र to the उत्तरवेदि. -2 offering oblations to fire; प्रत्यासन्ना ˚वेला K.348. -वीर्यम् 1 power or might of Agni. -2 gold. -वेतालः Name of Vetāla (connected with the story of Vikra-māditya). -वेशः [अग्नेर्वेश इव] N. of an ancient medical authority (चरक). -वेश्मन् m. the fourteenth day of the karma-ṃāsa; Sūryaprajñapti. -वेश्यः 1 N. of a teacher, Mbh. -2 Name of the 22nd muhūrta; Sūryapraj-ñapti. धौम्य cf. Mb 14.64.8. -शरणम्, -शाला-लम् a fire-sanctuary; ˚मार्गमादेशय Ś.5; a house or place for keeping the sacred fire; ˚रक्षणाय स्थापितो$हम् V.3. -शर्मन् a. [अग्निरिव शृणाति तीव्रकोपत्वात् शॄ-मनिन्] very passionate. (-m.) N. of a sage. -शिख a. [अग्नेरिव अग्निरिव वा शिखा यस्य] fiery, fire-crested; दहतु ˚खैः सायकैः Rām. (-खः) 1 a lamp. -2 a rocket, fiery arrow. -3 an arrow in general. -4 safflower plant. -5 saffron. -6 जाङ्गलीवृक्ष. (-खम्) 1 saffron. -2 gold. (-खा) 1 a flame; शरैरग्निशिखोपमैः Mb. -2 N. of two plants लाङ्गली (Mar. वागचबका or कळलावी) Gloriosa Superba; of other plants (also Mar. कळलावी) Meni-spermum Cordifolium. -शुश्रूषा careful service or worship of fire. -शेखर a. fire-crested. (-रः) N. of the कुसुम्भ, कुङ्कुम and जाङ्गली trees (-रम्) gold, -शौच a. [अग्नेरिव शौचं यस्य] bright as fire; purified by fire K.252. -श्री a. [अग्नेरिव श्रीर्यस्य] glowing like fire; lighted by Agni -ष्टुत्, -ष्टुभ, -ष्टोम &c. see ˚ स्तुत्, ˚स्तुभ् &c. -ष्ठम् 1 kitchen; अग्निष्ठेष्वग्निशालासु Rām.6.1.16. -2 a fire-pan. -संयोगाः explosives. Kau. A.2.3. -ष्वात्तः see स्वात्तः -संस्कारः 1 consecration of fire. -2 hallowing or con-secrating by means of fire; burning on the funeral pile; यथार्हं ˚रं मालवाय दत्वा Dk.169; नास्य कार्यो$ग्निसंस्कारः Ms.5.69, पितरीवाग्निसंस्कारात्परा ववृतिरे क्रियाः । R.12.56. -सखः; -सहायः 1 the wind. -2 the wild pigeon (smoke-coloured). -3 smoke. -सम्भव a. [प. ब.] sprung or produced from fire. (-वः) 1 wild safflower. -2 lymph, result of digestion. (-वम्) gold. -साक्षिक [अग्निः साक्षी यत्र, कप्] a. or adv. keeping fire for a witness, in the presence of fire; पञ्चबाण˚ M.4.12. ˚मर्यादो भर्ता हि शरणं स्त्रियाः H.1.v. l, R.11.48. -सारम् [अग्नौ सारं यस्य अत्यन्तानलोत्तापनेपि सारांशादहनात् Tv.] रसाञ्जन, a sort of medical preparation for the eyes. (-रः -रम्) power or essence of fire. -सुतः Kārttikeya; त्वामद्य निहनिष्यामि क्रौञ्चमग्निसुतो यथा । Mb.7.156.93. -सूत्रम् a thread of fire. -2 a girdle of sacrificial grass (मौञ्जीमेखला) put upon a young Brāhmaṇa at the time of investiture. -सूनुः (See -सुतः), (सेनानीरग्निभूर्गुहः । Amar.); देव्यङ्कसंविष्ट- मिवाग्निसूनुम् । Bu. ch.1.67. -स्तम्भः 1 stopping the burning power of Agni. -2 N. of a Mantra used in this operation. -3 N. of a medicine so used. -स्तुत् m. (अग्निष्टुत्) [अग्निः स्तूयते$त्र; स्तु-आधारे क्विप् षत्वम्] the first day of the Agniṣṭoma sacrifice; N. of a portion of that sacrifice which extends over one day; यजेत वाश्वमेधेन स्वर्जिता गोसवेन वा । अभिजिद्विश्वजिद्भ्यां वा त्रिवृता- ग्निष्टुतापि वा ॥ Ms.11.74. -स्तुभ् (˚ष्टुभ्) m. [अग्निः स्तुभ्यते$त्र; स्तुभ्-क्विप् षत्वम्] 1 = अग्निष्टोम. -2 N. of a son of the sixth Manu. -रतोमः (˚ष्टोमः) [अग्नेः स्तोमः स्तुतिसाधनं यत्र] 1 N. of a protracted ceremony or sacrificeial rite extending over several days in spring and forming an essential part of the ज्योतिष्टोम. -2 a Mantra or Kalpa with reference to this sacrifice; ˚मे भवो मन्त्रः ˚मः; ˚मस्य व्याख्यानम्, कल्पः ˚मः P.IV.3.66. Vārt. -3 N. of the son of the sixth Manu. -4 a species of the Soma plant; ˚सामन् a part of the Sāma Veda chanted at the conclusion of the Agniṣṭoma sacrifice. -सावर्णिः Name of Manu. -स्थ a. (ष्ठ) [अग्नौ स्थातुमर्हति; स्था-क षत्वम्] placed in, over, or near the fire. (ष्ठः) an iron frying-pan; in the अश्वमेध sacrifice the 11th Yūpa which of all the 21 is nearest the fire. -स्वात्तः (written both as ˚स्वात्त and ˚ष्वात्त) (pl.) [अग्नितः i. e. श्राद्धीयविप्रकर- रूपानलात् सुष्ठु आत्तं ग्रहणं येषां ते] N. of a class of Pitṛs or Manes who, when living on earth, maintained the sacred or domestic fires, but who did not perform the Agniṣṭoma and other sacrifices. They are regarded as Manes of Gods and Brāhmaṇas and also as descendants of Marīchi; Ms.3.195. अग्निष्वात्ताः पितर एह गच्छत Tsy.2.5.12.2. (मनुष्यजन्मन्यग्निष्टोमादियागमकृत्वा स्मार्तकर्मनिष्ठाः सन्तो मृत्वा च पितृत्वं गताः इति सायणः). -हुत्, -होतृ Ved. sacrificing to Agni, having Agni for a priest; Rv.1.66.8. -होत्रम् [अग्नये हूयते$त्र, हु-त्र, च. त.] 1 an oblation to Agni (chiefly of milk, oil and sour gruel.). -2 maintenance of the sacred fire and offering oblation to it; (अग्नये होत्रं होमो$स्मिन् कर्मणीति अग्निहोत्रमिति कर्मनाम); or the sacred fire itself; तपोवनाग्निहोत्रधूमलेखासु K.26. होता स्यात् ˚त्रस्य Ms.11.36. ˚त्रमुपासते 42; स्त्रीं दाहयेत् ˚त्रेण Ms.5.167,6.4, दाहयित्वाग्निहोत्रेण स्त्रियं वृत्तवतीम् Y.1.89. The time of throwing oblations into the fire is, as ordained by the sun himself, evening (अग्नये सायं जुहुयात् सूर्याय प्रातर्जुहुयात्). Agnihotra is of two kinds; नित्य of constant obligation (यावज्जीवमग्निहोत्रं जुहोति) and काम्य occasional or optional (उपसद्भिश्चरित्वा मासमेकमग्निहोत्रं जुहोति). (-त्र) a. Ved. 1 destined for, connected with, Agnihotra. -2 sacrificing to Agni. ˚न्यायः The rule according to which the नित्यकर्मन्s (which are to be performed यावज्जीवम्) are performed at their stipulated or scheduled time only, during one's life time. This is discussed and established by जैमिनि and शबर at Ms.6. 2.23-26. in connection with अग्निहोत्र and other कर्मन्s. ˚हवनी (णी) a ladle used in sacrificial libations, or अग्निहोत्रहविर्ग्रहणी ऋक् Tv.; See हविर्ग्रहणी; ˚हुत् offering the अग्निहोत्र; ˚आहुतिः invocation or oblation connected with अग्निहोत्र. -होत्रिन् a. [अग्निहोत्र-मत्वर्थे इनि] 1 one who practises the Agnihotra, or consecrates and maintains the sacred fire. -2 one who has prepared the sacrificial place. -होत्री Sacrificial cow; तामग्निहोत्रीमृषयो जगृहु- र्ब्रह्मवादिनः Bhāg.8.8.2.
agra अग्र a. [अङ्ग्-रन् नलोपः Uṇ.2.28] 1 First, foremost, chief, best, prominent, principal, pre-eminent; ˚महिषी chief queen; ˚वातमासेवमाना M.1. front (and hence, fresh) breeze; ˚आसनम् chief seat, seat of honour; माम- ग्रासनतो$वकृष्टमवशं ये दृष्टवन्तः पुरा Mu.1.12. -2 Excessive, over and above, surplus; supernumerary, projecting (अधिक). -ग्रः Setting mountain; अग्रसानुषु नितान्तपिशङ्गैः Ki.9.7. -ग्रम् 1 (a) The foremost or topmost point, tip, point (opp. मूलम्, मध्यम्); (fig.) sharpness, keenness; धर्मस्य ब्राह्मणो मूलम् मग्रं राजन्य उच्यते Ms.11.83; दर्व्याम् अग्रं मूलम् मध्यम् &c.; नासिका˚ tip of the nose; सूचि˚ &c.; समस्ता एव विद्या जिह्वाग्रे$भवन् K.346 stood on the tip of the tongue; अमुष्य विद्या रसनाग्रनर्तकी N.1.5. (b) Top, summit, surface; कैलास˚, पर्वत˚, &c. -2 Front, van; अग्रे कृ put in the front or at the head; तामग्रे कृत्वा Pt.4. See अग्रे. -3 The best of any kind; स्यन्दनाग्रेण with the best of chariots; प्रासादाग्रैः Rām. -4 Superiority, excellence (उत्कर्ष); अग्रादग्रं रोहति Tāṇḍya. -5 Goal, aim, resting place (आलम्बनम्); मनुमेकाग्रमासीनम् Ms.1.1, See ˚भूमि also. -6 Beginning, See अग्रे. -7 A multitude, assemblage. -8 Overplus, excess, surplus; साग्रं स्त्रीसहस्रम् Rām. 1 women and more; so साग्रकोटी च रक्षसाम्. -9 A weight = पल q. v. -1 A measure of food given as alms (ब्राह्मणभोजनम् occurring in अग्रहार); प्रयतो ब्राह्मणाग्रे यः श्रद्धया परया युतः । Mb.13.65.13. -11 (Astr.) Amplitude of the sun (˚ग्रा, अग्रका also). cf. ...अग्रमालम्बने$धिके । पुरोपरिप्रान्ताद्येषु न पुंसि प्रमिताशने । Nm. -12 Forepart of time; नैवेह किंचनाग्र आसीत् Bṛi. Up.1.2.1. In compounds as first member meaning 'the forepart', 'front', 'tip' &c.; e. g. ˚अक्चयः First procurement (cf. Daṇḍa-viveka G. O. S.52, p.43). ˚पादः -चरणः the forepart of the foot, toe; so ˚हस्तः, ˚करः, ˚पाणिः &c.; ˚सरोरूहम् the topmost lotus. पद्मानि यस्याग्रसरोरुहाणि Ku.1.16. ˚कर्णम् Tip-ear; top of the ear; Mātaṅga L.5.7. ˚कायः forepart of the body; so ˚नखम्, ˚नासिका tip of the nail, nose &c., -adv. In front, before, ahead. -Comp. -अंशुः [अग्रम् अंशोः] the focal point. -अक्षि n. [कर्म.] sharp or pointed vision, side-look (अपाङ्गवीक्षण); अग्राक्ष्णा वीक्षमाणस्तु तिर्यग् भ्रातरमब्रवीत् Rām. -अद्वन् a. having precedence in eating. -अनी (णी) कः (कम्) vanguard; दीर्घाल्लँघूंश्चैव नरानग्रानीकेषु योधयेत् Ms.7.193; [अग्राणीकं रघुव्याघ्रौ राक्षसानां बभञ्जतुः Rām. -अयणीयम [अग्रं श्रेष्टं अयनं ज्ञानं तत्र साधु छ]. 1 N. of a Buddhistic tenet (उत्पादपूर्वमग्रायणीयमथ वीर्यता प्रवादः स्यात् -हेमचन्द्रः). -2 title of the second of the fourteen oldest Jain books (Pūrvas). -अवलेहितम् [अग्रम् अव- लेहितम् आस्वादितं यस्य] food at a Śrāddha ceremony, the chief part of which has been tested. -आसनम् First seat of honour; मामग्रासनतो$वकृष्टमवशम् Mu.1.12. -उत्सर्गः taking a thing by leaving its first portion in conformity with the rule of laying by nothing for the next day (i. e. the rule of non hoarding); cf. Daṇḍaviveka G. O. S.52, pp.43-44. -उपहरणम् first supply. -उपहरणीय a. [अग्रे उपह्रियते कर्मणि अनीयर्] 1 that which is first offered or supplied. -2 [अग्रम् उपह्रियते यस्मै हृ- संप्रदाने अनीयर्] श्राद्धाद्यर्थमुपकल्पितस्य अन्नादेरग्रे दानोद्देश्यः वास्तु- देवादिः Tv. -करः 1 = अग्रहस्तः q. v. -2 the focal point. -केशः front line of hair; ˚शेषु रेणुः अपहरति K.86. -गः [अग्रे गच्छतीति, गम्-ड] a leader, a guide; taking the lead; marching foremost. -गण्य a. [अग्रे गण्यते$सौ] foremost, to be ranked first; शमनभवनयाने यद्भवानग्रगण्यः Mahān. -गामिन् a. [अग्रे गच्छति] a leader; प्रष्ठो$ग्रगामिनि P.VIII.3.92. -ज a. [अग्रे जायते; जन्-ड.] first born or produced; आनन्देनाग्रजेनेव R.1.78. (-जः) 1 the first born, an elder brother; सुमतिं ममाग्रजमवगच्छ M.5; अस्त्येव मन्युर्भरताग्रजे मे R.14.73. -2 a Brāhmaṇa. (-जा) an elder sister; so ˚जात, ˚जातक, ˚जाति. -जङ्घा the forepart of the calf. -जन्मन् m. [अग्रे जन्म यस्य सः] 1 the first-born, an elder brother; जनकाग्रजन्मनोः शासनमतिक्रम्य Dk.2. -2 a Brāhmaṇa (वर्णेषु मध्ये अग्रजातत्वात्, or अग्रात् प्रधानाङ्गात् मुखात् जातत्वात्, ब्राह्मणो$स्य मुखमासीत्, तस्मात् त्रिवृत् स्तोमानां मुखम... अग्निर्देवतानां ब्राह्मणो मनुष्याणाम्; तस्माद् ब्राह्मणो मुखेन वीर्यं करोति मुखतो हि सृष्टः Tāṇḍya); अतिवयसमग्रजन्मानम् K.12; अवो- चत् ˚न्मा Dk.13.3; N. of Brahmā, as he was the first to be born in the waters. cf. अग्रजन्मा द्विजे ज्येष्ठभ्रातरि ब्रह्मणि स्मृतम् Nm. -जिह्वा the tip of the tongue. -ज्या (astr.) the sign of the amplitude. -दानिन् [अग्रे दानम् अस्य; अग्र- दान-इनि] a (degraded) Brāhmaṇa who takes presents offered in honour of the dead (प्रेतोद्देशेन यद्दानं दीयते तत्प्रति- ग्राही); लोभी विप्रश्च शूद्राणामग्रेदानं गृहीतवान् । ग्रहणे मृतदानानां (ग्रहणात्तिलदानानां Tv.) अग्रदानी बभूव सः ॥ -दानीयः [अग्रे दानमर्हति छ] = अग्रदानिन्. -दूतः a harbinger; कृष्णाक्रोधा- ग्रदूतः Ve.1.22; ˚दूतिका Dk.2; महीपतीनां प्रणयाग्रदूत्यः R.6.12; -देवी the chief queen; समग्रदेवीनिवहाग्र- देवी... । Bu.ch.1.15. -धान्यम a cereal grain. (Mar. जोंधळा), Holcus soraghum or Holcus spicatus. (Mar. बाजरी). -निरूपणम् predestination; prophecy, determining beforehand. -नीः (णीः) [अग्रे नीयते असौ नी-क्विप्, णत्वम्] 1 a leader, foremost, first, chief; ˚णी- र्विरागहेतुः K.195; अप्यग्रणीर्मन्त्रकृतामृषीणाम् R.5.4. chief. -2 fire. -पर्णी [अग्रे पर्णं यस्याः सा-ङीप्] cowage, Carpopogon Pruriens (अजलोमन्). [Mar. कुयली]. -पातिन् a. [अग्रे आदौ पतति; पत्-णिनि] happening beforehand, antecedent; [˚तीनि शुभानि निमित्तानि K.65. -पादः the forepart of the foot; toes; नवकिसलयरागेणाग्रपादेन M.3.12; ˚स्थिता standing on tiptoe. Ś.5. -पाणिः = ˚हस्तः q. v. -पूजा the highest or first mark of reverence or respect; ˚जामिह स्थित्वा गृहाणेदं विषं प्रभो Rām. -पेयम् precedence in drinking. -प्रदायिन् a. giving in advance; तेषामग्र- प्रदायी स्याः कल्पोत्थायी प्रियंवदः Mb.5.135.35. -बीज a. [अग्रं शाखाग्रं बीजमुत्पादकं यस्य] growing by means of the tip or end of branches, growing on the stock or stem of another tree, such as 'कलम' in Mar. (-जः) a viviparous plant. -भागः [कर्म.] 1 the first or best part (श्राद्धादौ प्रथममुद्धृत्य देयं द्रव्यम्) -2 remnant, remainder (शेषभाग). -3 fore-part, tip, point. -4 (astr.) a degree of amplitude. -भागिन् a. [अग्र- भागो$स्यास्ति; अस्त्यर्थे इनि] first to take or claim (the remnant); अलङ्क्रियमाणस्य तस्य अनुलेपनमाल्ये ˚गी भवामि V. 5, claiming the first share of the remnant etc. -भावः precedence. उदारसंख्यैः सचिवैरसंख्यैः कृताग्रभावः स उदाग्रभावः Bu.ch.I.15. -भुज् a. 1 having precedence in eating. स तानग्रभुजस्तात धान्येन च धनेन च Mb.1.178.12. -2 gluttonous, voracious (औदरिक). -भूः [अग्रे भवति भू-क्विप्] = ˚ज. -भूमिः f. 1 goal of ambition or object aimed at; ततो$ग्रभूमिं व्यवसायासिद्धेः Ki.17.55; त्वमग्र- भूमिर्निरपायसंश्रया Śi.1.32 (प्राप्यस्थानम्). -2 the topmost part, pinnacle; विमान˚ Me.71. -महिषी the principal queen. -मांसम् [अग्रं भक्ष्यत्वेन प्रधानं मांसम्] flesh in the heart, the heart itself; ˚सं चानीतं Ve.3.2. morbid protuberance of the liver. -यणम् [अग्रम् अयनात् उत्तरायणात् णत्वं शकं˚ तद्विधानकालो$स्य अच् (?) Tv.] a kind of sacrificial ceremony. See आग्रयण. -यान a. [अग्रे यानं यस्य, या-ल्युट्] taking the lead, foremost. (-नम्) an army that stops in front to defy the enemy. मनो$ग्रयानं वचसा निरुक्तं नमामहे Bhāg.8.5.26. -यायिन् a. [अग्रे यास्यति या-णिनि] taking the lead, leading the van; पुत्रस्य ते रणशिरस्ययमग्रयायी Ś.7.26. मान- धनाग्रयायी R.5.3,5.62.18.1. -योधिन् [अग्रे स्थित्वा युध्यते] the principal hero, champion राक्षसानां वधे तेषां ˚धी भविष्यति Rām.; so ˚वीर; कर्मसु चाग्रवीरः. -रन्ध्रम् opening fore-part; त्रासान्नासाग्ररन्ध्रं विशति Māl.1.1. -लोहिता [अग्रं लोहितं यस्याः सा] a kind of pot-herb (चिल्लीशाक). -संख्या the first place or rank; पुत्रः समारोपयदग्रसंख्याम् R.18.3. -वक्त्रम् N. of a surgical instrument, Suśr. -वातः fresh breeze; अग्रवातमासेवमाना M.1. -शोमा towering beauty or the beauty of the peaks; कैलासशैलस्य यदग्रशोभाम् । Bu. ch.1.3. -संधानी [अग्रे फलोत्पत्तेः प्राक् संधी- यते ज्ञायते $नया कार्यम् Tv.] the register of human actions kept by Yama (यत्र हि प्राणिवर्गस्य प्राग्भवीयकर्मानुसारेण शुभा- शुभसूचकं सर्वं लिख्यते सा यमपञ्जिका). -सन्ध्या early dawn; कर्कन्धूनामुपरि तुहिनं रञ़्जयत्यग्रसन्ध्या Ś.4. v.1. -सर = यायिन् taking the lead; आयोधनाग्रसरतां त्वयि वीर याते R.5.71. -सारा [अग्रं शीर्षमात्रं सारो यस्याः सा] 1 a sprout which has tips without fruits. -2 a short method of counting immense numbers. -हर a. [अग्रे ह्रियते दीयते$सौ; हृ-अच्] 1 that which must be given first. -2 = अग्रहारिन्. -हस्त (˚कर; ˚पाणिः,) the forepart of the hand or arm; अग्रहस्तेन गृहीत्वा प्रसादयैनाम् Ratn.3; forepart of the trunk (of an elephant); often used for a finger or fingers taken collectively; शीतलस्ते ˚स्तः Mk.3; अतिसाध्वसेन वेपते मे ˚स्तः Ratn.1; कुसुमित इव ते ˚स्तः प्रतिभाति M.1.; प्रसारिते ˚स्ते M.4; ˚हस्तात्प्रभ्रष्टं पुष्पभाजनम् Ś.4. slipped from the fingers; also the right hand; अथ ˚हस्ते मुकुलीकृताङ्गुलौ Ku.5.63. (अग्रश्चासौ हस्तश्च Malli.). Ki.5.29. -हायनः (णः) [अग्रः श्रेष्ठः हायनो व्रीहिः अत्र, णत्वम्] the beginning of the year; N. of the month मार्गशीर्ष; (मासानां मार्गशीर्षो$हम् Bg. 1.35.); ˚इष्टिः नवशस्येष्टिर्यागभेदः. -हारः 1 a grant of land given by kings (to Brāhmaṇas) for sustenance (अग्रं ब्राह्मणभोजनं, तदर्थं ह्रियन्ते राजधनात् पृथक् क्रियन्ते ते क्षेत्रादयः- नीलकण्ठ; क्षेत्रोत्पन्नशस्यादुद्धृत्य ब्राह्मणोद्देशेन स्थाप्यं धान्यादि, गुरुकुला- दावृत्तब्रह्मचारिणे देयं क्षेत्रादि, ग्रामभेदश्च Tv.); अग्रहारांश्च दास्यामि ग्रामं नगरसंमितम् Mb.3.64.4. कस्मिंश्चिदग्रहारे Dk.8.9. -2 the first offering in वैश्वदेव Mb.3.234.47.
akṣi अक्षि n. [अश्नुते विषयान्; अश्-क्सि, अशेर्णित् Uṇ.3.155-6] अक्षिणी, अक्षीणि, अक्ष्णा, अक्ष्णः &c. 1 The eye (which grasps or sees objects); changed to अक्ष at the end of Bahuvrīhi comp; f. ˚क्षी when a limb of the body is indicated, as जलजाक्षी, otherwise दीर्घाक्षा वेणुयष्टिः; in Avyayī. comp. also it is changed to अक्ष, (समक्षम्, परोक्षम् &c.). -2 The number two; (-क्षिणी) the sun and moon. [cf. L. oculus; Ger. auge; Gr. okos, okkos, Zend ashi.] -Comp. -आमयः an eye-disease; यथा अक्ष्यामये मुद्गौदनं निवातशय्या चेति नित्यं शय्यासनं भोजनं च विकरोति । ŚB. on MS.1.3.32 and 1.6-81. -कम्पः twinkling; नाक्षिकम्पं व्यतिष्ठत R. 15.67. -कूटः-टकः, -गोलः, -तारा [ष. त.] the eyeball, pupil of the eye. -गत a. [अक्ष्णि गतः सर्वदा भावनावशात् अक्ष्यसन्नि- कृष्टो$पि उपस्थित इव़] 1 visible, present; न विभावयत्य- निशमक्षिगतामपि मां भवानतिसमीपतया Śi 9.81.2 rankling in the eye, an eye-sore, being a thorn in the eye, hated; ˚तोहमस्य हास्यो जातः Dk.159. -जाहः [ष. त.] the root of the eye. -पक्ष्मन्, -लोमन् n. [ष. त.] the eye-lash. -पटलम् [ष. त.]. 1 a coat of the eye. -2 a disease of the eye pertaining to this coat. -पद् a. Ved. falling into the eye, hence hurtful. न हि मे अक्षिपच्चना$च्छान्त्सुः पञ्च कृष्टयः Rv.1.119.6. adv. a little, as much as a mote (as much as could fall into the eye). -भू a. [अक्ष्णो भूर्विषयः] visible, perceptible, manifest; (hence) true, real. -भेषजम् [ष. त.] collyrium, a kind of balm (for the eyes). -जः (जम् also) N. of a plant (पट्टिकालोध्रवृक्ष) used to heal some varieties of the eye-disease. -भ्रुवम् [समाहारद्वन्द्व] the eye and the eyebrows taken collectively. -विकूणितम्, -विकूशितम् [अक्षणः विकूणि- तम् लज्जादिना सम्यक् प्रसाराभावात् संकोचो यत्र] a side-look, leer, a look with the eyelids partially closed. -श्रवस् serpent बभुरक्षिश्रवसो मुखे विशालाः Śi.2.44. -संविद् perception. -सूत्रम् the line of the eyes (with reference to idols. अक्षिसूत्रावसानं च तस्याधस्तात्पदान्तकम् Māna.9.2.92. -स्पन्दनम् eye twitching; Mu.4.
akūpāra अकूपार a. 1 Resulting in good, having a good issue. -2 Unlimited, unbounded; अकूपारस्य दावने Rv.5.39.2 -रः [न कुं पृथ्वीं पिपर्ति; पॄ-अण् बा˚ दीर्घः; न क्वापि पारं पूरणं वा गन्त- व्यदेशो यस्य वा, पृषो. दीर्घः] 1 The sea, the receptacle of waters; अकूपारः सलिलो मातरिश्वा Rv.1.19.1 (समुद्रो$प्यकूपार उच्यते अकूपारो भवति महापार: Nir.); न ह्यकूपारवत्कूपा वर्धन्ते विधुकान्तिभिः H; अकूपारमिवापारं पारयिष्यामहे कथम् । Śiva-bhārata 31.44. -2 The sun (आदित्यो$प्यकूपार उच्यते अकूपारो भवति दूरपारः Nir.). -3 A tortoise in general (न कूपमृच्छति). -4 King of tortoises sustaining the world. -5 A stone or rock.
amā अमा a. [न मा-क] Measureless. -ind. Ved. 1 At home, in the house; कामश्चरताममाभूत् Rv.2.38.6. -2 In this world, here below (इहलोके). -3 With, near, close to; अमैवासां तद्भवति Bṛi. Up.1.5.2. -4 Together with, in conjunction or company with, as in अमात्य, अमावास्या q. v.; अमाकृ to draw near, have near oneself. अमा सह समीपे च Nm. -f. 1 The day of the new moon, the day of the conjunction of the sun and moon; अमायां तु सदा सोम ओषधीः प्रतिपद्यते Vyāsa. -2 The sixteenth digit of the moon. -3 The fifteenth digit also. m. The soul. -Comp. -अक्त a. Ved. met, come together. -अन्तः The end of the day of new moon. -इष्ट a. Sacrificed at home. -जुर् f. Living at home during life, growing old at home; अमाजुरश्चिद्भवयो युवं भगो Rv.1.39.3; being without husband in the same dwelling with her parents, as a maiden (पितृषद्); अमाजूरिव पित्रोः सचा सती Rv.2.17.7. -पर्वन् n. The sacred time of अमा, day of new moon. -हठः Name of a snake-demon; Mb.
amāvasuḥ अमावसुः N. of a prince (a descendent of Purūravas); Mb. Hariv. अमावस्या amāvasyā वास्या vāsyā वसी vasī वासी vāsī अमावस्या वास्या वसी वासी (also written अमा- मसी-मासी) [अमावस् -ण्यत्, अमा सह वसतः चन्द्रार्कौ अस्यां सा. अमावस्यर्दन्यतरस्याम् P.III.1.122 Sk.] 1 The day of new moon, when the sun and moon dwell together or are in conjunction; the 15th day of the dark half of every lunar month; सूर्याजन्द्रमसोः यः परः सन्निकर्षः सा$मावस्या Gobhila; अमावास्यायां दीक्षित्वा Ch. Up.5.2.4. -2 A sacrifice offered at that time. -3 The sacrificial oblation.
ambu अम्बु n. [अम्ब्-शब्दे उण्] 1 Water; गाङ्गमम्बु सितमम्बु यामुनम् K. P.1. -2 The watery element of the blood (cf. imber). -3 N. of a metre. -4 A term in astrology (लग्नावधिकं चतुर्थस्थानम्). -Comp. -कणः a drop of water. -कण्टकः (short-nosed), alligator. -कन्दः An acquatic plant Trapa bispinosa (Mar. शिंगाडा). -किरातः alligator. -कीशः, कूर्मः a tortoise (शिशुमार); particularly Gangetic. -केशरः lemon-tree (छालङ्गवृक्ष). -क्रिया libation of water; Bk.; presentation of water to the Manes of the deceased. -कुक्कुटी An acquatic hen. -ग, -चर, -चारिन् a. moving or living in water, aquatic (as fish &c.); अद्रिं दधाराम्बुचरात्मना Bhāg.8.5. 11; Ms.12.57. -घनः hail. -चत्वरम् a lake. -चामरम् an aquatic plant (शैवाल). -ज a. produced in water, aquatic (opp. स्थलज); सुगन्धीनि च माल्यानि स्थलजान्यम्बु- जानि च Rām. (-जः) 1 the moon. -2 camphor. -3 the Sārasa bird. -4 the conch; दध्मौ तारेण चाम्बुजम् Mb.7.173.9. -5 N. of a tree (हिज्जल). (-जम्) 1 a lotus; इन्दीवरेण नयनं मुखमम्बुजेन Ś. Til.3; A. Rām. 4.1.2. -2 the thunderbolt of Indra. ˚भूः, ˚आसनः 'the lotus-born god' Brahmā; A. Rām. ˚आसना the goddess Lakṣmī. -जन्मन् n. a lotus; -m. 1 the moon. -2 the conch. -3 Sārasa. -तस्करः 'waterthief', the sun (whose heat drinks up water). -तालः = ˚चामर. -द a. giving or yielding water. (-दः) 1 a cloud; नवाम्बुदानीकमुहूर्तलाञ्छने R.3.53; -देवम्, -दैवम् The astronomical mansion पूर्वाषाढा. -धर [धरतीति धरः, अम्बूनां धरः; धृ-अच्] 1 a cloud; वशिनश्चाम्बुधराश्च योनयः Ku.4.43; शरत्प्रमृष्टाम्बुधरोपरोधः R.6.44. -2 the plant मुस्तक. -3 talc. -धिः [अम्बूनि धीयन्ते अत्र; धा-कि] 1 any receptacle of waters; such as a jar; अम्बुधिर्घटः Sk. ˚-स्रवा Aloe perfoliata (Mar. कोरफड). -2 the ocean; क्षार˚ Bh.2.6. -3 the number four (in Math.). ˚प्रसवा N. of a plant (घृतकुमारी). -नाथः The ocean. -नामन् Andropogon muricatum (Mar. वाळा). -निधिः 'treasure of waters', the ocean; देवासुरैरमृतम्बुनिधिर्ममन्थे Ki.5.3. -प a. drinking water. (-पः) 1 the ocean. -2 Varuṇa, the regent of waters; रक्षो$म्बुपानिलशशीशपुराणि चाष्टौ Śid. Śir; शक्राम्बुपयमानां च चतुर्थस्त्वं भविष्यसि Rām.7.4.17. -3 N. of a plant (चक्रमर्दक; Mar.टाकळा). -पतिः Varuṇa; यथाम्बुपतिमित्रौ हि तारकं दैत्यसत्तमम् (अधावताम्) Mb.7.155.36. -पत्रा N. of a plant (उच्चटावृक्ष; Mar. फुरडी). -पद्धतिः f. -पातः current, flow or stream of water, cascade; गङ्गाम्बुपातप्रतिमा गृहेभ्यः Bk.1.8. -प्रसादः -प्रसादनम् [अम्बूनि प्रसादयति] the clearing nut tree (कतक Mar. निवळी). Strychnos Potatorum (the nuts of this tree are used for purifying water; when rubbed on the inner surface of the vessel, they precipitate the impurities which the water contains; (फलं कतकवृक्षस्य यद्यप्यम्बुप्रसादकम् । न नामग्रहणादेव तस्य वारि प्रसीदति) Ms.6.67. -भवम् a lotus. -भृत् m. 1 water-bearer, a cloud. -2 the ocean. -3 = ˚पत्रा q. v. -4 N. of a plant मुस्तक. -5 talc. -मात्रज a. produced only in water. (-जः) a conchshell. -मुच् m. a cloud; ध्वनितसूचितमम्बुमुचां चयम् Ki.5.12. -राजः 1 the ocean. -2 Varuṇa. -राशिः receptacle or store of water, the ocean; त्वयि ज्वलत्यौर्वं इवाम्बुराशौ Ś.3.3; चन्द्रोदयारम्भ इवाम्बुराशिः Ku.3.67, R.6.57;9.82. -रुह् n. 1 a lotus. -2 Sārasa. -रुहः, हम्, a lotus; विपुलिनाम्बुरुहा न सरिद्वधूः Ki.5.1. (-हा) N. of the land-lotus plant (स्थलपद्मिनी). -रोहिणी a lotus. -वाची [अम्बु तद्वर्षणं वाचयति सूचयति] an epithet applied to the earth during four days from the 1th to the 13th in the dark half of the month of Āṣāḍha when it is supposed to be unclean (रजस्वला इव) and agriculture is prohibited; Brav. P.2.77. ˚प्रदः the 1th day; ˚त्यागः 13th day. -वासिनी, -वासी N. of a plant (पाटला), the trumpet flower. -वाहः [अम्बु वहतीति] 1 a cloud; तडित्वन्त- मिवाम्बुवाहम् Ki.3.1; भर्तुर्मित्रं प्रियमविधवे विद्धि मामम्बुवाहम् Me. 11. -2 a lake. -3 water-bearer. -4 the number 17. -5 a sort of grass. -वाहिन् a. carrying or conveying water. -m. 1 a cloud. -2 = मुस्तक. (-नी) 1 a wooden vessel, a sort of bucket. -2 a woman fetching water. -3 N. of a stream. -विहारः sporting in water. -विस्रवा = घृतकुमारी. -वेग a. flowing quickly; यथानदीनां बहवो$म्बुवेगाः Bg.11.28. -वेतसः a kind of cane or reed growing in water. (Mar. लव्हाळा). -शिरीषिका N. of plant. -सरणम् flow or current of water. -सर्पिणी a leech (अम्बुनि सर्पति). -सेचनी a wooden baling vessel.
aṃśuḥ अंशुः [अंश्-मृग˚ कु.] 1 A ray, beam of light; चण्ड˚, घर्मं˚ hot-rayed the sun; सूर्यांशुभिर्भिन्नमिवारविन्दम् Ku.1.32; Iustre, brilliance चण्डांशुकिरणाभाश्च हाराः Rām.5.9.48; Śi.1.9. रत्न˚, नख˚ &c. -2 A point or end. -3 A small or minute particle. - 4 End of a thread. -5 A filament, especially of the Soma plant (Ved.) -6 Garment; decoration. -7 N. of a sage or of a prince. -8 Speed, velocity (वेग). -9 Fine thread -Comp. -उदकम् dew-water. -जालम् a collection of rays, a blaze or halo of light. -धरः -पतिः -भृत्-बाणः -भर्तृ-स्वामिन् the sun, (bearer or lord of rays). -पट्टम् a kind of silken cloth (अंशुना सूक्ष्मसूत्रेणयुक्तं पट्टम्); सश्रीफलैरंशुपट्टम् Y. 1.186; श्रीफलैरंशुपट्टानां Ms.5.12. -माला a garland of light, halo. -मालिन् m. [अंशवो मालेव, ततः अस्त्यर्थे इनि] 1 the sun (wreathed with, surrounded by, rays). -2 the number twelve. -हस्तः [अंशुः हस्त इव यस्य] the sun (who draws up water from the earth by means of his 1 hands in the form of rays).
anapayati अनपयति ind. Very early (before the sun starts on his journey).
anasūya अनसूय यक a. [न. ब.] Free from malice, not envious, not spiteful; श्रद्दधानो$नसूयश्च Ms.4.158; श्रद्धावाननसूयश्च शृणुयादपि यो नरः । Bg.18.71. -या [न. त.] 1 Absence of envy, charity of disposition, freedom from spite or illwill; न गुणान् गुणिनो हन्ति स्तौति चान्यगुणानपि । न हसेच्चान्यदो- षांश्च सानसूया प्रकीर्तिता. -2 N. of a friend of Śakuntalā. -3 N. of a daughter of Dakṣa. -4 N. of Atri's wife, the highest type of chastity and wifely devotion. [She was very pious and given to austere devotion by virtue of which she had obtained miraculous powers. Several stories are told o illustrate them. When the earth was devastated by a terrible drought which lasted for 1 years, Anasūyā created water, fruits, roots &c. by means of her ascetic powers and saved many lives. On one occasion when the sage Māṇḍavya was about to be impaled, the wife of a sage happened to touch the stake as she passed by, whereupon Māṇḍavya cursed her that she would become a widow at sunrise. She, however, prevented the sun from rising, and all actions of men being consequently stopped, the gods, sages &c. went to Anasūyā, her friend, who, by the force of her penance, made the sun rise without, at the same time, bringing widowhood on her friend. Another legend is also told in which Anasūyā changed Brahmā, Viṣṇu and Maheśa into infants, when, at the instigation of their wives, they attempted to test her chastity, but restored them to their former shapes at the importunities of their humbled consorts. She is also said to have caused the three-streamed Ganges to flow down on the earth near the hermitage of her husband for the ablutions of sages; see R.13.51. In the Rāmāyaṇa she is represented as having been very kind and attentive to Sītā whom she favoured with sound motherly advice on the virtues of chastity, and at the time of her departure gave her an unguent (See R.12.27,14.14) which was to keep her beautiful for ever and to guard her person from the attempts of rapacious beasts, demons &c. She was the mother of the irascible sage Durvāsas]. सा त्वेवमुक्ता वैदेही त्वनसूयानसूयया Rām.2.18.1.
annam अन्नम् [अद्-क्त; अनित्यनेन, अन्-नन्; according to Yāska from अद्, अद्यते अत्ति च भूतानि; or from आ-नम्, आ आभि मुख्येन ह्येतन्नतं प्रह्वीभूतं भवति भोजनाय भूतानाम्] 1 Food (in general); अद्यते$त्ति च भूतानि तस्मादन्नं तदुच्यते Tait. Up.; मदो$सृङ्मांसमज्जास्थि वदन्त्यन्नं मनीषिणः Ms.3.8.182; अहमन्नं भवान् भोक्ता H.1.51. I am your prey &c.; चराणामन्नमचराः Ms.5.29. -2 Food as representing the lowest form in which the Supreme Soul is manifested, being the coarsest and last of the 5 vestures (कोश) in which the soul is clothed and passes from body to body in the long process of metempsychosis - "the nutrimentitious vesture or visible body in the world of sense" (स्थूल- शरीर called अन्नमयकोश). -3 Boiled rice; अन्नेन व्यञ्जनम् P. II.1.34. -4 Corn (bread corn); ता (आपः) अन्नम- सृजन्त तस्माद्यत्र क्व च वर्षति तदेव भूयिष्ठमन्नं भवति Ch. Up. 6.2.4.; आदित्याज्जायते वृष्टिर्वृष्टेरन्नं ततः प्रजाः Ms.3.76; कृत˚ 9.219;1.86,12.65. -5 Water. -6 Earth (पृथिव्या अन्नहेतुत्वादन्नशब्दवाच्यता). -7 N. of Viṣṇu. -न्नः The sun (स हि अन्नहेतुवृष्टिहेतुः). -Comp. -अकालः = अनाकाल q. v. -अत्तृ, -आदिन्, -आहारिन् eating food. -अद a. eating food. -2 having a good appetite (दीप्ताग्नि). (-दः) N. of Viṣṇu. -अद्यम् proper food, food in general; कुर्यादहरहः श्राद्धमन्नाद्येनोदकेन वा Ms.3.82,4.112, 11.144. अन्नाद्येन प्रजापतिः (तृप्तः) Mb.3.2.68. -आच्छा- दनम्, -वस्त्रम् food and clothing, food and raiment, the bare necessaries of life. -आयुः (अन्नायु) consisting of, living by, food; desirous of food (अन्नबन्धनः, अन्नजीवनः). -काम a. desirous of food; स इद्भोजो यो गृहवे ददात्यन्नकामाय Rv.1.117.3. -कालः hour of dinner; meal-time. -किट्टः = ˚मल q. v. -कूटः a large heap of boiled rice. -कोष्ठकः 1 a cupboard; granary. -2 Viṣṇu. -3 the sun. -गतिः f. the passage of food, gullet (cf. बहिः- स्रोतस्). -गन्धिः dysentery, diarrhoea. -ज, जात a. produced from food as the primitive substance. -जम् rice-gruel of three days. -जा f. a hickup. -जलम् food and water, bare subsistence. -तेजस् a. having the vigour caused by food. -द, -दातृ, -दायिन्, -प्रद a. 1 giving food. वारिदस्तृप्तिमाप्नोति सुखमक्षय्यमन्नदः Ms.4.229. -2 epithet of Śiva. -दा N. of Durgā or Annapūrṇā. -दासः [अन्नेन पालितो दासः शाक. त.] a servant who works for food only, one who becomes a servant or slave by getting food only. -देवता the deity supposed to preside over articles of food. -दोषः 1 sin arising from eating prohibited food; Ms.5.4. -2 a defect in the food eaten; derangement of food or the humours of the body; आलस्यादन्नदोषाच्च मृत्युर्विप्राञ् जिघांसति Ms.5.4. -द्वेषः dislike of food, loss of appetite. -पतिः lord or possessor of food, epithet of Savitṛ, Agni, and Śiva. अन्नपते$न्नस्य नो देहि Tait. Saṁ.11.83;34.58. -पाकः cooking of food; digestion of food; (by the fire in the stomach). -पू a. purifying food, epithet of the Sun. -पूर्ण a. filled with, possessed of, food. (-र्णा) a form of Durgā (the goddess of plenty); ˚ईश्वरी N. of Durgā or a form of Bhairavī. -पेयम् = वाज- पेयम् q. v. -प्रलय a. being dissolved into food after death. -प्राशः, प्राशनम् the ceremony of giving a new-born child food to eat for the first time, one of the 16 Saṁskāras performed between the 5th and 8th month (usually in the sixth, Ms.2.34) with preliminary oblations to fire (Mar.उष्टावण); षष्ठे$न्नप्राशन मासि Ms.2.34; Y.1.12. -ब्रह्मन्, -आत्मन् m. Brahman as represented by food. -भक्त a. [अन्नार्थं भक्तः दासः] = अन्नदास q. v. -भुज् a. eating food, epithet of Śiva. -मय a. see below. -मलम् 1 excrement, faeces; P.VI.1.148 Sk. -2 spirituous liquor; सुरा वै मलमन्नानाम् Ms.11.93. -रक्षा precautions as to eating food. -रसः essence of food, chyle; food and drink, nutriment; नानाविधानन्नरसान् वन्यमूलफलाश्रयान् । तेभ्यो ददौ Rām. -वत् a. possessed of food; अन्नवान्त्सन् रफितायोपज- ग्मुषे Rv.1.117.2. -वस्त्रम् = ˚आच्छादनम् q. v. -विकारः. 1 transformation of food, assimilation. -2 disorder of the stomach caused by indigestion. -3 seminal discharge (of man); semen itself; cf. अन्नाद्रेतः संभवति. -विद् a. acquiring food; कार्षीवणा अन्नविदो न विद्यया Av.6.116.1. -व्यवहारः the law or custom relating to food; i. e. the custom of eating together or not with other persons. -शेषः leavings of food, offal. -संस्कारः consecration of food. -होमः a sacrifice (with 1 materials) connected with the Aśvamedha sacrifice.
anūru अनूरु a. [न. ब.] Thighless. अपूर्णाण्डविनिर्भेदादनूरुररुणो$ भवत् Bm.1.11. -रुः Aruṇa, the charioteer of the sun (who is represented as having no thighs); the dawn; see अरुण. -Comp. -सारथिः the sun (having अनूरु for his charioteer); गतं तिरश्चीनमनूरुसारथेः Śi.1.2.
aravindam अरविन्दम् [अरान् चक्राङ्गानीव पत्राणि विन्दते विन्द् श P. III.1.138. Vārt.] 1 A lotus (Nymphea Stellata) (it is one of the 5 arrows of Cupid; see under पञ्चबाण); शक्यमरविन्दसुरभिः Ś.3.6. It is a sun lotus; cf. सूर्यंशुभिर्भिन्न- मिवारविन्दम् Ku.1.32; स्थल˚, चरण˚, मुख˚ &c. -2 Also a red or blue lotus. -दः 1 The (Indian) crane. -2 Copper. -Comp. -अक्ष a. lotus-eyed, an epithet of Viṣṇu. -दलप्रभम् copper. -नाभिः, -भः N. of Viṣṇu, from whose navel sprang the lotus which supported Brahmā; हृदये मदीये देवश्चकास्तु भगवानरविन्दनाभः Bv.4.8. -सद् m. N. of Brahmā. आनन्दयिष्यदागम्य कथं त्वामर- विन्दसत् Bk.21.12.
arka अर्क a. [अर्च्-घञ्-कुत्वम् Uṇ.3.4.]. Fit to be worshipped (अर्चनीय). -र्कः 1 A ray of light, a flash of lightning (Ved.). -2 The sun; आविष्कृतारुणपुरःसर एकतो$र्कः Ś.4.2. -3 Fire. य एवमेतदर्कस्यार्कत्वं वेद Bṛi. Up. 1.2.1. -4 A crystal; पुष्पार्ककेतकाभाश्च Rām.2.94.6. -5 Copper. -6 Sunday. -7 Membrum virile. एवा ते शेपः सहसायमर्को$ङ्गेनाङ्गं संसमकं कृणोतु Av.6.72.1. -8 N. of the sun-plant, Calatropis Gigantea (Mar. रुई), a small tree with medicinal sap and rind; अर्कस्योपरि शिथिलं च्युतमिव नवमल्लिकाकुसुमम् Ś.2.9; यमाश्रित्य न विश्रामं क्षुधार्ता यान्ति सेवकाः । सो$र्कवन्नृपतिस्त्याज्यः सदापुष्पफलो$पि सन् Pt.1.51. अर्के चेन्मधु विन्देत ŚB. on MS. -9 N. of Indra. -1 A sort of religious ceremony. -11 Praise, hymn; praising, extolling, song of praise. -12 A singer (Ved. in these two senses). -13 A learned man. -14 An elder brother. -15 Food (अर्कम् also). -16 N. of Viṣṇu. -17 A kind of decoction. -18 The seventh day of a month. -19 The उत्तरा- फल्गुनी asterism. -2 The number 12. -21 The sunstone (सूर्यकान्त); मसारगल्वर्कमयैर्विभङ्गैर्विभूषितं हेमनिबद्धचक्रम् Mb.12.46.33. cf. अर्को$र्कपर्णे स्फटिके ताम्रे सूर्ये दिवस्पतौ । ज्येष्ठभ्रातरि शुक्ले$र्कपादपे च पुमान् भवेत् ॥ Nm. -Comp. -अंशः, -कला a digit or 12th part of the sun's disc. -अश्मन् m. -उपलः 1 the sun-stone, heliotrope, girasol. -2 a sort of crystal or ruby. -आह्वः the swallow wort. -इन्दुसंगमः the time of conjunction of the sun and moon (दर्श or अमावास्या). -कान्तः A class of eleven storeyed buildings; Māna.29.25-34. -कान्ता 1 N. of a plant commonly called हुड्हुडिया. -2 sun's wife. -3 sun's shadow. -कुण्डतीर्थम् N. of a Tīrtha; Skanda P. -क्षेत्रम् 1 the field of the sun; the sign Leo, presided over by the sun. -2 N. of a holy place in Orissa. -ग्रहः The eclipse of the sun; Bṛi. S. -ग्रीवः N. of the Sāman. -चन्दनः a kind of red sandal (रक्तचन्दन). -चिकित्सा Arka's work on medical science. -जः epithet of Karṇa, Yama, Sugrīva. (-जौ) the two Aśvins regarded as the physicians of Heaven. -तनयः 'a son of the sun', an epithet of Karṇa, Yama, Manu Vaivasvata, Manu Sāvarṇi and Saturn; see अरुणात्मज. (-या) N. of the rivers Yamunā and Tāpti. -त्विष् f. light of the sun. -दिनम्, -वासरः Sunday. -दुग्धम् milky sap or exudation of Arka. -नन्दनः, -पुत्रः, -सुतः, -सूनुः N. of Saturn, Karṇa or Yama. -नयन a. one whose eyes are difficult to be gazed at. (-नः) an epithet of Virat Puruṣa. -नामन् m. the red arka tree. -पत्रः, -पर्णः N. of the plant अर्क. (-त्रा) a kind of birthwort (सुनन्दा, अर्कमूला) with wedge-shaped leaves. (-त्रम्, -र्णम्) the leaf of the अर्क plant. -पादपः N. of a plant (निम्ब); another tree (आकन्द). -पुष्पम् a flower of arka -पुष्पाद्यम् N. of a Sāman. (-ष्पी), -पुष्पिका N. of a plant (कुटुम्बिनी) -पुष्पोत्तरम् N. of a Sāman. -प्रकाश a. Bright like the sun; Mb. -प्रिया N. of a plant (जव). -बन्धुः, -बान्धवः 1 N. of Buddha Śākyamuni, meaning सूर्यवंश्यः, cf. शुद्धोदनो नाम नृपो$र्कबन्धुः Bu. Ch.9.9. -2 a lotus (the sun-lotus). -भम् 1 an asterism influenced by the sun. -2 the sign Leo. -3 उत्तराफल्गुनीनक्षत्र. -भक्ता = ˚कान्ता q. v. -मण्डलम् disc of the sun. -मूलः, -ला = ˚पत्रा; विलिखति वसुधामर्कमूलस्य हेतोः Bh.2.1. -रेतोजः Revanta, the son of Sūrya. -लपणम् Saltpetre. -वर्षः a solar year. -वल्लभः 1 N. of a plant (बन्धूक; Mar. दुपारी). -2 a lotus. -विवाहः marriage with the arka plant (enjoined to be performed before a man marries a third wife, who thus becomes his fourth); चतुर्थादिविवाहार्थं तृतीयो$र्कं समुद्वहेत् Kāśyapa. -वेधः N. of a tree (तालीशपत्र). -व्रतः, -तम् 1 a vow performed on माघशुक्लसप्तमी. -2 the law or manner of the sun; when a king exacts taxes from his subjects only to add to their material comforts and happiness, just as the sun draws up water during 8 months of the year, only to give it back increased a thousandfold, he is said to follow अर्कव्रत, अष्टौ मासान् यथादित्यस्तोयं हरति रश्मिभिः । तथा हरेत्करं राष्ट्रान्नित्यमर्कव्रतं हि तत् ॥ Ms.9.35; cf. R.1.18 (the point of comparison may also be the imperceptible way in which the sun absorbs water, see Pt.1.221). -शोकः Ved. brilliancy of rays. -सातिः f. 1 finding of rays. -2 poetical inspiration; finding out hymns; रपत् कविरिन्द्रार्कसातौ Rv.1. 174.7. -सोदरः 'brother of the sun', an epithet of Airāvata. -हिता = ˚कान्ता q. v.
arṇava अर्णव a. Being agitated, foaming, restless (Ved.); full of water (Sāy.); ततः समुद्रो अर्णवः Sandhyā; यात्येव यमुना पूर्णं समुद्रमुदकार्णवम् Rām.2.15.19. -वः [अर्णांसि सन्ति यस्मिन्, अर्णस्-व सलोपः P.V.2.19 Vārt.] 1 A stream, flood, wave. -2 The (foaming) sea, ocean; पराहतः शैल इवार्णवाम्बुभिः Ki.14.1. (fig. also), Bhāg.4. 22.4; शोक˚ ocean of grief; so चिन्ता˚; जन˚ ocean of men; संसारार्णवलङ्घनम् Bh.3.1. &c. also नृणामेको गम्यस्त्वमसि पयसामर्णव इव- शिवमहिम्रस्तोत्र of पुष्पदन्ताचार्य. -3 The ocean of air. -4 N. of a metre. -5 N. of the sun or Indra (as givers of water). -Comp. -अन्तः the extremity of the ocean. -उद्मवः 1 N. of a plant अग्निजार (Mar. समुद्रफेंस). -2 the moon. (-वा) Lakṣmī. (-वम्) nectar. -ज a. sea-born, marine. (-जम्, -जः) cuttle-fish. -पोतः, -यानम् a boat or ship. -मन्दिरः 1 'inhabiting the ocean', N. of Varuṇa, regent of the waters. -2 N. of Viṣṇu.
aupagaviḥ औपगविः Uddhava; Bhāg.3.4.27. औपग्रस्तिकः aupagrastikḥ ग्रहिकः grahikḥ औपग्रस्तिकः ग्रहिकः [उपग्रस्त-ग्रह-ठञ्] 1 An eclipse. -2 The sun or moon in eclipse.
āveśanam आवेशनम् 1 Entering, entrance. -2 Demoniacal possession. -3 Passion, anger, fury. -4 A manufactory, work-shop; कारुकावेशनानि Ms.9.265. -5 The disc of the sun or the moon. -6 A house, dwelling.
bāhuḥ बाहुः [बाध् कु धस्य हः Tv.] 1 The arm; शान्तमिदमाश्रम- पदं स्फुरति च बाहुः कुतः फलमिहास्य Ś.1.16; so महाबाहुः &c. -2 The fore-arm. -3 The fore-foot of an animal. -4 A door-post. -5 The base of a right-angled triangle (in geom.). -6 (In medic.) The whole upper extremity of the body (opp. सक्थि). -8 The bar of a chariotpole. -9 The shadow of the gnomon on a sun-dial. -1 The arm as a measure of length (= 12 Aṅgulas). -11 The limb of a bow. -हू (du.) The lunar mansion Ārdrā. -Comp. -अन्तरम् the chest; संवर्त्य मुष्टिं सहसा जघान बाह्वन्तरे शैलनिकाशरूपः Rām.6.7.154. -उत्क्षेपम् ind. having raised or tossed up the arms; बाहूत्क्षेपं क्रन्दितुं च प्रवृत्ता Ś.5.3. -कर a. active with the arms; P.III. 2.21. -कण्टकम् a mode in fighting; 'एकां जङ्घां पदा$$ क्रम्य परामुद्यम्य पाठ्यते । केतकीपत्रवच्छत्रुर्युद्धं तद्बाहुकण्टकम् ॥'; बाहु- कण्टकयुद्धेन तस्य कर्णो$थ युध्यतः Mb.12.5.4. -कुण्ठ, -कुब्ज a. crippled in the arms. -कुन्थः a wing (of a bird). -चापः the distance measured by the extended arms. -जः 1 a man of the Kṣatriya caste; cf. बाहू राजन्यः कृतः Rv.1.9.12; also Ms.1.31; स बाहुजो महाबाहुस्तदु- वाह महाबलम् Śiva B.; N.12.12. -2 a parrot. -3 sesamum growing spontaneously. -ज्या a sine (in math.). -तरणम् crossing a river (with the arms). -त्रः, -त्रम्, -त्राण vantbrass (armour for the arms). -दण्डः 1 a long, staff-like arm. -2 punishment with the arm or fist. -दन्तकम् N. of a Nītiśāstra treatise. -निःसृतम् a mode of fighting (by which a sword is twisted out of a person's hand). -पाशः a particular attitude in fighting. -2 the arm thrown round, as in the act of embracing. -प्रचालकम् ind. shaking the arms. -प्रति- बाहौ the opposite sides of a figure. -प्रसारः, -प्रसारणम् stretching the arms (for embracing &c.) -प्रहरणः a boxer. (-णम्) boxing. -फलम् 1 (in geom.) the result for the base sine. -2 (in astro.) the sine of an arc of a circle of position contained between the sun and the prime verticle. -बन्धनम् 1 encircling arms. (-नः) the shoulder-blade. -बलम् strength of arm, muscular strength. -भङ्गिः f. bending or twisting the arms. -भूषण, -भूषा an ornament worn on the arm, an armlet. -भेदिन् m. an epithet of Viṣṇu. -मूलम् 1 the armpit. -2 the shoulderblade. -युद्धम् a hand-to-hand or close fight, personal or pugilistic encounter, boxing; बाहुयुद्धं हि मल्लानामशास्त्रमृषिभिः स्मृतम् । मृतस्य तत्र न स्वर्गो यशो नेहापि विद्यते ॥ Mallaśāstram. -योधः, -योधिन् m. a pugilist, boxer. -रक्षा armour for the upper arm. -लता an arm-like creeper. ˚अन्तरम् the breast, bosom. -लोहम् bell-metal (कांस्य). -विक्षेपः 1 the act of throwing about the arms, moving the arms. -2 swimming. -विघट्टनम्, -विघट्टितम् a particular attitude in wrestling. -वीर्यम् strength of arms. -व्यायामः athletic exercise. -शालिन् m. 1 an epithet of Śiva. -2 of Bhīma. -शिखरम् the upper part of the arm, the shoulder. -संभवः a man of the Kṣatriya caste. -सहस्रभृत् m. an epithet of king Kārtavīrya (also called सहस्रार्जुन).
bāla बाल a. 1 Young, infantine, not full-grown or developed (of persons or things); बालेन स्थविरेण वा Ms. 8.7; बालाशोकमुपोढरागसुभगं भेदोन्मुखं तिष्ठति V.2.7; so बालमन्दारवृक्षः Me.77; R.2.45;13.24. -2 Newly risen, young (as the sun or its rays); बालार्कप्रतिमे- वाप्सु वीचिभिन्ना पतिष्यतः R.12.1. -3 New, waxing (as the moon); पुपोष वृद्धिं हरिदश्वदीधितेरनुप्रवेशादिव बाल- चन्द्रमाः R.3.22; Ku.3.29. -4 Puerile. -5 Ignorant, unwise; अनर्थकुशला ह्येते बालाः पण्डितमानिनः Rām.2.1.38. -6 Pure (as an animal fit for sacrifice). -लः 1 A child, an infant; बालादपि सुभाषितम् (ग्राह्यम्); Ms.2.239. -2 A boy, youth, young person. -3 A minor (under 16 years of age); बाल आषोडशाद्वर्षात् Nārada. -4 A colt, foal. -5 A fool, simpleton; नीरसायां रसं बालो बालिकायां विकल्पयेत् Pt.4.91. -6 (a) A tail. (b) An elephant's or a horse's tail. -7 Hair; तं केशपाशं प्रसमीक्ष्य कुर्युर्बालप्रियत्वं शिथिलं चमर्यः Ku.1.48. -8 An elephant five years old; 'पञ्चवर्षो गजो बालः पोतस्तु दशवार्षिकः' Vaijayantī. According to Mātaṅga L. (5.2.) however it means an elephant in the first year. -9 A kind of perfume. -1 The cocoa-nut. -Comp. -अग्रम् 1 the point of a hair. -2 A dove-cot; प्रासादबालाग्रकपोतपालिकायामुपविष्टः शृणोमि Mk.1.51/ 52. -अध्यापकः a tutor of youths or children. -अपत्यम् youthful progeny. -अभ्यासः study during childhood, early application (to study). -अरुण a. red like early dawn. (-णः) early dawn; morning sun. -अर्कः the newly-risen sun; R.12.1. -अवबोधः, -नम् instruction of the young; Pt.1. -अवस्थ a. juvenile, young; भुवमधिपतिर्बालाबस्थो$प्यलं परिरक्षितुम् V.5.18. -अवस्था childhood. -आतपः morning sunshine. -आमयः a child's disease. -इन्दुः the new or waxing moon; बालेन्दुवक्राप्य- विकाशभावाद् बभुः पलाशान्यतिलोहितानि Ku.3.29. -इष्टः the jujube tree. -उपचारः, -चरणम् (medical) treatment of children. -उपवीतम् 1 a piece of cloth used to cover the privities. -2 The sacrificial cord. -कदली a young plantain tree. -काण्डम् the first book of the Rāmāyaṇa. -कुन्दः, -दम् a kind of young jasmine. (-दम्) a young jasmine blossom; अलके बालकुन्दानुविद्धम् Me.67. -कृमिः a louse. -कृष्णः Kṛiṣṇa as a boy. -केलिः, -ली f. child's play or amusement. -क्रीडनम् a child's play or toy. -क्रीडनकम् a child's toy. -कः 1 a ball. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -क्रीडा a child's play, childish or juvenile sport. -खिल्यः a class of divine personages of the size of a thumb and produced from the creator's body and said to precede the sun's chariot (their number is said to be sixty thousand); cf. R.15.1; क्रतोश्च सन्ततिर्भार्या बालखिल्यानसूयत । षष्टिर्यानि सहस्राणि ऋषिणामूर्ध्व- रेतसाम् ॥ Mārk. P. -गर्भिणी a cow with calf for the first time. -गोपालः 'the youthful cowherd', an epithet of Kṛiṣṇa, as the boycowherd. -ग्रहः any demon (or planetary influence) teasing or injuring children; बालग्रहस्तत्र विचिन्वती शिशून् Bhāg.1.6.7. -घ्नः a childslayer, infanticide; Ms.11.19. -चन्द्रः -चन्द्रमस् m. 1 the young or waxing moon; इह जगति महोत्सवस्य हेतुर्नयनवतामुदियाय बालचन्द्रः Māl.2.1. -2 a cavity of a particular shape; Mk.3.13. -चरितम् 1 juvenile sports. -2 early life or actions; U.6. -चर्यः N. of Kārtikeya. (-र्या) the bahaviour of a child. -चुम्बालः a fish; Nigh. Ratn. -चतः a young mango-tree; धत्तेचक्षुर्मुकुलिनि रणत्कोकिले बालचूते Māl.3.12. -ज a. produced from hair. -जातीय a. childish, foolish, simple. -तनयः the Kha- dira tree. -तन्त्रम् midwifery. -तृणम् young grass. -दलकः the Khadira. -धनम् the property of a minor; Ms.8.149. -धिः (also बालधिः) a hairy tail; तुरंगमैरा- यतकीर्णवालधिः Śi.12.73; Ki.12.47. -नेत्र a. guided or steered by a fool. -पत्रः, -पत्रकः the Khadira tree. -पाश्या 1 an ornament worn in the hair when parted. -2 a string of pearls binding or intertwining the braid of hair. -पुष्टिका, -पुष्टी, -पुष्पी a kind of jasmine. -बोधः 1 instructing the young. -2 any work adapted to the capacities of the young or inexperienced. -भद्रकः a kind of poison. -भारः a large bushy tail; बाधेतोल्का- क्षपितचमरीबालभारो दवाग्निः Me.55. -भावः 1 child-hood, infancy. -2 a hairy growth; एतद्भ्रुवौ जन्म तदाप युग्मं लीलाचलत्वोचितबालभावम् N.7.26. -3 inattention; Ms. 8.118. (Kull.) -4 children (collectively). -5 recent rise (of a planet). -भृत्यः a servant from childhood. -भैषज्यम् a kind of collyrium. -भोज्यः pease. -मनो- रमा N. of several grammars. -मरणम् (with Jainas) a fool's manner of dying (12 in number). -मित्रः a friend from boyhood. -मृगः a fawn. -मूलम् a young radish. -मूषिका a small mouse. -मृणालः a tender filament or fibre (of lotus); व्यालं बालमृणालतन्तुभिरसौ रोद्धुं समुज्म्भते Bh.2.6. -यज्ञोपवीतकम् the sacred thread worn across the breast. -राजम् lapis lazuli. -रोगः a child's disease; अथ बालरोगाणां निदानानि लक्षणानि चाह । धात्र्यास्तु गुरुभिर्भोज्यैर्विषमैर्दोषलैस्तथा ...... Bhāva. P. -लता a young creeper; अवाकिरन् बाललताः प्रसूनैः R.2.1. -लीला child's play, juvenile pastime. -वत्सः 1 a young calf. -2 a pigeon. -वायजम् lapis lazuli. -वासस् n. a woollen garment. -वाह्यः a young or wild goat. -विधवा a child-widow. -वैधव्यम् child-widowhood. -व्यजनम् a chowrie or fly-flapper (usually made of the tail of the yāk or Bos Grunniens and used as one of the royal insignia); यस्यार्थयुक्तं गिरिराजशब्दं कुर्वन्ति बाल- व्यजनैश्चमर्यः Ku.1.13; R.9.66;14.11;16.33,57. -व्रतः an epithet of a Buddha saint Mañjughoṣa. -सखि m. a friend from childhood. -संध्या early twilight. -सात्म्यम् milk. -सुहृद् m. a friend of one's youth. -सूर्यः, -सूर्यकः lapis lazuli. -स्थानम् 1 childhood. -2 youth. -3 inexperience. -हत्या infanticide. -हस्तः a hairy tail.
bhārata भारत a. (-ती f.) [भरतस्येदम्, भारतान् भरतवंश्यानधिकृत्य कृतो ग्रन्थः अण्] Belonging to or descended from Bharata. -तः 1 A descendant of Bharata; (such as विदुर; सञ्जातहर्षो मुनिमाह भारतः Mb.3.2.8; also धृतराष्ट्र, अर्जुन in Bg.). -2 An inhabitant of Bharatavarṣa or India. -3 An actor, -4 An epithet of the sun shining on the south of Meru. -5 Fire. -तम् 1 India, the country of Bharata; एतदूढगुरुभार भारतं वर्षमद्य मम वर्तते वशे Śi.14.5. -2 N. of the most celebrated epic poem in Sanskrit which gives the history of the descendants of Bharata with innumerable episodes. (It is attributed to Vyāsa or कृष्णद्वैपायन, but the work, as we have it at present, is evidently the production of many hands); श्रवणाञ्जलिपुटपेयं विरचितवान् भारताख्यममृतं यः । तमहमरागमकृष्णं कृष्णद्वैपायनं वन्दे ॥ Ve.1.4; व्यासगिरां निर्यासं सारं विश्वस्य भारतं वन्दे । भूषणतयैव संज्ञां यदङ्कितां भारती वहति ॥ Āryā. S.31. -3 The science of music and dramaturgy founded by Bharata. -ती Speech, voice, words, eloquence; भारतीनिर्घोषः U.3; तमर्थमिव भारत्या सुतया योक्तुमर्हसि Ku.6.79; नवरसरुचिरां निर्मिति- मादधती भारती कवेर्जयति K. P.1. -2 The goddess of speech, Sarasvatī; कीरानने स्फुरसि भारति का रतिस्ते Govindarāja. -3 N. of a particular kind of style; भारती संस्कृतप्रायो वाग्व्यापारो नटाश्रयः S. D.285. -4 A quail. -5 The dramatic art in general. -6 The Sanskrit speech of an actor. -7 One of the 1 orders (दशनाम) of Gosāvins, mendicants (Mar. दसनाम गोसावी). -Comp. -आख्यानम्, -इतिहासः, -कथा the story of the Bhāratas (महाभारत). -मण्डलम्, -वर्षम् India. -सावित्री N. of a stotra; इमां भारतसावित्रीं प्रातरुत्थाय यः पठेत् Mb.18.5.64.
bhīṣma भीष्म a. [भी-णिच्-सुक्-अपादाने मक्] Terrible, dreadful, frightful, fearful; भीष्मो हि देवः सहसः सहीयान् Bhāg. 11.23.48. -ष्मः 1 The sentiment of terror (in rhetoric); see भयानक. -2 A demon, an imp, a fiend, goblin. -3 An epithet of Śiva. -4 N. of the son of Śantanu by Gangā; हृते भीष्मे हते द्रोणे शल्ये च निधनं गते Mb. [He was the youngest of the eight sons of Śantanu by Gangā; but all the others having died, he remained the sole heir to the throne after his father. On one occasion while Śantanu was walking by the side of a river, he beheld a charming young damsel named Satyavatī, the daughter of a fisherman, and, though bowed down with age, conceived a passion for her, and sent his son to negotiate the marriage. But the parents of the girl said that if their daughter bore sons to the king, they would not succeed to the throne, for after his death Śāntanava, being the rightful heir, would be the king. But Śāntanava, to please his father, made a vow to the parents that he would never accept the kingdom or marry a wife or become the father of children by any woman, so that if their daughter bore a son to Śantanu, he would be the king. This dreadful vow soon became known abroad, and thenceforth he was called Bhiṣma. He remained single, and, after the death of his father, he installed Vichitravīrya, the son of Satyavatī, on the throne, got him married to the two daughters of king Kāśirāja (see Ambikā), and became the guardian of his sons and grandsons, the Kauravas and Pāṇḍavas. In the great war he fought on the side of the Kauravas, but was wounded by Arjuna with the assistance of Śikhanḍin and was lodged in a 'cage of darts'. But having got from his father the power of choosing his own time for death, he waited till the sun had crossed the vernal equinox, and then gave up his soul. He was remarkable for his continence, wisdom, firmness of resolve, and unflinching devotion to God]. -ष्मम् Horror, horribleness. -Comp. -अष्टमी the eighth day in the light half of Māgha (when Bhīṣma died). -जननी an epithet of the Ganges. -पञ्चकम् N. of the five days from the eleventh to the fifteenth of the bright balf of Kārtika (said to be sacred to Bhīṣma). -पर्वन् N. of the 6th Book of the Mahā-Bhārata. -सूः f. an epithet of the river Ganges; हरशिरसि पतन्ती भीष्मसूर्वः पुनातु Udb. -स्तवराजः N. of the 47th Chapter of शान्तिपर्व in Mahābhāraṭa.
bimbaḥ बिम्बः म्बम् 1 The disc of the sun or moon; वदनेन निर्जितं तव निलीयते चन्द्रबिम्बमम्बुधरे Subhāṣ; so सूर्य˚, रवि˚ &c. -2 Any round or disc-like surface; as in नितम्ब- बिम्बः &c. -3 An image, shadow, reflection; बिम्बादिवो- त्थितौ बिम्बौ रामदेहात्तथापरौ Rām.1.4.11; प्रभवति शुचिर्बिम्ब- ग्राहे मणिर्न मृदां चयः U.2.4. -4 A mirror. -5 A jar. -6 An object compared (opp. प्रतिबिम्ब to which it is compared). -7 A statue, figure, idol; हेमबिम्बनिभा सौम्या मायेव मयनिर्मिता Rām.6.12.14. -8 A mould, matrix; यथा लोहस्य निःस्यन्दो निषिक्तो बिम्बविग्रहम् (उपैति) Mb.14.18.9. -म्बः A lizard. -म्बम् The fruit of a tree (which, when ripe, is ruddy and to which the lips of young women are often compared); रक्तशोकरुचा विशेषितगुणो बिम्बाधरालक्तकः M.3. 5; पक्कबिम्बाधरोष्ठी Me.84; cf. N.2.24. -Comp. -ओष्ठ a (बिम्बो-म्बौ-ष्ठ) having lips as ruddy or cherry as the Bimba fruit; दाक्षिण्यं नाम बिम्बोष्ठि बैम्बिकानां कुलव्रतस् M.4. 14. (-ष्ठः) a lip like the Bimba fruit. -फल the Bimba fruit; उमामुखे बिम्बफलाधरोष्ठे Ku.3.67.
bimbakam बिम्बकम् 1 The disc of the sun or moon. -2 The Bimba fruit. -3 A round form, roundness.
bimbikā बिम्बिका 1 The disc of the sun or moon. -2 The Bimba plant.
carama चरम a. [चर्-अमच् Uṇ.5.69] 1 Last, ultimate, final; चरमा क्रिया 'the final or funeral ceremony.' -2 Posterior, back; पृष्ठं तु चरभं तनोः Ak. -3 Old (as age). -4 Outermost. -5 Western, west. -6 Lowest, least. -7 Western; बृसीं चरमशैर्षिकीम् Rām.13.1.3. -मम् ind. At last; at the end. -Comp. -अचलः, -अद्रिः, -क्ष्माभृत् m. the western mountain behind which the sun and moon are supposed to set. -अवस्था the last state (old age). -कालः the hour of death. -वयस् a. old, aged; Māl.6.2.
chāyā छाया [छो-ण Uṇ.4.19] 1 Shade, shadow (changed at the end of Tat. comp. into छायम् when बाहुल्य or thickness of shade is meant; e. g. इक्षुच्छायनिषादिन्यः R.4.2; so 7.4;12.5; Mu.4.21); छायामधः सानुगतां निषेव्य Ku.1.5;6.46; अनुभवति हि मूर्ध्ना पादपस्तीव्रमुष्णं शमयति परितापं छायया संश्रितानाम् Ś.5.7; R.1.75;2.6;3.7; Me.67. -2 A reflected image, a reflection; छाया न मूर्छति मलोपहतप्रसादे शुद्धे तु दर्पणतले सुलभावकाशा Ś.7.32. -3 Resemblance, likeness; क्षित्यादीनामिहार्थानां छाया न कतमापि हि Bhāg.7.15.59. -4 A shadowy fancy, hallucination; असता छाययोक्ताय सदाभासाय ते नमः Bhāg.8.3.14. -5 Blending of colours. -6 Lustre, light; भ्रष्टश्च स्वरयोगो मे छाया चापगता मन Rām.2.69.2. छायामण्डललक्ष्येण R.4.5; रत्न- च्छायाव्यतिकरः Me.15,35. -7 Colour; Māl.6.5. -8 Colour of the face, complexion; केवलं लावण्यमयी छाया त्वां न मुञ्चति Ś.3; मेघैरन्तरितः प्रिये तव मुखच्छायानुकारी शशी S. D.; Pt.5.88. -9 Beauty क्षामच्छायं भवनम् Me.8,14. -1 Protection. -11 A row, line. -12 Darkness; (metaphorically) Avidyā; छायातपौ यत्र न गृध्रपक्षौ Bhāg.8.5.27. -13 A bribe. -14 N. of Durgā. -15 The shadow of gnomon as indicating the sun's position. -16 The Sun. -17 Nightmare. -18 N. of a wife of the sun (she was but a shadow or likeness of संज्ञा, the wife of the sun; consequently when संज्ञा went to her father's house without the knowledge of her husband, she put छाया in her own place. छाया bore to the sun three children :-two sons Sāvarṇi and Śani, and one daughter Tapanī). -19 A Sanskrit version of a Prākṛit text. -2 The Ganges; L. D. B. -21 Method; L. D. B. -22 A servant's chit; L. D. B. -यः One who grants shade. -Comp. -अङ्कः the moon. -आत्मन् m. a reflected image or form. -करः the bearer of an umbrella. -ग्रहः a mirror, or a sun-dial; प्रसन्नालापसंप्राप्तौ छायाग्रह इवापरः Rāj. T.3.154. -तनयः, -सुतः, -आत्मजः Saturn, son of छाया. -तरुः, -द्रुमः 1 a large umbrageous tree; स्निग्धच्छायातरुषु वसतिं रामगिर्याश्रमेषु Me.1; Ś.4.11. -2 The Nameru tree; छायावृक्षो नमेरौ स्यात् । Nm. -द्वितीय a. 'accompanied only by one's shadow', alone. -पथः the galaxy, the atmosphere; R.13.2. -भृत m. the moon. (-नम्) a measure of shadow. -मित्रम् a parasol. -मृगधरः the moon. -यन्त्रम् a sun-dial; छायाम्बुयन्त्रसंविदिते Bṛi. S.2.3.
dagdha दग्ध p. p. [दह्-क्त] 1 Burnt, consumed by fire. -2 (Fig.) Consumed by grief, tormented, distressed; (मही) न शक्यते द्रष्टुमपि प्रवासिभिः प्रियावियोगानलदग्धमानसैः Ṛs.1.1. -3 Famished. -4 Inauspicious, as in दग्धयोग. -5 Dry, tasteless, insipid -6 Wretched, accursed, vile, (used as a term of abuse before a word); नाद्यापि मे दग्धदेहः पतति U.4; अस्य दग्धोदरस्यार्थे कः कुर्यात् पातकं महत् H.1.68; so दग्धजठरस्यार्थे Bh.3.8. -7 Cunning (विदग्ध). -ग्धा 1 The quarter where the sun remains overhead. -2 A lunar day or तिथि on which it is considered inauspicious or unlucky to do any act. -ग्धम् 1 Burning; Mb. 12.33.6. -2 Cauterizing. -Comp. -काकः a raven. -जठरम् the hungry stomach; Bh.3. -व्रणः a burn, singe.
dakṣiṇa दक्षिण a. [दक्ष्-इनन् Uṇ 2.5.] 1 Able, skilful, dexterous, competent, clever; इत्यम्बरीषं नाभागिमन्वमोदन्त दक्षिणाः Mb.12.29.12. -2 Right (opp. वाम). -3 Situated on the right side. दक्षिणं परि, दक्षिणं कृ to place any one on the right side as a mark of respect; ग्रहर्क्षताराः परियन्ति दक्षिणम् Bhāg.4.12.25. -4 South, southern; as in दक्षिणवायु, दक्षिणदिक्; आददे नातिशीतोष्णो नभस्वानिव दक्षिणः R. 4.8. -5 Situated to the south. -6 Sincere, straightforward, honest, impartial. -7 Pleasing, amiable. -8 Courteous, civil. -9 Compliant, submissive. -1 Dependent. -11 Favourable; 'दक्षिणः सरलावामपरच्छन्दानुवर्तिषु' इति विश्वः; Ki.18.27. -णः 1 The right hand or arm. -2 A civil or courteous person, applied in poetic compositions to a lover who professes attachment to one mistress, while his heart has been entirely taken up by another. -3 An epithet of Śiva or Viṣṇu. -4 The right-hand horse of a carriage; इन्द्रस्येव दक्षिणः श्रियैधि Vāj.9.8. -5 The southern sacred fire. -णः, णम् 1 The right side. -2 The south; Nala.9.23. -3 The Deccan. -णम् The highest doctrine of the Śāktas -Comp. -अग्निः the southern fire, the sacred fire placed southwards; also called अन्वाहार्यपचन q. v. -अग्र a. pointing to the south. -अचलः the southern mountain. i. e. Malaya. -अत्ययः a dweller in the south. -अपर a. south-western. -अभिमुख a. facing the south, directed towards the south; Ms.4.5. -अयनम् the sun's progress south of the equator, the half year in which the sun moves from the north to the south, the winter solstice; सर्वे$श्वमेधैरीजानास्ते$ न्वयुर्दक्षिणायनम् Mb. 12.29.13. रात्रिः स्याद्दक्षिणायनम् Ms.1.67; Bhāg.5.21.3. -अरण्यम् Dandakāraṇya. -अर्धः 1 the right hand. -2 the right or southern side. -आचार a. 1 honest, well-behaved. -2 a worshipper of Śakti according to the right hand (or purer) ritual. -आम्नायः the southern sacred text (of the Tāntrikas). -आवर्त a. turning to the right (from the left), (a conch-shell). -आशा the south. ˚पतिः 1 an epithet of Yama. -2 the planet Mars. -इतर a. 1 left (as hand or foot); तमिमं कुरु दक्षिणेतरं चरणं निर्मितरागमेहि मे Ku.4.19. -2 northern. (-रा) the north. -ईर्मन् a. (a deer) wounded on the right side मृगयुमिव मृगो$थ दक्षिणेर्मा. -उत्तर a. turned or lying to the south and the north. ˚वृत्तम् the meridian line. -कालिका f. 1 A Tāntrika Deity. -2 Durgā. -पश्चात् ind. to the south-west. -पश्चिम a. south-western. (-मा) the south-west; जग्मुर्भरतशार्दूल दिशं दक्षिणपश्चिमाम् Mb.17.1.44. -पूर्व, -प्राच् a. south-east. -पूर्वा, -प्राची the south-eastern quarter. -भागः the southern hemisphere. -समुद्रः, -सागरः the southern ocean. -स्थः a charioteer.
dasra दस्र a. [दस्यति पांसून् दस्-रक्] Savage, fierce, destructive. -स्रौ m. (du.) 1 The two Asvins, the physicians of the gods; Mb.1.3.58; Bṛi. Up.2.5.17. -2 The number 'two.' -स्रः 1 An ass. -2 A robber. -स्रम् 1 The cold season. -2 The lunar mansion Aśvinī. -Comp. -देवता the constellation Aśvinī. -सूः f. wife of the sun and mother of the Aśvins, = संज्ञा q. v.
dhanus धनुस् a. [धन् शब्दे-असि] Armed with a bow. n. 1 A bow; धनुर्वंशविशुद्धो$पि निर्गुणः किं करिष्यति Subhāṣ. धनुष्यमोघं समधत्त बाणम् Ku.3.66; so इन्द्रधनुः &c. (At the end of Bahu. comp. धनुस् is changed to धन्वन्; अधिज्यधन्वा विचचार दावम् R.2.8.). -2 A measure of length equal to four hastas; धनुःशतं परीणाहो ग्रामे क्षेत्रान्तरं भवेत् Y.2.167; Ms. 8.237. -3 An arc of a circle. -4 The sign Sagittarius of the zodiac. -5 A desert; cf. धन्वन् -m. N. of Śiva. -Comp. -आकार a. (धनुराकार) bow-shaped, curved, bent. -आसनम् (धनुरासनम्) a particular mode of sitting. -कर (धनुष्कर) a. having or armed with a bow. (-रः) a bow-maker. -काण्डम् (धनु- ष्काण्डम्) a bow and arrow. -खण्डम् (धनुष्खण्डम्) part of a bow. Me.15. -गुणः (धनुर्गुणः) a bowstring. -ग्रहः (धनुर्ग्रहः), ग्राहः an archer. धनुर्ग्रहवरो यस्यं बाणखड्गास्त्रभृत्स्वयम् Rām.2.44.2. -ग्रहम् a measure, a cubit of 27 aṅgulas; Māna.2.52. -ज्या (धनुर्ज्या) a bow-string; अनवरतधनुर्ज्यास्फालनक्रूरपूर्वम् Ś2.4. -दुर्गम् (धनुर्दुर्गम्) a place protected by a desert; Ms.7.7. -द्रुमः (धनुर्द्रुमः) a bamboo. -धरः, -भृत् m. (धनुर्धरः &c.) 1 an archer; धनुर्भृतो$प्यस्य दयार्द्रभावम् R.2.11; धनुर्धरः केसरिणं ददर्श 29;3.31,38,39;9.11;12.97; 16.77. -2 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -3 the sign Sagittarius of the zodiac. -धारिन् (धनुर्धारिन्) m. an archer. -पाणि a. (धनुष्पाणि) armed with a bow, with a bow in hand; अहमेव धनुष्पाणिर्योद्धा समरमूर्धनि Rām. -मार्गः (धनुर्मार्गः) a line curved like a bow, a curve. -मासः (धनुर्मासः) The period during which the sun is in Sagittarius. -मुष्टिः (धनुर्मुष्टिः) a measure, a cubit of 26 aṅgulas; Māna 2.51. -लता 1 bow. -2 Soma creeper. -वातः (धनुर्वातः) a kind of disease. -विद्या (धनुर्विद्या) the science of archery. -वृक्षः (धनुर्वक्षः) 1 a bamboo. -2 the अश्वत्थ tree. -वेदः (धनुर्वेदः) the science of archery, one of the four Upavedas q. v. चतुष्पादं धनुर्वेदं वेद पञ्चविधं द्विज । रथनागाश्वपत्तीनां योधांश्चाश्रित्य कीर्तितम् ॥ यन्त्रमुक्तं पाणिमुक्तं मुक्तसन्धारितं तथा । अमुक्तं बाहुयुद्धं च पञ्चधा तत् प्रकीर्तितम् ॥ Agni P. -वेदिन् m. an epithet of Śiva. -स्तम्भः Tetanus.
dhūmita धूमित a. Obscured with smoke, darkened; अहमस्य दशेव पश्य मामविषह्यव्यसनेन धूमिताम् Ku.4.3. -ता (i. e. दिक्) The quarter towards which the sun turns first; धूमिताभिमुखी हन्ति स्वरदीप्ता दिगीश्वरान् Bṛi. S.9.3.
dinaḥ दिनः नम् [द्युति तमः, दो दी वा नक् ह्रस्व; Uṇ.2.49.] 1 Day (opp. रात्रि); दिनान्ते निहितं तेजः सवित्रेव हुताशनः R.4.1; यामिनयन्ति दिनानि च सुखदुःखवशीकृते मनसि K.P.1; दिनान्ते निलयाय गन्तुम् R.2.15. -2 A day (including the night), a period of 24 hours; दिने दिने सा परिवर्धमाना Ku.1.25; सप्त व्यतीयुस्त्रिगुणानि तस्य दिनानि R.2.25. -Comp. -अंशः any portion of a day, i. e. an hour, a watch, &c. -अण्डम् darkness. -अत्ययः, -अन्तः, -अवसानम् evening, sunset; R.2.15,45; दिनान्तरभ्यो$भ्युपशान्तमन्मथः Ṛs.1.1; Ki.9.8. -अधीशः the sun. -अर्धः mid-day, noon. -अन्तकः darkness. -आगमः, -आदिः, -आरम्भः daybreak, morning; Ki.11.52. -ईशः, ईश्वरः the sun. ˚आत्मजः 1 an epithet of Saturn. -2 of Karṇa. -3 of Sugrīva. -करः, -कर्तृ, -कृत् m. the sun; तुल्योद्योगस्तव दिनकृतश्चाधिकारो मतो नः V.2.1; दिनकरकुलचन्द्र चन्द्रकेतो U.6. 8; R.9.23. ˚तनयः N. of (1) Saturn; (2) Sugrīva; (3) Karṇa; (4) Yama. ˚तनया N. of (1) the river Yamunā, (2) the river Tāptī. -कर्तव्यम्, -कार्यम्, -कृत्यम् ceremonies to be performed daily; Ks. -केशरः, -केसरः, -केशवः darkness. -क्षयः, -पातः evening. -चर्या daily occupation, daily routine of business. -च्छिद्रम् 1 a constellation or lunar mansion. -2 a change of the moon at the beginning or end of a half-day; Hch. -ज्योतिस् n. sunshine. -दुःखितः the Chakravāka bird. -नक्तम् ind. by day and night. -नाथः, -पः, -पतिः, -बन्धः, -प्रणीः, -मणिः, -मयूखः, -रत्नम् the sun; दिनमणिमण्डलमण्डन Gīt.; पस्पृशुर्न पृथिवीं तुरङ्गमाः स्पर्धयेव दिननाथवाजिनाम् Vikr.14.64;11.1. -पाटिका a day's wages; Vet.4. -बलम् N. of the fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, eleventh, and twelfth signs of the zodiac taken collectively. -मलम् a month. -मुख morning; तुल्यतां दिनमुखेन दिनान्तः Ki.9.8; दिनमुखानि रविर्हिमनिग्रहै- र्विमलयन् मलयं नगमत्यजत् R.9.25. -मूर्द्धन् m. the eastern mountain behind which the sun is supposed to rise. -यौवनम् mid-day, noon (the youth of day). -वारः a week-day. -व्यास-दलम् the radius of a circle made by an asterism in its daily revolution; Sūrya S.2.6. -स्पृश् n. a lunar day coinciding with 3 week-days; Hch.
garbhaḥ गर्भः [गॄ-भन् Uṇ.3.152] 1 The womb, the belly; गर्भेषु वसतिः Pt.1; पुनर्गर्भे च संभवम् Ms.6.63. -2 A fœtus, embryo; act of conception, pregnancy; conception; नरपतिकुलभूत्यै गर्भमाधत्त राज्ञी P.2.75; गर्भो$भवद्भूधरराज- पत्न्याः Ku.1.19; गर्भं वहति Pt.1.3 bears a child in the womb. -3 The time of conception; गर्भाष्टमे$ब्दे कुर्वित ब्राह्मणस्योपनायनम् Ms.2.36. -4 The child (in the womb); Ś.6; ततः कुमारं सुरगर्भकल्पम् Bu. Ch.2.19; cf. 'गर्भो भ्रूणे$- र्भके कुक्षौ' Medinī. -5 A child, brood or offspring of birds. -6 The inside, middle, or interior of anything (in comp. in this sense and translated by 'full of', 'filled with', 'containing' &c); हिमगर्भैर्मयूखैः Ś.3.4; शुक˚ कोटर 1.14;7.7; ˚पत्रम् U.3.5. inwardly situated; अग्निगर्भां शमीमिव Ś.4.4; R.3.9;5.17;9.55; Śi.9.62; Māl.3.12; Mu.1.12. -7 The offspring of the sky, i. e. the vapours and fogs drawn upwards by the rays of the sun during 8 months and sent down again in the rainy season; cf. Ms.9.35; नवमासधृतं गर्भं भास्करस्य गभस्तिभिः Rām.4.28.3. -8 An inner apartment, a lying-in-chamber. -9 Any interior chamber. -1 A hole. -11 Fire. -12 Food. -13 The rough coat of the jack-fruit (पनसकण्टक). -14 the bed of a river, especially of the Ganges on the fourteenth day of the dark half of Bhādrapada or in the very height of the rains when the river is fullest. -15 The fruit (of plants). -16 Joining, union. -17 The calyx of the lotus. -18 (In dramas) One of the Sandhis q. v. -Comp. -अङ्कः (also गर्भे$ङ्कः) an interlude during an act, as the scene of the birth of Kuśa and Lava in U.7, or the सीतास्वयंवर in Bālarāmāyaṇa. The S. D. thus defines it :-- अङ्कोदर- प्रविष्टो यो रङ्गद्वारामुखादिमान् । अङ्को$परः स गर्भाङ्कः सबीजः फलवानपि ॥ 279. -अवक्रान्तिः f. descent of the soul into the womb. -अवटः see गर्भभाजनम्. -अष्टमः 1 the eighth month from conception. -2 the eighth year from conception. -अस्पन्दनम् non-quickening of the fœtus. -आगारम् 1 uterus. -2 an inner and private room, the female apartments. -3 a lying-in-chamber. -4 the body or sanctuary of a temple, the chamber where the image of a deity is placed; एकैव देवं द्रष्टुं च गर्भागारमथाविशत् Ks.7.71. -आधानम् 1 impregnation; गर्भाधानक्षणपरिच- यान्नूनमाबद्धमालाः (बलाकाः) Me.9. -2 one of the Saṁskāras or purificatory ceremonies performed after menstruation to ensure or facilitate conception; (this ceremony legalizes in a religious sense the consummation of marriage); Y.1.11. -आशयः the uterus, the womb. -आस्रावः mis-carriage, abortion. -ईश्वरः one born rich (cf. 'born in the purple'); a sovereign or rich man by birth. ˚ता sovereignty attained by inheritance; प्राप्तैश्वर्यो भवेन्मूढो गर्भेश्वरतयान्यथा Rāj. T.5.199. -उत्पत्तिः f. the formation of the embryo. -उपघातः miscarriage of the embryo (applied to the sky); Bṛi. S.21.25. -उपघातिनी a cow or female miscarrying from unseasonable gestation. -उपपत्तिः f. formation of the embryo. -कर, -कार a. impregnating, procreative. -कालः 1 time of impregnation. -2 the time when the vapour collected in the air shows the first signs of life. -कोशः, -षः uterus. -क्लेशः pains caused by the embryo, the throes of parturition or childbirth. -क्षयः miscarriage. -गृहम्, -भवनम्, -वेश्मन् n. 1 an inner apartment, the body of a house; Mb.5.118.19; R.19.42. -2 a lying-in-chamber. -3 the sanctuary or body of a temple; निर्गत्य गर्भभवनात् Māl.1. -ग्रहणम् impregnation, conception. -ग्राहिका a midwife; Ks.34. -घातिन् a. causing abortion. -चलनम् quickening, motion of the fœtus in the uterus. -चेटः a servant by birth; नर्मभिर्गर्भचेटानां द्वास्थानां विक्रियाक्रमैः Rāj. T.3.153. -च्युत a. 1 fallen from the womb (as a child). -2 miscarrying. -च्युतिः f. 1 birth; delivery. -2 miscarriage. -दासः, -सी a slave by birth; (often used as a term of abuse or reproach.); यथा गर्भदासः कर्मार्थ एव स्वामिनो$नड्वाँश्च क्रीयते । ŚB. on MS.3.1.2. -दिवसाः certain days on which the vapours collected in the air show signs of life; Bṛi.21.5. -द्रुह् a. (nom. sing. ˚ध्रुक्-ड्) causing abortion. -धम् Ved. semen virile. -धरा pregnant. -धारणम्, -धारणा gestation, impregnation. -धिः Ved. 1 a breeding place, a nest; कपोत इव गर्भधिम् Rv.1.3.4. -2 cohabitation. -ध्वंसः abortion. -नाडी the umbilical cord. -नुद् a. causing abortion. -न्यासः 1 laying the foundation. -2 the foundations. -परिस्रवः secundines or fœtal membranes collectively. -पाकिन् m. rice ripening in sixty days. -पातः miscarriage after the fourth month of pregnancy. -पोषणम्, -भर्मन् n. nourishment of the fœtus, gestation; अनुष्ठिते भिषग्भिराप्तैरथ गर्भभर्मणि R.3.12. -भाजनम् the foundation pit, the excavation. -मण्डपः an inner apartment, a bed-chamber. -मासः month of pregnancy. -मोचनम् delivery, birth. -योपा a pregnant woman; (fig.) the Ganges overflowing its banks. -रक्षणम् protecting the fœtus. -रन्धिः complete cooking; स्थाल्य- ग्नितापात्पयसो$मितापस्तत्तापतस्तण्डुलगर्भरन्धिः Bhāg.5.1.22. -रूप a. childish, youthful, juvenile. -रूपः, -रूपकः a child, an infant, a youth. -लक्षण a. observing the signs of the rainy season. (-णम्) a symptom of pregnancy. -लम्भनम् a ceremony performed for the sake of facilitating and developing pregnancy. -वसतिः f., -वासः 1 the womb; असकृद्गर्भवासेषु वासं जन्म च दारुणम् Ms.12.78. -2 being in the womb. -विच्युतिः f. abortion in the beginning of pregnancy. -विपत्तिः death of the fœtus. -वेदना throes of child-birth. -व्याकरणम् the formation of the embryo. -शङ्कुः a kind of instrument for extracting the dead fœtus. -शय्या the abode of the fœtus or uterus. -संभवः, -संभूतिः f. becoming pregnant; वर्षद्वयं प्रविष्टस्य वर्तत$न्तःपुरे$त्र मे । तदेषा गर्भसंभूतिः कुतः संप्रति कथ्यताम् Ks.5.61. -संभवा a kind of cardamoms (Mar. एलची). -स्थ a. 1 situated in the womb. -2 interior, internal. -स्रावः abortion, miscarriage; वरं गर्भस्रावः Pt.1; Y.3.2; Ms.5.66.
grāsaḥ ग्रासः [ग्रस् कर्मणि घञ्] 1 A mouthful, a quantity of anything equal to a mouthful; Ms.3.133;6.28; Y.3.55. -2 Food, nourishment; ग्रासाच्छादनमात्रं तु दद्या- दिति निदर्शनम् Mb.12.165.63. -3 The part of the sun or the moon eclipsed. -4 The morsel bitten. -5 The act of swallowing. -6 Slurring, indistinct pronunciation; fault in a pronunciation of the gutturals. -7 (In geom.) A piece cut out by the intersection of two circles -8 An eclipse. -Comp. -आच्छादनम् food and clothing; i. e. bare subsistence; see ग्रास (2); Ms.9.22. -प्रमाणम् the size of a morsel. -शल्यम् any extraneous substance lodged in the throat. -ग्रासीकृ To swallow; ग्रासीकर्तुं प्रवृत्तो$भूदुत्थायाजगरो महान् Ks.9.57.
grasanam ग्रसनम् [ग्रस् भावे ल्युट्] 1 Swallowing, eating. -2 Seizing. -3 A partial eclipse of the sun or moon; Bṛi. S.5.43,46. -4 A mouth, jaw; प्राशित्रमास्ये ग्रसने ग्रहास्तु ते Bhāg.3.13.36.
grasta ग्रस्त p. p. [ग्रस् कर्मणि क्त] 1 Eaten, devoured. -2 Seized, stricken, affected, possessed; ग्रह˚, विपद्˚, जरा˚ U.6. 39. -3 Slurred; ˚मुक्तम् U.5.13; ˚आमिषम् Pt.1.193. -4 Eclipsed. -5 Taken, seized. -6 Tormented, afflicted; Y.3.245. -स्तम् A word or sentence half-uttered or slurred over. -Comp. -अस्तम् the setting of the sun or moon while eclipsed. -उदयः rising of the sun or moon while eclipsed.
īśāna ईशान a. [ईश् ताच्छील्ये चानश्] 1 Owning, possessing, master or lord. -2 Reigning, ruling. -3 Wealthy, rich. -नः 1 A ruler, master, lord; ईशानो भूतभव्यस्य Kaṭh. Up.4.12. -2 N. of Śiva; ईशानसंदर्शनलालसानाम् Ku.7.56; K.1. -3 The Ārdrā Nakṣtra. -4 One of the Rudras. -5 The number 'eleven'. -6 The sun as a form of Śiva. पर्जन्यो यमो मृत्युरीशानः Bṛi. Up.1. 4.11. -7 A Sādhya. -8 N. of Viṣṇu. -नी N. of Durgā. -नी, -नः The silk-cotton tree (शाल्मली; Mar. सांवरी). -नम् Light, splendour. -Comp. -आदिपञ्चमूर्तिः f. one of the five forms of Śiva. -कल्पः N. of a Kalpa. -कृत् a. 1 making one a master or able. -2 acting like a competent person.
jala जल a. [जल् अच् डस्य लो वा] 1 Dull, cold, frigid = जड q. v. -2 Stupid, idiotic. -लम् 1 Water; तातस्य कूपो$- यमिति ब्रुवाणाः क्षारं जलं कापुरुषाः पिबन्ति । Pt.1.322. -2 A kind of fragrant medicinal plant or perfume (ह्रीवेर). -3 The embryo or uterus of a cow. -5 The constellation called पूर्वाषाढा. -Comp. -अञ्चलम् 1 a spring. -2 a natural water-course. -3 moss. -अञ्जलिः 1 a handful of water. -2 a libation of water presented to the manes of a deceased person; कुपुत्रमासाद्य कुतो जलाञ्जलिः Chāṇ 69; मानस्यापि जलाञ्जलिः सरभसं लोके न दत्तो यथा Amaru. 97 (where, जलाञ्जलिं दा means 'to leave or give up'). -अटनः a heron. -अटनी a leech. -अणुकम्, -अण्डकम् the fry of fish. -अण्टकः a shark. -अत्ययः autumn (शरद्); पृष्ठतो$नुप्रयातानि मेघानिव जलात्यये Rām.2.45.22. -अधिदैवतः, -तम् an epithet of Varuṇa. (-तम्) the constellation called पूर्वाषाढा. -अधिपः an epithet of Varuṇa. -अम्बिका a well. -अर्कः the image of the sun reflected in water. -अर्णवः 1 the rainy season. -2 the ocean of sweet water. -अर्थिन् a. thirsty. -अवतारः a landing-place at a river-side. -अष्ठीला a large square pond. -असुका a leech. -आकरः a spring, fountain, well. -आकाङ्क्षः, -काङ्क्षः, -काङ्क्षिन् m. an elephant. -आखुः an otter. -आगमः rain; तपति प्रावृषि सुतरामभ्यर्ण- जलागमो दिवसः Ratn.3.1. -आढ्य a. watery, marshy. -आत्मिका a leech. -आधारः a pond, lake, reservoir of water. -आयुका a leech. -आर्द्र a. wet. (-र्द्रम्) wet garment or clothes. (-र्द्रा) a fan wetted with water. -आलोका a leech. -आवर्तः eddy, whirl-pool. -आशय a. 1 resting or lying in water. -2 stupid, dull, apathetic. (-यः) 1 a pond, lake, reservoir. -2 a fish. -3 the ocean. -4 the fragrant root of a plant (उशीर). -आश्रयः 1 a pond. -2 water-house. -आह्वयम् a lotus. -इन्द्रः 1 an epithet of Varuṇa. -2 N. of Mahādeva. -3 the ocean; जलेन्द्रः पुंसि वरुणे जम्भले च महोदधौ Medinī. -इन्धनः the submarine fire. -इभः a water-elephant. -ईशः, -ईश्वरः 1 an epithet of Varuṇa; भीमोद्भवां प्रति नले च जलेश्वरे च N. -2 the ocean. -उच्छ्वासः 1 a channel made for carrying off excess of water, drain, (cf. परीवाह). -2 overflow of a river. -उदरम् dropsy. -उद्भव a. aquatic. (-वा) benzoin. -उरगा, -ओकस् m., -ओकसः a leech. -कण्टकः a crocodile. -कपिः the Gangetic porpoise. -कपोतः a water-pigeon. -कर a. making or pouring forth water. (-रः) tax for water. -करङ्कः 1 a shell. -2 a cocoa-nut. -3 a cloud. -4 a wave. -5 a lotus. -कल्कः mud. -कल्मषः the poison produced at the churning of the ocean; तस्यापि दर्शयामास स्ववीर्यं जलकल्मषः Bhāg.8. 7.44. -काकः the diver-bird. -कान्तः the wind. -कान्तारः an epithet of Varuṇa. -किराटः a shark. -कुक्कुटः a water-fowl; जलकुक्कुटकोयष्टिदात्यूहकुलकूजितम् Bhāg.8.2.16. (-टी) the black-headed gull. -कुन्तलः, -कोशः moss. -कूपी 1 a spring, well. -2 a pond. -3 a whirlpool; जलकूपी कूपगर्ते पुष्करिण्यां च योषिति Medinī. -कूर्मः the porpoise. -कृत् a. Causing rain; दिवसकृतः प्रतिसूर्यो जलकृत् (मेघः) Bṛi. S. -केलिः, m. or f., -क्रीडा playing in water, splashing one another with water. -केशः moss. -क्रिया presenting libations of water to the manes of the deceased. -गुल्मः 1 a turtle. -2 a quadrangular tank. -3 a whirlpool. -चर a. (also जलेचर) aquatic. (-रः) 1 an aquatic animal. -2 a fish. -3 any kind of water-fowl. ˚आजीवः, ˚जीवः a fisherman. -चत्वरम् a square tank. -चारिन् m. 1 an aquatic animal. -2 a fish. -ज a. born or produced in water. (-जः) 1 an aquatic animal. -2 a fish; स्वयमेव हतः पित्रा जलजेनात्मजो यथा Rām.2.61.22. -3 sea-salt. -4 a collective name for several signs of the zodiac. -5 moss. -6 the moon. (-जः, जम्) 1 a shell. -2 the conch-shell; अधरोष्ठे निवेश्य दघ्मौ जलजं कुमारः R.7. 63,1.6; इत्यादिश्य हृषीकेशः प्रध्माय जलजोत्तमम् Bhāg.8.4. 26. -3 (-जः) The Kaustubha gem; जलजः कौस्तुभे मीने तत् क्लीबे शङ्खपद्मयोः । Nm. (जः) -4 A kind of horse born in water; वाजिनो जलजाः केचिद् वह्निजातास्तथापरे । शालिहोत्र of भोज, Appendix II,12. (-जम्) a lotus. ˚आजीवः a fisherman. ˚आसनः an epithet of Brahmā; वाचस्पतिरुवाचेदं प्राञ्जलिर्जलजासनम् Ku.2.3. ˚कुसुमम् the lotus. ˚द्रव्यम् a pearl, shell or any other thing produced from the sea. -जन्तुः 1 a fish, -2 any aquatic animal. -जन्तुका a leech. -जन्मन् a lotus. -जिह्वः a crocodile. -जीविन् m. a fisherman. -डिम्बः a bivalve shell. -तरङ्गः 1 a wave. -2 a metal cup filled with water producing harmonic notes like a musical glass. -ताडनम् (lit.) 'beating water'; (fig.) any useless occupation. -तापिकः, -तापिन्, -तालः The Hilsa fish; L. D. B. -त्रा an umbrella. -त्रासः hydrophobia. -दः 1 a cloud; जायन्ते विरला लोके जलदा इव सज्जनाः Pt.1.29. -2 camphor. ˚अशनः the Śāla tree. -आगमः the rainy season; सरस्तदा मानसं तु ववृधे जलदागमे Rām.7.12.26. ˚आभ a. black, dark. ˚कालः the rainy season. ˚क्षयः autumn. -दर्दुरः a kind of musical instrument. -देवः the constellation पूर्वाषाढा. -देवता a naiad, water-nymph. -द्रोणी a bucket. -द्वारम् A gutter, a drain, Māna.31.99. -धरः 1 a cloud. -2 the ocean. -धारा a stream of water. -धिः 1 the ocean. -2 a hundred billions. -3 the number 'four'. ˚गा a river. ˚जः the moon. ˚जा Lakṣmī, the goddess of wealth. ˚रशना the earth. -नकुलः an otter. -नरः a merman. -नाडी, -ली a water-course. -निधिः 1 the ocean. -2 the number 'four'. -निर्गमः 1 a drain, water-course. -2 a water-fall, descent of a spring &c. into a river below. -नीलिः moss. -पक्षिन् m. a water-fowl. -पटलम् a cloud. -पतिः 1 the ocean. -2 an epithet of Varuṇa. -पथः a sea voyage; R.17.81. -पद्धतिः f. a gutter, drain. -पात्रम् 'a water-pot', drinking-vessel. -पारावतः a water-pigeon. -पित्तम् fire. -पुष्पम् an aquatic flower. -पूरः 1 a flood of water. -2 a full stream of water. -पृष्ठजा moss. -प्रदानम् presenting libations of water to the manes of the deceased. -प्रपातः 1 a water-fall. -2 rainy season; शरत्प्रतीक्षः क्षमतामिमं भवाञ्जलप्रपातं रिपुनिग्रहे धृतः Rām.4.27.47. -प्रलयः destruction by water. -प्रान्तः the bank of a river. -प्रायम् a country abounding with water; जलप्रायमनूपं स्यात् Ak. -प्रियः 1 the Chātaka bird. -2 a fish. (-या) an epithet of Dākṣāyaṇī. -प्लवः an otter. -प्लावनम् a deluge, an inundation. -बन्धः, बन्धकः a dam, dike, rocks or stones impeding a current. -बन्धुः a fish. -बालकः, -वालकः the Vindhya mountain. -बालिका lightning. -बिडालः an otter. -बिम्बः, -म्बम् a bubble. -बिल्वः 1 a (quadrangular) pond, lake. -2 a tortoise. -3 a crab. -भीतिः f. hydrophobia. -भू a. produced in water. -भूः m. 1 a cloud. -2 a place for holding water. -3 a kind of camphor. -भूषणः wind. -भृत् m. 1 a cloud. -2 a jar. -3 camphor. -मक्षिका a water-insect. -मण़्डूकम् a kind of musical instrument; (= जलदर्दुर). -मद्गुः a king-fisher. -मसिः 1 a cloud. -2 camphor. -मार्गः a drain, canal. -मार्जारः an otter. -मुच् m. 1 a cloud; Me.69. -2 a kind of camphor. -मूर्तिः an epithet of Śiva. -मूर्तिका hail. -मोदम् a fragrant root (उशीर). -यन्त्रम् 1 a machine for raising water (Mar. रहाट). -2 a waterclock, clepsydra. -3 a fountain. ˚गृहम्, ˚निकेतनम्, ˚मन्दिरम् a house erected in the midst of water (a summerhouse) or one supplied with artificial fountains; क्वचिद् विचित्रं जलयन्त्रमन्दिरम् Ṛs.1.2. -यात्रा a sea-voyage. -यानम् a ship. -रङ्कुः a kind of gallinule. -रण्डः, रुण्डः 1 a whirlpool. -2 a drop of water, drizzle, thin sprinkling. -3 a snake. -रसः sea-salt. -राशिः the ocean. -रुह्, -हम् a lotus. -रूपः a crocodile. -लता a wave, billow. -वरण्टः a watery pustule. -वाद्यम् a kind of musical instrument. -वायसः a diver-bird. -वासः residence in water. (-सम्) = उशीर q. v. -वाहः 1 a cloud; साद्रिजलधिजलवाहपथम् Ki.12.21. -2 a waterbearer. -3 a kind of camphor. -वाहकः, -नः a watercarrier. -वाहनी an aqueduct. -विषुवम् the autumnal equinox. -वृश्चिकः a prawn. -वैकृतम् any change in the waters of rivers indicating a bad omen. -व्यधः A kind of fish; L. D. B. -व्यालः 1 a water-snake. -2 a marine monster. -शयः, -शयनः, -शायिन् m. an epithet of Viṣṇu; -शय्या lying in water (a kind of religious rite); द्वादशं हि गतं वर्षं जलशय्यां समासतः Rām.7. 76.17. -शर्करा A hailstone; तीव्रैर्मरुद्गणैर्नुन्ना ववृषुर्जलशर्कराः Bhāg.1.25.9. -शुक्तिः f. a bivalve shell. -शुचि a. bathed, washed. -शूकम् moss. -शूकरः a crocodile. -शोषः drought. -समुद्रः the ocean of fresh water. -संपर्कः mixture or dilution with water. -सर्पिणी a leech. -सूचिः f. 1 the Gangetic porpoise. -2 a kind of fish. -3 a crow. -4 a water-nut. -5 a leech. -स्थानम्, -स्थायः a pond, lake, reservoir; कदचित्तं जलस्थायं मत्स्य- बन्धाः समन्ततः Rām.12.137.5. -स्रावः A kind of eyedisease. -हम् a small water-house (rather summerhouse) furnished with artificial fountains. -हस्तिन् m. a water-elephant. -हारिणी a drain. -हासः 1 foam. -2 cuttle-fish-bone considered as the foam of the sea.
jarat जरत् a. 1 Old, aged, decayed. -2 Infirm, decrepit. -m. An old man. -Comp. -कारुः N. of a great sage who married a sister of the serpent Vāsuki. [One day as he was fallen asleep on the lap of his wife, the sun was about to set. His wife, perceiving that the time of offering his evening prayers was passing away, gently roused him. But he became angry with her for having disturbed his sleep, and left her never to return. He, however, told her, as he went, that she was pregnant and would give birth to a son who would be her support, and at the same time the saviour of the serpent-race. This son was Astika]. -गवः an old ox; दारिद्र्यस्य परा मूर्तिर्यन्मानद्रविणाल्पता । जरद्गवधनः शर्वस्तथापि परमेश्वरः ॥ Pt.2.163.
jyotis ज्योतिस् n. [द्युत्-इसुन् आदेर्दस्य जः. ज्युत्-इसुन् वा] 1 Light, lustre, brightness, flash; ज्योतिरेकं जगाम Ś.5.3; R.2. 75; Me.5. -2 Light of Brahman, light regarded as the Supreme spirit; Bg.5.24;13.17; अथ यदतः परो दिवो ज्योतिर्दीप्यते Ch. Up.3.13.7; U.4.18. -3 Lightning. -4 A heavenly body. -5 A heavenly body, a luminary (planet, star &c.); ज्योतिर्भिरुद्यद्भिरिव त्रियामा Ku.7.21; Bg.1.21; H.1.21; Ku.2.19; Ś.7.6. -6 Brightness of the sky, day-light (opp. तमस्). -7 The sun and moon (dual). -8 Light as the divine principle of life, intelligence. -9 The science of the course of heavenly bodies; astronomy. See ज्योतिष. -1 The faculty of seeing. -11 The celestial world. -12 A Cow; ŚB. on MS.1.3.49. -m. 1 The sun. -2 Fire; ज्योति- ष्कल्पोरुकेशरः (मारुतिः) Bk.9.6. -8 An epithet of Viṣṇu. -Comp. -इङ्गः, -इङ्गणः the fire-fly. -कणः a spark of fire. -गणः the heavenly bodies collectively; -चक्रम् the zodiac. -ज्ञः an astronomer of astrologer. -मण्डलम् the stellar sphere. -मिलिन् m. -वी(बी)जम् a fire-fly. -रथः (ज्योतीरथः) the polar star. -लोकः the supreme spirit. -विद् m. an astronomer or astrologer. -विद्या, -शास्त्रम् (ज्योतिःशास्त्रम्) astronomy or astrology. -स्तोमः (ज्योतिष्टोमः) a Soma sacrifice considered as the type of a whole class of sacrificial ceremonies. -ज्योतिष्टोमः A kind of soma sacrifice requiring sixteen priests for its performance. -हस्ता N. of Durgā.
kha खः The sun. -खम् 1 The sky; खं केशवो$पर इवाक्रमितुं प्रवृत्तः Mk.5.2; यावद्गिरः खे मरुतां चरन्ति Ku.3.72; Me.9. -2 Heaven. -3 Organ of sense; पराञ्चि खानि व्यतृणत्स्वयंभूस्तमात्पराङ् पश्यति नान्तरात्मन् Kaṭh.2.1.1. -4 A city. -5 A field. -6 A cypher. -7 A dot, an anusvāra. -8 A cavity, an aperture, hollow, hole; नश्यतीषुर्यथा विद्धः खे विद्धमनुविध्यतः Ms.9.43. -9 An aperture of the human body; (of which there are 9, i. e. the mouth, the two ears, the two eyes, the two nostrils, and the organs of excretion and generation); खानि चैव स्पृशेदद्भिः Ms.2.6,53;4.144; Y.1.2; cf. Ku.3.5. -1 A wound. -11 Happiness, pleasure. -12 Tale. -13 Action. -14 Knowledge. -15 Brahman. -16 The glottis (in anatomy). -17 The tenth mansion from any given constellation or the sun's entrance into it. -खा 1 A well, fountain. -2 A river. -3 Pārvatī. -4 The earth. -5 Lakṣmi. -6 The speech; cf. खोमा क्ष्मा कमला च गीः Enm. -Comp. -अटः (खे$टः) 1 a planet. -2 Rāhu, the ascending node. -आपगा an epithet of the Ganges. -उल्कः, -खोल्कः 1 a meteor. -2 a planet. -3 N. of the sun. ˚आदित्यः a form of the sun. -उल्मुकः the planet Mars. -कामिनी N. of Durgā. -कुन्तलः N. of Śiva. -ग a. [खे आकाशे गच्छति गम्-ड] moving in the air; आरुह्यतामयं शीघ्रं खगो रत्नविभूषितः Rām.3.42.7. (-गः) 1 a bird; अधुनीत खगः स नैकधा तनुम् N.2.2; Ms.12.63. -2 air, wind; तमांसीव यथा सूर्यो वृक्षानग्निर्घनान्खगः Mb. -3 the sun. -4 a planet; e. g. आपोक्लिमे यदि खगाः स किलेन्दुवारः Tv. -5 a grass-hopper. -6 a deity. -7 an arrow; आशीविषाभान् खगमान् प्रमुञ्चन् Mb.8.67.2. ˚अधिपः an epithet of Garuḍa; हर्षयन्विबुधानीकमारुरोह खगाधिपम् Bhāg.8. 4.26. ˚अन्तकः a hawk, falcon. ˚अभिरामः an epithet of Śiva. ˚आसनः 1 the eastern mountain on which the sun rises. -2 an epithet of Viṣṇu. ˚इन्द्रः, ˚ईश्वरः, ˚पतिः epithets of Garuḍa ज्ञानेन वैयासकिशद्वितेन भेजे खगेन्द्रध्वजपादमूलम् Bhāg. ˚वती f. the earth. ˚स्थानम् 1 the hollow of a tree. -2 a bird's nest. -गङ्गा celestial Gaṅgā. -गतिः f. 1 flight in the air. -2 the motion of a planet. -3 a metre of 4 x 16 syllables. -गम a. moving in the air, flying (as the Gandharvas or missile weapons). (-मः) a bird. -(खे)गमनः a kind of gallinule. -गुण a. having a cypher as a multiplier. -गोलः the celestial sphere. ˚विद्या astronomy. -चमसः the moon. -चर a. flying, moving in the air. (-रः) or खेचरः 1 a bird. -2 a cloud. -3 the sun. -4 the wind. -5 a demon. -6 an aerial spirit. -7 a Gandharva or Vidyādhara खचरनगरकल्पं कल्पितं शास्त्रदृष्ट्या Mb.7.7.54; दिव्यस्रग्वस्त्रसन्नाहाः कलत्रैः खेचरा इव Bhāg.1.82.9. -8 a planet. (hence the number 'nine'). -9 mercury or quicksilver. -1 a sign of the zodiac. (-री i. e. खेचरी) 1 a semi-divine female able to fly. -2 an epithet of Durgā. -3 The magical power of flying (सिद्धि); एवं सखीभिरुक्ताहं खेचरी- सिद्धिलोलुभा Ks.2.15. -4 a particular मुद्रा or position of fingers. -चारिन् a. moving in the air. (-m.) an epithet of Skanda. -जलम् 'sky-water', dew, rain, frost &c. -ज्योतिस् m. a firefly. -तमालः 1 a cloud. -2 smoke. -तिलकः the sun, -द्योतः 1 a firefly; खद्योतालीविलसितनिभां विद्युदुन्मेषदृष्टिम् Me.83. -2 the sun. -द्योतनः the sun. -धूपः a rocket; मुमुचुः खधूपान् Bk.3.5. -परागः darkness. -पुष्पम् 'sky-flower', used figuratively to denote anything impossible, an impossibility; cf. the four impossibilities stated in this verse :-- मृगतृष्णाम्भसि स्नातः शशशृङ्गधनुर्धरः । एष वन्ध्यासुतो याति खपुष्पकृतशेखरः Subhāṣ. -बाष्पः dew, frost. -भ्रमः a planet. -भ्रान्तिः a falcon. -मणिः 'the jewel of the sky', the sun. -मीलनम् sleepiness, lassitude. -मूर्तिः an epithet of Śiva; a celestial body or person; Ms.2.82. -वारि n. rain-water, dew &c. -बाष्पः snow, hoar-frost. -शय (also खेशय) a. resting or dwelling in the air. -शरीरम् a celestial body. -श्वासः wind, air. -समुत्थ, -संभव a. produced in the sky, ethereal. -सिन्धुः the moon. -सूचि See under that word. -स्तनी the earth. -स्फटिकम् the sun or moon gem. -हर a. having a cypher for its denominator.
kuñjaraḥ कुञ्जरः [कुञ्जो हस्तिहनुः सो$स्यास्ति, कुञ्ज-र, ऊषसुषिपुष्क मधोरः P.V.2.17. Vārt.] 1 An elephant; प्राक्छाये कुञ्जरस्य च Ms.3.274. दन्तयोर्हन्ति कुञ्जरम् Mbh. on P.II.3.36. -2 Anything pre-eminent or excellent of its class (at the end of comp. only). Amara gives the following words used similarly :-- स्युरुत्तरपदे व्याघ्रपुङ्गवर्षभकुञ्जराः । सिंहशार्दूलनागाद्याः पुंसि श्रेष्ठार्थवाचकाः ॥ -3 The Aśvattha tree. -4 The lunar asterism called हस्त. -5 Hair. -6 Head. -7 An ornament; कुञ्जरः कुन्तले पुमान् मस्तके भूषणे नागे ... Nm. -8 The number 'eight' (from eight elephants of the cardinal points). -रा, -री 1 A female elephant. -2 N. of a flower-plant. -Comp. -अनीकम् the division of an army consisting of elephant-corps. -अरिः a lion. -अशनः the Aśvattha tree. -अरातिः 1 a lion. -2 Śarabha (a fabulous animal with 8 feet). -आरोहः an elephant's driver; Rām.6. -ग्रहः an elephant-catcher; नाश्वबन्धो$श्वमाजानन्न गजं कुञ्जरग्रहः Rām.2.91.57. -च्छायः A famous Yoga in Astrology in which the moon is in the मघानक्षत्र and the sun is in the हस्तनक्षत्र.
kūṭa कूट a. 1 False; as in कूटाः स्युः पूर्वसाक्षिणः Y.2.8; दुस्तोषः कूटयोगिनाम् Bhāg.2.9.19. -2 Immovable, steady. -3 Despised. -टः, -टम् 1 Fraud, illusion, deception. -2 A trick, fraudulent or roguish scheme; अक्षकूटमधि- ष्ठाय हृतं दुर्योधनेन वै Mb.3.33.3. -3 A puzzling question, knotty or intricate point, as in कूटश्लोक, कूटान्योक्ति; वाचः कूटं तु देवर्षेः स्वयं विभमृशुर्धिया Bhāg.6.5.1. -4 Falsehood, untruth; oft. used in comp. with the force of an adjective; ˚वचनम् false or deceitful words; ˚तुला, ˚मानम् &c. -5 A summit or peak of a mountain; वर्धयन्निव तत्कूटानु- द्धतैर्धातुरेणुभिः R.4.71, Me.115; Māl.5.32. -6 Any projection or prominence. -7 The bone of the forehead with its projections, the crown of the head. -8 A horn, सम्परेतमयःकूटैश्छिन्दन्त्युत्थितमन्यवः Bhāg.4.25.8. -9 End, corner; Y.3.96. -1 Head, chief. -11 A heap, mass, multitude; अभ्रकूटम् 'a heap of clouds'; so अन्नकूटम् 'a heap of food'; Mv.6.32. -12 A hammer, an iron mallet. -13 A plough-share, the body of a plough. -14 A trap for catching deer; नश्येदभिमृशन्सद्यो मृगः कूट- मिव स्पृशन् Mb.12.68.52. -15 A concealed weapon, as a dagger in a woollen case or a sword in a stick. -16 A water-jar. -17 The door of a city; निर्ययुर्भवनात्त- स्मात्कूटमुद्गरपाणयः Rām.5.42.25. -18 A false coin; कूटं हि निषादानामेवोपकारकं न आर्याणाम् ŚB. on MS.6.1.52. -टः 1 A house, dwelling. -2 An ox whose horns are broken. -3 An epithet of Agastya. -Comp. -अक्षः a false or loaded die; कूटाक्षोपधिदेविनः Y.2.22. -अगारम् an apartment on the top of a house; कूटागारैश्च संपूर्णामि- न्द्रस्येवामरावतीम् Rām.1.5.15. -अर्थः ambiguity of meaning. ˚भाषिता a tale, fiction. -उपायः a fraudulent plan, trick, stratagem. -कारः, -कारकः a rogue, a false witness; Ms.3.158. -कृत् a. 1 cheating, deceiving. -2 forging a document; Y.2.7. -3 bribing. (-m.) 1 a man of the writer caste (कायस्थ). -2 an epithet of Śiva. -कार्षापणः a false कार्षापण q. v. -कोष्ठम् a. compartment on the top of a building (Kāmikāgama 55.123-3); (कूटशाला and कूटागार are synonyms). -खङ्गः a sword-stick. -च्छद्मन् m. a cheat; पीड्यमानाः प्रजा रक्ष्याः कूटच्छद्मादिभिस्तथा Pt.1.343. -तुला a false pair of scales. -धर्म a. where falsehood is considered a duty (as a place, house, country, &c.). -पाकलः, -पर्वः -पूर्वः bilious fever to which elephants are subject (हस्तिवातज्वर); अचिरेण वैकृतविवर्तदारुणः कलभं कठोर इव कूट- पाकलः (अभिहन्ति Māl.1.39); (also sometimes written as कूटपालक). -पालकः a potter; a potter's kiln. -पाशः, -बन्धः a trap, snare, समाधिभीतेन किलोपनीतः पञ्चाप्सरोयौवन- कूटबन्धम् R.13.39. -मानम् false measure or weight. -मोहनः an epithet of Skanda. -यन्त्रम् a trap, a snare for deer, birds &c. -युद्धम् treacherous or unfair warfare; कूटयुद्धविधिज्ञे$पि तस्मिन्सन्मार्गयोधिनि R.17.69. -रचना 1 a trap laid; Pt.2.85. -2 artifice, trick; अतर्क्या कुट्टनीकूटरचना हि विधेरपि Ks.57.115. -लेखः a falsified document; कृत्वाथ कूटलेखं सा विदग्धा मह्यमर्पयत् Ks.124.197. -शाल्मलिः f., m. 1 a species of the Śālmali tree. -2 a kind of tree with sharp thorns (regarded as one of the several instruments-perhaps a club-with which the wicked are tortured in the world of Yama); see R.12.95 and Malli. thereon. -शासनम् a forged grant or decree; Ms.9.232. -संक्रान्तिः the passing of the sun into another zodiac when half the night is over. -साक्षिन् m. a false witness. -स्थ a. 1 standing at the top, occupying the highest place (said of a person who stands at the head in a geneological table). -2 silent; not at all moving or working; Mb.12.179.6. (-स्थः) the Supreme Soul (immovable, unchangeable, and perpetually the same); क्षरः सर्वाणि भूतानि कूटस्थो$क्षर उच्यते Bg.6.8;12.3. (-स्थः, -स्थम्) a kind of perfume (Mar. नखला). -स्वर्णम् counterfeit gold; Y.2.297. -हेमन् (as above); रज्यत्तुषारद्युतिकूटहेम तत्पाण्डु जातं रजतं क्षणेन N.22.52.
lagna लग्न p. p. 1 Adhered or clung to, stuck, held fast; लता- विटपे एकावली लग्ना V.1. -2 Touching, coming in contact with. -3 Attached to, connected with. -4 Clinging or sticking to, remaining on; उवाच रामं संप्रेक्ष्य पङ्कलग्न इव द्विपः Rām. 4.18.49. -5 Cutting, meeting (as lines) -6 Following closely, impending. -7 Busy with, closely occupied about; परे ब्रह्मणि को$पि न लग्नः Skanda P. -8 Fastened on, directed towards. -9 Ashamed. -1 -Consumed, spent; Ms.7.127 (com.) -11 Auspicious; (see लग्). -ग्नः 1 A bard, minstrel. -2 An elephant in rut. -ग्नम् 1 The point of contact or intersection, the point where the horizon and the ecliptic or the path of planets meet. -2 The point of the ecliptic which at any given time is at the horizon or on the meridian. -3 The rising of the sun or of the planets. -4 The moment of the sun's entrance into a zodiacal sign. -5 A figure of the twelve zodiacal signs. -6 An auspicious or lucky moment. -7 (Hence) A decisive moment, time for action. -Comp. -अहः, -दिनम्, -दिवसः, -वासरः an auspicious day, a day chosen as lucky for the performance of any work. -कालः, -मुहूर्तः, -वेला, -समयः auspicious time, the time fixed upon (by astrologers &c.) as auspicious for the performance of any work (marriage &c.). -ग्रह a. tenacious, insisting firmly on anything. -नक्षत्रम् an auspicious asterism. -भुजः (in astr.) ascensional difference. -मण्डलम् the zodiac. -मासः an auspicious month. -शुद्धिः f. auspiciousness of the zodiacal signs &c. for the performance of any work.
lalāṭaṃtapa ललाटंतप a. 1 Burning or scorching the (fore) head; ललाटंतपस्तपति तपनः Māl.1; U.6 'the sun is shining right overhead'; ललाटंतपसप्तसप्तिः R.13.41. -2 (Hence) Very painful; लिपिर्ललाटंतपनिष्ठुराक्षरा N.1.138. -पः The sun.
layaḥ लयः [ली-अच्] 1 Sticking, union, adherence. -2 Lurking, hiding. -3 Fusion, melting, solution. -4 Disappearance, dissolution, extinction, destruction; universal destruction (प्रलय); लयं या 'to be dissolved or destroyed'. -5 Absorption of the mind, deep concentration, exclusive devotion (to any one object); पश्यन्ती शिवरूपिणं लयवशादात्मानमभ्यागता Māl.5.2,7; ध्यानलयेन Gīt.4. -6 Time in music (of three kinds- द्रुत, मध्य, and विलम्बित); किसलयैः सलयैरिव पाणिभिः R.9.35; पादन्यासो लय- मनुगतः M.2.9; मध्यलम्बितपरिच्छिन्नस्त्रिधायं लयः Nāg.1.14. -7 A pause in music. -8 Rest, repose. -9 A place of rest, abode, habitation; अलया Śi.4.57 'having no fixed abode, wandering'. -1 Slackness of mind, mental inactivity; (also used in adjectival sense; यदा जये- द्रजः सत्त्वं तमो मूढं लयं जडम् Bhāg.11.25.15.). -11 An embrace. -12 The Supreme Being. -13 The union of song, dance, and instrumental music; गायतं मधुरं गेयं तन्त्रीलयसमन्वितम् Rām.7.93.15. -14 A swoon. -15 The quick (downward) movement of an arrow. -Comp. -अर्कः the sun at the destruction of the universe. -आरम्भः, -आलम्भः an actor, a dancer. -कालः the time of destruction (of the world.). -गत a. dissolved, melted away. -नालिकः a Buddhist or Jain temple. -पुत्री an actress, a female dancer. -मध्य a. to be performed in moderate time (a piece of music). -शुद्ध a. to be performed in right time. -स्थानम् a place of dissolution.
madhya मध्य a. [मन्-यत् नस्य धः Tv.] 1 Middle, central, being in the middle or centre; एकं मुक्तागुणमिव भुवः स्थूल- मध्येन्द्रनीलम् Me.48; Ms.2.21. -2 Intervening, intermediate. -3 Middling, moderate, of a middling size or quality, mediocre; अग्ऱ्यो मध्यो जघन्यश्च तं प्रवेक्ष्याम्यशेषतः Ms.12.3; प्रारभ्य विघ्नविहता विरमन्ति मध्याः Bh.2.27. -4 Neutral, impartial. -5 Just, right. -6 Mean (in astr.). -ध्यः, -ध्यम् 1 The middle, centre, middle or central part; अह्नः मध्यम् midday; सहस्रदीधितिरलंकरोति मध्यमह्नः Māl. 1 'the sun is on the meridian' or 'right over-head'; सरति सहसा बाह्वोर्मध्यं गताप्यबला सती M.4.11 (v. l.); व्योममध्ये V.2.1. -2 The middle of the body, the waist; मध्ये क्षामा Me.84; वेदिविलग्नमध्या Ku.1.39; विशालवक्षास्तनुवृत्तमध्यः R.6.32; दधाना बलिभं मध्यं कर्णजाहविलोचना Bk.4.16. -3 The belly, abdomen; मध्येन ... वलित्रयं चारु बभार बाला Ku.1.39. -4 The inside or interior of anything. -5 A middle state or condition. -6 The flank of a horse. -7 Mean time in music. -8 The middle term of a progression. -9 Cessation, pause, interval. -ध्या 1 The middle finger. -2 A young woman, one arrived at puberty. -ध्यम् Ten thousand billions. [The acc., instr., abl. and loc. singulars of मध्य are used adverbially. (a) मध्यम् into the midst of, into. (b) मध्येन through or between. (c) मध्यात् out of, from among, from the midst (with gen.); तेषां मध्यात् काकः प्रोवाच Pt.1. (d) मध्ये 1 in the middle, between, among, in the midst; स जहार तयोर्मध्ये मैथिलीं लोकशोषणः R.12.29. -2 in, into, within, inside, oft. as the first member of adverbial compounds; e. g. मध्येगङ्गम् into the Ganges; मध्येजठरम् in the belly; Bv.1.61; मध्येनगरम् inside the city; मध्येनदि in the middle of the river; मध्येपृष्ठम् on the back; मध्येभक्तम् a medicine taken in the middle of one's meals; मध्येरणम् in the battle; Bv.1.128; मध्ये- सभम् in or before an assembly; N.6.76; मध्येसमुद्रम् in the midst of the sea; Śi.3.33.]. -Comp. -अङ्गुलिः, -ला f. the middle finger. -अह्नः (for अहन्) midday, noon; प्रातःकालो मुहूर्तांस्त्रीन् संगवस्तावदेव तु । मध्याह्नस्त्रिमुहूर्तं स्यात् ...... Dakṣasamhitā. ˚कृत्यम्, ˚क्रिया a midday rite or observance. ˚कालः, ˚वेला, ˚समयः noontime, midday. ˚स्नानम् midday ablution. -आदित्यः the mid-day sun. -उदात्त a. having the उदात्त accent on the middle syllable. -कर्णः a radius. -क्ष्मामा N. of a metre. -ग a. being or going in the middle or among. -गत a. central, middle, being in the middle. -गन्धः the mango tree. -ग्रहणम् the middle of an eclipse. -छाया mean or middle shadow. -जिह्वम् the organ of the palatals. -ज्या the sign of the meridian. -तमस् n. circular or annular darkness, central darkness. -तापिनी N. of an Upaniṣad. -दन्तः a front tooth. -दिनम् (also मध्यंदिनम्); मध्यंदिने$र्धरात्रे च Ms.7.151. 1 midday, noon. -2 a midday offering. -दीपकम् a variety of the figure called Dīpaka, in which the common attribute that throws light on the whole description is placed in the middle; e. g; गरुडानिलतिग्मरश्मयः पततां यद्यपि संमता जवे । अचिरेण कृतार्थमागतं तममन्यन्त तथाप्यतीव ते ॥ Bk.1.25. -देशः 1 the middle region or space, the middle part of anything. -2 the waist. -3 the belly. -4 the meridian. -5 the central region, the country lying between the Himālaya and Vindhya mountains; हिमवद्विन्ध्ययोर्मध्यं यत्प्राग्विनशनादपि । प्रत्यगेव प्रयागाच्च मध्यदेशः स कीर्तितः ॥ Ms.2.21. -देहः the trunk of the body, the belly. -निहित a. inserted, fixed into. -पदम् the middle word. ˚लेपिन् see मध्यमपदलोपिन्. -परिमाणम् the middle measure (between an atom and infinitude). -पातः 1 communion, intercourse. -2 (in astr.) the mean occurrence of the aspect. -प्रविष्ट a. one who has stolen into another's confidence; Ks. -भः (in astr.) the meridian ecliptic point. -भागः 1 the middle part. -2 the waist. -भावः 1 middle state, mediocrity. -2 a middling or moderate distance. -मणिः the principle or central gem of a necklace. -यवः a weight of six white mustard-seeds. -योगिन् a. being in the middle of a conjunction, completely obscured. -रात्रः, -रात्रिः f. midnight. -रेखा the central or first meridian; (the line supposed to be drawn through लङ्का, उज्जयिनी, कुरुक्षेत्र and other places to the mount मेरु). -लग्नम् the point of the ecliptic situated on the meridian. -लोकः the middle of the three worlds; i. e. the earth or world of mortals. ˚ईशः, ˚ईश्वरः a king. -वयस् a. middle-aged. -वर्तिन् a. 1 middle, central. -2 being among or in the middle. (-m.) an arbitrator, a mediator. -वृत्तम् the navel. -शरीर a. 1 having a middle-sized body. -2 one of moderately full habit. -सूत्रम् = मध्यरेखा q. v. -स्थ a. 1 being or standing in the middle, central. -2 intermediate, intervening. -3 middling. -4 mediating, acting as umpire between two parties. -5 impartial, neutral; सुहृन्मित्रार्युदासीनमध्यस्थ- द्वेष्यबन्धुषु ... समबुद्धिर्विशिष्यते Bg.6.9. -6 indifferent, unconcerned; अन्या मध्यस्थचिन्ता तु विमर्दाभ्यधिकोदया Rām. 2.2.16; मध्यस्थो देशबन्धुषु Pt.4.6; वयमत्र मध्यस्थाः Ś.5. (-स्थः) 1 an umpire, arbitrator, a mediator. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -स्थता 1 intermediate position. -2 middle state or character. -3 mediocrity. -4 arbitration, mediatorship. -5 impartiality; मध्यस्थतां गृहीत्वा भण M.3 'say impartially'; मध्यस्थतानैकतरोपहासः N. -6 indifference. -स्थलम्, -स्थली 1 the middle or centre. -2 the middle space or region. -3 the waist. -4 the hip; कुचौ मरिचसंनिभौ मुरजमध्यमध्यस्थली Udb. -स्थानम् 1 the middle station. -2 the middle space; i. e. air. -3 a neutral region. -स्थित a. central, intermediate. -ता indifference. -स्वरित a. having the स्वरित accent on the middle syllable.
makaraḥ मकरः [मं विषं किरति कॄ-अच् Tv.] 1 A kind of seaanimal, a crocodile, shark; झषाणां मकरश्चास्मि Bg.1.31; मकरवक्त्र Bh.2.4. (Makara is regarded as an emblem of Cupid; cf. comps. below). -2 The sign Capricornus of the zodiac. -3 An array of troops in the form of a Makara; दण्डव्यूहेन तन्मार्गं यायात्तु शकटेन वा । वराहमकराभ्यां वा ... Ms.7.187; Śukra.4.11. -4 An ear-ring in the shape of a Makara. -5 The hands folded in the form of a Makara. -6 N. of one of the nine treasures of Kubera. -7 The tenth arc of thirty degrees in any circle. -Comp. -अङ्कः an epithet of 1 the god of love. -2 the ocean. -अश्वः an epithet of Varuṇa. -आकरः, -आवासः the ocean; प्रविश्य मकरावासं यादोगणनिषेवितम् Mb.7.11.19. -आलयः 1 the ocean. -2 a symbolical expression for the number 'four'. -आसनम् a kind of Āsana in yoga; मकरासनमावक्ष्ये वायूनां स्तम्भकारणात् । पृष्ठे पादद्वयं बद्ध्वा हस्ताभ्यां पृष्ठबन्धनम् ॥ Rudrayāmala. -कुण्डलम् an ear-ring in the shape of a Makara; हेमाङ्गदलसद्- बाहुः स्फुरन्मकरकुण्डलः (रराज) Bhāg.8.15.9. -केतनः, -केतुः, -केतुमत् m. epithets of the god of love. -ध्वजः 1 an epithet of the god of love; संप्राप्तं मकरध्वजेन मथनं त्वत्तो मदर्थे पुरा Ratn.1.3; तत्प्रेमवारि मकरध्वजतापहारि Ch. P. 41. -2 a particular array of troops. -3 the sea. -4 a particular medical preparation. -राशिः f. the sign Capricornus of the zodiac. -वाहनः N. of Varuṇa. -संक्रमणम् the passage of the sun into the sign Capricornus. -सप्तमी the seventh day in the bright half of Māgha.
maṇḍala मण्डल a. [मण्ड्-कलच्] Round, circular; मण्डलाग्रा बृसीश्चैव गृहान्याः पृष्ठतो ययुः Rām.5.18.12. -लः 1 circular array of troops. -2 A dog. -3 A kind of snake. -लम् 1 A circular orb, globe, wheel, ring, circumference, anything round or circular; न्यग्रोधं च सुमण्डलम् Mb.12.169. 12; करालफणमण्डलम् R.12.98; आदर्शमण्डलनिभानि समुल्लसन्ति Ki. 5.41; स्फुरत्प्रभामण्डलया चकाशे Ku.1.24; so रेणुमण्डल, छाया- मण्डल, चापमण्डल, मुखमण्डल, स्तनमण्डल &c. -2 The charmed circle (drawn by a conjurer); मण्डले पन्नगो रुद्धो मन्त्रैरिव महाविषः Rām.2.12.5; जानन्ति तन्त्रयुक्तिं यथास्थितं मण्डलमभि- लिखन्ति Mu.2.1. -3 A disc, especially of the sun or moon; तेनातपत्रामलमण्डलेन R.16.27; अपर्वणि ग्रहकलुषेन्दुमण्डला (विभावरी) M.4.15; दिनमणिमण्डलमण्डन भवखण्डन ए Gīt.1. -4 The halo round the sun or moon. -5 The path or orbit of a heavenly body. -6 A multitude, group, collection, assemblage, troop, company; एवं मिलितेन कुमारमण्डलेन Dk.; अखिलं चारिमण्डलम् R.4.4. -7 Society, association. -8 A great circle. -9 The visible horizon. -1 A district or province. -11 A surrounding district or territory. -12 (In politics) The circle of a king's near and distant neighbours; मण्डलचरितम् Kau. A. 1.1.1; सततसुकृती भूयाद् भूपः प्रसादितमण्डलः Ve.6.44; उपगतो$पि च मण्डलनाभिताम् &c. R.9.15. (According to Kāmandaka quoted by Malli. the circle of a king's near and distant neighbours consists of twelve kings:-- विजिगीषु or the central monarch, the five kings whose dominions are in the front, and the four kings whose dominions are in the rear of his kingdom, the मध्यम or intermediate, and उदासीन or indifferent king. The kings in the front as well as in the rear are designated by particular names; see Malli. ad loc; cf. also Śi. 2.81. and Malli. thereon. According to some the number of such kings is four, six, eight, twelve or even more; see Mit. on Y.1.345. According to others, the circle consists of three kings only:-- the प्राकृतारि or natural enemy, (the sovereign of an adjacent country), the प्राकृतमित्र natural ally, (the sovereign whose dominions are separated by those of another from the country of the central monarch with whom he is allied), and प्राकृतोदासीन or the natural neutral, (the sovereign whose dominions lie beyond those of the natural ally). -13 A particular position of the feet in shooting. -14 A kind of mystical diagram used in invoking a divinity. -15 A division of the Ṛigveda (the whole collection being divided into 1 Maṇḍalas or eight Aṣṭakas). -16 A kind of leprosy with round spots. -17 A kind of perfume. -18 A circular bandage (in surgery). -19 A sugar-ball, sweetmeat. -2 Sexual dalliance; नानाविचित्र- कृतमण्डलमावहन्तीम् Bil. Ch. (उत्तरपीठिका) 38. -21 A circular gait; हय इव मण्डलमाशु यः करोति Rām.6.33.35; Mb.3. 19.8. -22 A play-board (द्यूते शारीस्थापनपट्टम्); Mb.8.74. 15. -ली 1 A circle, orb &c. -2 A group, assemblage; तन्मोचनाय तेनाशु प्रेरिता शिष्यमण्डली Bm.1.648. -3 Walking round, circular motion. -4 Bent grass (दूर्वा). -Comp. -अग्र a. round-pointed. (-ग्रः) a bent or crooked sword, scimitar. (-ग्रम्) a surgeon's circular knife. -अधिपः, -अधीशः, -ईशः, -ईश्वरः 1 the ruler or governor of a district or province. -2 a king, sovereign. -आवृत्तिः f. circular movement; भ्रमिषु कृतपुटान्तर्मण्डला- वृत्तिचक्षुः U.3.19. -आसन a. sitting in a circle. -उत्तमम् a principal kingdom or district. -कविः a bad poet. -कार्मुक a. having a circular bow. -नाभिः the centre of a circle. -नृत्यम् a circular dance, dance in a ring. -न्यासः describing a circle. -पुच्छकः a kind of insect. -बन्धः the formation of a circle or roundness. -भागः an arc. -माडः a pavilion. -वटः the fig-tree forming a circle. -वर्तनम् drawing figures with some powder (Mar. रांगोळी घालणें); संमार्जनोपलेपाभ्यां गृहमण्डलवर्तनैः Bhāg. 7.11.26. -वर्तिन् m. a ruler of a small province; स तुल्यातिशयध्वंसं यथा मण्डलवर्तिनाम् Bhāg.11.3.2. -वर्षः rain over the whole of a king's territory, general rain-fall. -वाटः a garden.
māṭharaḥ माठरः 1 N. of Vyāsa. -2 A Brāhmaṇa. -3 A distiller (शौण्डिक Sk.) -4 One of the attendants on the sun (पारिपार्श्विक); तैरेव फलपत्रैश्च स माठरमतोषयत् Mb.12. 292.8. -5 N. of a Gotra; माठरो$स्मि गोत्रेण.
mitraḥ मित्रः [मिद्यति स्निह्यति, मिद्-त्र, मि-त्र वा] 1 The sun; तद्दिनं दुर्दिनं मन्ये यत्र मित्रागमो हि ना Subhāṣ. -2 N. of an Āditya and usually associated with Varuṇa; cf. Ṛv. 3.59. -3 The deity presiding over the part of rectum (गुदस्थान); गुदं पुंसो विनिर्भिन्नं मित्रो लोकेश आविशत् Bhāg.3.6.2. -त्रम् 1 A friend; तन्मित्रमापदि सुखे च समक्रियं यत् Bh.2.68; Me.17. -2 An ally, the next neighbour of a king; cf. मण्डल. -Comp. -अनुग्रहणम् the act of favouring friends. -अमित्रम् friend and foe; मित्रा$मित्रस्य चार्जनम् Ms.12.79. -आचारः conduct towards a friend. -उदयः 1 sun-rise. -2 the welfare or prosperity of a friend. -उपस्थानम् worship of the sun (part of the morning संध्या). -कर्मन्, -कार्यम्, -कृत्यम् the business of a friend, a friendly act or service; मित्रकृत्यमपदिश्य पार्श्वतः (प्रस्थितम्) R.19.31. -घ्न a. treacherous. -द्रुह्, -द्रोहिन् a. hating a friend, treacherous to a friend, a false or treacherous friend. -भम् the अनुराधा constellation. -भावः friendship. -भेदः breach of friendship. -युद्धम् a contest between friends. -लाभः 1 acquisition of friends, contracting of friendship. -2 N. of the first book of the Hitopadeśa. -वत्सल a. kind to friends, of winning manners. -विन्दः an epithet of Agni. -विषयः friendship. -सप्तमी N. of the seventh day in the bright half of मार्गशीर्ष. -साह a. kind or indulgent to friends; स्वैर्दौहित्रैस्तारितो मित्रसाहः Mb.1.93.28. -हत्या the murder of a friend.
mṛdu मृदु a. [मृद्-कु] (-दु or -द्वी f.; compar. म्रदीयस्; superl. म्रदिष्ठ) 1 Soft, tender, supple, pliant, delicate; मृदु तीक्ष्णतरं यदुच्यते तदिदं मन्मथ दृश्यते त्वयि M.3.2; अथवा मृदु वस्तु हिंसितुं मृदुनैवारभते प्रजान्तकः R.8.45,57; Ś.1.1; 4.11. -2 Soft, mild, gentle; न खरो न च भूयसा मृदुः R. 8.9; बाणं कृपामृदुमनाः प्रतिसंजहार 9.57 'with his mind softened with pity'; तं कृपामृदुरवेक्ष्य भार्गवम् 11.83; Ś.6.1; महर्षिर्मृदुतामगच्छत् R.5.54 'relented'; खातमूल- मनिलो नदीरयैः पातयत्यपि मृदुस्तटद्रुमम् 11.76 'even a soft or gentle breeze' &c. -3 Weak, feeble; सर्वथा मृदुरसौ राजा H.3; ततस्ते मृदवो$भूवन् गन्धर्वाः शरपीडिताः Mb. -4 Moderate. -5 Blunt. -6 Slow. -7 (In astr.) Situated in the upper apsis. -दुः The planet Saturn. -दु n. 1 Softness, gentleness. -2 A kind of iron. -दु ind. Softly, gently, in a sweet manner; स्वनसि मृदु कर्णान्तिकचरः Ś.1.23; वादयते मृदु वेणुम् Gīt.5. -Comp. -अङ्ग a. of delicate limbs. (-ङ्गी) a delicate woman. -अवग्रहः a particular slight separation of the members of a compound. -उच्चम् (in astr.) the upper apsis of a planet's course. -उत्पलम् the soft i. e. blue lotus. -कण्टकः a kind of sheat-fish. -कार्ष्णायसम्, -कृष्णायसम् soft-iron, lead. -कोष्ठ a. having bowels which are relaxed or easily affected by medicines. -गमन a. having a gentle or lounging gait. (-ना) a goose, female swan. -गिर् a. soft-voiced. -चर्मिन्, -छदः, -त्वच्, -त्वचः m. a kind of birch tree. -तीक्ष्णम् the नक्षत्रs कृत्तिका and विशाखा. -पत्रः a rush or reed. -पर्वकः, -पर्वन् m. a reed, cane. -पुष्पः the Śir&imacrṣa tree. -पूर्व a. gentle at first, bland, coaxing. -फलम् N. of a plant (विकङ्कत). -भाषिन् a. sweet-speaking. -युद्ध a. fighting lazily. -रोमन् m., -रोमकः a hare. -वर्गः, -गणः the group of the Nakṣatras अनुराधा, मृगशिरस्, चित्रा and रेवती. -सारा, -रम् Thespesia Populnea (Mar. पारसा पिंपळ). -सूर्य). a. (a day) on which the sun shines mildly; मृदुसूर्याः सुनीहाराः ...... दिवसा भान्ति सांप्रतम् Rām.3.16.12. -स्पर्श a. soft to the touch. -हृदय a. kind.
nir निर् ind. A substitute for निस् before vowels and soft consonants conveying the senses of 'out of', 'away from'. 'without', 'free from', and be frequently expressed by 'less', 'un', used with the noun; see the compounds given below; see निस् and cf. अ also. -Comp. -अंश a. 1 whole, entire. -2 not entitled to any share of the ancestral property. -अक्षः the place of no latitute; i. e. the terrestrial equator (in astronomy). ˚देशः 1 a first meridian, as Laṅkā. -2 a place where the sun is always vertical and the days and nights are equal. -3 the equatorial region. -अक्षर a. Not knowing the letters, illiterate. -अग्नि a. having lost or neglected the consecrated fire; स संन्यासी च योगी च न निरग्निर्न चाक्रियः Bg.6.1. -अग्र (क) a. divisible without remainder. -अङ्कुश a. 'not curbed by a hook', unchecked, uncontrolled; unruly, independent, completely free, unfettered; निरङ्कुश इव द्विपः Bhāg.; कामो निकामनिरङ्कुशः Gīt.7; निरङ्कुशाः कवयः Sk.; Bh.3.15; Mv.3.39; विनयरुचयः सदैव निरङ्कुशाः Mu.3.6. ˚ता self-will, independence. -अघ a. sinless, blameless. -अङ्ग a. 1 having no parts. -2 deprived of expedients or resources. -अजिन a. skinless. -अञ्जन a. 1 without collyrium; निरञ्जने साचिविलोलिकं दृशौ Ki.8.52. -2 unstained, untinged. -3 free from falsehood; तदा विद्वान् पुण्यपापे विधूय निरञ्जनं परमं साम्यमुपैति Munda 3.1.3. -4 simple, artless. (-नः) 1 an epithet of Śiva. -2 N. of the Supreme Being. (-ना) 1 the day of full moon. -2 an epithet of Durgā. -अतिशय a. unsurpassed, matchless, unrivalled; निरतिशयं गरिमाणं तेन जनन्याः स्मरन्ति विद्वांसः Pt.1.3. (-यः) the Supreme Being. -अत्यय a. 1 free from danger, secure, safe; तद्भवान् वृत्तसंपन्नः स्थितः पथि निरत्यये Rām.4.29.12; R.17.53. -2 free from fault, unblamable, faultless, disinterested; Ki.1.12, शक्तिरर्थपतिषु स्वयंग्रहं प्रेम कारयति वा निरत्ययम् 13.61. -3 completely successful. -अधिष्ठान a. 1 supportless. -2 independent. -अध्व a. one who has lost one's way. -अनुक्रोश a. pitiless, merciless, hard-hearted. (-शः) mercilessness, hard-heartedness. -अनुग a. having no followers. -अनुग्रह a. Ungracious, unkind; Bhāg.5. 12.7. -अनुनासिक a. not nasal. -अनुमान a. not bound to conclusions or consequences. -अनुयोज्य a. unblamable, faultless. -अनुरोध a. 1 unfavourable, unfriendly. -2 unkind, unamiable; Māl.1. -अन्तर a. -1 constant, perpetual, uninterrupted, incessant; निरन्त- राधिपटलैः Bv.1.16; निरन्तरास्वन्तरवातवृष्टिषु Ku.5.25. -2 having no intervening or intermediate space, having no interval, close, closely contiguous, in close contact; मूढे निरन्तरपयोधरया मयैव Mk.5.15; हृदयं निरन्तरबृहत्कठिनस्तन- मण्डलावरणमप्यभिदन् Śi.9.66. -3 compact, dense; परितो रुद्धनिरन्तराम्बराः Śi.16.76. -4 coarse, gross. -5 faithful, true (as a friend). -6 not hidden from view. -7 not different, similar, identical. -8 sincere, sympathetic; सुहृदि निरन्तरचित्ते (निवेद्य दुःखं सुखीभवति) Pt.1.341. -9 abounding in, full of; निपात्यमानैर्ददृशे निरन्तरम् Rām.7.7. 54; गुणैश्च निरन्तराणि Mv.4.12. (-रम्) ind. 1 without interruption, constantly, continually, incessantly. -2 without intervening space or interval. -3 closely, tightly, firmly; (परिष्वजस्व) कान्तैरिदं मम निरन्तरमङ्गमङ्गैः Ve.3.27; परिष्वजेते शयने निरन्तरम् Ṛs.2.11. -4 immediately. ˚अभ्यासः constant study, diligent exercise or practice. -अन्तराल a. 1 without an intervening space, close. -2 narrow. -अन्धस् a. foodless, hungry. -अन्वय a. 1 having no progeny, childless. -2 unconnected, unrelated; Ms.8.198. -3 not agreeing with the context (as a word in a sentence). -4 without logical connection or regular sequence, unmethodical. -5 without being seen, out of sight; निरन्वयं भवेत् स्तेयम् Ms.8. 332. -6 without retinue, unaccompanied, see अन्वय. -7 sudden, unexpected; U.7. -8 exterminatory, without leaving any species or trace; प्रागाधारनिरन्वयप्रमथनादुच्छेदमे- वाकरोः... Mv.3.13; (com. नाशो द्विविधः--स्वान्वयविनाशः, निरन्वयविनाशश्चेति......निर्वापणादिना सजातीयज्वालोदयानर्हविनाशस्तु निरन्वयविनाशः ।). -अपत्रप a. 1 shameless, impudent. -2 bold. -अपराध a. guiltless, innocent, faultless, blameless. (-धः) innocence. -अपवर्त a. 1 not turning back. -2 (in arith.) leaving no common divisor, reduced to the lowest terms. -अपवाद a. 1 blameless. -2 not admitting of any exception. -अपाय a. 1 free from harm or evil. -2 free from decay, imperishable. -3 infallible; उपायो निरपायो$यमस्माभिरभिचिन्तितः Rām.1.1.2. -अपेक्ष a. 1 not depending on, irrespective or independent of, having no need of (with loc.); न्यायनिर्णीतसारत्वा- न्निरपेक्षमिवागमे Ki.11.39. -2 disregarding, taking no notice of. -3 free from desire, secure; निरपेक्षो न कर्तव्यो भृत्यैः स्वामी कदाचन H.2.82. -4 careless, negligent, indifferent -5 indifferent to worldly attachments or pursuits; समुपोढेषु कामेषु निरपेक्षः परिव्रजेत् Ms.6.41. -6 disinterested, not expecting any reward from another; दिशि दिशि निरपेक्ष- स्तावकीनं विवृण्वन् Bv.1.5. -7 without purpose. (-क्षा) indifference, disregard. -अपेक्षित a. 1 disregarded. -2 regardless. -अपेक्षिन् a. disregarding, indifferent. -अभिभव a. 1 not subject to humiliation or disgrace. -2 not to be surpassed, unrivalled. -अभिमान a. 1 free from self-conceit, devoid of pride or egotism. -2 void of self-respect. -3 unconscious. -अभिलाष a. not caring for, indifferent to; स्वसुखनिरभिलाषः खिद्यसे लोकहेतोः Ś.5.7. -अभिसंधानम् absence of design. -अभ्र a. cloudless. -अमर्ष a. 1 void of anger, patient. -2 apathetic. -अम्बर a. naked. -अम्बु a. 1 abstaining from water. -2 waterless, destitute of water. -अर्गल a. without a bolt, unbarred, unobstructed, unrestrained, unimpeded, completely free; M.5; मरणसमये त्यक्त्वा शङ्कां प्रलापनिरर्गलम् Māl.5.26. (-लम्) ind. freely. -अर्थ a. 1 void of wealth, poor, indigent; स्त्रियः कृतार्थाः पुरुषं निरर्थं निष्पीडितालक्तकवत्त्यजन्ति Pt.1.194. -2 meaningless, unmeaning (as a word or sentence). -3 non-sensical. -4 vain, useless, purposeless. (-र्थः) 1 loss, detriment. -2 nonsense. -अर्थक a. 1 useless, vain, unprofitable. -2 unmeaning, nonsensical, conveying no reasonable meaning; इत्थं जन्म निरर्थकं क्षितितले$रण्ये यथा मालती S. D. -3 (a consonant) not followed by a vowel. (-कम्) an expletive; निरर्थकं तु हीत्यादि पूरणैकप्रयोजनम् Chandr.2.6. -अलंकृतिः (in Rhet.) want of ornament, simplicity. -अवकाश a. 1 without free space. -2 without leisure. -अवग्रह a. 1 'free from restraint', unrestrained, unchecked, uncontrolled, irresistible. -2 free, independent. -3 self-willed, head-strong. (-हम्) ind. 1 uninterruptedly. -2 intensely, strongly. -अवद्य a. 1 blameless, faultless, unblameable, unobjectionable; हृद्य- निरवद्यरूपो भूपो बभूव Dk.1. -2 an epithet of the Supreme Being (having no passions). -अवधि a. having no end, unlimited; कथं तूष्णीं सह्यो निरवधिरयं त्वप्रतिविधः U. 3.44;6.3; Māl.1.6. -2 continuous; महानाधिव्याधि- र्निरवधिरिदानीं प्रसरतु Māl.4.3. -अवयव a. 1 without parts. -2 indivisible. -3 without limbs. -अवलम्ब a. 1 unsupported, without support; Ś.6. -2 not affording support. -3 not depending or relying on. -अवशेष a. whole, complete, entire, (निरवशेषेण ind. completely, entirely, fully, totally). -अवसाद a. cheerful; Gīt. -अव्यय a. eternal, immutable. -अशन a. abstaining from food. (-नम्) fasting. -अश्रि a. even; Kau. A.2.11. -अष्ट a. Ved. driven away, scattered. (-ष्टः) a horse twentyfour years old. -अस्त्र a. weaponless, unarmed. -अस्थि a. boneless. -अहंकार, -अहंकृति a. free from egotism or pride, humble, lowly; Bg.12.13. -अहंकृत a. 1 having no egotism or self-consciousness. -2 without individuality. -3 unselfish. -अहम् a. free from egotism or self-conceit; ह्यनामरूपं निरहं प्रपद्ये Bhāg. 5.19.4. -आकाङ्क्ष a. 1 wishing nothing, free from desire. -2 wanting nothing to fill up or complete (as the sense of a word or sentence). -आकार a. 1 devoid of form, formless, without form. -2 ugly, deformed. -3 disguised. -4 unassuming, modest. (-रः) 1 the universal spirit, Almighty. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -3 of Viṣṇu. ˚ज्ञानवादः the doctrine that the perception of the outer world does not arise from images impressed on the mind; Sarva. S. -आकृति a. 1 formless, shapeless. -2 deformed. (-तिः) 1 a religious student who has not duly gone through a course of study, or who has not properly read the Vedas. -2 especially, a Brāhmaṇa who has neglected the duties of his caste by not going through a regular course of study; a fool; ग्रामधान्यं यथा शून्यं यथा कूपश्च निर्जलः । यथा हुतमनग्नौ च तथैव स्यान्निराकृतौ ॥ Mb.12.36.48. -3 one who neglects the five great religious duties or yajñas; Ms.3.154. -आकाश a. leaving no free space, completely filled or occupied, -आकुल a. 1 unconfused, unperplexed, unbewildered; Ki.11.38. -2 steady, calm; सुपात्रनिक्षेपनिरा- कुलात्मना (प्रजासृजा) Śi.1.28. -3 clear. -4 perspicuous; अलिकुलसङ्कुलकुसुमसमूहनिराकुलबकुलकलापे Gīt.1. (-लम्) 1 calmness serenity. -2 perspicuity, clearness. -आक्रन्द a. not crying or complaining. (-दः) a place where no sound can be heard. -आक्रोश a. unaccused, unreviled. -आगम a. not founded on revelation or scripture, not derived from the Vedas. -आगस् a. faultless, innocent, sinless; कथमेकपदे निरागसं जनमाभाष्यमिमं न मन्यसे R.8.48. -आचार a. without approved customs or usages, lawless, barbarian. -आडम्बर a. 1 without drums. -2 without show, unostentatious. -आतङ्क a. 1 free from fear; R.1.63; निरातङ्को रङ्को विहरति चिरं कोटिकनकैः Śaṅkara (देव्यपराधक्षमापनस्तोत्रम् 6). -2 without ailment, comfortable, healthy. -3 not causing pain. -4 unchecked, unhampered; निरातङ्कः पङ्केष्विव पिशितपिण्डेषु विलसन् Māl. 5.34. (-कः) an epithet of Śiva. -आतप a. sheltered from heat, shady, not penetrated by the sun's rays. (-पा) the night. -आदर a. disrespectful. -आदान a. 1 taking or receiving nothing; Mb.3. -2 an epithet of Buddha. -आधार a. 1 without a receptacle. -2 without support, supportless (fig. also); निराधारो हा रोदिमि कथय केषामिह पुरः G. L.4.39. -आधि a. secure, free from anxiety. -आनन्द a. cheerless, sad, sorrowful. -आन्त्र a. 1 disembowelled. -2 having the entrails hanging out. -आपद् a. free from misfortune or calamity. (-f.) prosperity. -आबाध a. 1 unvexed, unmolested, undisturbed, free from disturbance. -2 unobstructed. -3 not molesting or disturbing. -4 (in law) frivolously vexatious (as a suit or cause of complaint); e. g. अस्मद्- गृहप्रदीपप्रकाशेनायं स्वगृहे व्यवहरति Mitā. -आमय a. 1 free from disease or illness, sound, healthy, hale. -2 untainted, pure. -3 guileless. -4 free from defects or blemishes. -5 full, complete. -6 infallible. -7 not liable to failure or miscarriage. (-यः, यम्) freedom from disease or illness, health, well-being, welfare, happiness; कुरूणां पाण्डवानां च प्रतिपत्स्व निरामयम् Mb.5.78.8. (-यः) 1 a wild goat. -2 a hog or boar. -आमिष a. 1 fleshless; निरुपमरसप्रीत्या खादन्नरास्थि निरामिषम् Bh. -2 having no sensual desires or covetousness; Ms.6.49. -3 receiving no wages or remuneration. -आय a. yielding no income or revenue, profitless. -यः an idler living from hand to mouth. -आयत a. 1 full-stretched or extended; निरायतपूर्वकायाः Ś.1.8. -2 contracted, compact. -आय- -तत्वम् shortness, compactness; निरायतत्वादुदरेण ताम्यता Ki.8.17. -आयति a. one whose end is at hand; नियता लघुता निरायतेः Ki.2.14. -आयास a. not fatiguing, easy. -आयुध a. unarmed, weaponless. -आरम्भ a. abstaining from all work (in good sense); Mb.3.82.11. -आलम्ब a. 1 having no prop or support (fig. also); ऊर्ध्वबाहुं निरालम्बं तं राजा प्रत्यभाषत Rām.7.89.1; निरालम्बो लोकः कुलमयशसा नः परिवृतम् Mv.4.53. -2 not depending on another, independent. -3 self-supported, friendless, alone; निरालम्बो लम्बोदरजननि कं यामि शरणम् Jag. (-म्बा) spikenard. (-म्बम्) Brahman. -आलोक a. 1 not looking about or seeing. -2 deprived of sight. -3 deprived of light, dark; निरालोकं लोकम् Māl.5.3; Bhāg.8.24.35. -5 invisible. (-कः) an epithet of Śiva. -आवर्ण a. manifest, evident. -आश a. 1 devoid of hope, despairing or despondent of; मनो बभूवेन्दुमतीनिराशम् R.6.2. -2 depriving (one) of all hope. -आशक, -आशिन् a. hopeless; अद्य दुर्योधनो राज्याज्जीविताच्च निराशकः (भविष्यति) Mb.8.74.13. -आशङ्क a. fearless. -आशा hopelessness, despair. -आशिस् a. 1 without a boon or blessing, without virtues; आश्रमा विहिताः सर्वे वर्जयित्वा निराशिषम् Mb.12.63.13. -2 without any desire, wish or hope, indifferent; निराशीर्यतचित्तात्मा Bg.4.21; जगच्छ- रण्यस्य निराशिषः सतः Ku.5.76. -आश्रय a. 1 without a prop or support, supportless, unsupported; न तिष्ठति निराश्रयं लिङ्गम् Sāṅ. K.41. -2 friendless, destitute, alone, without shelter or refuge; निराश्रयाधुना वत्सलता. -3 not deep (as a wound). -आस्वाद a. tasteless, insipid, unsavoury. -आहार a. 'foodless', fasting, abstaining from food. (-रः) fasting; कालो$ग्निः कर्म मृद् वायुर्मनो ज्ञानं तपो जलम् । पश्चात्तापो निराहारः सर्वे$मी शुद्धिहेतवः ॥ Y.3.31. -इङ्ग a. immovable, stationary; यथा दीपो निवातस्थो निरिङ्गो ज्वलते पुनः Mb.12.46.6. -इच्छ a. without wish or desire, indifferent. -इन्द्रिय a. 1 having lost a limb or the use of it. -2 mutilated, maimed. -3 weak, infirm, frail; Kaṭh.1.1.3. -4 barren. -5 without प्रमाण or means of certain knowledge; निरिन्द्रिया ह्यमन्त्राश्च स्त्रियो$नृत- मिति स्थितिः Ms.9.18. -6 destitute of manly vigour, impotent (Ved.). -इन्धन a. destitute of fuel. -ईति a. free from the calamities of the season; निरातङ्का निरीतयः R.1.63; see ईति. -ईश्वर a. godless, atheistic. -˚वाद atheistic doctrine. -ईषम् the body of a plough. -ईह a. 1 desireless, indifferent; निरीहाणामीशस्तृणमिव तिरस्कारविषयः Mu.3.16. -2 inactive; निरीहस्य हतद्विषः R.1.24. (-हा), -निरीहता, -त्वम् 1 inactivity. -2 indifference. -उच्छ्वास a. 1 breathless, without breathing; निरुच्छ्वासं हरिं चक्रुः Rām.7.7.6. -2 narrow, contracted; उपेयुषो वर्त्म निरन्तराभिरसौ निरुच्छ्वासमनीकिनीभिः Śi.3.32. -3 dead; निरुच्छ्वासाः पुनः केचित् पतिता जगतीतले Rām.6.58.13. (-सः) absence of breath; लोका निरुच्छ्वासनिपीडिता भृशम् Bhāg.4. 8.8. -उत्तर a. 1 answerless, without a reply. -2 unable to answer, silenced. -3 having no superior. -उत्थ a. irrecoverable. -उद्धति a. not jolting (a chariot); अभूतल- स्पर्शतया निरुद्धतिः Ś.7.1. (v. l.) -उत्सव a. without festivities; विरतं गेयमृतुर्निरुत्सवः R.8.66. -उत्साह a. 1 inactive, indolent. -2 devoid of energy. (-हः) 1 absence of energy. -2 indolence. -उत्सुक a. 1 indifferent. -2 calm, tranquil. -उदक a. waterless. -उदर a. 1 having no belly or trunk. -2 thin (अतुन्दिल); श्रीमान्निरुदरो महान् Rām.3.16.31. -उद्यम, -उद्योग a. effortless, inactive, lazy, idle. उद्विग्न, -उद्वेग a. free from excitement or perturbation, sedate, calm. -उपक्रम a. 1 without a commencement. -2 incurable. -उपद्रव a. 1 free from calamity or affliction, not visited by danger or adversity, lucky, happy, undisturbed, unmolested, free from hostile attacks. -2 free from national distress or tyranny. -3 causing no affliction. -4 auspicious (as a star). -5 secure, peaceful. -उपधि a. guileless, honest; U.2.2. ˚जीवन a. leading an honest life. (v. l.). -उपपत्ति a. unsuitable. -उपपद a. 1 without any title or designation; अरे आर्यचारुदत्तं निरुपपदेन नाम्नालपसि Mk.1.18/19. -2 unconnected with a subordinate word. -उपप्लव a. 1 free from disturbance, obstacle or calamity, unharmed; निरुपप्लवानि नः कर्माणि संवृत्तानि Ś3. -2 not causing any affliction or misery. -3 an epithet of Śiva. -उपभोग a. without enjoyment; संसरति निरुपभोगं भावैरधिवासितं लिङ्गम् Sāṅ. K.4. -उपम a. peerless, matchless, incomparable. -उपसर्ग free from portents. -उपस्कृत a. not corrupted, pure; of self-denying temperament; शमेन तपसा चैव भक्त्या च निरुपस्कृतः । शुद्धात्मा ब्राह्मणो रात्रौ निदर्शनमपश्यत ॥ Mb.12.271.14. -उपहत a. 1 not injured, unhurt. -2 auspicious, lucky. -उपाख्य a. 1 unreal, false, non-existent (as वन्ध्यापुत्र). -2 immaterial. -3 invisible. (-ख्यम्) the supreme Brahman. -उपाधि (क) a. without qualities, absolute. -उपाय a. 1 without expedients, helpless. -2 unsuccessful. -उपेक्ष a. 1 free from trick or fraud. -2 not neglectful. -उष्मन् a. devoid of heat, cold. -गन्ध a. void of smell, scentless, unfragrant, inodorous; निर्गन्धा इव किंशुकाः. ˚पुष्पी f. the Śālmali tree. -गर्व a. free from pride. -गवाक्ष a. windowless. -गुण a. 1 stringless (as a bow). -2 devoid of all properties. -3 devoid of good qualities, bad, worthless; निर्गुणः शोभते नैव विपुलाड- म्बरो$पि ना Bv.1.115. -4 without attributes; साकारं च निराकारं सगुणं निर्गुणं विभुम् Brahmavai. P. -5 having no epithet. (-णः) the Supreme Spirit. ˚आत्मक a. having no qualities. -गृहः a. houseless, homeless; सुगृही निर्गृही- कृता Pt.39. -गौरव a. 1 without dignity, undignified. -2 devoid of respect. -ग्रन्थ a. 1 freed from all ties or hindrances; आत्मारामाश्च मुनयो निर्ग्रन्था अप्युरुक्रमे । कुर्वन्त्यहैतुकीं भक्तिम् Bhāg.1.7.1. -2 poor, possessionless, beggarly. -3 alone, unassisted. (-न्थः) 1 an idiot, a fool. -2 a gambler. -3 a saint or devotee who has renounced all worldly attachments and wanders about naked and lives as a hermit. -4 A Buddha Muni. -ग्रन्थक a. 1 clever, expert. -2 unaccompanied, alone. -3 deserted, abandoned. -4 fruitless. (-कः 1 a religious mendicant. -2 a naked devotee. -3 a gambler. -ग्रन्थिक a. clever. (-कः) a naked mendicant, a Jaina mendicant of the Digambara class. -घटम् 1 a free market. -2 a crowded market. -घण्टः See निघण्टः. -घृण a. 1 cruel, merciless, pitiless. -2 shameless, immodest. -घृणा cruelty. -घोष a. noiseless, still, calm. -जन a. 1 tenantless, uninhabited, unfrequented, lonely, desolate. -2 without any retinue or attendants; भूयश्चैवाभिरक्षन्तु निर्धनान्निर्जना इव Mb.12.151.7. (-नम्) a desert, solitude, lonely place. -जन्तु a. free from living germs; H. Yoga. -जर a. 1 young, fresh. -2 imperishable, immortal. (-रः) a deity, god; (nom. pl. निर्जराः -निर्जरसः) (-रम्) ambrosia, nectar. -जरायु a. Ved. skinless. -जल a. 1 waterless, desert, destitute of water. -2 not mixed with water. (-लः) a waste, desert. ˚एकादशी N. of the eleventh day in the bright half of Jyeṣṭha. -जाड्य free from coldness. -जिह्वः a frog. -जीव a. 1 lifeless. -2 dead; चिता दहति निर्जीवं चिन्ता दहति जीवितम्. -ज्ञाति a. having no kinsmen, alone. -ज्वर a. feverless, healthy. -दण्डः a Śūdra. -दय a. 1 merciless, cruel, pitiless, unmerciful, unkind. -2 passionate. -3 very close, firm or fast, strong, excessive, violent; मुग्धे विधेहि मयि निर्दयदन्तदंशम् Gīt.1; निर्दयरति- श्रमालसाः R.19.32; निर्दयाश्लेषहेतोः Me.18. -4 unpitied by any; निर्दया निर्नमस्कारास्तन्मनोरनुशासनम् Ms.9.239. -दयम् ind. 1 unmercifully, cruelly. -2 violently, excessively; न प्रहर्तुमलमस्मि निर्दयम् R.11.84. -दश a. more than ten days old; यदा पशुर्निर्दशः स्यादथ मेध्यो भवे- दिति Bhāg.9.7.11. -दशन a. toothless. -दाक्षिण्य a. uncourteous. -दुःख a. 1 free from pain, painless. -2 not causing pain. -दैन्य a. happy, comfortable. -दोष a. 1 faultless, defectless; न निर्दोषं न निर्गुणम् -2 guiltless, innocent. -द्रव्य a. 1 immaterial. -2 without property, poor. -द्रोह a. not hostile, friendly, well-disposed, not malicious. -द्वन्द्व a. 1 indifferent in regard to opposite pairs of feelings (pleasure or pain), neither glad nor sorry; निर्द्वन्द्वो निर्ममो भूत्वा चरिष्यामि मृगैः सह Mb.1.85.16; निर्द्वन्द्वो नित्यसत्त्वस्थो निर्योगक्षेम आत्मवान् Bg.2.45. -2 not dependent upon another, independent. -3 free from jealousy or envy. -4 not double. -5 not contested, undisputed. -6 not acknowledging two principles. -धन a. without property, poor, indigent; शशिनस्तुल्यवंशो$पि निर्धनः परिभूयते Chāṇ.82. (-नः) an old ox. ˚ता, ˚त्वम् poverty, indigence. -धर्म a. unrighteous, impious, unholy. -धूम a. smokeless. -धौत a. cleansed, rendered clean; निर्धौत- दानामलगण्डभित्तिर्वन्यः सरित्तो गज उन्ममज्ज R.5.43. -नमस्कार a. 1 not courteous or civil, not respecting any one. -2 disrespected, despised. -नर a. abandoned by men, deserted. -नाणक a. coinless, penniless; Mk.2. -नाथ a. without a guardian or master. ˚ता 1 want of protection. -2 widowhood. -3 orphanage. -नाभि a. going or reaching beyond the navel; निर्नाभि कौशेयमुपात्तबाणम् Ku.7.7. -नायक a. having no leader or ruler, anarchic. -नाशन, -नाशिन् a. expelling, banishing. -निद्र a. sleepless, wakeful. -निमित्त a. 1 causeless. -2 disinterested. -निमेष a. not twinkling. -बन्धु a. without kindred or relation, friendless. -बल n. powerless, weak, feeble. -बाध a. 1 unobstructed. -2 unfrequented, lonely, solitary. -3 unmolested. (-धः) 1 a part of the marrow. -2 a knob. -बीज a. seedless, impotent. (-जा) a sort of grape (Mar. बेदाणा). -बुद्धि a. stupid, ignorant, foolish. -बुष, -बुस a. unhusked, freed from chaff. -भक्त a. taken without eating (as a medicine). -भय a. 1 fearless, undaunted. -2 free from danger, safe, secure; निर्भयं तु भवेद्यस्य राष्ट्रं बाहुबलाश्रितम् Ms.9.255. -भर a. 1 excessive, vehement, violent, much, strong; त्रपाभरनिर्भर- स्मरशर &c. Gīt.12; तन्व्यास्तिष्ठतु निर्भरप्रणयिता मानो$पि रम्यो- दयः Amaru.47. -2 ardent. -3 fast, close (as embrace); कुचकुम्भनिर्भरपरीरम्भामृतं वाञ्छति Gīt.; परिरभ्य निर्भरम् Gīt.1. -4 sound, deep (as sleep). -5 full of, filled with (at the end of comp.); आनन्द˚, गर्व˚ &c. (-रः) a servant receiving no wages. (-रम्) excess. (-रम् ind.) 1 excessively, exceedingly, intensely. -2 soundly. -भाग्य a. unfortunate, unlucky. -भाज्य a. to be separated; स निर्भाज्यः स्वकादंशात् किंचिद्दत्वोपजीवनम् Ms.9.27. -भृतिः a. without wages, hireless. -भोगः a. not fond of pleasures. -मक्षिक a. 'free from flies', undisturbed, private, lonely. (-कम्) ind. without flies, i. e. lonely, private; कृतं भवतेदानीं निर्मक्षिकम् Ś.2,6. -मज्ज a. fatless, meagre. -मत्सर a. free from envy, unenvious; निर्मत्सरे मत्समे वत्स... वसुन्धराभारमारोप्य Rāmāyaṇachampū. -मत्स्य a. fishless. -मद a. 1 not intoxicated, sober, quiet. -2 not proud, humble. -3 sad, sorry. -4 not in rut (as an elephant). -मनुज, -मनुष्य a. tenantless, uninhabited, deserted by men. -मन्तु a. faultless, innocent. -मन्त्र a. 1 a ceremony, unaccompanied by holy texts. -2 not familiar with holy texts; Mb.12.36.43. -मन्यु, -मन्युक a. free from anger; Mb.5.133.4. -मम a. 1 free from all connections with the outer world, who has renounced all worldly ties; संसारमिव निर्ममः (ततार) R.12.6; Bg.2.71; निराशीर्निर्ममो भूत्वा युध्यस्व विगतज्वरः 3.3. -2 unselfish, disinterested. -3 indifferent to (with loc.); निर्ममे निर्ममो$र्थेषु मथुरां मधुराकृतिः R.15.28; प्राप्तेष्वर्थेषु निर्ममाः Mb. -4 an epithet of Śiva. -मर्याद a. 1 boundless, immeasurable. -2 transgressing the limits of right or propriety, unrestrained, unruly, sinful, criminal; मनुजपशुभिर्निर्मर्यादैर्भवद्भिरुदायुधैः Ve.3.22. -3 confused. -4 insolent, immodest. (-दम्) ind. confusedly, topsyturvy. (-दम्) confusion, disorder. -मल a. 1 free from dirt or impurities, clear, pure, stainless, unsullied (fig. also); नीरान्निर्मलतो जनिः Bv.1.63. -2 resplendent, bright; Bh.1.56. -3 sinless, virtuous; निर्मलाः स्वर्गमायान्ति सन्तः सुकृतिनो यथा Ms.8.318. (-लम्) 1 talc. -2 the remainings of an offering made to a deity. ˚उपलः a crystal. -मशक a. free from gnats. -मांस a. fleshless; स्वल्प- स्नायुवसावशेषमलिनं निर्मांसमप्यस्थिकम् Bh.2.3. -मान a. 1 without self-confidence. -2 free from pride. -मानुष a. uninhabited, desolate. -मार्ग a. roadless, pathless. -मिथ्य a. not false, true; H. Yoga. -मुटः 1 a tree bearing large blossoms. -2 the sun. -3 a rogue. (-टम्) a large free market or fair. -मूल a. 1 rootless (as a tree). -2 baseless, unfounded (statement, charge &c.). -3 eradicated. -मेघ a. cloudless. -मेध a. without understanding, stupid, foolish, dull. -मोह a. free from illusion. (-हः) an epithet of Śiva. -यत्न a. inactive, lazy, dull. -यन्त्रण a. 1 unrestrained, unobstructed, uncontrolled, unrestricted. -2 unruly, self-willed, independent. (-णम्) 1 squeezing out. -2 absence of restraint, independence. -यशस्क a. without fame, discreditable, inglorious. -युक्त a. 1 constructed, built. -2 directed. -3 (in music) limited to metre and measure. -युक्ति f. 1 disunion. -2 absence of connection or government. -3 unfitness, impropriety. -युक्तिक a. 1 disjoined, unconnected. -2 illogical, unmeaning. -3 unfit, improper. -यूथ a. separated from the herd, strayed from the flock (as an elephant). -यूष = निर्यास. -योगक्षेम a. free from care (about acquisition); Bg.2. 45. -रक्त a. (-नीरक्त) colourless, faded. -रज, -रजस्क a. (-नीरज, नीरजस्क) 1 free from dust. -2 devoid of passion or darkness. (-जः) an epithet of Śiva. -रजस् (नरिजस्) a. see नीरज. (-f.) a woman not menstruating. ˚तमसा absence of passion or darkness. -रत (नीरत) a. not attached to, indifferent. -रन्ध्र a. (नीरन्ध्र) 1 without holes or interstices, very close or contiguous, thickly situated; नीरन्ध्रनीरनिचुलानि सरित्तटानि U.2.23. -2 thick, dense. -3 coarse, gross. -रव a. (-नीरव) not making any noise, noiseless; गतिविभ्रमसाद- नीरवा (रसना) R.8.58. -रस a. (नीरस) 1 tasteless, unsavoury, flavourless. -2 (fig.) insipid, without any poetic charm; नीरसानां पद्मानाम् S. D.1. -3 sapless, without juice, withered or dried up; Ś. Til.9. -4 vain, useless, fruitless; अलब्धफलनीरसान् मम विधाय तस्मिन् जने V.2.11. -5 disagreeable. -6 cruel, merciless. (-सः) the pomegranate. -रसन a. (नीरसन) having no girdle (रसना); Ki.5.11. -रुच् a. (नीरुच्) without lustre, faded, dim; परिमलरुचिराभिर्न्यक्कृतास्तु प्रभाते युवतिभिरुप- भोगान्नीरुचः पुष्पमालाः Śi.11.27. -रुज्, -रुज a. (नीरुज्, नीरुज) free from sickness, healthy, sound; नीरुजस्य किमौषधैः H.1. -रूप a. (नीरूप) formless, shapeless. (-पः) 1 air, wind. -2 a god. (-पम्) ether. -रोग a. (नीरोग) free from sickness or disease, healthy, sound; यथा नेच्छति नीरोगः कदाचित् सुचिकित्सकम् Pt.1.118. -लक्षण a. 1 having no auspicious marks, ill-featured. -2 undistinguished. -3 unimportant, insignificant. -4 unspotted. -5 having a white back. -लक्ष्य a. invisible. -लज्ज a. shameless, impudent. -लाञ्छनम् the marking of domestic animals (by perforating the nose &c.). -लिङ्ग a. having no distinguishing or characteristic marks. -लिप्त a. 1 unanointed. -2 undefiled, unsullied. -3 indifferent to. (-प्तः) 1 N. of Kṛiṣṇa. -2 a sage. -लून a. cut through or off. -लेप a. 1 unsmeared, unanointed; निर्लेपं काञ्चनं भाण्डमद्भिरेव विशुध्यति Ms.5.112. -2 stainless, sinless. (-पः) a sage. -लोभ a. free from desire or avarice, unavaricious. -लोमन् a. devoid of hair, hairless. -वंश a. without posterity, childless. -वचन a. 1 not speaking, silent. -2 unobjectionable, blameless; (for other senses see the word separately). -नम् ind. silently; माल्येन तां निर्वचनं जघान Ku.7.19. -वण, -वन a. 1 being out of a wood. -2 free from woods. -3 bare, open. -वत्सल a. not loving or fondling (esp. children); निर्वत्सले सुतशतस्य विपत्तिमेतां त्वं नानुचिन्तयसि Ve.5.3. -वर = निर्दरम् q. v. -वसु a. destitute of wealth, poor. -वाच्य a. 1 not fit to be said. -2 blameless, unobjectionable; सखीषु निर्वाच्य- मधार्ष्ट्यदूषितं प्रियाङ्गसंश्लेषमवाप मानिनी Ki.8.48. -वात a. free or sheltered from wind, calm, still; हिमनिष्यन्दिनी प्रातर्निर्वातेव वनस्थली R.15.66. (-तः) a place sheltered from or not exposed to wind; निर्वाते व्यजनम् H.2.124. -वानर a. free from monkeys. -वायस a. free from crows. -वार्य a. 1 irresistible. -2 acting fearlessly or boldly. -विकल्प, -विकल्पक a. 1 not admitting an alternative. -2 being without determination or resolution. -3 not capable of mutual relation. -4 conditioned. -5 undeliberative. -6 recognizing no such distinction as that of subject and object, or of the knower and the known; as applied to समाधि or contemplation, it is 'an exclusive concentration upon the one entity without distinct and separate consciousness of the knower, the known, and the knowing, and without even self-consciousness'; निर्विकल्पकः ज्ञातृज्ञानादिविकल्पभेद- लयापेक्षः; नो चेत् चेतः प्रविश सहसा निर्विकल्पे समाधौ Bh.3.61; आत्मारामा विहितरतयो निर्विकल्पे समाधौ Ve.1.23. -7 (in phil.) not arising from the relation of the qualifier and the qualified, (विशेषणविशेष्यसंबन्धानवगाहि प्रत्यक्षं ज्ञानम्) said of knowledge not derived from the senses, as घटत्व. (-ल्पम्) ind. without hesitation or wavering. -विकार a. 1 unchanged, unchangeable, immutable. -2 not disposed; तौ स्थास्यतस्ते नृपती निदेशे परस्परावग्रहनिर्विकारौ M.5.14. -3 disinterested; तरुविटपलतानां बान्धवो निर्विकारः Ṛs.2.28. (-रः) the Supreme deity. -विकास a. unblown. -विघ्न a. uninterrupted, unobstructed, free from impediments; निर्विघ्नं कुरु मे देव सर्वकार्येषु सर्वदा. (-घ्नम्) absence of impediment. -विचार a. not reflecting, thoughtless, inconsiderate; रे रे स्वैरिणि निर्विचारकविते मास्मत्प्रकाशीभव Chandr. 1.2. (-रम्) ind. thoughtlessly, unhesitatingly. -वि- चिकित्स a. free from doubt or reflection. -विचेष्ट a. motionless, insensible; यो हि दिष्टमुपासीनो निर्विचेष्टः सुखं शयेत् Mb.3.32.14. -वितर्क a. unreflecting. -विनोद a. without amusement, void of pastime, diversion or solace; शङ्के रात्रौ गुरुतरशुचं निर्विनोदां सखीं ते Me.9. -विन्ध्या N. of a river in the Vindhya hills; निर्विन्ध्यायाः पथि भव रसाभ्यन्तरः सन्निपत्य Me.28. -विमर्श a. 1 void of reflection, thoughtless. -2 not having विमर्श Sandhi. -विवर a. 1 having no opening or cavity. 2 without interstices or interval, close, compact; घटते हि संहततया जनितामिदमेव निर्विवरतां दधतोः Śi.9.44. -विवाद a. 1 not contending or disagreeing. -2 undisputed, not contradicted or disputed, universally acknowledged. -विवेक a. indiscreet, void of judgment, wanting in discrimination, foolish. -विशङ्क a. fearless, undaunted, confident; Ms.7.176; यस्मिन्कृत्यं समावेश्य निर्विशङ्केन चेतसा । आस्यते सेवकः स स्यात् कलत्रमिव चापरम् ॥ Pt.1.85. -विशेष a. showing or making no difference, indiscriminating, without distinction; निर्विशेषा वयं त्वयि Mb.; निर्विशेषो विशेषः Bh.3.5. 'a difference without distinction'. -2 having no difference, same, like, not differing from (oft. in comp.); निर्विशेषाकृति 'having the same form'; प्रवातनीलो- त्पलनिर्विशेषम् Ku.1.46; स निर्विशेषप्रतिपत्तिरासीत् R.14.22. -3 indiscriminate, promiscuous. (-षः) absence of difference. (निर्विशेषम् and निर्विशेषेण are used adverbially in the sense of 'without difference', 'equally', indiscriminately'; क्रुद्धेन विप्रमुक्तो$यं निर्विशेषं प्रियाप्रिये Rām.7.22.41. स्वगृहनिर्विशेषमत्र स्थीयताम् H.1; R.5.6.). -विशेषण a. without attributes. -विष a. poisonless (as a snake); निर्विषा डुण्डुभाः स्मृताः. -विषङ्ग a. not attached, indifferent. -विषय a. 1 expelled or driven away from one's home, residence or proper place; मनोनिर्विषयार्थकामया Ku.5.38; R.9.32; also -निर्विषयीकृत; वने प्राक्कलनं तीर्थं ये ते निर्विषयी- कृताः Rām.2.14.4. -2 having no scope or sphere of action; किंच एवं काव्यं प्रविरलविषयं निर्विषयं वा स्यात् S. D.1. -3 not attached to sensual objects (as mind). -विषाण a. destitute of horns. -विहार a. having no pleasure. -वीज, -बीज a. 1 seedless. -2 impotent. -3 causeless. -वीर a. 1 deprived of heroes; निर्वीरमुर्वीतलम् P. R.1.31. -2 cowardly. -वीरा a woman whose husband and children are dead. -वीर्य a. powerless, feeble, unmanly, impotent; निर्वीर्यं गुरुशापभाषितवशात् किं मे तवेवायुधम् Ve.3.34. -वीरुध, -वृक्ष a. treeless. -वृत्ति f. accomplishment, achievement; अत आसां निर्वृत्त्या अपवर्गः स्यात् । आतण्डुलनिर्वृत्तेः आ च पिष्टनिर्वृत्तेरभ्यास इति ॥ ŚB. on MS.11.1.27. -a. having no occupation, destitute. See निर्वृति. -वृष a. deprived of bulls. -वेग a. not moving, quiet, calm. -वेतन a honorary, unsalaried. -वेद a. not acknowledging the Vedas, an atheist, infidel. -वेष्टनम् a. a weaver's shuttle. -वैर a. free from enmity, amicable, peaceable. (-रम्) absence of enmity. -वैलक्ष्य a. shameless. -व्यञ्जन a. 1 straight-forward. -2 without condiment. (-नम् ind.) plainly, in a straight-forward or honest manner. -व्यथ, -न a. 1 free from pain. -2 quiet, calm. -व्यथनम् a hole; छिद्रं निर्व्यथनम् Ak. -व्यपेक्ष a. indifferent to, regardless of; मृग्यश्च दर्भाङ्कुरनिर्व्यपेक्षास्तवागतिज्ञं समबोधयन् माम् R.13.25;14.39. -व्यलीक a. 1 not hurting or offending. -2 without pain. -3 pleased, doing anything willingly. -4 sincere, genuine, undissembling. -व्यवधान a. (ground) uncovered, bare. -व्यवश्थ a. moving hither and thither. -व्यसन a. free from bad inclination. -व्याकुल a. calm. -व्याघ्र a. not haunted or infested by tigers. -व्याज a. 1 candid, upright, honest, plain. -2 without fraud, true, genuine. -3 got by heroism or daring deeds (not by fraud or cowardly conduct); अशस्त्रपूतनिर्व्याजम् (महामांसम्) Māl.5.12. (v. l.) -4 not hypocritical; धर्मस्य निर्व्याजता (विभूषणम्) Bh.2.82. (-जम् ind.) plainly, honestly, candidly; निर्व्याजमालिङ्गितः Amaru.85. -व्याजीकृत a. made plain, freed from deceit. -व्यापार a. 1 without employment or business, free from occupation; तं दधन्मैथिलीकण्ठनिर्व्यापारेण बाहुना R.15.56. -2 motionless; U.6. -व्यावृत्ति a. not involving any return (to worldly existence). -व्रण a. 1 unhurt, without wounds. -2 without rents. -व्रत a. not observing vows. -व्रीड a. shameless, impudent. -हिमम् cessation of winter. -हेति a. weaponless. -हेतु a. causeless, having no cause or reason. -ह्रीक a. 1 shameless, impudent. -2 bold, daring.
pakṣaḥ पक्षः [पक्ष्-अच्] 1 A wing, pinion; अद्यापि पक्षावपि नोद्भिद्येते K.347; so उद्भिन्नपक्षः fledged; पक्षच्छेदोद्यतं शक्रम् R.4.4;3.42. -2 The feather or feathers on each side of an arrow; अनुसंततिपातिनः पटुत्वं दधतः शुद्धिभृतो गृहीतपक्षाः (शराः) Śi.2.11. -3 The flank or side of a man or animal, the shoulder; स्तम्बेरमा उभयपक्षविनीतनिद्राः R.5.72. -4 The side of anything, a flank; वितत्य पक्षद्वयमायतम् Ki.14.31. -5 The wing or flank of an army; सुपर्णपक्षानिलनुन्नपक्षम् (राक्षसराजसैन्यम्) Rām.7.6. 69. -6 The half of anything. -7 The half of a lunar month, a fortnight (comprising 15 days; there are two such pakṣas, शुक्लपक्षः the bright or light half, and कृष्ण-तमिस्र-पक्षः the dark half); तमिस्रपक्षे$पि सह प्रियाभि- र्ज्योत्स्नावतो निर्विशति प्रदोषान् R.6.34; Ms.1.66; Y.3.5; सीमा वृद्धिं समायाति शुक्लपक्ष इवोडुराट् Pt.1.92; Mb.3.26.5. -8 (a) A party in general, faction, side; प्रमुदितवरपक्षम् R.6.86; Śi.2.117; तुल्यो मित्रारिपक्षयोः Bg.14.25; R.6. 53;18.17. (b) A family, race; रूपान्वितां पक्षवतीं मनोज्ञां भार्यामयत्नोपगतां लभेत् सः Mb.13.57.4; किं क्रन्दसि दुराक्रन्द स्वपक्षक्षयकारक Pt.4.29. -9 One belonging to any party, a follower, partisan; विष्णुपक्षैः प्रतिच्छन्नैर्न भिद्येतास्य धीर्यथा Bhāg.7.5.7; शत्रुपक्षो भवान् H.1. -1 A class, multitude, host, any number of adherents; as अरि˚, मित्र˚. -11 One side of an argument, an alternative, one of two cases; पक्षे 'in the other case, on the other hand' पूर्व एवाभवत् पक्षस्तस्मिन्नाभवदुत्तरः R.4.1;14.34. cf. पूर्वपक्ष and उत्तरपक्ष. -12 A case or supposition in general; as in पक्षान्तरे. -13 A point under discussion, a thesis, an argument to be maintained. -14 The subject of a syllogism or conclusion (the minor term); संदिग्धसाध्य- वान् पक्षः T. S., दधतः शुद्धिभृतो गृहीतपक्षाः Śi.2.11 (where it means 'a feather' also). -15 A symbolical expression for the number 'two'. -16 A bird. -17 A state, condition. -18 The body. -19 A limb of the body. -2 A royal elephant. -21 An army; Mb.2. 16.7. -22 A wall. -23 Opposition. -24 Rejoinder, reply. -25 A mass, quantity (when in composition with words meaning 'hair'); केशपक्षः; cf. हस्त. -26 Place, position. -27 A view, notion, idea. -28 The side of an equation in a primary division. -29 The ash-pit of a fire-place. -3 Proximity, neighbourhood. -31 A bracket. -32 Purity, perfection. -33 A house. -34 The sun (according to Sāyaṇa); सा पक्ष्या नव्यमायु- र्दधाना Rv.3.53.16. -Comp. -अध्यायः logic, casuistry. -अन्तः 1 the 15th day of either half month, i. e. the day of new or full moon. -2 the end of the wings of an army. -अन्तरम् 1 another side. -2 a different side or view of an argument. -3 another supposition. -अवसरः = पक्षान्त q. v. -आघातः 1 palsy or paralysis of one side, hemiplegia. -2 refutation of an argument. -आभासः 1 a fallacious argument. -2 a false plaint. -आहारः eating food only once in a fortnight; सुपुत्रदारो हि मुनिः पक्षाहारो बभूव ह Mb.3.26.5. -उद्ग्राहिन् a. showing partiality, adopting a side. -गम a. flying. -ग्रहणम् choosing a party; taking the side of. -घातः = -पक्षाघातः see above. -घ्न a. (a house) wanting a side. -चरः 1 an elephant strayed from the herd. -2 the moon. -3 an attendant. -छिद् m. an epithet of Indra (clipper of the wings of mountains); क्रुद्धे$पि पक्षच्छिदि वृत्रशत्रौ Ku.1.2. -जः the moon. -द्वयम् 1 both sides of an argument. -2 'a couple of fortnights', i. e. a month. -द्वारम् a sidedoor, private entrance. -धर a. 1 winged. -2 adhering to the party of one, siding with any one. (-रः) 1 a bird. -2 the moon. -3 a partisan. -4 an elephant strayed from the herd. -नाडी a quill. -निक्षेपः the placing on the side of, counting among. -पातः 1 siding with any one; यद् दुर्योधनपक्षपातसदृशं कर्म Ve.3.5. -2 liking, desire, love, affection (for a thing); भवन्ति भव्येषु हि पक्षपाताः Ki.3.12; U.5.17; रिपुपक्षे बद्धः पक्षपातः Mu.1. -3 attachment to a party, partisanship, partiality; पक्षपातमत्र देवी मन्यते M.1; सत्यं जना वच्मि न पक्षपातात् Bh.1.47. -4 falling of wings, the moulting of birds. -5 a partisan. -पातिता, -त्वम् 1 partisanship, adherence to a side or party. -2 friendship, fellowship. -3 movement of the wings; न परं पथि पक्षपातिता$नवलम्बे किमु मादृशे$पि सा N.2.52. -पातिन् a. or subst. 1 siding with, adhering to, a party, attached or partial (to a particular cause); पक्षपातिनो देवा अपि पाण्डवानाम् Ve.3. -2 sympathizing; Ve.3. -3 a follower, partisan, friend; यः सुरपक्षपाती V.1. -पालिः a private door. -पुटः a wing. -पोषण a. factious, promoting quarrels. -प्राप्तानुवादः a case of the description of a thing which admits of two alternatives (cf. Daṇḍaviveka G. O. S.52, p.21.). -बिन्दुः a heron. -भागः 1 the side or flank. -2 especially, the flank of an elephant. -भुक्ति f. the course traversed by the sun in a fortnight. -भेदः a. distinction between two sides of an argument. -रात्रिः a kind of play or sport. -वञ्चितकम् a particular position of hands in dancing. -वधः paralysis of one side. -मूलम् the root of a wing; उल्लास- पल्लवितकोमलपक्षमूलाः (चकोराः) Bv.2.99. -रचना forming a party or faction. -वादः 1 an exparte statement. -2 stating a case, expression of opinion. -वाहनः a bird. -व्यापिन् a. 1 embracing the whole of an argument. -2 pervading the minor term. -हत a. paralysed on one side; दृष्ट्वा कुणीन् पक्षहतान् Mb.12.18.39. -हरः 1 a bird. -2 a recreant, traitor. -होमः 1 a sacrificial rite lasting for a fortnight. -2 a rite to be performed every fortnight.
pañcan पञ्चन् num. a. (Always pl., nom. and acc. पञ्च) Five. (As the first member of comp. पञ्चन् drops its final न्). [cf. Gr. pente.] -Comp. -अंशः the fifth part, a fifth. -अग्निः 1 an aggregate of five sacred fires; i. e. (अन्वाहार्यपचन or दक्षिण, गार्हपत्य, आहवनीय, सभ्य, and आव- सथ्य). -2 a householder who maintains the five sacred fires; पञ्चाग्नयो धृतव्रताः Māl.1; Ms.3.185. -3 five mystic fires supposed to exist in the body; तेजो ह्यग्निस्तथा क्रोधश्चक्षुरूष्मा तथैव च । अग्निर्जरयते यच्च पञ्चाग्नेयाः शरीरिणः ॥ Mb.12.184.21. -4 one who is acquainted with the doctrine of these fires. ˚साधनम् four fires on four sides and the sun above the head. This is a form of penance. -अङ्ग a. five-membered, having five parts or divisions as in पञ्चाङ्गः प्रणामः (i. e. बाहुभ्यां चैव जानुभ्यां शिरसा वक्षसा दृशा); कृतपञ्चाङ्गविनिर्णयो नयः Ki.2.12. (see Malli. and Kāmandaka quoted by him); पञ्चाङ्गमभिनयमुपदिश्य M.1; चित्ताक्षिभ्रूहस्तपादैरङ्गैश्चेष्टादिसाम्यतः । पात्राद्यवस्थाकरणं पञ्चाङ्गे$भिनयो मतः ॥ (-ङ्गः) 1 a tortoise or turtle. -2 a kind of horse with five spots in different parts of his body. (-ङ्गी) a bit for horses. -(ङ्गम्) 1 collection or aggregate of five parts. -2 five modes of devotion (silent prayer, oblations, libations, bathing idols and feeding Brāhmaṇas) -3 the five parts of a tree; त्वक्पत्रकुसुमं मूलफलमेकस्य शाखिनः । एकत्र मिलितं चैतत् पञ्चाङ्ग- मिति संज्ञितम् ॥ -4 a calendar or almanac, so called because it treats of five things:-- (तिथिर्वारश्च नक्षत्रं योगः करणमेव च); चतुरङ्गबलो राजा जगतीं वशमानयेत् । अहं पञ्चा- ङ्गबलवानाकाशं वशमानये ॥ Shbhāṣ. ˚गुप्तः a turtle. ˚पत्रम् a calendar. ˚विनिर्णयः the five rules are as follows; सहायाः साधनोपाया विभागो देशकालयोः । विनिपातप्रतीकारः सिद्धिः पञ्चाङ्ग- मिष्यते ॥ Kāmandak; cf. Ki.2.12. ˚शुद्धिः f. the propitiousness or favourable state of five important points; i. e. तिथि, वार, नक्षत्र, योग and करण (in astrology). -अङ्गिक a. five-membered. -अङ्गुल a. (-ला or -ली f.) measuring five fingers. (-लः) the castor-oil plant. -अ(आ)जम् the five products of the goat; cf. पञ्चगव्य. -अतिग a. liberated (मुक्त); सो$पि पञ्चातिगो$भवत् Mb. 12.59.9. -अप्सरस् n. N. of a lake, said to have been created by the sage Mandakarni; cf. R.13.38. -अमरा The five plants i. e. (Mar. भांग, दूर्वा, बेल, निर्गुडी and तुळस. -अमृत a. consisting of 5 ingredients. -(तम्) 1 the aggregate of five drugs; dry ginger, a species of Moonseed (Cocculus cordifolius, Mar. गुळवेल), Asparagus recemosus (Mar. शतावरी), Hypoxis brevifolia (Mar. मुसळी), गोक्षुरक (Mar. गोखरूं). -2 the collection of five sweet things used in worshipping deities; (दुग्धं च शर्करा चैव घृतं दधि तथा मधु). -3 the five elements; Māl.5.2. -अम्लम् the aggregate of five acid plants (the jujube, pomegranate, sorrel, spondias and citron). -अर्चिस् m. the planet Mercury. -अवयव a. five-membered (as a syllogism, the five members being, प्रतिज्ञा, हेतु, उदाहरण, उपनय and निगमन q. v.). -अवस्थः a corpse (so called because it is resolved into the five elements) cf. पञ्चत्व below. -अविकम् the five products of the sheep; cf. पञ्चगव्य. -अशीतिः f. eighty-five. -अहः a period of five days. -आतप a. doing penance with five fires. (i. e. with four fires and the sun); cf. R.13.41. -आत्मक a. consisting of five elements (as body). -आननः, -आस्यः, -मुखः, -वक्त्रः 1 epithets of Śiva. -2 a lion (so called because its mouth is generally wide open; पञ्चम् आननं यस्य), (often used at the end of names of learned men to express great learning or respect; न्याय˚, तर्क˚ &c. e. g. जगन्नाथतर्कपञ्चानन); see पञ्च a. -3 the sign Leo of the zodiac. (-नी) an epithet of Durgā. -आम्नायाः m. (pl.) five Śāstras supposed to have proceeded from the five mouths of Śiva. -आयतनी, -नम् a group of five deities like गणपति, विष्णु, शंकर, देवी and सूर्य. -इन्द्रियम् an aggregate of the five organs (of sense or actions; see इन्द्रियम्). -इषुः, -बाणः, -शरः epithets of the god of love; (so called because he has five arrows; their names are:-- अरविन्दमशोकं च चूतं च नवमल्लिका । नीलोत्पलं च पञ्चैते पञ्चबाणस्य सायकाः ॥ the five arrows are also thus named:-- संमोहनोन्मादनौ च शोषणस्तापनस्तथा । स्तम्भनश्चेति कामस्य पञ्चबाणाः प्रकीर्तिताः ॥). -उपचारः the five articles of worship i. e. (गन्ध, पुष्प, धूप, दीप and नैवेद्य). -उष्मन् m. (pl.) the five digestive fires supposed to be in the body. -कपाल a. prepared or offered in five cups. -कर्ण a. branded in the ear with the number 'five' (as cattle &c.); cf. P.VI.3.115. -कर्मन् n. (in medicine) the five kinds of treatment; i. e. 1 वमन 'giving emetics'; 2 रेचन 'purging'; 3 नस्य 'giving strenutatories'; 4 अनुवासन 'administering an enema which is oily', and 5 निरूह 'administering an enema which is not oily. वमनं रेचनं नस्यं निरूहश्चानुवासनम् । पञ्चकर्मेदमन्यश्च ज्ञेयमुत्क्षेपणादिकम् ॥ -कल्याणकः a horse with white feet and a white mouth. -कषाय a decoction from the fruits of five plants (जम्बु, शाल्मलि, वाट्याल, बकुल and बदर). -कृत्यम् the five actions by which the Supreme Power manifests itself (सृष्टि, स्थिति, संहार, तिरोभाव and अनुग्रह- करण). -कृत्वस् ind. five times. -कृष्णः A kind of game. (-ष्णाः) The five deities of Mahānubhāva sect namely चक्रवर्ती कृष्ण, Datta of Mātāpura, Gundam Raul of ऋद्धिपुर, चांगदेव राऊळ of द्वारावती and चांगदेव राऊळ of प्रतिष्ठान. -कोणः a pentagon. -कोलम् the five spices taken collectively; पिप्पली पिप्पलीमूलं चव्यचित्रकनागरम् । पञ्चकोलं ......... (Mar. पिंपळी, पिंपळमूळ, चवक, चित्रक व सुंठ). -कोषाः m. (pl.) the five vestures or wrappers supposed to invest the soul; they are:-- अन्नमयकोष or the earthly body (स्थूलशरीर); प्राणमयकोष the vesture of the vital airs; मनो- मयकोष the sensorial vesture; विज्ञानमयकोष the cognitional vesture (these three form the लिङ्गशरीर); and आनन्द- मयकोष the last vesture, that of beatitude. कोषैरन्नमयाद्यैः पञ्चभिरात्मा न संवृतो भाति । निजशक्तिसमुप्तन्नैः शैवालप़टलैरिवाम्बु वापीस्थम् ॥ Vivekachūdāmaṇi. -क्रोशी 1 a distance of five Kroṣas. -2 N. of the city, Banares. -खट्वम्, -खट्वी a collection of five beds. -गत a. (in alg.) raised to the fifth power. -गवम् a collection of five cows. -गव्यम् the five products of the cow taken collectively; i. e. milk, curds, clarified butter or ghee, urine, and cowdung (क्षीरं दधि तथा चाज्यं मूत्रं गोमयमेव च). -गु a. bought with five cows. -गुण a. five-fold. (-णाः) the five objects of sense (रूप, रस, गन्ध, स्पर्श and शब्द). (-णी) the earth. -गुप्तः 1 a tortoise (as drawing in its 4 feet and head). -2 the materialistic system of philosophy, the doctrines of the Chārvākas. -घातः (in music) a kind of measure. -चत्वारिंश a. forty-fifth. -चत्वारिंशत् f. forty-five. -चामरम् N. of 2 kinds of metre; प्रमाणिकापदद्वयं वदन्ति पञ्चचामरम् Vṛittaratnākara. -जनः 1 a man, mankind. -2 N. of a demon who had assumed the form of a conch-shell, and was slain by Kṛiṣṇa; तस्मै प्रादाद्वरं पुत्रं मृतं पञ्चजनोदरात् Bhāg.3.3.2. -3 the soul. -4 the five classes of beings; i. e. gods, men, Gandharvas, serpents and pitṛis; यस्मिन् पञ्च पञ्चजना आकाशश्च प्रतिष्ठितः Bṛi. Up.4.4.17. -5 the four primary castes of the Hindus (ब्राह्मण, क्षत्रिय, वैश्य and शूद्र) with the Niṣādas or barbarians as the fifth (pl. in these two senses); (for a full exposition see Sārirabhāṣya on Br. Sūtras 1.4.11-13). (-नी) an assemblage of five persons. -जनीन a. devoted to the five races. (-नः) an actor, a mimic, buffoon, one who is devoted to the pentad viz. singer, musician, dancer, harlot and a jester; गायकवादक- नर्तकदासीभण्डरतः खलु पञ्चजनीनः Bhāsāvritti on P.V.1.9. -ज्ञानः 1 an epithet of Buddha as possessing the five kinds of knowledge. -2 a man familiar with the doctrines of the Pāśupatas. -तक्षम्, -क्षी a collection of five carpenters. -तत्त्वम् 1 the five elements taken collectively; i. e. पृत्थी, अप्, तेजस्, वायु and आकाश. -2 (in the Tantras) the five essentials of the Tāntrikas, also called पञ्चमकार because they all begin with म; i. e. मद्य, मांस, मत्स्य, मुद्रा and मैथुन. -तन्त्रम् N. of a well-known collection in five books containing moral stories and fables by Visnugupta; पञ्चतन्त्रात्तथान्यस्माद् ग्रन्थादाकृष्य लिख्यते H. Pr.9. -तन्मात्रम् the five subtle and primary elements (such as शब्द, रस, स्पर्श and रूप and गन्ध). -तपस् m. an ascetic who in summer practises penance sitting in the middle of four fires with the sun burning right over his head; cf. हविर्भुजामेधवतां चतुर्णां मध्ये ललाटंतपसप्तसप्तिः R.13.41; Ku.5.23; Ms.6.23 and Śi.2.51. also; ग्रीष्मे पञ्चतपा वीरो वर्षास्वासारषाण्मुनिः Bhāg. 4.23.6; Rām.3.6.5. -तय a. five-fold; वृत्तयः पञ्चतय्यः क्लिष्टा अक्लिष्टाः Mbh. (-यः) a pentad. -तिक्तम् the five bitter things:-- निवामृतावृषपटोलनिदिग्धिकाश्च. -त्रिंश a. thirtyfifth. -त्रिंशत्, -त्रिंशतिः f. thirty-five. -दश a. 1 fifteenth. -2 increased by fifteen; as in पञ्चदशं शतम् 'one hundred and fifteen'. -दशन् a. (pl.) fifteen. ˚अहः a period of fifteen days. -दशिन् a. made or consisting of fifteen. -दशी 1 the fifteenth day of a lunar fortnight (the full or new moon day); Y.1.146. -2 N. of a philosophical work (प्रकरणग्रन्थ) by माधवाचार्य (विद्यारण्य). -दीर्घम् the five long parts of the body; the arms, eyes, belly, nose and breast; बाहू नेत्रद्वयं कुक्षिर्द्वे तु नासे तथैव च । स्तनयोरन्तरं चैव पञ्चदीर्घं प्रचक्षते ॥ -देवताः the five deities:-- आदित्यं गणनाथं च देवीं रुद्रं च केशवम् । पञ्चदैवतमित्युक्तं सर्वकर्मसु पूजयेत् ॥ -धारणक a. upheld by the five elements. -नखः 1 any animal with five claws; such as the hare, alligator, tortoise, porcupine, rhinoceros शशकः शल्लकी गोधा खड्गी कूर्मश्च पञ्चमः । पञ्च पञ्चनखा भक्ष्या ये प्रोक्ताः कृतजैर्द्विजैः Bk.6.131; Ms.5.17,18; Y.1.177. -2 an elephant. -3 a turtle. -4 a lion or tiger. -नखी, -नखराज an iguana (Mar. घोरपड); Gīrvāṇa. -नदः 'the country of five rivers, the modern Panjab (the five rivers being शतद्रु, विपाशा, इरावती, चन्द्रभागा and वितस्ता, or the modern names Sutlej, Beas, Ravee, Chenab and Jhelum). -दा (pl.) the people of this country. -नवतिः f. ninety-five. -निम्बम् the five products of निम्ब viz. (the flowers, fruit, leaves, bark and root). -नीराजनम् waving five things before an idol and then falling prostrate before it; (the five things being:-- a lamp, lotus, cloth, mango and betel-leaf). -पञ्चाश a. fiftyfifth. -पञ्चाशत् f. fifty-five. -पदी 1 five steps; पुंसो यमान्तं व्रजतो$पिनिष्ठुरै- रेतैर्धनैः पञ्चपदी न दीयते Pt.2.115. -2 the five strong cases, i. e. the first five inflections -पर्वन् n. (pl.) the five parvans q. v.; they are चतुर्दश्यष्टमी चैव अमावास्या च पूर्णिमा । पर्वाण्येतानि राजेन्द्र रविसंक्रान्तिरेव च ॥ a. five-knotted (an arrow). -पल्लवम् The leaves of the mango, fig, banyan, ficus religiosa (Mar. पिंपळ) and Genus Ficus (Mar. पायरी). There are other variations such as पनस, आम्र, पिप्पल, वट and बकुल. The first group is for the Vedic ritual only. -पात्रम् 1 five vessels taken collectively. -2 a Srāddha in which offerings are made in five vessels. -पाद् a. consisting of five feet, steps, or parts; पञ्चपादं पितरम् Praśna Up.1.11. (-m.) a year (संवत्सर). -पादिका N. of a commentary on शारीरकभाष्य. -पितृ m. (pl.) the five fathers:-- जनकश्चोपनेता च यश्च कन्यां प्रयच्छति । अन्नदाता भयत्राता पञ्चैते पितरः स्मृताः ॥ -पित्तम् the bile of five animals viz. (the boar, goat, buffalo, fish and peacock). -प्रस्थ a. having five elevations (a forest). -प्राणाः m. (pl.) the five life-winds or vital airs: प्राण, अपान, व्यान, उदान, and समान. -प्रासादः a temple of a particular size with four pinnacles and a steeple. -बन्ध a fine equal to the fifth part of anything lost or stolen. -बलाः five medicinal herbs, namely बला, नागबला, महाबला, अति- बला and राजबला. -बाणः, -वाणः, -शरः epithets of the god of love; see पञ्चेषु. -बाहुः N. of Śiva. -बिन्दुप्रसृतम् N. of a particular movement in dancing; Dk.2. -बीजानि the five seeds:--कर्कटी, त्रपुस, दाडिम, पद्मबीज, and वानरीबीज. -भद्र a. 1 having five good qualities. -2 consisting of five good ingredients (as a sauce &c.). -3 having five auspicious marks (as a horse) in the chest, back, face and flanks. -4 vicious. -द्रः a kind of pavilion. -भागिन् m. the five deities of पञ्चमहा- यज्ञ; धर्मकामविहीनस्य चुक्रुधुः पञ्चभागिनः Bhāg.11.23.9. -भुज a. pentagonal. (-जः) 1 a pentagon; cf. पञ्चकोण. -2 N. of Gaṇeśa. -भूतम् the five elements; पृथ्वी, अप्, तेजस्, वायु and आकाश. -भृङ्गाः the five trees, viz. देवदाली (Mar. देवडंगरी), शमी, भङ्गा (Mar. भांग), निर्गुण्डी and तमालपत्र. -मकारम् the five essentials of the left-hand Tantra ritual of which the first letter is म; see पञ्चतत्त्व (2). -महापातकम् the five great sins; see महापातक Ms.11. 54. -महायज्ञाः m. (pl.) the five daily sacrifices enjoined to be performed by a Brāhmaṇa; अध्यापनं ब्रह्मयज्ञः पितृ- यज्ञस्तु तर्पणम् । होमो दैवो बलिर्भौतो नृयज्ञो$तिथिपूजनम् ॥ Ms.3.7. अहुतं च हुतं चैव तथा प्रहुतमेव च । ब्राह्मं हुतं प्राशितं च पञ्च यज्ञान् प्रचक्षते ॥ Ms.3.73; see महायज्ञ. -मारः son of Baladeva; L. D. B. -माश(षि)क a. consisting of five Māṣas (as a fine &c.). -माष(षि)क a. amounting to five māṣas; गर्दभाजाविकानां तु दण्डः स्यात्पञ्चमाषिकः Ms.8.298. -मास्य a. happening every five months. -मुखः an arrow with five points; (for other senses see पञ्चानन.) -मुद्रा five gestures to be made in presenting offerings to an idol; viz आवाहनी, स्थापनी, संनिधापनी, संबोधनी and संमुखीकरणी; see मुद्रा. -मूत्रम् the urine of five female animals; the cow, goat, she-buffalo, sheep, and she-ass.). -मूलम् there are nine varieties of the pentad combinations of roots; लघुपञ्चमूल, बृहत्पञ्चमूल, शतावर्यादि, तृणपञ्चमूल, जीवकादिपञ्चमूल, पुनर्नवादिपञ्चमूल, गोक्षुरादि˚, वल्ली˚. -रत्नम् a collection of five gems; (they are variously enumerated: (1) नीलकं वज्रकं चेति पद्मरागश्च मौक्तिकम् । प्रवालं चेति विज्ञेयं पंचरत्नं मनीषिभिः ॥ (2) सुवर्णं रजतं मुक्ता राजावर्तं प्रवालकम् । रत्नपञ्चकमाख्यातम् ...॥ (3) कनकं हीरकं नीलं पद्मरागश्च मौक्तिकम् । पञ्चरत्नमिदं प्रोक्त- मृषिभिः पूर्वदर्शिभिः ॥ -2 the five most admired episodes of the Mahābhārata; गीता, विष्णुसहस्रनाम, भीष्मस्तवराज, अनुस्मृति and गजेन्द्रमोक्ष). -रसा the आमलकी tree (Mar. आंवळी). -रात्रम् 1 a period of five nights; इत्यर्थं वयमानीताः पञ्चरात्रो$पि विद्यते Pañch.3.24. -2 N. of one of Bhāsa's dramas. -3 N. of a philosophical treatise attributed to Nārada. -4 N. of an अहीन (sacrifice) lasting for 5 days; स एतं पञ्चरात्रं पुरुषमेधं यज्ञक्रतुमपश्यत् Śat. Br.; cf. Mb.12.218. 11. -राशिकम् the rule of five (in math.). -लक्षणम् a Purāṇa; so called because it deals with five important topics:-- सर्गश्च प्रतिसर्गश्च वंशो मन्वन्तराणि च । वंशानुचरितं चैव पुराणं पञ्चलक्षणम् ॥ see पुराण also. -लवणम् five kinds of salt; i. e. काचक, सैन्धव, सामुद्र, बिड and सौवर्चल. -लाङ्गलकम् a gift (महादान) of as much land as can be cultivated with five ploughs. -लोकपालः the five guardian deities viz. Vināyaka, Durgā, Vāyu, Ākāśa and Aśvinīkumāra. -लोहम् a metallic alloy containing five metals (i. e. copper, brass, tin, lead and iron). -लोहकम् the five metals i. e. gold, silver, copper, tin and lead. -वटः the sacred or sacrificial thread worn across the breast (यज्ञोपवीत). -वटी 1 the five fig-trees: i. e. अश्वत्थ, बिल्व, वट, धात्री and अशोक. -2 N. of a part of the Daṇḍakā forest where the Godāvarī rises and where Rāma dwelt for a considerable time with his beloved; it is two miles from Nasik; परिहरन्तमपि मामितः पञ्चवटीस्नेहो बलादाकर्षतीव U.2.27/28; R.13.34. -वर्गः 1 an aggregate of five. -2 the five essential elements of the body. -3 the five organs of sense; संतुष्टपञ्चवर्गो$हं लोकयात्रां प्रवाहये Rām.2.19.27. -4 the five daily sacrifices enjoined to be performed by a Brāhmaṇa; cf. महायज्ञ. -5 the five classes of spies (कापटिक, उदास्थित, गृहपतिव्यञ्जन, वैदेहिकव्यञ्जन and तापसव्यञ्जन); cf. Kull. on Ms.7.154. -वर्षदेशीय a. about five years old. -वर्षीय a. five years old. -वल्कलम् a collection of the barks of five kinds of trees; namely न्यग्रोध, उदुम्बर, अश्वत्थ, प्लक्ष and वेतस. -वल्लभा N. of Draupadī. -वार्षिक a. recurring every five years. -वाहिन् a. drawn by five (as a carriage). -विंश a. twenty-fifth. -शः 1 a Stoma consisting of 25 parts. -2 N. of Viṣṇu (regarded as the 25th तत्त्व); स तु जन- परितापं तत्कृतं जानता ते नरहर उपनीतः पञ्चतां पञ्चविंश Bhāg. 7.8.53. -विंशतिः f. twenty-five. -विंशतिका a collection of twenty-five; as in वेतालपञ्चविंशतिका. -विध a. fivefold, of five kinds. ˚प्रकृतिः f. the five departments of a government; अमात्यराष्ट्रदुर्गार्थदण्डाख्याः पञ्च चापराः Ms.7.157. -वीरगोष्ठम् an assembly room, concert-hall; रागमञ्जरी नाम पञ्चवीरगोष्ठे संगीतकमनुष्ठास्यति Dk.2. -वृत्, -वृतम् ind. five-fold. -वृत्तिता depending on senses; Rām.2.1.65. -शत a. amounting to five hundred. (-तम्) 1 one hundred and five. -2 five hundred. -शाखः 1 the hand; स्वशिरः पश्चशाखाभ्यामभिहत्यायतेक्षणा Mb.11.17.3; कदापि नो मुञ्चति पञ्चशाखः (नारायणस्य) Rām. Ch.1.9; स्फूर्जद्रत्नाङ्गुलीयद्युतिशबलनखद्योतिभिः पञ्चशाखैः Śiva B.3.49. -2 an elephant. -शारदीयः N. of a Yāga. -शिखः a lion. -शीलम् the five rules of conduct; Buddh. -शुक्लम् The holy combination of five days, viz. Uttarāyaṇa (day of the gods), the bright half of the month (day of the manes) and day time, हरिवासर and सिद्धक्षेत्र (cf. त्रिशुक्लम्). -ष a. (pl.) five or six; सन्त्यन्ये$पि बृहस्पतिप्रभृतयः संभाविताः पञ्चषाः Bh.2.34. -षष्ट a. sixty-fifth. -षष्टिः f. sixty-five. -सटः one with five tufts of hair on the head (सटाः जटाः केशसन्निवेशे मध्ये मध्ये पञ्चसु स्थानेषु क्षौरवद्वापनम्); दासो$यं मुच्यतां राज्ञस्त्वया पञ्चसटः कृतः Mb.3.272.18; (Mar. पांच पाट काढणें). -सप्तत a. seventy-fifth. -सप्ततिः f. seventy-five. -सस्यम् the five grains viz. धान्य, मुद्ग, तिल, यव and माष. -सिद्धान्ती f. the five astronomical doctrines from astronomical book like सूर्यसिद्धान्त etc. -सिद्धौषधयः the five medicinal plants:-- तैलकन्द, सुधाकन्द, क्रोडकन्द, रुदन्तिक, सर्पाक्षी. -सुगन्धकम् the five kinds of aromatic vegetable sub- stances; they are:-- कर्पूरकक्कोललवङ्गपुष्पगुवाकजातीफलपञ्चकेन । समांशभागेन च योजितेन मनोहरं पञ्चसुगन्धकं स्यात् ॥. -सूनाः f. the five things in a house by which animal life may be accidentally destroyed; they are:-- पञ्चसूना गृहस्थस्य चुल्ली पेषण्युपस्करः कण्डनी चोदकुम्भश्च Ms.3.68. -सूरणाः the five medicinal esculent roots; sweet and bitter सूरण, अत्यम्ल- पर्णी, काण्डीर, मालाकन्द. &c. -स्रोतम् n. the mind; पञ्चस्रोतसि निष्णातः Mb.12.218.11. (com. पञ्चस्त्रोतांसि विषयकेदारप्रणालिका यस्य तस्मिन् मनसि). -हायन a. five years old.
parāgaḥ परागः 1 The pollen of a flower; स्फुटपरागपरागतपङ्कजम् Śi.6.2; Amaru.54. -2 Dust in general; प्रतापो$ग्रे ततः शब्दः परागस्तदनन्तरम् R.4.3. -3 Fragrant power used after bathing. -4 Sandal. -5 An eclipse of the sun or moon. -6 Fame, celebrity. -7 Independence, self-will. -8 Medicinal powder; Mātaṅga L.11.28. -9 Powder; काये$पि कर्पूरपरागपूरः Mv.7.17.
paridhiḥ परिधिः 1 A wall, fence, hedge, anything surrounding or enclosing another; नैनं परिधिमेतेषामीषत् क्षपयितुं क्षमाः Śiva B.26.59; बर्बरान् परिधीभूतान् परिभूय स्वतेजसा 28.27. -2 A misty halo round the sun or moon; परिधेर्मुक्त इवोष्णदीधितिः R.8.3; शशिपरिधिरिवोच्चेर्मण्डलस्तेन तेने N.2. 18. -3 A circle of light; मेघश्यामः कनकपरिधिः कर्णविद्योत- विद्युत् Bhāg. -4 The horizon; the quarter; पिबद्भिरिव खं दृग्भिर्दहद्भिः परिधीनिव Bhāg.8.15.1. -5 The circumference or compass in general. -6 The circumference of a circle. -7 The periphery of a wheel. -8 A stick (of a sacred tree like पलाश) laid round the sacrificial fire; सप्तास्यासन् परिधयः त्रिःसप्त समिधः कृताः Rv.1.9.15; धूम्रा दिशः परिधयः कम्पते भूः सहाद्रिभिः Bhāg.1.14.15. -9 A circle surrounding the globe. -1 Epicycle. -11 A covering. -12 A branch of a sacred tree to which the sacrificial victim is tied. -13 A cover, garment; श्यामं हिरण्यपरिधिं नवमाल्यबर्हधातुप्रवालनटवेषमनुव्रतांसे Bhāg.1.23.22. -Comp. -उपान्त a. bordered by the ocean. -पतिखेचरः an epithet of Śiva. -स्थः 1 a guard. -2 an officer attendant on a king or general (modern 'aide-decamp'). -3 A number of sentinels posted in a circle.
parighaḥ परिघः 1 An iron (or wooden) beam or bar used for locking or shutting a gate (अर्गल); एकः कृत्स्नां नगरपरिघप्रांशुबाहुर्भुनक्ति Ś.2.16; R.16.84; Śi.19.32; M.5.2. -2 (Hence) A bar, barrier, hindrance, obstacle; भार्गवस्य सुकृतो$पि सो$भवत् स्वर्गमार्गपरिघो दुरत्ययः R.11.88. -3 A stick or club studded or tipped with iron; पादपाविद्धपरिघः R.12.73. -4 An iron club in general. It is a kind of weapon (परितो हन्तीती--सर्वतः कण्टकितो लोहदण्डः com. on Mb.1.19.17);...... हन्तुं घोरं परिघमाददे Śiva B.14.99. -5 A water-jar, pitcher. -6 A glass-pitcher. -7 A house, dwelling. -8 Killing, destroying. -9 Striking, a stroke or blow. -1 A child which assumes a peculiar cross position in birth. -11 A line of clouds crossing the sun at sunrise or sunset. -12 The gate of a palace, town or house. Hence perhaps it means 'Gate-duty'; मूलं भागो व्याजी परिघः क्लृप्तं रूपिकमत्ययश्चाय-मुखम् Kau. A.2.6.24. -13 (In astrol.) N. of the 19th Yoga. -घौ m. (du.) Two birds flying on each side of a traveller (regarded as an omen). -Comp. -गुरु a. as heavy as an iron bar; M. -स्तम्भः a door-post; M.
parigrahaḥ परिग्रहः 1 Seizing, holding, taking, grasping; आसन- रज्जुपरिग्रहे R.9.46; शङ्कापरिग्रहः Mu.1 'taking or entertaining a doubt'. -2 Surrounding, enclosing, encircling, fencing round. -3 Putting on, wrapping round (as a dress); मौलिपरिग्रहः R.18.38. -4 Assuming, taking; मानपरिग्रहः Amaru.97; विवाहलक्ष्मी˚ U.4. -5 Receiving, taking, accepting, acceptauce; भौमो मुनेः स्थानपरिग्रहो$यम् R.13.36; अर्ध्यपरिग्रहान्ते 7;12.16; Ku. 6.53; विद्यापरिग्रहाय Māl.1; so आसनपरिग्रहं करोतु देवः U.3 'your majesty will be pleased to take a seat or sit down'. -6 Possessions, property, belongings; त्यक्तसर्वपरिग्रहः Bg. 4.21; R.15.55; V.4.26. -7 Taking in marriage, marriage; नवे दारपरिग्रहे U.1.19; Māl.5.27; असंशयं क्षत्रपरिग्रह- क्षमा Ś.1.22; न हि गणयति क्षुद्रो जन्तुः परिग्रहफल्गुताम् Bh.1.9. -8 A wife, queen; प्रयतपरिग्रहद्वितीयः R.1.95,92;9.14; 11.33;16.8; Ś.5.28,31; परिग्रहबहुत्वे$पि Ś.3.19; प्राप श्रियं मुनिवरस्य परिग्रहो$सौ Rām. Ch. -9 Taking under one's protection, favouring; धन्याः स्मो वः परिग्रहात् U.7. 11; M.1.13; कुर्वन्ति पाण्डवपरिग्रहमेव पौराः Pañch.1.2. -1 Attendants, followers, train, retinue, suite; परिग्रहेण सर्वेण कोषेण च महीयसा Śiva.B.8.4. -11 A household, family, members of a family. -12 The seraglio or household of a king, harem. -13 Anything received, a present; राजपरिग्रहो$यम् Ś.1. -14 Assent, consent. -15 Taking possession of, acquiring. -16 A claim. -17 Entertaining, honouring, receiving (a guest &c.). Mb.1.195.1. -18 An entertainer. -19 Assistance. -2 A husband. -21 Respect, reverence. -22 Grace, favour. -23 Comprehension, understanding. -24 Undertaking, performing. -25 Subjugation; धर्षितो मत्परिग्रहः Mb.12.32.55. -26 Dominion. -27 Punishment. -28 Connection, relation. -29 Summing up, totality. -3 A house, residence. -31 Removing, taking away. -32 A curse; निर्मुक्तनिष्ठुरपरिग्रहपाशबन्धः Rām. Ch. (cf. पत्नीपरिजनादानमूलशापाः परिग्रहाः Ak.). -33 (In Ved. gram.) The double mention of a word both before and after इति. -34 The form which precedes इति. -35 Root, origin. -36 The eclipse of the sun or moon. -37 An oath. -38 The rear of an army. -39 N. of Viṣṇu. -4 The body; आश्रयन्त्याः स्वभावेन मम पूर्वपरिग्रहम् Mb.12. 32.57. (com. स्वभावेन चित्तेन मम परिग्रहं शरीरं आश्रयन्त्याः). -41 Administration; राज्यपरिग्रहः Mb.12.32.51. -Comp. -अर्थीय a. generalizing; having the sense of comprehension; Nir.1.7. -द्वितीय a. accompanied by one's wife or family. -बहुत्वम् multitude of wives.
pariveṣaṇam परिवेषणम् शनम् 1 Serving up meals, waiting, distributing food; विप्राणां प्रवराः सर्वे चक्रुश्च परिवेषणम् Rām. 7.91.28. -2 Enclosing, surrounding निवेशपरिवेशनम् Mb. 14.45.1. -3 A halo round the sun or moon. -4 Circumference.
pariviṣṭi परिविष्टि f. Ved. Service, attendance. परि(री)वेशः(षः) 1 Waiting at meals, distributing food, serving up meals. -2 A circle, circlet, halo (of lustre &c); स्वकिरणपरिवेषोद्भेदशून्याः प्रदीपाः R.5.74;6.13; Śi.5.52;17.9. -3 Especially, the halo round the sun or moon लक्ष्यते स्म तदनन्तरं रविर्बद्धभीमपरिवेषमण्डलः R.11.59; अद्यापि तत् सपरिवेषशशिप्रकाशमास्यं स्मरामि Bil. Ch.; U.46. -4 The circumference of a circle. -5 The disc of the sun or moon. -6 Anything which surrounds or protects. उज्जासानाय परितः परिवेषकृतां द्विषाम् Śiva B.26.64;28.23.
parvan पर्वन् n. [पॄ-वनिप् Uṇ.4.112.] पर्व स्यादुत्सवे ग्रन्थौ प्रस्तावे लक्षणान्तरे' इति विश्वः. 1 A knot, joint; मासाश्चार्धमासाश्च पर्वाणि; Bṛi. Up.1.1.1. (Sometimes changed to पर्व at the end of Bah. comp.; as in कर्कशाङ्गुलिपर्वया R.12.41.) सो$हं दुर्मायिनस्ते$द्य वज्रेण शतपर्वणा, शिरो हरिष्ये Bhāg.8.11.6; सतामिवापर्वणि मार्गणानाम् Ki.17.29. -2 A limb, member, joint of the body, knuckle. -3 A portion, part, division; ससर्ज च्छायया विद्यां पञ्चपर्वाणमग्रतः Bhāg.3.2.18. -4 A book, section (as of the Mahābhārata). -5 The step of a staircase; दिने दिने शैवलवन्त्यधस्तात् सोपानपर्वाणि विमुञ्चदम्भः R.16.46. -6 A period, fixed time. -7 Particularly, the days of the four changes of the moon; i. e. the eighth and fourteenth day of each half month and the days of the full and new moon. -8 A sacrifice performed on the occasion of a change of the moon; पर्वणि न विचिन्वेत् (तुलसीम्) Tulasī. Up. -9 The day of new or full moon, the day of opposition or conjunction; अपर्वणि ग्रहकलुषेन्दुमण्डला विभावरी कथय कथं भविष्यति M.4.15; R.7.33; Ms.4.15; Bh.2.34. -1 An eclipse of the sun or moon; भ्रातः पर्वणि पश्य दानवपतिः शीर्षावशेषी कृतः Bh. -11 A festival, holiday, an occasion of joy; स्वलंकृतौ बालगजौ पर्वणीव सितेतरौ (कृष्णरामौ) Bhāg.1.41.41. -12 An opportunity or occasion in general. -13 A particular period of the year (as the equinox, solstice). -14 The moment of the sun's entering a new sign. -15 A moment, instant. -Comp. -आस्फोटः cracking the fingers (regarded as indecorus). -कारः One wearing different dresses (वेषान्तरधारी); Mb.13.9.9. -कालः 1 a periodic change of the moon. -2 the time at which the moon at its conjunction or opposition passes through the node; ˚राशिः time of festivals. -कारिन् m. a Brāhmaṇa who from motives of gain performs on common days ceremonies which ought to be performed on periodical occasions, such as अमावास्या &c. -गामिन् m. one who has sexual intercourse with his wife at particular times or occasions when such intercourse is prohibited by the Śāstras. -दक्षिणा the teacher's fee for teaching a particular portion of the Veda. -धिः the moon. -नाडी time of opposition or conjunction. -पूर्णता 1 preparations for a festival. -2 completion of a festival. -3 joining. -भागः the wrist; आपर्वभागोत्थितैः Ś.4.5. -भेदः voilent pain in the joints; Suśr. -मूलम् the time at which the fourteenth day passes into the fifteenth day of a fortnight. -योनिः a cane or reed. -रुह् m. a pomegranate tree. -वर्ज a. except the forbidden days of a month. -विपद् The moon. -संधिः 1 the junction of the fifteenth and first of a lunar fortnight, the full and change of the moon, or the exact moment of the full and change of the moon; जुषन्ते पर्वतश्रेष्ठमृषयः पर्वसंधिषु Mb.3.159.16. -2 a finger-joint.
pāṣāṇaḥ पाषाणः [पिनष्टि पिष् संचूर्णने आनच् पृषो˚ Tv.] A stone. -णी 1 A small stone used as a weight. -2 A spear. -Comp. -गर्दभः a hard swelling on the maxillary joint. -चतुर्दशी N. of a festival on the 14th day of the month of Mārgaśīrṣa, when the sun is in the वृश्चिकराशि, in honour of Gaurī. In this festival sweet balls shaped like a पाषाण are prepared. -दारकः, -दारणः a stonecutter's chisel. -शीला a flat stone. -सन्धिः a cave or chasm in a rock. -हृदय a. stonehearted, cruel, relentless.
pātālam पातालम् [पतत्यस्मिन्नधर्मेण पत्-आलञ्; cf. Uṇ.1.114] 1 The last of the seven regions or worlds under the earth said to be peopled by Nāgas. the seven regions are:-अतल, वितल, सुतल, रसातल, तलातल, महातल and पाताल. -2 The lower regions or world in general; मा मेति व्याहरत्येव तस्मिन् पातालमभ्यगात् R.15.84;1.8; पातालान्न विमोचितो बत बली नीतो न मृत्युः क्षयम् Subhāṣ. -3 An excavation, a hole. -4 Submarine fire. -5 (In astrol.) The fourth house or sign from that in which the sun is present. -लः 1 A kind of instrument for distillation or the calcination and sublimation of metals. -2 N. of Jupiter's year (of 361 days). -Comp. -गङ्गा the Ganges of the lower world. -ओकस् m., -निलयः, -निवासः, -वासिन् m. 1 a demon. -2 a Nāga or a serpent-demon. -तलम्, -मूलम् the bottom of Pātāla. -मुखम् a great hollow (महागर्त); यत्त्वद्य पातालमुखे पतन्तं पाणौ गृहीत्वा प्रतिसंहरेत Mb. 3.268.4. -मूलम् the centre or gravity; आस्ते पातालमूलस्थः शेषो$शेषसुतर्चितः V. P.2.5.2. -यन्त्रम् See पातालः (1).
prabhā प्रभा 1 Light, splendour, lustre, effulgence, radiance; प्रभास्मि शशिसूर्ययोः Bg.7.8; प्रभा पतङ्गस्य R.2.15,31; 6.18; Ṛs.1.2; Me.49; दृष्टस्त्वं प्रभया गोप्या युक्तो वृन्दावने वने Brahmavaivasvata P. -2 A ray of light. -3 The shadow of the sun on a sun-dial. -4 An epithet of Durgā; प्रभा प्रभानशीलत्वात् Devī. P. -5 N. of the city of Kubera. -6 N. of an Apsaras. -Comp. -करः 1 the sun; प्रसन्नत्वात् प्रभाकरः R.1.74. -2 the moon. -3 fire. -4 the ocean. -5 an epithet of Śiva. -6 N. of a learned writer, the founder of a school of Mīmāṁsā philosophy called after him. -7 A gem (पद्मराग); Rām.2.114.1. -कीटः a fire-fly. -तरल a. tremulously radiant; न प्रभातरलं ज्योतिरुदेति वसुधातलात् Ś.1.25. -पल्लवित a. overspread or glowing with lustre; प्रभा- पल्लवितेनासौ करोति मणिना खगः (अवतंसकम्); V.5.3. -प्रभुः the sun; दृष्टदृग्भिर्दुरालोकं प्रभयेव प्रभाप्रभुम् (व्यलोकत) N.17. 25. -प्ररोहः a ray or flash of light. -भिद् a. brilliant, shining; शक्रधनुः प्रभाभिदः Ki.16.58. -मण्डलम् a circle or halo of light; स्फुरत्प्रभामण्डलया चकाशे Ku.1.24;6.4; R.3.6;14.14. -लेपिन् a. covered with lustre, emitting lustre; प्रभालेपी नायं हरिहतमृगस्यामिषलवः V.4.62.
pradhūpita प्रधूपित p. p. 1 Fumigated, perfumed. -2 Heated, burned. -3 Inflamed. -4 Afflicted, distressed; व्यसन- प्रधूपिताम् Ku. -ता 1 A woman in trouble. -2 The quarter to which the sun proceeds.
prājña प्राज्ञ a. (-ज्ञा, -ज्ञी f.) [प्रज्ञ एव स्वार्थे अण्] 1 Intellectual. -2 Wise, learned, clever; किमुच्यते प्राज्ञः खलु कुमारः U.4. -ज्ञः 1 A wise or learned man; तेभ्यः प्राज्ञा न बिभ्यति Ve.2.14; देवद्विजगुरुप्राज्ञपूजनं शौचमार्जवम् ब्रह्मचर्यमहिंसा च शारीरं तप उच्यते ॥ Bg.17.14. -2 A kind of parrot. -3 Intelligence dependent on individuality; Vedāntasāra. -4 Supreme Being (Almighty); अयं पुरुषः प्राज्ञेनात्मना संपरिष्वक्तो न बाह्यं किंचन वेद नान्तरम् Bṛi. Up.4.3.21. -ज्ञा 1 Intelligence, understanding. -2 A clever or intelligent woman. -ज्ञी 1 A clever or learned woman. -2 The wife of a learned man. -3 N. of a wife of the sun (सूर्यपत्नी). -Comp. -कथा a story about a wise man. -मन्य, -मानिन् or प्राज्ञंमानिन् a. fancying oneself to be wise, conceited; न तु चिन्तयतश्चित्ते जनस्य प्राज्ञमानिनः Bu. Ch.4.52. -मानः respect for learned men.
prāpta प्राप्त p. p. 1 Got, obtained, won, acquired. -2 Reached, attained to. -3 Met with, found. -4 Incurred, suffered, endured; सभार्येण सराष्ट्रेण यत् प्राप्तं तत्र तत्त्वतः (संप्रपश्यति) Rām.1.3.3. -5 Arrived, come, present. -6 Completed. -7 Proper, right. -8 Following from a rule, -9 Described (as a symptom). -1 Fixed, placed. -11 (In gram.) Following from a rule, valid. Comp. -अनुज्ञ a. one who has got permission to go, allowed to depart. -अपराध a. guilty of an offence. -अर्थ a. successful. (-र्थः) an object gained. -अवसर a. 1 finding occasion or opportunity. -2 timely, seasonable. (-रः) a fit or suitable time. -उदय a. one who has attained rise or exaltation. -कर्मन् n. that which results or follows from a preceding rule. -कारिन् a. doing what is right. -काल a. 1 opportune, seasonable, suitable; see अप्राप्तकाल. -2 marriageable. -3 fated, destined. (-लः) a fit time, suitable or favourable moment. (-लम्) ind. seasonably, opportunely, timely; अप्राप्तकालं वचनं बृहस्पतिरपि ब्रुवन् Pt.1. 63. -क्रम a. fit, proper, suitable. -जीवन a. revived, restored to life. -दोष a. guilty. -पञ्चत्व a. resolved into the five elements, i. e. dead; cf. पञ्चत्व. -प्रसव a. 1 delivered of a child. -2 near her confinement; प्राप्तप्रसव- मात्मानं गङ्गादेव्यां विमुञ्चति U.7.2. -बीज a. sown. -बुद्धि a. 1 recovering, regaining one's consciousness. -2 instructed, enlightened. -भारः a beast of burden. -भाव a. 1 wise. -2 handsome. -वः a young bullock. -मनोरथ a. one who has obtained his desired object. -यौवन a. being in the bloom of youth, arrived at the age of puberty, youthful. -रूप a. 1 handsome, beautiful. -2 wise, learned. -3 charming, attractive. -4 fit, proper, worthy. -वर a. fraught with blessings. -व्यवहार a. come of age, being able and legally authorised to manage his own affairs (opp. 'minor'). -श्री a. one who owes his rise (to another); इतः स दैत्यः प्राप्तश्रीर्नेत एवार्हति क्षयम् Ku.2.55; Pt.1.244. -सूर्य a. having the sun (vertical).
prati प्रति ind. 1 As a prefix to verbs it means (a) towards, in the direction of; (b) back, in return, again; तष्ठेदानीं न मे जीवन् प्रतियास्यसि दुर्मते Rām.7.18.13; (c) in opposition to, against, counter; (d) upon, down upon; (see the several roots with this preposition). -2 As a prefix to nouns not directly derived from verbs it means (a) likeness, resemblance, equality; (b) opposite, of the opposite side; प्रतिबल Ve.3.5. 'the opposing force'; so प्रतिद्विपाः Mu.2.13; (c) rivalry; as in प्रतिचन्द्रः 'a rival moon'; प्रतिपुरुषः &c. -3 As a separable preposition (with acc.) it means (a) towards, in the direction of, to; तौ दम्पती स्वां प्रति राजधानीं प्रस्थापयामास वशी वसिष्ठः R.2.7;1. 75; प्रत्यनिलं विचेरु Ku.3.31; वृक्षं प्रति विद्योतते विद्युत् Sk.; (b) against, counter, in opposition to, opposite; तदा यायाद् रिपुं प्रति Ms.7.171; प्रदुदुवुस्तं प्रति राक्षसेन्द्रम् Rām.; ययावजः प्रत्यरिसैन्यमेव R.7.55; (c) in comparison with, on a par with, in proportion to, a match for; त्वं सहस्राणि प्रति Ṛv.2.1.8; (d) near, in the vicinity of, by, at, in, on; समासेदुस्ततो गङ्गां शृङ्गवेरपुरं प्रति Rām.; गङ्गां प्रति; (e) at the time, about, during; आदित्यस्योदयं प्रति Mb; फाल्गुनं वाथ चैत्रं वा मासौ प्रति Ms.7.182; (f) on the side of, in favour of, to the lot of; यदत्र मां प्रति स्यात् Sk.; हरं प्रति हलाहलं (अभवत्) Vop.; (g) in each, in or at every, severally (used in a distributive sense); वर्षं प्रति, प्रतिवर्षम्; यज्ञं प्रति Y.1.11; वृक्षं वृक्षं प्रति सिञ्चति Sk.; (h) with regard or reference to, in relation to, regarding, concerning, about, as to; न हि मे संशीतिरस्या दिव्यतां प्रति K.132; चन्द्रोपरागं प्रति तु केनापि विप्रलब्धासि Mu.1; धर्मं प्रति Ś.5.18; मन्दौत्सुक्यो$स्मि नगरगमनं प्रति Ś.1; Ku.6.27; 7.83; त्वयैकमीशं प्रति साधु भाषितम् 5.81; Y.1.218; R.6. 12;1.29;12.51; (i) according to, in conformity with; मां प्रति in my opinion; (j) before, in the presence of; (k) for, on account of. -4 As a separable preposition (with abl.) it means either (a) a representative of, in place of, instead of; प्रद्युम्नः कृष्णात् प्रति Sk.; संग्रामे यो नारायणतः प्रति Bk.8.89; or (b) in exchange or return for; तिलेभ्यः प्रति यच्छति माषान् Sk.; भक्तेः प्रत्यमृतं शंभोः Vop. -5 As the first member of Avyayībhāva compound it usually means (a) in or at every; as प्रतिसंवत्सरम् 'every year', प्रतिक्षणम्, प्रत्यहम् &c.; (b) towards, in the direction of; प्रत्यग्नि शलभा डयन्ते. -6 प्रति is sometimes used as the last member of Avyayī. comp. in the sense of 'a little'; सूपप्रति, शाकप्रति. [Note:-In the compounds given below all words the second members of which are words not immediately connected with verbs, are included; other words will be found in their proper places.] -Comp. -अंशम् ind. on the shoulders. -अक्षरम् ind. in every syllable or letter; प्रत्यक्षरश्लेषमयप्रबन्ध Vās. -अग्नि ind. towards the fire. -अग्र = प्रत्यग्र q. v. -अङ्गम् 1 a secondary or minor limb (of the body), as the nose. -2 a division, chapter, section. -3 every limb. -4 a weapon. (-ङ्गम्) ind. 1 on or at every limb of the body; as in प्रत्यङ्ग- मालिङ्गितः Gīt.1. -2 for every subdivision. -3 in each case (in grammar). -अधिदेवता a tutelary deity who stays in front or near one; Hch. -अधिष्ठानम्, -आधानम् the principal place of residence; Bṛi. Up.2.2.1. -2 repository. -अनन्तर a. 1 being in immediate neighbourhood; दानमानादिसत्कारैः कुरुष्व प्रत्यनन्तरम् Rām.4.15.27. (com. प्रत्यनन्तरं स्वाधीनम्). -2 standing nearest (as an heir). -3 immediately following, closely connected with; जीवेत् क्षत्रियधर्मेण स ह्यस्य (ब्राह्मणस्य) प्रत्यनन्तरः; Ms.1. 82;8.185. (-रम्) ind. 1 immediately after. -2 next in succession. -रीभू to betake oneself close to; P. R. -अनिलम् ind. towards or against the wind. -अनीक a 1 hostile, opposed, inimical. -2 resisting, opposing. -3 opposite. -4 equal, vying with. (-कः) an enemy. (-कम्) 1 hostility, enmity, hostile attitude or position; न शक्ताः प्रत्यनीकेषु स्थातुं मम सुरासुराः Rām. -2 a hostile army; यस्य शूरा महेष्वासाः प्रत्यनीकगता रणे Mb.; ये$वस्थिताः प्रत्यनीकेषु योधाः Bg.11.32. (प्र˚ may have here sense 1 also). -3 (in Rhet.) a figure of speech in which one tries to injure a person or thing connected with an enemy who himself cannot be injured; प्रतिपक्षमशक्तेन प्रतिकर्तुं तिरस्क्रिया । या तदीयस्य तत्स्तुत्यै प्रत्यनीकं तदुच्यते K. P.1. -अनुप्रासः a kind of alliteration. -अनुमानम् an opposite conclusion. -अन्त a. contiguous, lying close to, adjacent, bordering. (-न्तः) 1 a border, frontier; स गुप्तमूलप्रत्यन्तः R.4.26. -2 a bordering country; especially, a country occupied by barbarian or Mlechchhas. ˚देशः a bordering country. ˚पर्वतः an adjacent hill; पादाः प्रत्यन्तपर्वताः Ak. -अन्धकार a. spreading shadow; Buddh. -अपकारः retaliation, injury in return; शाम्येत् प्रत्यप- कारेण नोपकारेण दुर्जनः Ku.2.4. -अब्दम् ind. every year -अमित्र a. hostile. (-त्रः) an enemy. (-त्रम्) ind. towards as enemy. -अरिः 1 a well-matched opponent. -2 the 9th, 14th or 23rd asterism from the जन्मनक्षत्र. -3 a particular asterism; दारुणेषु च सर्वेषु प्रत्यरिं च विवर्जयेत् Mb.13.14.28 (com. प्रत्यरिं स्वनक्षत्राद् दिननक्षत्रं यावद् गणयित्वा नवभिर्भागे हृते पञ्चमी तारा प्रत्यरिः ।). -अर्कः a mock sun; parhelion. -अर्गलम् the rope by which a churning stick is moved. -अवयवम् ind. 1 in every limb. -2 in every particular, in detail. -अवर a. 1 lower, less honoured; पुरावरान् प्रत्यवरान् गरीयसः Mb.13.94.12. -2 very low or degrading, very insignificant; Ms.1.19. -अश्मन् m. red chalk. -अष्ठीला a kind of nervous disease. -अहम् ind. every day, daily; day by day; गिरिशमुपचचार प्रत्यहं सा सुकेशी Ku.1.6. -आकारः a scabbard, sheath. -आघातः 1 a counter-stroke. -2 reaction. -आचारः suitable conduct or behaviour. -आत्मम् ind. singly, severally. -आत्मक a. belonging to oneself. -आत्म्यम् similarity with oneself. -आत्मेन ind. after one's own image; स किंनरान् कुंपुरुषान् प्रत्यात्म्येना- सृजत् प्रभुः Bhāg.3.2.45. -आदित्यः a mock sun. -आरम्भः 1 recommencement, second beginning. -2 prohibition. -आर्द्र a. fresh. -आशा 1 hope, expectation; न यत्र प्रत्याशामनुपतति नो वा रहयति Māl.9.8. -2 trust, confidence. -आसङ्गः Connection, contact; अथ प्रत्यासङ्गः कमपि महिमानं वितरति Mv.1.12. -आस्वर 1 returning. -2 reflecting; Ch.Up.1.3.2. -आह्वयः echo, resonance; छाया प्रत्याह्वयाभासा ह्यसन्तो$प्यर्थकारिणः Bhāg.11.28.5. -उत्तरम् a reply, rejoinder. -उलूकः 1 a crow; मृत्युदूतः कपोतो$यमुलूकः कम्पयन्मनः । प्रत्युलूकश्च कुह्वानैरनिद्रौ शून्यमिच्छतः ॥ Bhāg.1.14.14. -2 a bird resembling an owl. -ऋचम् ind. in each Rik. -एक a. each, each one, every single one. (-कम्) ind. 1 one at a time, severally; singly, in every one, to every one; oft. with the force of an adjective; विवेश दण्डकारण्यं प्रत्येकं च सतां मनः R.12.9. 'entered the mind of every good man'; 12.3;7.34; Ku.2.31. -एनस् m. 1 an officer of justice (who punishes criminals); Bṛi. Up.4.3.7. -2 a heir responsible for the debts of the deceased; surety. -कञ्चुकः 1 an adversary. -2 a critic. -कण्ठम् ind. 1 severally, one by one. -2 near the throat. -कलम् ind. constantly, perpetually. -कश a. not obeying the whip. -कष्ट a. comparatively bad. -कामिनी a female rival; Śi. -कायः 1 an effigy, image, picture, likeness. -2 an adversary; स वृषध्वजसायकावभिन्नं जयहेतुः प्रतिकाय- मेषणीयम् Ki.13.28. -3 a target, butt, mark. -कितवः an opponent in a game. -कुञ्जरः a hostile elephant. -कूपः a moat, ditch. -कूल a. 1 unfavourable, adverse, contrary, hostile, opposite, प्रतिकूलतामुपगते हि विधौ विफलत्व- मेति बहुसाधनता Śi.9.6; Ku.3.24. -2 harsh, discordant. unpleasant, disagreeable; अप्यन्नपुष्टा प्रतिकूलशब्दा Ku.1. 45. -3 inauspicious. -4 contradictory. -5 reverse, inverted. -6 perverse, cross, peevish, stubborn. ˚आचार- णम्, ˚आचरितम् any offensive or hostile action or conduct; प्रतिकूलाचरितं क्षमख मे R.8.81. ˚उक्तम्, -क्तिः f. a contradiction. ˚कारिन्, -कृत, -चारिन्, -वत्ति a. opposing. ˚दर्शन a. having an inauspicious or ungracious appearance. ˚प्रवर्तिन्, -वर्तिन् a. acting adversely, taking an adverse course. ˚भाषिन् a. opposing, contradicting. ˚वचनम् disagreeable or unpleasant speech. ˚वादः contradiction. (प्रतिकूलता, -त्वम् adverseness, opposition, hostility. प्रति- कूलयति 'to oppose'.). -कूल ind. 1 adversely, contrarily. -2 inversely, in inverted order. -कूलय Den. P. to resist, oppose. -कूलिक a. hostile, inimical. -क्षणम् ind. at every moment or instant, constantly; प्रतिक्षणं संभ्रमलोलदृष्टि- र्लीलारविन्देन निवारयन्ती Ku.3.56. -क्षपम् ind. everynight. -गजः a hostile elephant -गात्रम् ind. in very limb. -गिरिः 1 an opposite mountain. -2 an inferior mountain. -गृहम्, -गेहम् ind. in every house. -ग्रामम् ind. in every village. -चक्रम् a hostile army. -चन्द्रः a mock moon; paraselene. -चरणम् ind. 1 in every (Vedic) school or branch. -2 at every foot-step. -छाया, -यिका 1 a reflected image, reflection, shadow; रूपं प्रतिच्छायिक- योपनीतम् N.6.45. -2 an image, picture. -जङ्घा the forepart of the leg. -जिह्वा, -जिह्विका the soft palate, -तन्त्रम् ind. according to each Tantra or opinion. -तन्त्र- सिद्धान्तः a conclusion adopted by one of the disputants only; (वादिप्रतिवाद्येकतरमात्राभ्युपगतः). -त्र्यहम् ind. for three days at a time. -दण्ड a. Ved. disobedient. -दिनम् ind. every day; राशीभूतः प्रतिदिनमिव त्र्यम्बकस्याट्टहासः Me.6. -दिशम् ind. in every direction, all round, everywhere. -दूतः a messenger sent in return. -देवता a corresponding deity; गताः कलाः पञ्चदश प्रतिष्ठा देवाश्च सर्वे प्रतिदेवतासु Muṇḍa.3.2.7. -देशम् ind. in every country. -देहम् ind. in every body. -दैवतम् ind. for every deity. -द्वन्द्वः 1 an antagonist, opponent, adversary, rival. -2 an enemy. (-द्वम्) opposition, hostility. -द्वन्द्विन् a. 1 hostile, inimical. -2 adverse (प्रतिकूल); कृतान्तदुर्वृत्त इवापरेषां पुरः प्रतिद्वन्द्विनि पाण्डवास्त्रे Ki.16.29. -3 rivalling, vying with; किसलयोद्भेदप्रतिद्वन्दिभिः (करतलैः) Ś.4.5. (-m.) an opponent, adversary, rival; तुल्यप्रति- द्वन्द्वि बभूव युद्धम् R.7.37.;15.25. -द्वारम् ind. at every gate. -धुरः a horse harnessed by the side of another. -नप्तृ m. great-grandson, a son's grandson. -नव a. 1 new, young, fresh. -2 newly blown budded; सान्ध्यं तेजः प्रतिनवजपापुष्परक्तं दधानः Me.38. -नाडी a branch-vein. -नायकः the adversary of the hero of any poetic composition; धीरोद्धतः पापकारी व्यसनी प्रतिनायकः S. D., as रावण in the Rāmāyaṇa, शिशुपाल in Māgha-Kāvya &c. -नारी, -पत्नी, -युवतिः a female rival; Śi.7.45. -निनादः = प्रतिध्वनिः q. v. -न्यायम् ind. in inverted order; पुनः प्रतिन्यायं प्रतियोन्याद्रवति स्वप्नायैव Bṛi. Up.4.3.15. -पक्ष a. like, similar. (-क्षः) 1 the opposite side, party or faction, hostility; विमृश्य पक्षप्रतिपक्षाभ्यामवधारणं नियमः Gaut. S, -2 an adversary, enemy, foe, rival; प्रति- पक्षकामिनी, -लक्ष्मी 'a rival wife'; Bv.2.64; दासीकृतायाः प्रति- पक्षलक्ष्याः Vikr.1.73; प्रतिपक्षमशक्तेन प्रतिकर्तुम् K. P.1; Vikr.1.7; often used in comp. in the sense of 'equal' or 'similar'. -3 remedy, expiation; यादवस्य पापस्य प्रतिपक्षमुपदिशामि Nāg.5. -4 a defendant or respondent (in law). ˚ता 1 hostility, opposition. -2 obstacle. -पक्षित a. 1 containing a contradiction. -2 nullified by a contradictory premise; (as a hetu in न्याय); cf. सत्प्रतिपक्ष. -पक्षिन् m. an opponent, adversary. -पण्यम् merchandise in exchange; Buddh. -प्रथम् ind. along the road, towards the way; प्रतिपथगतिरासीद् वेगदीर्घीकृताङ्गः Ku.3.76. -पदम् ind. 1 at evry stop. -2 at every place, everywhere. -3 expressly. -4 in every word; प्रतिपदाख्याने तु गौरवं परिहरद्भिर्वृत्तिकारैः सर्वसामान्यः शब्दः प्रति- गृहीतः प्रकृतिवदिति ŚB. on MS.8.1.2. -पल्लवः an opposite or outstretched branch; R. -पाणः 1 a stake. -2 a counter-pledge. -3 a counter-stake; Mb.3. -पादम् ind. in each quarter. -पात्रम् ind. with regard to each part, of each character; प्रतिपात्रमाधीयतां यत्नः Ś.1 'let care be taken of each character'. -पादपम् ind. in every tree. -पाप a. returning sin for sin, requiting evil for evil. -पु(पू)रुषः 1 a like or similar man. -2 a substitute, deputy. -3 a companion. -4 the effigy of a man pushed by thieves into the interior of a house before entering it themselves (to ascertain if any body is awake). -5 an effigy in general. (-षम्) ind. man by man, for each man. -पुस्तकम् a copy of an original manuscript. -पूर्वाह्णम् ind. every forenoon. -प्रति a. counter-balancing, equal to. -प्रभातम् ind. every morning. -प्रसवः 1 (As opposed to अनुप्रसव) tracing causes back to the origin as -a pot, a lump of mud, mud, clay, Pātañjala Yogadarśana. -2 Negation of (or exception to) a negation. The force of a प्रतिप्रसव is positive, limiting as it does the scope of a प्रतिषेध or negation. Hence it is just the opposite of परिसंख्या whose force is negative or exclusive since it limits the scope of a positive statement. प्रतिप्रसवो$यं न परिसंख्या ŚB. on MS.1.7.45. -प्रकारः an outer wall or rampart. -प्रियम् a kindness or service in return; प्रतिप्रियं चेद् भवतो न कुर्यां वृथा हि मे स्यात् स्वपदोपलब्धिः R.5.56. -बन्धुः an equal in rank or station; Mb.5.121.13. -बलः a. 1 able, powerful. -2 equal in strength, equally matched or powerful. (-लम्) 1 a hostile army; अस्त्रज्वालावलीढप्रतिबलजलधेरन्तरौर्वायमाणे Ve.3.7. -2 strength. -बाहु 1 the forepart of the arm. -2 an opposite side (in a square or polygon). -बि (वि) म्बः, -म्बम् 1 a reflection, reflected image; ज्योतिषां प्रतिबिम्बानि प्राप्नु- वन्त्युपहारताम् Ku.6.42; Śi.9.18. -2 an image, a picture. -बीजम् a rotten seed. -भट a. vying with, rivalling; घटप्रतिभटस्तनि N.13.5. (-टः) 1 a rival, an opponent; निवासः कन्दर्पप्रतिभटजटाजूटभवने G. L.21. -2 a warrior on the opposite side; समालोक्याजौ त्वां विदधति विकल्पान् प्रतिभटाः K. P.1. -भय a. 1 fearful, formidable, terrible, frightful. -2 dangerous; स्वगृहोद्यानगते$पि स्निग्धैः पापं विशङ्क्यते मोहात् । किमु दृष्टबह्वपायप्रतिभयकान्तारमध्यस्थे ॥ Pt.2.171; Nāg.5.1.; Bhāg.1.6.14. (-यम्) a danger; सुनन्द, श्रुतं मया संनिहितगरुडप्रतिभयमुद्देशं जामाता जीमूतवाहनो गतः Nāg.5. -भैरव a. dreadful. -मञ्चः a kind of measure (in music.) -मञ्चाः Platforms opposite to each other; दशभागिकौ द्वौ प्रतिमञ्चौ Kau. A.2.3.21. -मण्डलम् 1 a secondary disc (of the sun &c.). -2 an eccentric orbit. -मन्दिरम् ind. in every house. -मल्लः an antagonist, a rival; उपेयिवांसं प्रतिमल्लतां रयस्मये जितस्य प्रसभं गरुत्मतः N.1.63; पातालप्रतिमल्लगल्ल &c. Māl.5.22. -मानना worship (पूजा); स्पर्शमशुचिवपुरर्हति न प्रतिमाननां तु नितरां नृपोचिताम् Śi.15.35. -माया a counter-spell or charm; प्रतिमाया कृतं च तत् Mb.1.34.22. -मार्गः the way back; Mb.4. -मार्गम् ind. back, backwards. -माला capping verses (Mar. भंडी). -मासम् ind. every month, monthly. -मित्रम् an enemy, adversary. -मुख a. standing before the face, facing; प्रतिमुखागत Ms.8.291. -2 near, present. (-खम्) a secondary plot or incident in a drama which tends either to hasten or retard the catastrophe; see S. D.334 and 351-364. (-खम्) ind. 1 towards. -2 in front, before. -मुखरी a particular mode of drumming. -मुद्रा 1 a counterseal. -2 the impression of a seal. -मुहूर्तम् ind. every moment. -मूर्तिः f. an image, a likeness. -मूषिका f. a musk-rat (Mar. चिचुंदरी). -यूथपः the leader of a hostile herd of elephants. -रथः an adversary in war (lit. in fighting in a war-chariot); दौष्यन्तिमप्रतिरथं तनयं निवेश्य Ś.4.2. -रथ्यम् in every road; अस्मिन् नगरे प्रतिरथ्यं भुजङ्गबद्धसंचारे Udb. -रवः, -ध्वनिः 1 an echo; प्रतिरवविततो वनानि चक्रे Ki.1.4. -2 quarrel; controversy. -3 (Ved.) life (प्राण). -रसितम् an echo; केनास्मत् सिंह- नादप्रतिरसितसखो दुन्दुभिस्ताड्यते$यम् Ve.1.22. -राजः a hostile king. -रात्रम् ind. every night. -रूप a. 1 corresponding, similar, having a counter-part in; अग्निर्यथैको भुवनं प्रविष्टो रूपं रूपं प्रतिरूपो बभूव Kaṭh.2.2.9. -2 beautiful. -3 suitable, proper; इदं न प्रतिरूपं ते स्त्रीष्वदाक्षिण्यमीदृशम् Bu. Ch.4.66; आत्मनः प्रतिरूपं सा बभाषे चारुहासिनी Rām.4. 19.17. -4 facing (अभिमुख); प्रतिरूपं जनं कुर्यान्न चेत् तद् वर्तते यथा Mb.12.97.16 (com. प्रतिरूपं युद्धाभिमुखम्). (-पम्) 1 a picture, an image, a likeness. -2 a mirror-like reflecting object; अदर्शनं स्वशिरसः प्रतिरूपे च सत्यपि Bhāg. 1.42.28. -4 an object of comparison (उपमान); भवान्मे खलु भक्तानां सर्वेषां प्रतिरूपधृक् Bhāg.7.1.21. -रूपक a. resembling, similar (at the end of comp.); जहीमान् राक्षसान् पापानात्मनः प्रतिरूपकान् Mb.3.29.11; चेष्टाप्रतिरूपिका मनोवृत्तिः Ś.1. (-कम्) 1 a picture, an image; अग्निदैर्गर- दैश्चैव प्रतिरूपककारकैः Mb.12.59.49. -2 a forged edict; जर्जरं चास्य विषयं कुर्वन्ति प्रतिरूपकैः Mb.12.56.52. -3 a reflection. -लक्षणम् a mark, sign, token. -लिपिः f. a transcript, a written copy. -लेखः a writ of reply; प्रावृत्तिकश्च प्रतिलेख एव Kau. A.2.1.28. -लोम a. 1 'against the hair or grain', contray to the natural order, inverted, reverse (opp. अनुलोम); नववर्षसहस्राक्षः प्रतिलोमो$भवद् गुरुः Bhāg.12.14.15. -2 contrary to caste (said of the issue of a woman who is of a higher caste than her husband). -3 hostile. -4 low, vile, base. -5 left (वाम). -6 obstinate, perverse; अपरिचितस्यापि ते$प्रतिलोमः संवृत्तः Ś.7. -7 disagreeable, unpleasant. (-मम्) any injurious or unpleasant act. (-मम्) ind. 'against the hair or grain', inversely, invertedly. ˚ज a. born in the inverse order of the castes; i. e. born of a mother who is of a higher caste than the father; cf. Ms.1.16,25. -लोमक a. reverse, inverted; राजन्यविप्रयोः कस्माद् विवाहः प्रतिलोमकः Bhāg.9.18.5. -कम् inverted order. -लोमतः ind. 1 in consequence of the inverted order or course; Ms.1.68. -2 in an unfriendly manner; यदा बहुविधां वृद्धिं मन्येत प्रतिलोमतः Mb.12.13.39. -वत्सरम् ind. every year. -वनम् ind. in every forest. -वर्णिक a. similar, corresponding. -वर्धिन् a. being a match for. -वर्षम् ind. every year. -वस्तु n. 1 an equivalent, a counterpart. -2 anything given in return. -3 a parallel. ˚उपमा a figure of speech thus defined by Mammaṭa:-- प्रतिवस्तूपमा तु सा ॥ सामान्यस्य द्विरेकस्य यत्र वाक्यद्वये स्थितिः । K. P.1; e. g. तापेन भ्राजते सूर्यः शूरश्चापेन राजते Chandr.5. 48. -वातः a contrary wind; प्रतिवाते$नुवाते च नासीत गुरुणा सह Ms.2.23. (-तम्) ind. against the wind; चीनांशुक- मिव केतोः प्रतिवातं नीयमानस्य Ś.1.33. -वारणः a hostile elephant. -वासरम् ind. every day. -विटपम् ind. 1 on every branch. -2 branch by branch. -विषम् an antidote. (-षा) a birch tree. -विष्णुकः a Muchakunda tree. -वीरः an opponent, antagonist. -वीर्यम् being equal to or a match for. -वृषः a hostile bull. -वेलम् ind. at each time, on every occasion. -वेशः 1 a neighbouring house, neighbourhood. -2 a neighbour. -वेशिन् a. a neighbour; दृष्ट्वा प्रभातसमये प्रतिवेशिवर्गः Mk.3.14. -वेश्मन् n. a neighbour's house. -वेश्यः a neighbour. -वैरम् requital of hostilities revenge. -शब्दः 1 echo, reverberation; वसुधाधरकन्दराभिसर्पी प्रतिशब्दो$पि हरेर्भिनत्ति नागान् V. 1.16; Ku.6.64; R.2.28. -2 a roar. -शशिन् m. a mock-moon. -शाखम् ind. for every branch or school (of the Veda). -शाखा a side-branch; महाभूतविशेषश्च विशेषप्रतिशाखवान् Mb.14.35.21. -संवत्सरम् ind. every year. -सङ्गक्षिका 1 a cloak to keep off the dust; Buddh. -संदेशः a reply to the message; दर्पसारस्य प्रति- संदेशमावेदयत् D. K.2.1. -सम a. equal to, a match for. -सव्य a. in an inverted order. -सामन्तः an enemy. -सायम् ind. every evening. -सूर्यः, -सूर्यकः 1 a mock-sun. -2 a lizard, chameleon; 'कृकलासस्तु सरटः प्रतिसूर्यः शयानकः ।' Hemchandra; तृष्यद्भिः प्रतिसूर्यकैरजगरस्वेदद्रवः पीयते U.2.16. -सेना, सैन्यम् a hostile army; निहतां प्रतिसैन्येन वडवामिव पातिताम् Rām.2.114.17. -स्थानम् ind. in every place, everywhere. -स्मृतिः N. of particular kind of magic; गृहाणेमां मया प्रोक्तां सिद्धिं मूर्तिमतीमिव । विद्यां प्रतिस्मृतिं नाम Mb.3.36.3. -स्रोतस् ind. against the stream; सरस्वतीं प्रतिस्रोतं ययौ ब्राह्मणसंवृतः Bhāg.1.78. 18. -a. going against the stream; अथासाद्य तु कालिन्दी प्रतिस्रोतः समागताम् Rām.2.55.5. -हस्तः, -हस्तकः a deputy, an agent, substitute, proxy; आश्रितानां भृतौ स्वामिसेवायां धर्मसेवने । पुत्रस्योत्पादने चैव न सन्ति प्रतिहस्तकाः ॥ H.2.33. -हस्तीकृ to take; Pratijñā 3. -हस्तिन् the keeper of a brothel; Dk.2.2.
pratigrahaḥ प्रतिग्रहः 1 Receiving, accepting. -2 Receiving or accepting a donation; अयाचितोपपन्ने तु नास्ति दोषः प्रतिग्रहे -3 The right of receiving or accepting a donation. -4 The right of receiving gifts (which is a peculiar prerogative of Brāhmaṇas); अध्यापनमध्ययनं यजनं याजनं तथा । दानं प्रतिग्रहं चैव ब्राह्मणानामकल्पयत् ॥ Ms.1.88;4.86; Y.1.118 -5 A gift, present, donation; राज्ञः प्रतिग्रहो$यम् Ś.1; Śi.14.35. -6 A receiver (of a gift). -7 Kind or friendly reception; प्रतिग्रहाय पाण्डूनां प्रेषयामास कौरवान् Mb.1.27.12. -8 Favour, grace. -9 Marrying; तत्प्रतिग्रहलाभाय जित्वा भूपान् स्वयंवरे Bm.1.456. -1 Listening to. -11 The rear of an army. -12 A spitting-pot. -13 The sun near the moon's node. -14 a chambervessel (for sick persons). -15 a grasper, seizer; केश- प्रतिग्रहः = barber.
pratinirdeśya प्रतिनिर्देश्य a. That which, though before expressed, is repeated in order to state something more about it; cf. the instance given in K. P.7; उदेति सविता ताम्रस्ताम्र एवास्तमेति च, where ताम्र is repeated to show that the sun that rises red sets also red.
praveśaḥ प्रवेशः 1 Entrance, penetration; पुरप्रवेशाभिमुखो बभूव R.7.1; Ku.3.6. -2 Ingress, access, approach. -3 Entrance on the stage; तेन पात्रप्रवेशश्चेत् S. D.6. -4 The entrance or door (of a house &c.). -5 Income, revenue. -6 Close application (to a pursuit), intentness of purpose. -7 The entrance of the sun into a sign of the zodiac. -8 Coming on, setting in (of night). -9 The syringe of a clyster-pipe. -1 Employment, use. (Proverb-चञ्चुप्रवेशो मुसलप्रवेशः; cf. 'the thin end of the wedge'). -11 Manner, method.
pūrva पूर्व a. (Declined like a pronoun when it implies relative position in time or space, but optionally so in nom. pl.; and abl. and loc. sing.) 1 Being in front of, first, foremost. -2 Eastern, easterly, to the east of; ग्रामात् पर्वतः पूर्वः Sk.; पूर्वापरौ तोयनिधी वगाह्य Ku.1.1. -3 Previous to, earlier than; ब्राह्मणे साहसः पूर्वः Ms.8.276. -4 Old, ancient; पूर्वसूरिभिः R.1.4; इदं कविभ्यः पूर्वेभ्यो नमोवाकं प्रशास्महे U.1.1. -5 Former, previous, anterior, prior, antecedent (opp. उत्तर); in this sense often at the end of comp. and translated by 'formerly.' or 'before'; श्रुतपूर्व &c.; व्यतीता या निशा पूर्वा पौराणां हर्षवर्धिनी Rām.7.37.1. -6 Aforesaid, before-mentioned. -7 Initial. -8 Established, customary, of long standing -9 Early, prime, पूर्वे वयसि Pt.1.165 'in early age or prime of life. -1 Elder (ज्येष्ठ); रामः पूर्वो हि नो भ्राता भविष्यति महीपतिः Rām.2.79.8. -11 (At the end of comp.) Preceded by, accompanied by, attended with; संबन्धमा भाषणपूर्वमाहुः R.2.58; पुण्यः शब्दो मुनिरिति मुहुः केवलं राजपूर्वः Ś2.17; तान् स्मितपूर्वमाह Ku.7.47; बहुमानपूर्वया 5.31; दशपूर्वरथं यमाख्यया दशकण्ठारिगुरुं विदुर्बुधाः R.8.29; so मतिपूर्वम् Ms.11.147 'intentionally', 'knowingly'; 12.89; अबोधपूर्वम् 'unconsciously', Ś.5.2. &c. -र्वः An ancestor, a forefather; पूर्वैः किलायं परिवर्धितो नः R.13.3; पयः पूर्वैः सनिश्वासैः कवोष्णमुपभुज्यते 1.67;5.14; अनुकारिणि पूर्वेषां युक्तरूपमिदं त्वयि Ś.2.17. -र्वम् The forepart; अनवरतधनुर्ज्यास्फालनक्रूरपूर्वम् (गात्रम्) Ś.2.4. -र्वा 1 The east -2 N. of a country to the east of Madhyadeśa. -र्वम् ind. 1 Before (with abl.); मासात् पूर्वम्. -2 Formerly, previously, at first, antecedently, beforehand; तं पूर्वमभिवादयेत् Ms.2.117;3.94;8.25;; R. 12.35; प्रणिपातपूर्वम् K; भूतपूर्वखरालयम् U.2.17 'which formerly was the abode', &c.; समयपूर्वम् Ś.5. 'after a formal agreement.' -3 Immemorially. (पूर्वेण 'in front', 'before', 'to the east of', with gen. or acc.; अद्य पूर्वम् 'till-now', 'hitherto'; पूर्वः -ततः -पश्चात् -उपरि 'firstthen, first-afterwards', 'previously, subsequently', पूर्वम् -अधुना or -अद्य 'formerly-now.' -Comp. -अग्निः the sacred fire kept in the house (आवसथ्य). -अङ्गः the first day in the civil month. -अचलः, -अद्रिः the eastern mountain behind which the sun and moon are supposed to rise. -अधिकारिन् m. the first occupant, a prior owner. -अन्तः the end of a preceding word. -अपर a. 1 eastern and western; कतमो$यं पूर्वापर- समुद्रावगाढः सानुमानालोक्यते Ś.7; पूर्वापरौ तोयनिधी वगाह्य Ku. 1.1. -2 first and last. -3 prior and subsequent, preceding and following. -4 connected with another. (-रम्) 1 what is before and behind. -2 connection; न च पूर्वापरं विद्यात् Ms.8.56. -3 the proof and the thing to be proved. ˚विरोधः inconsistency, incongruity. -अभि- मुख a. turned towards or facing the east. -अभ्यासः former practice or experience. -अम्बुधिः the eastern ocean. -अर्जित a. attained by former works. (-तम्) ancestral property. -अर्धः, -र्धम् 1 the first half; दिनस्य पूर्वार्धपरार्धभिन्ना छायेव मैत्री खलसज्जनानाम् Bh.2.6; समाप्तं पूर्वार्धम् &c. -2 the upper part (of the body); शकुन्तला पूर्वार्धेन शयनादुत्थाय Ś.3; R.16.6. -3 the first half of a hemistich. -अवसायिन् a. what occurs first or earlier; पूर्वावसायिनश्च बलीयांसो जघन्यावसायिभ्यः ŚB. on MS.12.2.34. -अह्णः the earlier part of the day, forenoon; Ms.4. 96,152. श्वः कार्यमद्य कुर्वीत पूर्वाह्णे चापराह्णिकम् (पूर्वाह्णतन, पूर्वा- ह्णिकः, पूर्वाह्णेतन a. relating to the forenoon). -आवेदकः a plaintiff. -आषाढा N. of the 2th lunar mansion consisting of two stars. -इतर a. western. -उक्त, -उदित a. beforementioned, aforesaid, -उत्तर a. north-eastern. (-रा) the north-east. (-रे dual) the preceding and following, antecedent and subsequent. -कर्मन् n. 1 a former act or work. -2 the first thing to be done, a prior work. -3 actions done in a former life. -4 preparations, preliminary arrangements. -कल्पः former times. -कायः 1 the fore-part of the body of animals; पश्चार्धेन प्रविष्टः शरपतनभयाद् भूयसा पूर्वकायम् Ś.1.7. -2 the upper part of the body of men; स्पृशन् करेणानतपूर्वकायम् R.5.32; पर्यङ्कबन्धस्थिरपूर्वकायम् Ku.3.45. -काल a. belonging to ancient times. (-लः) former or ancient times. -कालिक, -कालीन a. ancient. -काष्ठा the east, eastern quarter. -कृत a. previously done. (-तम्) an act done in a former life. -कोटिः f. the starting point of a debate, the first statement or पूर्वपक्ष q. v. -क्रिया preparation. -गा N. of the river Godāvarī. -गङ्गा N. of the river Narmadā; रेवेन्दुजा पूर्वगङ्गा नर्मदा मेकलीद्रिजा Abh. Chin.183. -चोदित a. 1 aforesaid, above-mentioned. -2 previously stated or advanced (as an objection. -ज a. 1 born or produced before or formerly, first-produced, first-born; यमयोः पूर्वजः पार्थः Mb.3.141. 11. -2 ancient, old. -3 eastern. (-जः) 1 an elder brother; अपहाय महीशमार्चिचत् सदसि त्वां ननु भामपूर्वजः; Śi. 16.44; R.15.36. -2 the son of the elder wife. -3 an ancestor, a forefather; स पूर्वजानां कपिलेन रोषात् R.16.34. -4 (pl.) the progenitors of mankind. -5 the manes living in the world of the moon. (-जा) an elder sister. -जन्मन् n. a former birth. (-m.) an elder brother; स लक्ष्मणं लक्ष्मणपूर्वजन्मा (विलोक्य) R.14.44.;15.95. -जातिः f. a former birth. -ज्ञानम् knowledge of a former life. -तापनीयम् N. of the first half of नृसिंहतापनीयोपनिषद्. -दक्षिण a. south-eastern. (-णा) the south-east. -दिक्पतिः Indra, the regent of the east. -दिनम् the forenoon. -दिश् f. the east. -दिश्य a. situated towards the east, eastern. -दिष्टम् the award of destiny. -दृष्ट a. 1 primæval. -2 declared by the ancients; यथा ब्राह्मण- चाण्डालः पूर्वदृष्टस्तथैव सः Ms.9.87. -देवः 1 an ancient deity. -2 a demon or Asura; भूमिदेवनरदेवसंगमे पूर्वदेवरिपुरर्हणां हरिः Śi.14.58. -3 a progenitor (पितृ). -4 (du.) an epithet of Nara-Nārāyaṇa; सव्यसाचिन् महाबाहो पूर्वदेव सनातन Mb.3. 41.35. (com. पूर्वदेव नरनारायणसख). -देवता a progenitor (पितृ) of gods or of men; अक्रोधनाः शौचपराः सततं ब्रह्म- चारिणः । न्यस्तशस्त्रा महाभागाः पितरः पूर्वदेवताः ॥ Ms.3.192. -देशः the eastern country, or the eastern part of India. -द्वार a. favourable in the eastern region. -निपातः the irregular priority of a word in a compound; cf. परनिपात. -निमित्त an omen. -निविष्ट a. made formerly, in past; यस्तु पूर्वनिविष्टस्य तडागस्योदकं हरेत् Ms.9.281. -पक्षः 1 the fore-part or side. -2 the first half of a lunar month; सर्वं पूर्वपक्षापरपक्षाभ्यामभिपन्नम् Bṛi. Up.3.1.5. -3 the first part of an argument, the prima facie argument or view of a question; विषयो विशयश्चैव पूर्वपक्षस्तथोत्तरम्. -4 the first objection to an argument. -5 the statement of the plaintiff. -6 a suit at law. -7 an assertion, a proposition. ˚पादः the plaint, the first stage of a legal proceeding. -पदम् the first member of a compound or sentence. -पर्वतः the eastern mountain behind which the sun is supposed to rise. -पश्चात्, -पश्चिम ind. from the east to the west. -पाञ्चालक a. belonging to the eastern Pañchālas. -पाणिनीयाः m. (pl.) the disciples of Pāṇini living in the east. -पालिन् m. an epithet of Indra. -पितामहः a forefather, an ancestor; अब्रवीद् हि स मां क्रुद्धस्तव पूर्वपितामहः । मूत्रश्लेष्माशनः पाप निरयं प्रतिपत्स्यसे ॥ Mb.12.3.21. -पीठिका introduction. -पुरुषः 1 an epithet of Brahmā. -2 anyone of the first three ancestors, beginning with the father (पितृ, पितामह, and प्रपितामह); Pt.1.89. -3 an ancestor in general. -पूर्व a. each preceding one. (-र्वाः) m. (pl.) forefathers. -प्रोष्ठपदा = पूर्वभाद्रपदा; Mb.13.89.13. -फल्गुनी the eleventh lunar mansion containing two stars. ˚भवः an epithet of the planet Jupiter. -बन्धुः first or best friend; Mk. -भवः a former life. -भागः 1 the forepart. -2 the upper part. -भा(भ)द्रपदा the twentyfifth lunar mansion containing two stars. -भावः 1 priority. -2 prior or antecedent existence; येन सहैव यस्य यं प्रति पूर्वभावो$वगम्यते Tarka K. -3 (Rhet.) disclosing an intention. -भाषिन् a. willing to speak first; hence polite, courteous. -भुक्तिः f. prior occupation or possession; Ms.8.252. -भूत a. preceding, previous. -मध्याह्नः the forenoon. -मारिन् a. dying before; एवंवृत्तां सवर्णां स्त्रीं द्विजातिः पूर्वमारिणीम् (दाहयेत्) Ms.5.167. -मीमांसा 'the prior or first Mīmāṁsā', an inquiry into the first or ritual portion of the Veda, as opposed to the उत्तरमीमांसा or वेदान्त; see मीमांसा. -मुख a. having the face turned towards the east. -याम्य a. south-eastern. -रङ्गः the commencement or prelude of a drama, the prologue; यन्नाठ्यवस्तुनः पूर्वं रङ्गविघ्नोपशान्तये । कुशीलवाः प्रकुर्वन्ति पूर्वरङ्गः स उच्यते ॥ D. R; पूर्वरङ्गं विधायैव सूत्रधारो निवर्तते S. D.283; पूर्वरङ्गः प्रसंगाय नाटकीयस्य वस्तुनः Śi.2.8. (see Malli. thereon). -रागः the dawning or incipient love, love between two persons which springs (from some previous cause) before their meeting; श्रवणाद् दर्शनाद् वापि मिथः संरूढरागयोः । दशाविशेषोयो$प्राप्तौ पूर्वरागः स उच्यते ॥ S. D.214. -रात्रः the first part of the night (from dusk to midnight). -रूपम् 1 indication of an approaching change; an omen. -2 a symptom of occuring disease. -3 the first of two concurrent vowels or consonants that is retained. -4 (in Rhet.) a figure of speech which consists in describing anything as suddenly resuming its former state. -लक्षणम् a symptom of coming sickness. -वयस् a. young. (-n.) youth. -वर्तिन् a. existing before, prior, previous. -वाक्यम् (in dram.) an allusion to former utterance. -वादः the first plea or commencement of an action at law; पूर्ववादं परित्यज्य यो$न्यमालम्बते पुनः । पदसंक्रमणाद् ज्ञेयो हीनवादी स वै नरः ॥ Mitā. -वादिन् m. the complainant or plaintiff. -विद् a. knowing the events of the past; historian; पृथोरपीमां पृथिवीं भार्यां पूर्वविदो विदुः Ms.9.44. -विप्रतिषेधः the conflict of two statements contrary to each other. -विहित a. deposited before. -वृत्तम् 1 a former event; पूर्ववृत्तकथितैः पुराविदः सानुजः पितृ- सखस्य राघवः (अह्यमानः) R.11.1. -2 previous conduct. -वैरिन् a. one who first commences hostilities, an aggressor. -शारद a. relating to the first half of autumn. -शैलः see पूर्वपर्वत. -सक्थम् the upper part of the thigh. P. V.4.98. -संचित a. gathered before (as in former birth); त्यजेदाश्वयुजे मासि मुन्यन्नं पूर्वसंचितम् Ms.6.15. -सन्ध्या daybreak, dawn; रजनिमचिरजाता पूर्वसंध्या सुतैव (अनुपतति) Si.11.4. -सर a. going in front. -सागरः the eastern ocean; स सेनां महतीं कर्षन् पूर्वसागरगामिनीम् R.4.32. -साहसः the first of the three fines; स दाप्यः पूर्वसाहसम् Ms.9.281. -स्थितिः f. former or first state.
puṣpam पुष्पम् [पुष्प् विकाशे-अच्] 1 A flower, blossom; पत्रं पुष्पं फलं तोयं यो मे भक्त्या प्रयच्छति Bg.9.26. -2 The menstrual discharge; as in पुष्पवती q. v. -3 A topaz (पुष्पराग); Rām.2.94.6. -4 A disease of the eyes (albugo). -5 The car or vehicle of Kubera; see पुष्पक. -6 Gallantry, politeness (in love language). -7 Expanding, blooming, blossoming (said to be m. in this sense). -Comp. -अग्रम् pistil. -अञ्जनम् 1 calx of brass used as a collyrium. -2 A white flower-like substance which appears when zinc is mixed with copper and heated for preparing brass. -3 Zinc oxide (Mar. जस्तफूल). -अञ्जलिः a handful of flowers. -अनुगम् a powder promoting menstruation. -अभिषेक = ˚स्नान q. v. -अम्बु the honey of flowers. -अम्बुजम् the sap of flowers. -अवचयः collecting or gathering flowers. -अवचायिन् = पुष्पाजीव q. v. -अस्त्रः an epithet of the god of love. -आकर a. rich or abounding in flowers; मासो नु पुष्पाकरः V.1.9. -आगमः the spring. -आजीवः a florist, garland-maker. -आननः a kind of liquor. -आपीडः a chaplet of flowers. -आयुधः, -इषुः the god of love; पुष्पायुधं दुराधर्षम् Mb.1. 172.17; Mahimna 23. -आसवम् honey. -आसारः a shower of flowers; पुष्पासारैः स्नपयतु भवान् व्योमगङ्गाजलार्द्रैः Me.45. -आस्तरकः, -आस्तरणम् the art of strewing flowers (one of the 64 Kalās). -उद्गमः appearance of flowers. -उद्यानम् a flower-garden. -उपजीविन् m. a florist, gardener, garland-maker. -करण्डकम् N. of the garden of Ujjayinī. -करण्डिनी N. of the city, Ujjayinī. -कालः 1 'flower-time', the spring. -2 the time of the menses. -कासीसम् green (or black) sulphate of iron. -कीटः a large black bee. -केतनः, -केतुः the god of love. (-n.) 1 calx of flowers. -2 vitriol (used as a collyrium). -गण्डिका N. of a kind of farce (in which men act as women and women as men); S. D. -गृहम् a flowerhouse, conservatory. -घातकः the bamboo. -चयः 1 gathering flowers -2 a quantity of flowers. -चापः the god of love. -चामरः a kind of cane. -जम् the juice of flowers. -दः a tree. -दन्तः 1 N. of an attendant of Śiva. -2 N. of the author of the Mahimnastotra. -3 N. of the elephant presiding over the northwest; शुद्धाक्षमैन्द्रं भल्लाटं पुष्पदन्तं तथैव च Hariv. -4 the sun and moon (dual). -दामन् n. a garland of flowers. -द्रवः 1 the sap or exudation of flowers. -2 an infusion of flowers. -द्रुमः a flowering tree. -धः the offspring of an outcast Brāhmaṇa; cf. व्रात्यात् तु जायते विप्रात् पापात्मा भूर्जकण्टकः । आवन्त्यवाटधानौ च पुष्पधः शैख एव च ॥ Ms.1.21. -धनुस्, -धन्वन् m. the god of love; द्रुतमेत्य पुष्पधनुषो धनुषः Śi.9.41; शतमखमुपतस्थे प्राञ्जलिः पुष्पधन्वा Ku.2.64. -धरः a. bearing flowers. -धारणः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -ध्वजः the god of love. -निक्षः a bee. -निर्यासः, -निर्यासकः the sap, nectar, or juice of flowers. -नेत्रम् the tube of a flower. -पत्रिन् m. the god of love. -पथः, -पदवी the vulva. -पुटः the calyx of a flower. -2 (in music) a particular position in dancing. -पुरम् N. of Pāṭaliputra; प्रासादवातायनसंश्रितानां नेत्रोत्सवं पुष्पपुराङ्गनानाम् R.6.24. -प्रचयः, -प्रचायः the plucking or gathering of flowers. -प्रचायिका gathering of flowers. -प्रस्तारः a bed or couch of flowers. -फलः the wood-apple tree. -बटुकः a courtier, gallant; (v. l. for पुष्पनाटक), -बलिः an offering of flowers. -बाणः, -वाणः an epithet of the god of love. -भद्रः a kind of pavilion with 62 columns. -भवः the nectar or juice of flowers. -मञ्जरिका a blue lotus. -माला a garland of flowers. -मासः 1 the month of Chaitra; मम त्वयं विना वासः पुष्पमासे सुदुःसहः Rām.4.1. 41. -2 the spring; अजितभुवनस्तथा हि लेभे सिततुरगे विजयं न पुष्पमासः Ki.1.35. -यमकम् a kind of Yamaka; cf. Bk.1.14. -रजस् n. the pollen. -रथः a carriage for travelling or for pleasure (but not for war); मुख्यः पुष्परथो युक्तः किं न गच्छति ते$ग्रतः Rām.2.26.15. -रसः the nectar or juice of flowers. ˚आह्वयम् honey. -रागः, -राजः a topaz. -रेणुः pollen; वायुर्विधूनयति चम्पकपुष्पपेणून् Kavirahasya; R.1.38. -पुष्परोचनः the Nāgakesara tree. -लावः a flower-gatherer. (-वी) a female flowergatherer; Me.26. -लिक्षः, -लिह् m. a bee. -लिपिः A particular style of writing. -वर्षः, -वर्षणम् a shower of flowers; सुरभि सुरविमुक्तं पुष्पवर्षं पपात R.12.12; पुष्पवर्षो महानभूत् Rām. -वाटिका, -वाटी f. a flower-garden. -वृक्षः a tree bearing flowers. -वृष्टिः f. a shower of flowers; परस्परशरव्राताः पुष्पवृष्टिं न सेहिरे R.12.94. -वेणी a garland of flowers. -शकटिका, -शकटी a heavenly voice, voice from heaven. ˚निमित्तज्ञानम् Knowledge of the omens which result from heavenly voices (one of the 64 Kalās). -शय्या a flowery bed, a couch of flowers. -शरः, -शरासनः, -सायकः the god of love. -समयः the spring. -सारः, -स्वेदः the nectar or honey of flowers. -सारा the holy basil. -सिता a kind of sugar. -स्नानम् a kind of inauguration. -हासः 1 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -2 the blooming of flowers. -हासा a woman in her courses. -हीना a woman past child-bearing.
puṣpavat पुष्पवत् a. 1 Blooming, flowery -2 Set off with flowers. -m. (du.) The sun and moon; तेजस्विनौ विराजेते पुष्पवन्ताविवोदितौ Śiva. B.2.23; रबित्वचन्द्रत्वाभ्यामेकशक्तिमदेव नियतद्विवचनाकाङ्क्षम्. -ती 1 A woman in her courses; पुष्पवत्यपि पवित्रा K. -2 A cow longing for the bull.
rāhuḥ राहुः [रह्-उण् Uṇ.1.3] 1 N. of a demon, son of Viprachitti and Siṁhikā and hence often called Saiṁhikeya; ग्रसते हि तमोपहं मुहुर्ननु राह्वाह्वमहर्पतिं तमः Śi.16.57; विधुरपि विधियोगाद् ग्रस्यते राहुणासौ H. [When the nectar, that was churned out of the ocean, was being served to the gods, Rāhu disguised himself and attempted to drink it along with them. But he was detected by the sun and the moon who informed Viṣṇu of the fraud. Visnu, thereupon, severed his head from the body; but as he had tasted a little quantity of nectar the head became immortal, and is supposed to wreak its vengeance on the sun and moon at the time of conjunction and opposition; cf. Bh.2.34. In astronomy Rāhu is regarded, like Ketu, as one of the nine planets, or only as the ascending node of the moon.] -2 An eclipse, or rather the moment of occultation. -3 Abandoning. -4 One who abandons. -5 The regent of the southwest quarter. -Comp. -उच्छिष्टम्, -उत्सृष्टम् = लशुन q. v. -गतः a. darkened, eclipsed; also राहुग्रस्त. -ग्रसनम्, -ग्रासः, -दर्शनम्, -पीडा, -संस्पर्शः an eclipse (of the sun or moon). -छत्रम् green ginger. -पीडा an eclipse. -भेदिन् m. N. of Viṣṇu. -रत्नम् a kind of gem (= गोमेद). -शत्रुः the moon; राहुशत्रोः प्रियां पत्नीं ...... ग्रहेणाभ्युदितेनैकां रोहिणीमिव पीडिताम् Rām.2.114.3. -सूतकम् 'the birth of Rāhu', i. e. an eclipse (of the sun or moon); Y.1.146; cf. Ms.4.11. -हन् m. N. of Kriṣṇa; L. D. B.
revantaḥ रेवन्तः [रिवेः ज्ञच् Uṇ.3.126] The son of the sun and chief of the गुह्यकs.
ṛta ऋत a. [ऋ-क्त] 1 Proper, right. -2 Honest, true; सर्वमेतदृतं मन्ये यन्मां वदसि केशव Bg.1.14; Ms.8.82. -3 Worshipped, respected. -4 Bright, luminous (दीप्त) -5 Gone, risen, moved, affected by; सुखेन ऋतः = सुखार्तः ऋते च तृतीयासमासे Vārt. on P.VI.1.89; so दुःखः˚, काम˚. -तम् ind. Rightly, properly. -तः 1 A sacrifice. -2 The sun (n. also). -तम् (Not usually found in classical literature) 1 A fixed or settled rule, law (religious). -2 Sacred custom, pious action. यस्तनोति सतां सेतुमृतेनामृतयोनिना Mb.12.47.49. -3 Divine law, divine truth. -4 Absolution. मर्त्यानामृतमिच्छताम् Bhāg.1.16.7. -5 Water; सत्यं त्वा ऋतेन परिषिञ्चामि. -6 Truth (in general), right; ऋतं वदिष्यामि T. Up.1.1.1. ऋतानृते Ms.1.29, 2.52,8.61,14. -7 Truth (personified as an object of worship; in later Sanskrit regarded as a child of Dharma). -8 Livelihood by picking or gleaning grains in a field (as opposed to the cultivation of ground); ऋतमुञ्च्छशिलं वृत्तम् Ms.4.4. -9 The fruit of an action; एकं चक्रं वर्तते द्वादशारं षण्णाभिमेकाक्षमृतस्य धारणम् Mb.1.3. 62. -1 Agreeable speech; ऋतं च सूनृता वाणी कविभिः परिकीर्तिता Bhāg.11.19.38. -11 N. of an Āditya. -12 The Supreme Spirit. (In the Vedas ऋत is usually interpreted by Sāyaṇa to mean 'water', 'sun' or 'sacrifice', where European scholars take it in the sense of 'divine truth', 'faith' &c.). -Comp. -जा, -जात a. Ved. 1 of a true nature, sprung from sacred truth; अब्जा गोजा ऋतजा अद्रिजा ऋतम् Rv.4.4.5. -2 Well-made, excellent; Rv.3.58.8. -जातसत्य a. (Sāy.) born for the sake of sacrifice and having true result. -जित् a. Ved. gaining the right; Vāj.17.83. -ज्ञा a. (Sāy.) knowing the sacrifice, familiar with the sacred law. -द्युम्न a. shining with truth; Rv.9. 113.4. -धामन् a. 1 of a true or pure nature. -2 having an imperishable place. -m. N. of Viṣṇu. -धीति a. Ved. of true disposition; or receiving true praise. -ध्वजः N. of Śiva. -नी a. leading in the right way; Rv.2.27.12. -पर्णः = ऋतुपर्णः q. v. -पेयः a sacrifice lasting one day. -पेशस् a. Ved. having a perfect shape; Rv.5.66.1. -m. one whose form consits of water; i. e. Varuṇa. -प्सुः 1 a god who consumes sacrificial food; Rv.1.18.3. -2 one whose form is truth. -युक्तिः f. true application of a hymn; Rv.1.61.1. -युज् a. going to sacrifice. -वाकः Ved. true speech; Rv.9.113.2. -सद् a. dwelling in the sacrifice or truth; Rv.4.4.5. -m. fire, -सदनम् -नी the right or usual alter. -साप् a. pervading truth; steady in religious belief. -सामन् n. N. of a Sāman; Ārṣeya Br. -स्था a. standing right; स हि दिवः स पृथिव्या ऋतस्था. Av.4.1.4.
samayaḥ समयः 1 Time in general. -2 Occassion, opportunity; न तैः समयमन्विच्छेत् पुरुषो धर्ममाचरन् Ms.1.53. -3 Fit time, proper time or season, right moment; गन्तुं प्रवृत्ते समयं विलङ्घ्य Ku.3.35. -4 An agreement, a compact, contract, an engagement; मिथःसमयात् Ś.5. -5 A convention, conventional usage. -6 An established rule of conduct, a ceremonial custom, usual practice, observance; निह्नवन्ति च ये तेषां समयं सुकृतं च यत् Mb.12. 229.8; निरस्तनारीसमया दुराधयः Ki.1.28; U.1. -7 The convention of poets; (e. g. that persons separated from their beloveds are affected at the sight of clouds.). -8 An appointment, assignation. -9 A condition, stipulation; V.5. -1 A law, rule, regulation; वीराणां समयो हि दारुणरसः स्नेहक्रमं बाधते U.5.19. -11 Direction, order, instruction; precept. -12 Emergency, exigency. -13 An oath; कामं तथा तिष्ठ नरेन्द्र तस्मिन् यथा कृतस्ते समयः सभायाम् Mb.3.183.35. -14 A sign, hint, indication; शौरिसमयनिगृहीतधियः Śi.15.41. -15 Limit, boundary. -16 A demonstrated conclusion, doctrine, tenet; बौद्ध˚, वैशेषिक˚ &c. -17 End, conclusion, termination. -18 Success, prosperity. -19 End of trouble. (समयेन 'on condition, conditionally'.) -Comp. -अध्युषितम् a time at which neither the stars nor the sun is visible; उदिते$नुदिते चैव समयाध्युषिते तथा Ms.2.15. -अनुवर्तिन् a. following established customs. -अनुसारेण, -उचितम् ind. suitably to the occasion, as the occasion demands. -आचारः conventional practice, established usage; अतश्च प्रवज्यासुलभसमयाचारविमुखः Māl.4.6. -क्रिया 1 making an agreement; नारदस्याज्ञया चैव द्रौपद्याः समयक्रिया Mb.1.2.119 'the time-arrangement of Draupadi's conjugal life'. -2 enjoining certain duties; स्थापयेत्तत्र तद्वंश्यं कुर्याच्च समयक्रियाम् Ms.7.22. -3 preparation of an ordeal. -च्युतिः neglect of the right time. -ज्ञ a. knowing the right time. -धर्मः covenant, stipulation. -परि- रक्षणम् observance of a compact, treaty, or agreement; न समयपरिरक्षणं क्षमं ते Ki.1.45. -बन्धन a. bound by an agreement. -भेदः breaking an agreement or engagement, breach of contract. -विद्या astrology; Dk -व्यभि- चारः breaking an agreement, violation or breach of contract. -व्यभिचारिन् a. breaking an agreement; निगृह्य दापयेच्चैनं समयव्यभिचारिणम् Ms.8.22-221.
saṃcāraḥ संचारः 1 Going, movement, travelling or roaming through; स पुनः पार्थसंचारं संचरत्यवनीपतिः K. P.1; सुलभ- पुरुषसंचारे$स्मिन् प्रदेशे Mk.7; R.2.15. -2 Passing through, passage, transit. -3 A course, way, road, pass. -4 A difficult progress or journey. -5 Difficulty, distress. -6 Inciting. -7 Leading, guiding. -8 Transmission, contagion. -9 A gem said to be found in the hood of serpents. -1 The entrance of the sun into a new sign. -11 Infatuating; तथाख्यातविधानं च योगः संचार एव च Mb.12.59.48 (com. संचारः श्रवणदर्शनाभ्यां परमोहनम्). -12 Track (of wild animals). -Comp. -जीविन् a. seeking a living by roaming; L. D. B.
saṃjñā संज्ञा 1 Consciousness, अकरुण पुनः संज्ञाव्याधिं विधाय किमीहसे Māl.9.42; रतिखेदसमुत्पन्ना निद्रा संज्ञाविपर्ययः Ku.6.44. संज्ञा लभ्, आपद् or प्रतिपद् 'to regain or recover one's consciousness, come to one's senses'. -2 Knowledge, understanding; नायका मम सैन्यस्य संज्ञार्थं तान् व्रवीमि ते Bg.1.7; Mb.12.153.63. -3 Intellect, mind; लोकतन्त्रं हि संज्ञाश्च सर्वमन्ने प्रतिष्ठितम् Mb.13.63.5. -4 A hint, sign, token, gesture; मुखापिंतैकाङ्गुलिसंज्ञयैव मा चापलायेति गणान् व्यनैषीत् Ku.3.41; उपलभ्य ततश्च धर्मसंज्ञाम् Bu. Ch.5.21; Bhāg. 6.7.17. -5 A name, designation, an appellation; oft. at the end of comp. in this sense; द्वन्द्वैर्विमुक्ताः सुखदुःखसंज्ञैः Bg.15.5. -6 (In gram.) Any name or noun having a special meaning, a proper name. -7 The technical name for an affix. -8 The Gāyatrī Mantra; see गायत्री. -9 A track, footstep. -1 Direction. -11 A technical term. -12 N. of the daughter of Viśvakarman and wife of the sun, and mother of Yama, Yamī, and the two Aśvins. [A legend relates that संज्ञा on one occasion wished to go to her father's house and asked her husband's permission, which was not granted. Resolved to carry out her purpose, she created, by means of her superhuman power, a woman exactly like herself --who was, as it were, her own shadow (and was therefore called Chhāyā), --and putting her in her own place, went away without the knowledge of the sun. Chhāya bore to the sun three children (see छाया), and lived quite happily with him, so that when Saṁjñā returned, he would not admit her. Thus repudiated and disappointed, she assumed the form of a mare and roamed over the earth. The sun, however, in course of time, came to know the real state of things, and discovered that his wife had assumed the form of a mare. He accordingly assumed the form of a horse, and was united with his wife, who bore to him, two sons--the Aśvinīkumāras or Aśvins q. v.] -Comp. -अधिकारः a leading rule which gives a particular name to the rules falling under it, and which exercises influence over them. -विपर्ययः loss of consciousness; रतिखेदसमुत्पन्ना निद्रा संज्ञाविपर्ययः Ku.6.44. -विषयः an epithet, an attribute. -सुतः an epithet of Saturn. -सूत्रम् any Sūtra which teaches the meaning of a technical term.
saṃkrāntiḥ संक्रान्तिः f. 1 Going together, union. -2 Passage from one point to another, transition. -3 The passage of the sun or any planetary body from one zodiacal sign into another. -4 Transference, giving over (to another); संपातिताः ... पयसो गण्डूषसंक्रान्तयः U.3.16. -5 Transferring or communicating (one's knowledge to another), power of imparting (instruction to another); विवादे दर्शयिष्यन्तं क्रियासंक्रान्तिमात्मनः M.1.19; शिष्टा क्रिया कस्यचिदात्मसंस्था संक्रान्तिरन्यस्य विशेषयुक्ता 1.16. -6 Image, reflection. -7 Depicting.
śaniḥ शनिः [शो-अनि किच्च Tv.] 1 The planet Saturn (the son of the sun and represented as of a black colour or dressed in dark coloured clothes). -2 Saturday. -3 N. of Śiva. -Comp. -चक्रम् Saturn's diagram (used for foretelling). -जम् black pepper. -प्रदोषः a term for the (evening) worship of Śiva performed on the thirteenth day of a lunar fortnight when it falls on a Saturday. -प्रसूः f. an epithet of Chhāyā, wife of the sun; cf. संज्ञा. -प्रियम् a sapphire or emerald. -वारः, -वासरः Saturday.
ṣaṣ षष् num. a. (used in pl., nom. षट्; gen. षण्णाम्) Six; तेषां त्ववयवान् सूक्ष्मान् षण्णामप्यमितौजसाम् Ms.1.16;8.43. -Comp. -अंशः (ष़डंशः) a sixth part. -अक्षीणः (षडक्षीणः) a fish. -अङ्गम् (ष़डङ्गम्) 1 (a) six parts of the body taken collectively : जङ्घे बाहू शिरो मध्यं षडङ्गमिदमुच्यते । (b) The other six parts of the body are 'हृदयशिरःशिखा- नेत्रकवचास्त्राणि' as in Māl.5.2 (नित्यं न्यस्तषडङगचक्रनिहितं हृत्पद्यमध्योदितम्); cf. com. on the verse. -2 the six works auxiliary to the Veda; शिक्षा कल्पो व्याकरणं निरुक्तं छन्दसां चितिः । ज्योतिषामयनं चैव षडङ्गो वेद उच्यते ॥ see वेदाङ्ग also. ˚विद् knowing the six वेदाङ्गs; Ms.3.145. -3 six auspicious things, i. e. the six things obtained from a cow; गोमूत्रं गोमयं क्षीरं सर्पिर्दधि च रोचना । षडङ्गमेतन्माङ्गल्यं पठितं सर्वदा गवाम् ॥ -3 any set of six articles. ˚जत् m. N. of Viṣṇu. -अङ्घ्रिः (षडङ्घ्रिः) a bee; किमिह बहु षडङ्घ्रे गायसि त्वम् Bhāg.1.47.14.; Śi.1.4. -अधिक a. (-षडधिक) exceeded by six; षडधिकदशनाडीचक्रमध्यस्थितात्मा Māl.5.1. -अभिज्ञः (षडभिज्ञः) a Buddhist deified saint. -अशीत (षडशीत) eighty-sixth. -अशीतिः f. (-ष़डशीतिः) 1 eighty-six. -2 N. of the four passages of the sun from one zodiacal sign to the other; L. D. B. -अष्टकम् (in astr.) a particular Yoga. -अहः (ष़डहः) a period of six days. -आननः, -वक्त्रः, -वदनः, (षडाननः, षड्वक्त्रः, षड्वदनः) epithets of Kārtikeya; षडाननापीतपयोधरासु नेता चमूनामिव कृत्तिकासु R.14.22. -आम्नायः (षडाम्नायः) the six-fold Tantra. -ऊर्मिः the six waves of existence. -ऊषणम् (ष़डूषणम्) six spices taken collectively; पञ्चकोलं समरिचं षडूषणमुदाहृतम्. -ऋतुः m. pl. the six seasons (i. e. वसन्त, ग्रीष्म, वर्षा, शरद्, हेमन्त and शिशिर). -कर्ण a. (-षट्कर्ण) heard by six ears; i. e. by a third person other than the speaker and the person spoken to; told to more than one listener (as a counsel, secret &c.); षट्कर्णो भिद्यते मन्त्रः Pt.1.99. (-र्णः) a kind of lute. -कर्मन् n. (षट्कर्मन्) 1 the six acts or duties enjoined on a Brāhmaṇa; they are अध्यापनमध्ययनं यजनं याजनं तथा । दानं प्रतिग्रहश्चैव षट्कर्माण्यग्र- जन्मनः ॥ Ms.1.75. -2 the six acts allowable to a Brāhmaṇa for his subsistence:- उच्छं प्रतिग्रहो भिक्षा वाणिज्यं पशुपालनम् । कृषिकर्म तथा चेति षट्कर्माण्यग्रजन्मनः ॥. -3 the six acts that may be performed by means of magic :- शान्ति, वशीकरण, स्तम्भन, विद्वेष, उच्चाटन and मरण. -4 the six acts belonging to the practice of Yoga :- धौतिर्वस्ती तथा नेती नौलिकी (नौलिकः) त्राटकस्तथा । कपालभाती चैतानि षट्कर्माणि समाचरेत् ॥ (-m.) 1 a Brāhmaṇa skilled in the above six acts. -2 one well-versed in the Tantra magical rites. -कोण a. (-षट्कोण) hexangular. (-णम्) 1 a hexagon. -2 the thunderbolt of Indra. -3 a diamond. -गया the sixfold gayā; गयागजो गयादित्यो गायत्री च गदाधरः । गया गयासुरश्चैव षड्गया मुक्तिदायकाः ॥ -गवम् (षड्गवम् 1 a team or yoke of six oxen. -2 a yoke of six (sometimes after the names of other animals); i. e. हस्ति˚, अश्व˚ 'six elephants, horses &c.'. -गवीय a. drawn by six oxen; न यद्वहेच्छकटं षड्गवीयम् Mb.8.76.17. -गुण a. (-षड्गुण) 1 sixfold. -2 having six attributes. (-णम्) 1 an assemblage of six qualities. -2 the six expedients to be used by a king in foreign politics; see under गुण (21); cf. षाड्गुण्य also. -ग्रन्थः a kind of Karañja tree. -ग्रन्थि n. (-षड्ग्रन्थि) the root of long pepper. -ग्रन्थिका (षड्- ग्रन्थिका) zedoary (शठी). -चक्रम्, (षट्चक्रम्) the six mystical circles of the body, i. e. मूलाधार, स्वाधिष्ठान, मणिपूर, अनाहत, विशुद्ध and आज्ञाख्य. -चत्वारिंशत् (षट्चत्वारिंशत्) forty-six. -चरणः (षट्चरणः) -1 a bee. -2 a locust. -3 a louse. -जः, (ष़ड्जः) the fourth (or first according to some) of the seven primary notes of the Indian gamut; so called because it is derived from the six organs : नासां कण्ठमुरस्तालु जिह्वां दताञ्श्च संस्पृशन् । षड्जः सञ्जायते (षढ्भ्यः संञ्जायते) यस्मात्तस्मात् षड्ज इति स्मृतः ॥ it is said to resemble the note of peacocks; षड्जं रौति मयूरस्तु Nārada; षड्जसंवादिनीः केकाः द्विधा भिन्नाः शिखण्डिभिः R.1.39. -तन्त्री N. of the six philosophical systems. -त्रिंशत् f. (-षट्त्रिंशत्) thirty-six; (-षट्रत्रिंश a. thirtysixth). -तिलिन् m. one performing six acts with sesamum seeds; तिलोद्वतीं तिलस्नायी तिलहोमी तिलप्रदः । तिलभुक् तिलवापी च षट्तिली नावसीदति ॥ -दर्शनम् (षड्दर्शनम्) the six principal systems of Hindu philosophy; they are: सांख्य, योग, न्याय, वैशेषिक, मीमांसा and वेदान्त. (-नः) one conversant with the above six systems. -दीर्घः the six long vowels : आ, ई, ऊ, ऐ, औ. -दुर्गम्, (षड्दुर्गम्) the six kinds of forts taken collectivelly; धन्वदुर्गं महीदुर्गं गिरिदुर्गं तथैव च । मनुष्यदुर्गं मृद्दुर्गं वनदुर्गमिति क्रमात् ॥ -नवतिः f. (-षण्णवतिः) ninety-six. -पञ्चाशत् f. (-षट्पञ्चाशत्) fifty-six. -पदः (षट्पदः) 1 a bee; न पङ्कजं तद्यदलीनषट्पदं न षट्पदो$सौ न जुगुञ्ज यः कलम् Bk.2.19; Ku.5.9; R.6.69. -2 a louse. -3 a verse consisting of six padas. ˚अथितिः 1 the mango tree. -2 the Champaka tree. ˚आनन्दवर्धनः the Aśoka or Kiṅkirāta tree. ˚ज्य a. having bees for the bow-string (as the bow of Cupid); प्रायश्चापं न वहति भयान्मन्मथः षट्पदज्यम् Me.75. ˚प्रियः the tree called नाग- केशर. -पदी (षट्पदी) 1 a stanza consisting of six lines. -2 a female bee. -3 a louse. -4 the six states ('यो$शनायापिपासे शोकं मोहं जरां मृत्युमत्येति' इति श्रुत्युक्ताः Mb. 3.314.9 Com.):-- hunger, thrist, sorrow, disordered intellect, old age and death; other version is :-- कामक्रोधौ लोभमोहौ मदमानौ च षट्पदी ।. -पादः (षट्पादः) a bee. -प्रज्ञः, (षट्प्रज्ञः) 1 one who is well acquainted with six subjects i. e. the four Puruṣārthas or objects of human existence, the nature of the world, and the nature of the Supreme Sprit; धर्मार्थकाममोक्षेषु लोक- तत्त्वार्थयोरपि । षट्सु प्रज्ञा तु यस्यासौ षट्प्रज्ञः परिकीर्तितः ॥ -2 a lustful or licentious man. -3 a good-hearted neighbour. -बिन्दुः (षड्बिन्दुः ) an epithet of Viṣṇu. -भागः (षड्भागः) a sixth part, one-sixth; तपःषड्भागमक्षय्यं ददत्यारण्यका हि नः Ś.2.14; Ms.7.131;8.33. -भाववादिन् a maintainer of the theory of the six भावs (i. e. द्रव्य, गुण, कर्मन्, सामान्य, विशेष and समवाय). -भुज a. (-षड्भुज) 1 six-armed. -2 six-sided, hexagonal. (-जः) a hexagon. (-जा) 1 an epithet of Durgā. -2 the watermelon. -मतस्थापकः (षण्मतस्थापकः) N. of Śaṁkarāchārya. -मासः (षण्मासः) a period of six months. ˚निचय a. one who has a store (of food) sufficient for six months; Ms.6.18. -मासिक a. (-षण्मासिक) half-yearly, occurring every six months. -मुखः (षण्मुखः) an epithet of Kārtikeya; स गुणानां बलानां च षण्णां षण्मुख- विक्रमः R.17.67; Mv.1.33. (खा) a water-melon. -रसम्, -रसाः (m. pl.) (-षड्रसम् &c.) the six flavours taken collectively; see under रस. -रात्रम् (षड्रात्रम्) a period of six nights. -रेखा, (षड्रेखा) a water-melon. -वर्गः (षड्वर्गः) 1 an aggregate of six things. -2 especially, the six enemies of mankind; (also called षड्रिपु); कामः क्रोधस्तथा लोभो मदमोहौ च मत्सरः; कृतारिषड्वर्गजयेन Ki.1 9; व्यजेष्ठ षड्वर्गम् Bk.1.2. -3 the five senses and Manas. -र्विशम् N. of a Brāhmaṇa belonging to the Sāma Veda. -विंशतिः f. (-षड्विंशतिः)twenty-six; (-षड्विंश twentysixth). -विध (षड्विध) a. of six kinds, sixfold; षड्विधं बलमादाय प्रतस्थे दिग्जिगीषया R.4.26. -शास्त्रिन् m. one conversant with the six Śāstras or darśanas. -षष्टिः f. (-षट्षष्टिः) sixty-six. -सप्ततिः (षट्सप्ततिः) seventy-six.
sāvarṇiḥ सावर्णिः A metronymic of the eighth Manu (son of the sun by Savarṇā); सावर्णिः सूर्यतनयो यो मनुः कथ्यते$ष्टमः Mārk. P.
sopaplava सोपप्लव a. 1 Afflicted with any great calamity. -2 Invaded or overrun by enemies. -3 Eclipsed (as the sun or moon); ब्रह्मघोषैर्विरहितः पर्वतो$यं न शोभते । रजसा तमसा चैव सोमः सोपप्लवो यथा ॥ Mb.12.328.13.
sparśaḥ स्पर्शः 1 [स्पर्श्, स्पृश् वा-घञ्] Touch, contact (in all senses); स्पर्शान् कृत्वा बहिर्बाह्यांश्चक्षुश्चैवान्तरे भ्रुवोः Bg.5.27; तदिदं स्पर्शक्षमं रत्नम् Ś.1.28;2.7. -2 Contact (in astr.). -3 Conflict, encounter. -4 Feeling, sensation, the sense of touch. -5 The quality of touch or tangibility, touch, the object or विषय of skin (त्वच्); स्पर्शगुणो वायुः T. S.; स्पर्शनं स्पर्शती स्पर्शान् बुद्धिर्विक्रियते$सकृत् Mb.12.285.2. -6 That which affects or influences, affection, seizure. -7 Disease, illness, disorder, distemper. -8 A consonant of any of the five classes of letters (from क् to म्); कादयो मान्ताः स्पर्शाः; स्पर्शस्तस्याभवज्जीवः स्वरो देह उदाहृतः Bhāg.3.12.46. -9 A gift, donation, presentation. -1 Air, wind. -11 The sky. -12 Sexual union; स्त्रीपुंसयोः संप्रयोगे स्पर्शः कस्याधिको भवेत् Mb.13.12.1. -13 A secret spy. -र्शा An unchaste woman. -Comp. -अज्ञ a. senseless, insensible. -अनुकल a. pleasant to the touch, cooling. -आनन्दा an apsaras. -इन्द्रियम् the organ or sense of touch. -उदय a. followed by a consonant. -उपलः, -मणिः a kind of jewel considered to be the same as 'philosopher's stone'. ˚मणिप्रभवम् gold; L. D. B. -क्लिष्ट a. painful to the touch. -क्षम a. capable of touch, tangible. -गुण a. having the quality of tangibility (as air); बलवाञ्जायते वायुः स वै स्पर्शगुणो मतः Ms.1.76. -तन्मात्रम् the subtile element of tangibility. -द्वेषः sensitiveness to touch. -यज्ञः an offering consisting in the mere touch of the things offered; स्पर्शयज्ञं करिष्यामि विधिरेष सनातनः Mb.14.92.19. -रसिक a. sensual, lustful. -लज्जा, -संकोचपर्णिका the sensitive plant (Mar. लाजाळू). -वेद्य a. to be apprehended by the sense of touch. -संचारिन् a. contagious, infectious. -स्नानम् ablution at the entrance of a sun or moon into an eclipse. -स्पन्दः, -स्यन्दः a frog.
sūryaḥ सूर्यः [सरति आकाशे सूर्यः, यद्वा सुवति कर्मणि लोकं प्रेरयति; cf. Sk. on P.III.1.114] 1 The sun; सूर्ये तपत्यावरणाय दृष्टेः कल्पेत लोकस्य कथं तमिस्रा R.5.13. [In mythology, the sun is regarded as a son of Kaśyapa and Aditi. He is represented as moving in a chariot drawn by seven horses, with Aruṇa for his charioteer. He is also represented as all-seeing, the constant beholder of the good and bad deeds of mortals. Samjñā (or Chhāyā or Aśvinī) was his principal wife, by whom he had Yama and Yamunā, the two Aśvins and Saturn. He is also described as having been the father of Manu Vaivasvata, the founder of the solar race of kings.] -2 The tree called Arka. -3 The number 'twelve' (derived from the twelve forms of the sun). -4 The swallow-wort. -5 N. of Śiva. -Comp. -अपायः sunset; सूर्यापाये न खलु कमलं पुष्यति स्वामभिख्याम् Me.82. -अर्ष्यम् the presentation of an offering to the sun. -अश्मन् m. the sun-stone. -अश्वः a horse of the sun. -अस्तम् sunset. -आतपः heat or glare of the sun, sunshine. -आलोकः sunshine. -आवर्तः 1 a kind of sun-flower. -2 a head-ache which increases or diminishes according to the course of the sun (Mar. अर्धशिशी). -आह्व a. named after the sun. (-ह्वः) the gigantic swallow-wort. (-ह्वम्) copper. -इन्दुसंगमः the day of the new moon (the conjunction of the sun and moon); दर्शः सूर्येन्दुसंगमः Ak. -उत्थानम्, -उदयः sunrise. -ऊढः 1 'brought by the sun', an evening guest; संप्राप्तो यो$तिथिः सायं सूर्योढो गृहमेधिनाम् । पूजया तस्य देवत्वं लभन्ते गृहमेधिनः ॥ Pt.1.17. -2 the time of sunset. -उपस्थानम्, -उपासना attendance upon or worship of the sun; V.1. -कमलम् the sun-flower, a heliotrope. -कान्तः 1 the sun-stone, sun-crystal; स्पर्शानुकूला इव सूर्यकान्तास्तदन्यतेजो$भिभवाद्वमन्ति । Ś.2.7. -2 a crystal. -कान्ति f. 1 sun-light. -2 a particular flower. -3 the flower of sesamum. -कालः day-time, day. ˚अनलचक्रम् a particular astrological diagram for indicating good and bad fortune. -ग्रहः 1 the sun. -2 an eclipse of the sun. -3 an epithet of Rāhu and Ketu. -4 the bottom of a water-jar. -ग्रहणम् a solar eclipse. -चन्द्रौ (also सूर्याचन्द्रमसौ) m. du. the sun and moon. -जः, -तनयः, पुत्रः 1 epithets of Sugrīva; यो$हं सूर्यसुतः स एष भवतां यो$यं स वत्सो$ङ्गदः Mv. 5.55. -2 of Karṇa. -3 of the planet Saturn. -4 of Yama. -जा, -तनया the river Yamunā. -तेजस् n. the radiance or heat of the sun. -द्वारम् the way of the sun; उत्तरायण q. v.; सूर्यद्वारेण ते विरजाः प्रयान्ति यत्रामृतः स पुरुषो ह्याव्ययात्मा Muṇḍ.1.2.11. -नक्षत्रम् that constellation (out of the 27) in which the sun happens to be. -पर्वन् n. a solar festival, (on the days of the solstices, equinoxes, eclipses &c.). -पादः a sun-beam. -पुत्री 1 lightning. -2 the river Yamunā. -प्रभव a. sprung or descended from the sun; क्व सूर्यप्रभवो वंशः क्व चाल्पविषया मतिः R.1.2. -फणिचक्रम् = सूर्यकालानलचक्रम् q. v. above. -बिम्बः the disc of the sun. -भक्त a. one who worships the sun. (-क्तः) the tree Bandhūka or its flower. -मणिः the sunstone. -मण्डलम् the orb of the sun. -मासः the solar month. -यन्त्रम् 1 a representation of the sun (used in worshipping him). -2 an instrument used in taking solar observations. -रश्मिः a ray of the sun, sun-beam; Ms.5.133. -लोकः the heaven of the sun. -वंशः the solar race of kings (who ruled at Ayodhyā). -वर्चस् a. resplendent as the sun. -वारः Sunday. -विलोकनम् the ceremony of taking a child out to see the sun when four months old; cf. उपनिष्क्रमणम्. -संक्रमः, -संक्रातिः f. the sun's passage from one zodiacal sign to another. -संज्ञम् saffron. -सारथिः an epithet of Aruṇa. -सिद्धान्तः a celebrated astronomical work (supposed to have been revealed by the god Sun). -स्तुतिः f., -स्तोत्रम् a hymn addressed to the sun. -हृदयम् N. of a hymn to the sun.
svar स्वर् ind. 1 Heaven, paradise; as in स्वर्लोक, स्वर्वेश्या, स्वर्भानुः, &c.; त्वं कर्मणां मङ्गलमङ्गलानां कर्तुः स्म लोकं तनुषे स्वः परं वा Bhāg.4.6.45. -2 The heaven of Indra and the temporary abode of the virtuous after death. -3 The sky, ether. -4 The space above the sun or between the sun and the polar star. -5 The third of the three Vyāhṛitis, pronounced by every Brāhmaṇa in his daily prayers; see व्याहृति. -6 Radiance, splendour. -7 Water. ind. (used in nom., acc., gen., or loc. case); स्वलंकृतैर्भ- वनवरैविभूषितां पुरंदरः स्वरिव यथामरावतीम् Rām.7.11.5; साधोरपि स्वः खलु गामिताधो गमी स तु स्वर्गमितः प्रयाणे N.6. 99 (herein abl. case, स्वर् = स्वर्गात्). -Comp. -अतिक्रमः reaching Vaikuṇṭha (beyond heaven). -आपगा, -गङ्गा 1 the celestial Ganges. -2 the galaxy or milky way. -इङ्गणः a strong wind. -गत a. dead. -गतिः f., -गमनम् 1 going to heaven, future felicity. -2 death. -गिरिः Sumeru. -जित् m. a kind of sacrifice; यजेत वाश्वमेधेन स्वर्जिता गोसवेन वा Ms.11.74. -तरुः (स्वस्तरुः) a tree of paradise. -दृश् m. 1 an epithet of Indra. -2 of Agni. -3 of Soma. -धुनी, -नदी (forming स्वर्णदी) the celestial Ganges; सद्यः पुनन्त्युपस्पृष्टाः स्वर्धुन्यापोनुसेवया Bhāg.1.1.15. -भानवः a kind of precious stone. -भानुः N. of Rāhu; तुल्ये$पराधे स्वर्भानुर्भानुमन्तं चिरेण यत् । हिमांशुमाशु ग्रसते तन्म्रदिम्नः स्फुटं फलम् Ś.i.2.49. ˚सूदनः the sun. -मणिः the sun. -मध्यम् the central point of the sky, the zenith. -यात a. dead. -यातृ a. dying. -यानम् dying, death. -योषित a celestial woman, apsaras. -लोकः the celestial world, heaven. -वधूः f. a celestial damsel, an apsaras. -वापी the Ganges. -वारवामभ्रू (see -वधू above); स्वर्वारवामभ्रुवः नृत्यं चक्रुः Cholachampū p.22, Verse 51. -वेश्या 'a courtezan of heaven', a celestial nymph, an apsaras. -वैद्य m. du. an epithet of the two Aśvins. -षा 1 an epithet of Soma. -2 of the thunderbolt of Indra. -सिन्धु = स्वर्गङ्गा q. v.
tārā तारा 1 A star or planet in general; हंसश्रेणीषु तारासु R.4.19; Bh.1 15. -2 A fixed star; Y.3.172; R. 6.22. -3 The pupil of the eye, the eye-ball; कान्तामन्तः- प्रमोदादभिसरति मदभ्रान्ततारश्चकोरः Māl.9.3; विस्मयस्मेरतारैः 1.28; Ku.3.47. -4 A pearl. -5 (in Sāṅkhya Phil.) One of the 8 Siddhis. -6 (in music) N. of a Rāga of six notes. -7 A kind of perfume. -8 (a) N. of the wife of Vāli, king of the monkeys, and mother of Aṅgada. She in vain tried to dissuade her husband Vāli from fighting with Rāma and Sugrīva, and married Sugrīva after Vāli had been killed by Rāma. (b) N. of the wife of Bṛihaspati, the preceptor of the gods. She was on one occasion carried off by Soma (the moon) who refused to deliver her up to her husband when demanded. A fierce contest then ensued, and Brahmā had at last to compel Soma to restore her to her husband. Tārā gave birth to a son named Budha who became the ancestor of the Lunar race of kings (see Bhāg.9.14). (c) N. of the wife of Hariśchandra and mother of Rohidāsa (also called Tārāmatī). (d) N. of a Buddha goddess. (e) N. of a Śakti; Jaina. -Comp. -अधिपः 1 the moon; Ku.7.48; Bh.1.71. -2 Śiva. -3 Bṛihaspati. -4 Vāli. -5 Sugrīva. -आपीडः the moon. -आभः quicksilver. -ग्रहः one of the 5 lesser planets exclusive of the sun and moon; Bṛi.S.69.1. -पतिः 1 the moon R.13.76. -2 Vāli. -3 Bṛihaspati. -4 Śiva. -पथः the atmosphere, firmament, sky. -प्रमाणम् sidereal measure, sidereal time. -भूषा the night. -मण्डलम् 1 the starry region, the zodiac. -2 the pupil of the eye. -3 (लः) A kind of Śiva temple. -मृगः the constellation मृगशिरस् -मैत्रकम् 'the friendship of the stars', spontaneous or unaccountable love; Māl.7.4; U.5. -वर्षम् falling stars.
ṭha ठः 1 An imitative sound, as of a metallic jar rolling down steps; रामाभिषेके मदविह्वलायाः कक्षा- च्च्युतो हेमघटस्तरुण्याः । सोपानमार्गे प्रकरोति शब्दं ठठं ठठं ठं ठठठं ठठं ठः Subhāṣ. -2 A loud noise. -3 The disc of the sun or moon. -4 A circle, globe. -5 A cypher. -6 A place resorted to or held sacred by all. -7 An object of sense. -8 An idol, deity. -9 An epithet of Śiva.
tvaṣṭṛ त्वष्टृ m. [त्वक्ष्-तृच्] 1 A carpenter, builder, workman, त्वष्ट्रेव विहितं यन्त्रम् Mb.12.33.22. -2 Viśvakarman, the architect of the gods. [Tvaṣtṛi is the Vulcan of the Hindu mythology. He had a son named Triśiras and a daughter called संज्ञा, who was given in marriage to the sun. But she was unable to bear the severe light of her husband, and therefore Tvaṣtṛi mounted the sun upon his lathe, and carefully trimmed off a part of his bright disc; cf. आरोप्य चक्रभ्रमिमुष्णतेजास्त्वष्ट्रेव यत्नो- ल्लिखितो विभाति R.6.32. The part trimmed off is said to have been used by him in forming the discus of Viṣṇu, the Triśūla of Śiva, and some other weapons of the gods.] पर्वतं चापि जग्राह क्रुद्धस्त्वष्टा महाबलः Mb.1.227. 34. -3 Prajāpati (the creator); यां चकार स्वयं त्वष्टा रामस्य महिषीं प्रियाम् Mb.3.274.9. -4 Āditya, a form of the sun; निर्भिन्ने अक्षिणी त्वष्टा लोकपालो$विशद्विभोः Bhāg.3.6.15.
udaya उदय a. (In gram.) Following, coming after or upon (as a letter, accent &c.); उदयशब्दः परशब्दसमानार्थः प्रातिशाख्येषु प्रसिद्धः. -यः 1 Rise (fig. also); चन्द्रोदय इवोदधेः R.12.36,2.73; going upwards, ascending (as of the sun, stars &c.). -2 (a) Rising up, coming forth; द्रविण˚ acquisition of wealth; Pt.2; so भाग्य˚ dawn of fortune; Amaru.25; स्वगुणोदयेन Pt.1.94. (b) Appearance, becoming visible, production; घनोदयः प्राक् Ś.7.3; मेघ˚ Ku.6.54; हसितमन्यनिमित्तकृतोदयम् Ś.2.12 raised from some other cause; Amaru.88; Ś.7.8; फलोदय R.1.5; rising or accomplishment of the fruit; Ms.3.169; K.3.18. -3 Creation (opp. प्रलय); यः सिन्धूनामुपोदये Rv.8.41.2. यौ तौ स्वप्नावबोधौ तौ भूतानां प्रलयो- दयौ Ku.2.8. -4 The eastern mountain (behind which the sun is supposed to rise); ददर्श पिङ्गाधिपतेरमात्यं वाता- त्मजं सूर्यमिवोदयस्थम् Rām.5.31.18. यौर्यत्र दृश्यते भास्वान्स तेषामुदयः स्मृतः; उदयगूढशशाङ्कमरीचिभिः V.3.6. -5 Advance- ment, prosperity, rise; (opp. व्यसन), तेजोद्वयस्य युगपद्- व्यसनोदयाभ्याम् Ś.4.2; उदये मदावाच्यमुञ्झता R.8.84; K.5; importance, celebrity; ˚उन्मुखे त्वयि R.11.73. -6 Elevation, exaltation, rise; growth; उदयमस्तमयं च रघू- द्वहात् R.9.9; तमुदयाय नवा नवयौवना 7; आत्मोदयः परग्लानिः Śi 2.3,11.6. -7 Result, consequence; असुखोदयं कर्म Ms.4.7; Amaru.47; following; नोदात्तस्वरितोदयम् P.VIII.4.67. -8 Accomplishment, fulfilment; उपस्थितो- दयम् R.3.1; प्रारम्भसदृशोदयः 1.15. -9 Profit, advantage. -1 Income, revenue; Ms.7.55; Y.2.43. -11 Interest, consideration paid for the use of money; Y.2.67,146. -12 Light, splendour. -13 Outlet, exit. -14 Beginning; अभिगम्योदयं तस्य कार्यस्य प्रत्यवेदयत् Mb.3.282.22. -15 Efficacy, influence; पर्याप्तः परवीरघ्न यशस्यस्ते बलोदयः Rām. 5.56.11. -16 Birthday celebration; हस्ते गृहीत्वा सहराम- मच्युतं नीत्वा स्ववाटं कृतवत्यथोदयम् Bhāg.1.11.2. -17 The first lunar mansion; the orient sine. -Comp. -अचलः, -अद्रिः, -गिरिः, -पर्वतः, -शैलः the eastern mountain behind which the sun, moon &c are supposed to rise; उदयगिरिवनालीबालमन्दारपुष्पम् Udb.; श्रितोदयाद्रेरभिसा- यमुच्चकैः Śi.1.16; तत उदयगिरेरिवैक एव Māl.2.1. -इन्दुः The town इन्द्रप्रस्थ; पुरे कुरूणामुदयेन्दुनाम्नि Mb.7.23.29. -उन्मुख a. About to rise, expecting prosperity. -क्रमः Gradual rise; नाडीनाम् Māl.5.2. by gradually inflating or filling with wind the Nādīs, (as in the act of restraining the wind). -ज्या f. See उदय (17). -पुरम् N. of the capital of Mārwār. -प्रस्थः the plateau of the mountain behind which the sun is supposed to rise. -प्राणः (pl.) A particular measure of time. -राशिः The constellation in which the planet is seen when on the horizon.
uddānam उद्दानम् [दो बन्धने ल्युट्] 1 Binding, confinement; उद्दाने क्रियमाणे तु मत्स्यानां तत्र रज्जुभिः Mb.12.137.14. -2 Taming, subduing. -3 The middle, the waist. -4 A fire-place. -5 The submarine fire. -6 Entrance of the sun into a zodiacal sign. (संक्रान्त).
upadhūpita उपधूपित a. 1 Fumigated. -2 Being at the point of death; -3 Suffering extreme pain. -तः Death. -ता, उपधूमिता The quarter of the heavens to which the sun is proceeding.
upadṛś उपदृश् a. Seeing, witnessing (as the sun and moon). f. Aspect, view (Ved.).
upaplavaḥ उपप्लवः 1 Misfortune, evil, calamity, distress, adversity; अथ मदनवधूरुपप्लवान्तं ... परिपालयाम्बभूव Ku.4.46; जीवन्पुनः शश्वदुपप्लवेभ्यः प्रजाः पासि R.2.48; -2 (a) An unluky accident, injury, trouble; कच्चिन्न वाय्वादिरुपप्लवो वः R.5.6; Me.17. (b) An obstacle, impediment; तौ (अर्थकामौ) हि तत्त्वावबोधस्य दुरुच्छेदावुपप्लवौ Ki.11.2. -3 Oppression, harassing, troubling; उपप्लवाय लोकानां धूमकेतुरिवोत्थितः Ku. 2.32. -4 Danger, fear; see उपप्लविन् below. -5 Agitation, perturbation; इन्द्रिय˚ K.146. -6 A portent or natural phenomenon foreboding evil. -7 Particularly, an eclipse of the sun or moon; चन्द्रमिवोपप्लवान्मुक्तम् V.I.11. -8 N. of Rāhu, the ascending node, केतूपप्लवभौममन्दगतयः षष्ठे तृतीये शुभाः. -9 Anarchy. -1 N. of Śiva. -11 Doubt, scepticism (with Buddhists). -12 Loss, absence; मायया विभ्रमच्चित्तो न वेद स्मृत्युपप्लवात् Bhāg.1.84.25.
uparāgaḥ उपरागः 1 An eclipse of the sun or moon; उपरागान्ते शशिनः समुपगता रोहिणी योगम् Ś.7.22; Śi.2.45. -2 Hence, Rāhu or the ascending node. -3 Redness, red colour, colour; कोपोपरागजनिताम् Ratn.3.14; Mk.4; कलहकोप˚ Māl.9. -4 A calamity, affliction, injury; blighting influence; मृणालिनी हैममिवोपरागम् R.16.7. -5 Misbehaviour, ill-conduct. -6 Reproach, blame, abuse.
uparakta उपरक्त p. p. 1 Afflicted, overtaken by calamity, distressed. -2 Eclipsed; K.314. -3 Tinged, coloured; द्विषद्द्वेषोपरक्ताङ्गसङ्गिनीः Śi.2.18. -क्तः 1 The sun or moon in eclipse. -2 Rāhu.
upasṛṣṭa उपसृष्ट p. p. 1 Joined, connected with, accompanied by; किं क्षत्रबन्धून्कलिलोपसृष्टान् Bhāg.1.16.23. -2 Seized or possessed by (a demon or evil spirit); उपसृष्टा इव क्षुद्राधिष्ठितभवनाः K.17. -3 Troubled, affected, injured; (उपसृष्टः परेणेति मूर्च्छितो गदया हतः Bhāg.1.76.33, रोगो- पसृष्टतनुर्दुर्वसतिं मुमुक्षुः R.8.94; K.289. -4 Eclipsed; Mb.13.14.18; Ms.4.37. -5 Furnished with an उपसर्ग (as a root); क्रुधद्रुहोरुपसृष्टयोः कर्म P.I.4.38. -6 Let loose, thrown off; अश्वत्थाम्नोपसृष्टेन ब्रह्मशीर्ष्णोरुतेजसा । उत्तराया हतो गर्भ ईशेनाजीवितः पुनः Bhāg.1.12.1. -8 Ruined; कालोपसृष्टनिगमावन आत्तयोगमायाकृतिं परमहंसगतिं नताः स्म Bhāg. 1.83.4. -ष्टः The sun or moon when eclipsed. -ष्टम् Sexual union.
upasūryakam उपसूर्यकम् The disc of the sun or its halo. -कः A fire-fly.
uttara उत्तर a. [उद्-तरप्] 1 Being or produced in the north, northern (declined like a pronoun). -2 Upper, higher P.I.1.34 (opp. अधर); उत्तरे-अधरे दन्ताः Śat. Br.; अवनतोत्तरकायम् R.9.6; P.II.2.1. -3 (a) Later-latter, following, subsequent (opp. पूर्व); पूर्वमेघः, उत्तरमेघः, ˚मीमांसा; उत्तरार्धः &c. ˚रामचरितम् later adventures of Rāma U.1.2; पूर्वः उत्तरः former-latter H.1.9; एतानि मान्यस्थानानि गरीयो यद्यदुत्तरम् Ms.2.136. (b) Future; concluding; ˚कालः subsequent time; ˚फलम्; ˚वचनम् a reply. -4 Left (opp. दक्षिण). -5 Superior, chief, excellent; dominant, power- ful. आनयेङ्गुदिपिण्याकं चीरमाहर चोत्तरम् Rām.2.13.2; वाद्यमानेषु तूर्येषु मल्लतारोत्तरेषु च Bhāg.1.42.36. -6 Exceeding, transgressing, beyond; तर्कोत्तराम् Mv.2.6. -7 More, more than (generally as the last member of a comp. with numerals); षडुत्तरा विंशतिः 26; अष्टोत्तरं शतं 18; दशनागबलाः केचित् केचिद्दशगुणोत्तराः Rām.5.43.22. -8 Accompanied or attended with, full of, consisting chiefly of, followed by (at the end of comp.); राज्ञां तु चरितार्थता दुःखोत्तरैव Ś.5; चषकोत्तरा R.7.49; अस्रोत्तर- मीक्षिताम् Ku.5.61; उत्सवोत्तरो मङ्गलविधिः Dk.39,166; K.311; H.1.15; प्रवाल ˚पुष्पशय्ये R.6.5 over spread with; धर्मोत्तरम् 13.7 rich in; 18.7; कम्प ˚ 13.28;17.12; 19.23. -9 To be crossed over. -रः 1 Future time, futurity. -2 N. of Viṣṇu. -3 N. of Śiva. -रा 1 The north; अस्त्युत्तरस्यां दिशि देवतात्मा Ku.1.1. -2 A lunar mansion. -3 N. of the daughter of Virāṭa and wife of Abhimanyu. -4 N. of a plant (Mar. पिंपरी). -रम् 1 An answer, reply; प्रचक्रमे च प्रतिवक्तुमुत्तरम् R.3.47; उत्तरादुत्तरं वाक्यं वदतां संप्रजायते Pt.1.6; a reply is suggested to a reply वचस्तस्य सपदि क्रिया केवलमुत्तरम् Śi. -2 (In law) Defence, a rejoinder. -3 The last part or following member of a compound. -4 (In Mīm.) The fourth member of an अधिकरण q. v. the answer. -5 The upper surface or cover. -6 Conclusion. -7 Remainder, rest, what followed or took place next; शान्तमथवा किमिहोत्तरेण U.3.26. -8 Superiority, excellence. -9 Result, the chief or prevalent result or characteristic. -1 Excess, over and above; see above (उत्तर a. 8). -11 Remainder, difference (in arith.). -12 A rectangular moulding (Mānasāra 13.67.) -13 The next step, further action; उत्तरं चिन्तयामास वानरो मरुतात्मजः Rām.5.13.59. -14 A cover (आच्छादन); सूस्करं सोत्तरबन्धुरेषम् Mb.6.6.9. -रम् ind. 1 Above. -2 Afterwards, after; तत उत्तरम्, इत उत्तरम् &c. शापं तं ते$भिविज्ञाय कृतवन्तः किमुत्तरम् Mb.1.36.1. -Comp. -अगारम् An upper room, garet. -अधर a. higher and lower (fig. also). (-रौ du.) the upper and under lip, the two lips; पुनर्विवक्षुःस्फुरितोत्तराधरः Ku.5.83 (स्फुरण- भूयिष्ठो$धरो यस्य Malli.). -अधिकारः, -रिता, -त्वम् right to property, heirship, inheritance. -अधिकारिन् m. an heir or claimant (subsequent to the death of the original owner). -अपरा north-west. -अभिमुख a. Turned towards the north. -अयनम् (˚यणं. न being changed to ण) 1 the progress of the sun to the north (of the equator); अग्निर्ज्योतिरहः शुक्लः षण्मासा उत्तरायणम् Bg.8.24. cf. भानोर्मकरसंक्रान्तेः षण्मासा उत्तरायणम् । कर्कादेस्तु तथैव स्यात् षण्मासा दक्षिणायनम् ॥ -2 the period or time of the summer solstice. -अरणिः, -णी f. the upper अरणि (which by cutting becomes the प्रमन्थ or churner); दारुपात्राणि सर्वाणि अरणिं चोत्तरारणिम् (दत्त्वा) Rām.6.111.116. -अर्थ a. for the sake of what follows. -अर्धम् 1 the upper part of the body. -2 the northern part. -3 the latter half (opp. पूर्वार्ध). -4 the further end. -अर्ध्य a. being on the northern side. -अहः the following day. -आभासः a false reply, an indirect, evasive, or prevaricating reply. ˚ता, -त्वम् the semblance of a reply without reality. -आशा the northern direction. ˚अधिपतिः, -पतिः the regent of the northern direction, an epithet of Kubera. -आषाढा 1 the 21st lunar mansion consisting of three stars. -2 N. of bread-fruit or Jak tree (Mar. फणस). -आसङ्गः 1 an upper garment; कृतोत्तरासङ्गम् K.43; Śi.2.19; Ku.5.16. -2 contact with the north. -इतर a. other than उत्तर i. e. southern. (-रा) the southern direction. -उत्तर a. [उत्तरस्मादुत्तरः] 1 more and more, higher and higher, further and further. -2 successive, ever increasing; ˚स्नेहेन दृष्टः Pt. 1; Y.2.136. (-रम्) 1 a reply to an answer, reply on reply; अलमुत्तरोत्तरेण Mu.3. -2 conversation, a rejoinder. -3 excess, exceeding quantity or degree. -4 succession, gradation, sequence. -5 descending. (-रम्) ind. higher and higher, in constant continuation, more and more. उत्तरोत्तरमुत्कर्षः K. P.1; उत्तरोत्तरं वर्धते H.1. -उत्तरिन् a. 1 ever-increasing. -2 one following the other. -ओष्ठः the upper lip (उत्तरो-रौ-ष्ठः). Vārt. on P.VI.1.94. ओत्वोष्ठयोस्समासे वा -काण्डम् the seventh book of the Rāmāyaṇa. -कायः the upper part of the body; तं वाहनादवनतोत्तरकायमीषत् R.9.6. -कालः 1 future time. -2 time calculated from one full moon to another. -कुरु (m. pl.) one of the nine divisions of the world, the country of the northern Kurus (said to be a country of eternal beatitude). -कोसलाः (m. pl.) the northern Kosalas; पितुरनन्तरमुत्तरकोसलान् R.9.1. -कोशला the city of Ayodhyā; यदुपतेः क्व गता मथुरा पुरी रघुपतेः क्व गतोत्तरकोशला ॥ Udb. -क्रिया funeral rites, obsequies. -खण्डम् the last section of book. -खण्डनम् refutation. -गीता N. of a section of the sixth book of the Mahābhārata. -ग्रन्थः supplement to a work. -च्छदः a bed-covering, covering (in general); शय्योत्तरच्छदविमर्द- कृशाङ्गरागम् R.5.65,17.21; नागचर्मोत्तरच्छदः Mb. -ज a. born subsequently or afterwards; चतुर्दश प्रथमजः पुनात्युत्तरजश्च षट् Y.1.59. -ज्या the versed sine of an arc (Wilson); the second half of the chord halved by the versed sine (B. and R.). -ज्योतिषाः (m. pl.) the northern Jyotiṣas. -ततिः f. Ectype (lit. subequent proceedings) उत्तरस्यां ततौ तत्प्रकृतित्वात् MS.1.4.25. शबर explains उत्तरस्यां ततौ as विकृतौ), -तन्त्रम् N. of a supplementary section in the medical work of Suśruta. -तापनीयम् N. of the second part of the नृसिंहतापनीयो- पनिषद्. -दायक a. replying, disobedient, pert, impertinent; दुष्टा भार्या शठं मित्रं भृत्याश्चोत्तरदायकाः H.2.11. -दिश् f. the north. ˚ईशः, -पालः 1 Kubera, the regent of the north. -2 the planet बुध. ˚बलिन् 1 the planet Venus. -2 the moon. -देशः the country towards the north. -धेय a. to be done subsequently. -नारायणः the second part of the नारायणसूक्त or पुरुषसूक्त (Rv.1.9.). -पक्षः 1 the northern wing or side. -2 the dark half of a lunar month. -3 the second part of an argument, i. e. a reply, the reason pro. (opp. पूर्वपक्ष); प्रापयन् पवनव्याधेर्गिरमुत्तरपक्षताम् Śi.2.15. -4 a demonstrated truth or conclusion. -5 the minor proposition in a syllogism. -6 (in Mīm.) the fifth member of an Adhikaraṇa, q. v. -पटः 1 an upper garment. -2 a bed-covering (उत्तरच्छदः). -पथः the northern way, way leading to the north; the northern country; P.V.1 77. उत्तरपथेनाहृतं च. -पथिक a. travelling in the northern country. -पदम् 1 the last member of a compound. -2 a word that can be compounded with another. -पदिक, -पदकीय a. relating to, studying, or knowing the last word or term. -पर्वतकम् A variety of hides. Kāu. A.2.11. -पश्चार्धः the northwestern half. -पश्चिम a. northwestern. (-मः) the north-western country. (-मा) [उत्तरस्याः पश्चिमायाश्च दिशोन्तरालम्] the north-west; आलोकयन्नुत्तरपश्चिमेन Mb.12.335.8. -पादः the second division of a legal plaint, that part which relates to the reply or defence; पूर्वपक्षः स्मृतः पादो द्वितीयश्चोत्तरः स्मृतः । क्रियापादस्तृतीयः स्याच्चतुर्थो निर्णयः स्मृतः ॥ -पुरस्तात् ind. north-eastward (with gen.). -पुराणम् N. of a Jaina work. -पुरुषः = उत्तमपुरुषः q. v. -पूर्व a. north-eastern. (-र्वा) the north-east. -प्रच्छदः a cover lid, quilt. -प्रत्युत्तरम् 1 a dispute, debate, a rejoinder, retort. -2 the pleadings in a law-suit. -फ (फा) ल्गुनी the twelfth lunar mansion consisting of two stars (having the figure of a bed). -भागः The second part. -भाद्रपद्, -दा 1 the 26 th lunar mansion consisting of two stars (figured by a couch). -2 N. of a plant (Mar. कडुनिंब). -मन्द्रा a loud but slow manner of singing. ˚मन्द्राद्या a. particular मूर्च्छना in music. -मात्रम् a mere reply. -मीमांसा the later Mīmāmsā, the Vedānta Philosophy, an inquiry into the nature of Brahman or Jñāna Kāṇḍa (distinguished from मीमांसा proper which is usually called पूर्वमीमांसा). -युगम् A particular measure (= 13 Aṅgulas). -रहित a. without a reply. -रामचरितम् -त्रम् N. of a celebrated drama by Bhavabhūti, which describes the later life of Rāma. -रूपम् The second of two combined vowels or consonants. -लक्षणम् the indication of an actual reply. -लोमन् a. having the hair turned upwards. -वयसम्, -स् n. old age, the declining period of life. -वरितः a kind of small syringe. -वल्ली f. N. of the second section of the काठकोपनिषद् when divided into two अध्यायs. -वस्त्रम्, -वासस् n. an upper garment, mantle, cloak; जग्राह तामुत्तरवस्त्रदेशे Mb.3.268. 24. -वादिन् m. 1 a defendant, respondent; (Opp. पूर्ववादिन्.) साक्षिषूभयतः सत्मु साक्षिणः पूर्ववादिनः । पूर्वपक्षे$धरीभूते भवन्त्युत्तरवादिनः ॥ Y.2.17. -2 one whose claims are of later date than another's. -विद् -वेदन or वेदिन् An elephant sensitive to slight stimuli (Mātaṅga L.1.29; 9.39). -वीथिः f. The northern orbit; Bṛi. S. -वेदिः 1 the northern altar made for the sacred fire. -2 N. of a Tīrtha near the कुरुक्षेत्र. -सक्थम् the left thigh. -संझित a. denoted or named in reply (as a witness). (-तः) hearsay-witness. -साक्षिन् m. 1 a witness for the defence. -2 a witness deposing to facts from the reports of others. -साधक a. 1 finishing what remains or follows, assisting at a ceremony. -2 who or what proves a reply. (-कः) an assistant, helper -हनुः Ved. the upper jaw-bone.
vaḍavā वडवा 1 A mare; सैव भूत्वाथ वडवा नासत्यौ सुषुवे भुवि Bhāg. 6.6.4. -2 The nymph Aśvinī who in the form of a mare bore to the sun two sons, the Aśvins; see संज्ञा. -3 A female slave. -4 A harlot, prostitute. -5 A woman of the Brāhmaṇa caste (द्विजयोषित्). -6 A particular constellation represented by a horse's head. -Comp. अग्निः, -अनलः the submarine fire. -भर्तृ N. of the mythical horse उच्चैःश्रवस्. -मुखः 1 the submarine fire; मोक्षदुर्लाभ- विषयं वडवामुखसागरम् Mb.12.31.71. -2 N. of Śiva.
vaidhuryam वैधुर्यम् 1 Bereavement. -2 Agitation, tremor. वैधृतम् vaidhṛtam वैधृति vaidhṛti वैधृतम् वैधृति f. N. of a particular position of the sun and moon (योग), considered as very inauspicious and malignant.
vedaḥ वेदः [विद्-अच् घञ् वा] 1 Knowledge. -2 Sacred knowledge, holy learning, the scripture of the Hindus. (Originally there were only three Vedas :- ऋग्वेद, यजुर्वेद and सामवेद, which are collectively called त्रयी 'the sacred triad'; but a fourth, the अथर्ववेद, was subsequently added to them. Each of the Vedas had two distinct parts, the Mantra or Samhitā and Brāhmaṇa. According to the strict orthodox faith of the Hindus the Vedas are a-pauruṣeya, 'not human compositions', being supposed to have been directly revealed by the Supreme Being, Brahman, and are called Śruti' i. e. 'what is heard or revealed', as distinguished from 'Smṛiti', i. e. 'what is remembered or is the work of human origin'; see श्रुति, स्मृति also; and the several sages, to whom the hymns of the Vedas are ascribed, are, therefore, called द्रष्टारः 'seers', and not कर्तारः or सृष्टारः 'composers'.) -3 A bundle of Kuśa grass; पद्माक्षमालामुत जन्तुमार्जनं वेदं च साक्षात्तप एव रूपिणौ Bhāg. 12.8.34; Ms.4.36. -4 N. of Viṣṇu. -5 A part of a sacrifice (यज्ञांग). -6 Exposition, comment, gloss. -7 A metre. -8 Acquisition, gain, wealth (Ved). -9 N. of the number 'four'. -1 The ritual (वेदयतीति वेदो विधिः); Karma-kāṇda; वेदवादस्य विज्ञानं सत्याभासमिवानृतम् Mb.12.1. 2 (see Nīlakaṇtha's commentary). -11 Smṛiti literature; आम्नायेभ्यः पुनर्वेदाः प्रसृताः सर्वतोमुखाः Mb.12.26.9. -Comp. -अग्रणीः N. of Sarasvatī. -अङ्गम् 'a member of the Veda', N. of certain classes of works regarded as auxiliary to the Vedas and designed to aid in the correct pronunciation and interpretation of the text and the right employment of the Mantras in ceremonials; (the Ved- āṅgas are six in number :-- शिक्षा कल्पो व्याकरणं निरुक्तं छन्दसां चयः । ज्योतिषामयनं चैव वेदाङ्गानि ष़डेव तु ॥; i. e. 1 शिक्षा 'the science of proper articulation and pronunciation'; 2 छन्दस् 'the science of prosody'; 3 व्याकरण 'grammar'; 4 निरुक्त 'etymological explanation of difficult Vedic words'; 5 ज्योतिष 'astronomy'; and 6 कल्प 'ritual or ceremonical'). A peculiar use of the word 'वेदाङ्ग' in masculine gender may here be noted; वेदांश्चैव तु वेदाङ्गान् वेदान्तानि तथा स्मृतीः । अधीत्य ब्राह्मणः पूर्वं शक्तितो$न्यांश्च संपठेत् ॥ Bṛihadyogiyājña- valkya-Smṛti 12.34. -अधिगमः, -अध्ययनम् holy study, study of the Vedas; काम्यो हि वेदाधिगमः कर्मयोगश्च वैदिकः Ms.2.2. -अधिपः 1 one who presides over the Veda; ऋग्वेदाधिपतर्जीवो यजुर्वेदाधिपो भृगुः । सामवेदाधिपो भौमः शशिजो$- थर्ववेदपः ॥ -2 N. of Viṣṇu. -अध्यापकः a teacher of the Vedas, a holy preceptor. -अनध्ययनम् Remissness in the Vedic study; Ms.3.63. -अन्तः 1 'the end of the Veda', an Upaniṣad (which comes at the end of the Veda). Also -अन्तम् (See quotation from बृहद्योगियाज्ञ- वल्क्यस्मृति under -अङ्ग above). -2 the last of the six principal Darśanas or systems of Hindu philosophy; (so called because it teaches the ultimate aim and scope of the Veda, or because it is based on the Upaniṣads which come at the end of the Veda); (this system of philosophy is sometimes called उत्तरमीमांसा being regarded as a sequel to Jaimini's पूर्वमीमांसा, but it is practically quite a distinct system; see मीमांसा. It represents the popular pantheistic creed of the Hindus, regarding, as it does, the whole world as synthetically derived from one eternal principle, the Brahman or Supreme Spirit; see ब्रह्मन् also). ˚गः, ˚ज्ञः a follower of the Vedanta philosophy. -अन्तिन् m. a follower of the Vedanta philosophy. -अभ्यासः 1 the study of the Vedas; वेदाभ्यासो हि विप्रस्य तपः परमिहोच्यते Ms.2.166. -2 the repetition of the sacred syllable Om. -अर्थः the meaning of the Vedas. -अवतारः revelation of the Vedas. -अश्र a. quadrangular. -आदि n., -आदिवर्णः, -आदिवीजम् the sacred syllable. Om. -उक्त a. scriptural, taught in the Vedas. -उदयः N. of the sun (the Sāma Veda being said to have proceeded from him). -उदित a. scriptural, ordained by the Vedas; वेदोदितं स्वकं कर्म नित्यं कुर्यादतन्द्रितः Ms. 4.14. -कार the composer of the Veda. -कौलेयकः an epithet of Śiva. -गर्भः 1 an epithet of Brahman; कमण्डलुं वेदगर्भः कुशान् सप्तर्षयो ददुः Bhāg.8.18.16. -2 a Brāhmaṇa versed in the Vedas. -3 N. of Viṣṇu. -ज्ञः a Brāhmaṇa versed in the Vedas; तथा दहति वेदज्ञः कर्मजं दोषमात्मनः Ms.12.11. -त्रयम्, -त्रयी the three Vedas collectively. -दर्शिन् a. one who discerns the sense of the Veda; तपोमध्यं बुधैः प्रोक्तं तपो$न्तं वेददर्शिभिः Ms.11.234. -दृष्ट a. sanctioned by the Vedas. -निन्दकः 1 an atheist, a heretic, an unbeliever (one who rejects the divine origin and character of the Vedas). -2 a Jaina or Buddhist. -निन्दा unbelief, heresy; Ms.11.56. -पारगः a Brāhmaṇa skilled in the Vedas. -पुण्यम् a merit acquired by the study of the Veda. वेदपुण्येन युज्यते Ms.2.78. -बाह्य a. contrary to the Veda. (-ह्यः) a sceptic. -मातृ f. 1 N. of a very sacred Vedic verse called Gāyatree q. v. -2 N. of सरस्वती, सावित्री and गायत्री; सूतश्च मातरिश्वा वै कवचं वंदमातरः Mb.5.179.4. -भूतिः (embodiment of the Veda) an honourable title before the names of learned Brāhmaṇas. -वचनम्, -वाक्यम् a Vedic text. -वदनम् grammar. -वादः see वेदः (1); तदुक्तं वेदवादेषु गहनं वेददर्शिभिः Mb.12.238.11 (com.); Vedic discussion; यामिमां पुष्पितां वाचं प्रवदन्त्यविपश्चितः । वेदवादरताः Bg. 2.42. -वासः a Brāhmaṇa. -वाह्य a. contrary to, or not founded on, the Veda. -विद् m. 1 a Brāhmaṇa versed in the Vedas. -2 N. of Viṣṇu. -वद्वस् a. conversant with the Vedas; ब्राह्मणान् वेदविदुषो यज्ञार्थं चैव दक्षिणाम् Ms. 11.4. -विहित a. enjoined by the Vedas. -व्यासः an epithet of Vyāsa who is regarded as the 'arranger' of the Vedas in their present form; see व्यास. -शास्त्रम् the doctrine of the Vedas; Ms.4.26. -श्रुतिः Vedic revelation. -संन्यासः givig up the ritual of the Vedas. -संमत, -संमित a. sanctioned by the Vedas.
vibhrānta विभ्रान्त p. p. 1 Whirled about. -2 Agitated, bewildered, confused, flurried. -3 Mistaken, erring. -4 Spread abroad (as fame). -Comp. -नयन a. with rolling eyes. -शील a. 1 confused in mind. -2 intoxicated, drunk. (-लः) 1 a monkey. -2 the disc of the sun or moon.
vidhātṛ विधातृ m. 1 A maker, creator; यो विधाता च धाता च Rām.7.2.31; प्रसिद्धनेपथ्यविधेर्विधाता Ku.7.36. -2 The creator, N. of Brahman; विधाता भद्रं नो वितरतु मनोज्ञाय विधये Māl.6.7; R.1.35;6.11;7.25. -3 A granter, giver, bestower; स्वयं विधाता तपसः फलानाम् Ku.1.57. -4 Fate, destiny; तावच्च तत्र च विधातृवशादुपैति H.1.4. -5 N. of Viśvakarman. -6 N. of Kāma; the god of love. -7 Spirituous liquor. -8 The illusion, Māyā; त्वं हि धाता विधाता च त्वं विष्णुः सुरसत्तमः Mb.1.23.17. -Comp. -आयुस् m. 1 sunshine. -2 the sun flower. -भूः an epithet of Nārada.
vilamb विलम्ब् 1 Ā. 1 To hang down, hang from, be suspended from; विभ्रत्या कौस्तुभं न्यासं स्तनान्तरविलम्बिनम् R.1.62. -2 To set, decline (as the sun &c.). -3 To stay or lag behind, stay or remain, wait, stand still; तां प्राङ्मुखीं तत्र निवेश्य तन्वीं क्षणं व्यलम्बन्त पुरो निषण्णाः Ku. 7.13. -4 To delay, be retarded; विलम्बितफलैः कालं निनाय स मनोरथैः R.1.33; किं विलम्ब्यते त्वरितं तं प्रवेशय U.1. -5 To rest or depend upon; कर्मणि निर्वाणविलम्बितानि Bhāg.1. 16.24. -Caus. To delay, detain. -2 To put off, retard, procrastinate, postpone. -3 To waste, lose.
vimardaḥ विमर्दः 1 Pounding, crushing, bruising. -2 Rubbing together, trituration (as of perfumes), friction; विमर्दसुरभिर्बकुलावलिका खल्वहम् M.3; R.5.65; कस्तूरिका मृगविमर्दसुगन्धिरेति Śi.4.61;11.28. -3 Pressing together (as in embrace). -4 Spoiling, marring; कुतूहलविमर्द- कारिणा परिश्रमेण Mk.1. -5 Touch, contact. -6 Rubbing the person with saffron or other unguents. -7 War, battle, fight, encounter; विमर्दक्षमां भूमिमवतरावः U.5;3.44. -8 Destruction, devastation; पुरा जनस्थानविमर्दशङ्की संधाय लङ्काधिपतिः प्रतस्थे R.6.62. -9 Conjunction of the sun and the moon. -1 An eclipse. -11 Weariness, tediousness. -Comp. -अर्घम् the time from the apparent conjunction to the end of an eclipse.
vimardakaḥ विमर्दकः 1 Grinding, pounding, bruising. -2 The trituration of perfumes. -3 An eclipse. -4 The conjunction of the sun and the moon. -5 Destroying. -6 Cassia Tora (Mar. टाकळा).
vindhyaḥ विन्ध्यः [विदधाति करोति भयम् Uṇ.4.121] 1 N. of a range of mountain which separates Hindustan proper from the Deccan or south; it is one of the seven Kulaparvatas (q. v.) and forms the southern limit of Madhyadeśa; see Ms.2.21. [According to a legend, the Vindhya mountain, being jealous of the mount Meru (or Himālaya) demanded that the sun should revolve round himself as about Meru, which the sun declined to do; whereupon the Vindhya began to rise higher and higher so as to obstruct the path of the sun and moon. The gods being alarmed sought the aid of the sage Agastya, who approached the mountain and requested that by bending down he would give him an easy passage to the south, and that he would retain the same position till his return. This Vindhya consented to do (because according to one account, he regarded Agastya as his teacher); but Agastya never returned from the south, and Vindhya never attained the height of Meru.] -2 A hunter. -न्ध्या 1 N. of a plant (लवली). -2 Small cardamoms. -3 A measure of time (त्रुटि); L. D. B. -Comp. -अटवी the great Vindhya forest. -कूटः, -कूटनम् epithets of the sage Agastya. -गिरिः the Vindhya range of hills; also विन्ध्याचल, विन्ध्याद्रि. -वासिन् m. an epithet of the grammarian व्याडि. (-नी) an epithet of Durgā.
viṣuvam विषुवम् The first point of Aries or Libra into which the sun enters at the vernal or autumnal equinox, the equinoctial point; अयने विषुवे कुर्याह्यतीपाते दिनक्षये Bhāg.7. 14.2. -Comp. -छाया the shadow of the gnomon at noon. -दिनम् the day of the equinox. -रेखा the equinoctial line. -संक्रान्तिः f. the sun's equinoctial passage. -समयः the equinoctial season.
vṛścikaḥ वृश्चिकः [व्रश्च्-किकन्] 1 A scorpion. -2 The sign Scorpio of the zodiac. -3 A crab. -4 A centipede. -5 A kind of beetle. -6 A hairy caterpillar. -7 The month when the sun is in Scorpio. -का, -की An ornament for the toes. -Comp. -ईशः 1 ruler of the (zodiacal sign) Scorpio. -2 the planet Mercury.
vyāgulī व्यागुली Sour scum of boiled rice; cf. यवागू. -3 N. of Śiva. -4 N. of a tree (हिज्जल). -5 The planet Mars. -क्ता 1 Lac. -2 The plant गुञ्जा. -3 One of the 7 tongues of fire. -4 (In music) N. of a श्रुति. -क्तम् 1 Blood; रक्तं सर्वशरीरस्थं जीवस्याधारमुत्तमम् Bhāva P. -2 Copper. -3 Cinnabar. -4 Saffron. -5 Vermilion. -6 Dried Emblic Myrobalan; L. D. B. -7 A disease of the eyes. -8 The menstrual fluid. -9 Red sandal; रक्तं पीतं गुरु स्वादु छर्दितृष्णास्रपित्तनुत् । पित्तनेत्रहितं वृष्यं ज्वरव्रण- विषापहम् Bhāva P. -Comp. -अक्त a. 1 dyed red, tinged. -2 smeared with blood. (-क्तम्) red sandal. -अक्ष a. 1 red-eyed. -2 fearful. (-क्षः) 1 a buffalo. -2 a pigeon. -3 a crane (सारस). -4 N. of a संवत्सर. -5 the Chakora bird. -अङ्कः a coral. -अङ्गः 1 a bug. -2 the planet Mars. -3 the disc of the sun or moon. (-ङ्गम्) 1 a coral (also m. and f.) -2 saffron. -अति(ती)सारः dysentery, bloody flux; पित्तकृत तु यदात्यर्थं द्रव्यमश्नाति पैत्तिके । तद्दोषाज्जायते शीघ्रं रक्तातीसार उल्बणः ॥ Bhāva P. -अधरा a Kinnarī. -अधि- मन्थः inflammation of the eyes. -अपहम् myrrh. -अम्बर a. clad in red garments. (-रम्) a red garment. (-रः) a vagrant devotee wearing red garments. -अर्बुदः a bloody tumour. -अर्शस् n. a form of piles. -अशोकः the red-flowered Aśoka; रक्ताशोकरुचा विशेषितगुणो बिम्बाधरा- लक्तकः M.3.5. -आकारः coral -आधारः the skin. -आभ a. red-looking. -आशयः any viscus containing or secreting blood (as the heart, spleen, or liver). -उत्पलम् the red lotus. -उपलम् red chalk, red earth. -कण्ठ, -कण्ठिन् a. sweet-voiced. (-m.) the cuckoo; प्लावितै रक्तकण्ठानां कूजितैश्च पतत्रिणाम् Bhāg.4.6.12. -कन्दः, -कन्दलः coral. -कदम्बः the red-flowering Kadamba. -कमलम् the red lotus. -कुमुदम् a red lily. -केसरः the coral tree. -कैरवः, -कोकनदः a red lotus-flower. -गन्धकम् myrrh. -ग्रन्थिः a particular form of urinary disease. -ग्रीवः 1 a demon. -2 a kind of pigeon. -घ्नः the Rohitaka tree. (-घ्नी) the Dūrvā grass. -चन्दनम् 1 redsandal. -2 saffron. -चूर्णम् vermilion. -च्छद a. redleaved. -छर्दिः f. vomiting blood. -जिह्वः a lion. -तुण्डः a parrot. -तेजस् n. flesh. -दन्तिका, -दन्ती N. of Durgā; स्तुवन्तो व्याहरिष्यन्ति सततं रक्तदन्तिकाम् Devīmāhātmyam. -दृश् m. a pigeon. -धातुः 1 red chalk, orpiment. -2 copper. -नाडी a fistulous ulcer on the gum caused by a bad state of blood. -नासिकः an owl. -पः a demon, an evil spirit. (-पा) 1 a leech. -2 a Dākiṇī. -पक्षः N. of Garuḍa. -पटः a kind of mendicant; केचिद् रक्तपटीकृताश्च जटिलाः कापालिकाश्चापरे Pt.4.34 (esp. Jains); धर्म इत्युपधर्मेषु नग्नरक्तपटादिषु । प्रायेण सज्जते भ्रान्त्या पेशलेषु च वाग्मिषु ॥ Bhāg.4.19.25. -पद्मम् A red lotus. -पल्लवः the Aśoka tree. -पातः blood-shed. -पाता a leech. -पाद a. red-footed. (-दः) 1 a bird with red feet, a parrot. -2 a war-chariot. -3 an elephant. -पायिन् m. a bug. -पायिनी a leech. -पारदः, -दम् cinnabar. -पिण्डम् 1 a red pimple. -2 a spontaneous discharge of blood from the nose and mouth. -पित्तम् derangement of the blood produced by bile; संयोगाद् दूषणात् तत् तु सामान्याद् गन्धवर्णयोः । रक्तं च पित्तमाख्यातं रक्तपित्त मनीषिभिः Bhāva P. -पुष्पः N. of several plants:-- करवीर, रोहितक, दाडिम, बन्धूक, पुन्नाग &c. -ष्पा N. of the plant Punarnavā पुनर्नवा परारक्ता रक्तपुष्पा परारिका Bhāva P. -पूयम् N. of a hell. -पूरकम् = वृक्षाम्ल q. v, -प्रमेहः the passing of blood in the urine. -फलः the figtree. -बिन्दुः N. of a demon; रक्तबिन्दुर्यदा भूमौ पतत्यस्य शरीरतः । समुत्पतति मेदिन्यास्तत्प्रमाणस्तदासुरः Devīmāhātmyam. -बीजः the pomegranate tree. -मत्स्यः a kind of red fish. -भवम् flesh. -भाव a. 1 red. -2 loving, amorous. -मञ्जरः the Nichula tree. -मण्डलम् a red lotus-flower. -मेहः the voiding of blood with urine; विस्रमुष्णं सलवणं रक्ताभं रक्तमेहतः Bhāva P. -मोक्षः, -मोक्षणम् bleeding, letting out blood. -राजिः a particular disease of the eye. -रेणुः 1 vermilion. -2 the Punnāga tree. -3 an angry man. -4 A bud of the Palāśa tree. -लोचनः a pigeon. -वटी, -वरटी small-pox. -वर्गः1 lac. -2 the pomegranate tree. -3 safflower. -वर्ण a. red-coloured. (-र्णः) 1 redcolour. -2 cochineal insect. (-र्णम्) gold. -वर्धनः Solanum Melongena (Mar. डोरली वांगी). -वसन, -वासस् a. clothed in red; Ms.8.256. (-m.) a Brāhmaṇa in the fourth order of life. -वालुकम्, -का vermilion. -विकारः deterioration of blood. -विद्रधिः a boil filled with bloood. -वृष्टिः a. shower of blood forboding evil; रक्ते (वर्षिते) शस्त्रोद्योगः Jyotiśtattvam. -वीजः the pomegranate tree; (see रक्तबीज above). -शासनम् vermilion. -शीर्षकः a kind of heron. -शृङ्गिकम् a kind of poison. -ष्ठीवी the spitting of blood. -संकोचः safflower. -संकोचकम् a red lotus-flower. -संझम् saffron. -संदंशिका a leech. -संध्यकम् the red lotus. -सारम् red sandal. -स्रावः hemorrhage.
vyasanam व्यसनम् 1 Casting away, dispelling. -2 Separating, dividing. -3 Violation, infraction; शीलव्यसनमेतत्ते नाभिजाना- म्यहं पुरा Rām.2.12.57; Ki.3.45. -4 Loss, destruction, defeat, fall; defection, weak point; अमात्यव्यसनम् Pt.3; स्वबलव्यसने Ki.13.15; Śi.2.57. -5 (a) A calamity, misfortune, distress, evil, disaster, ill-luck; अज्ञातभर्तृव्यसना मुहूर्तं कृतोपकारेव रतिर्बभूव Ku.3.73;4.3; R.12.57. (b) Adversity, need; स सुहृद् व्यसने यः स्यात् Pt.1.327 'a friend in need is a friend indeed'. -6 Setting (as of the sun &c.); तेजोद्वयस्य युगपद् व्यसनोदयाभ्याम् Ś.4.1 (where व्यसन means 'a fall' also). -7 Vice, bad practice, evil habit; मिथ्यैव व्यसनं वदन्ति मृगयामीदृग् विनोदः कुतः Ś.2.5; R.18.14; Y.1.31; (these vices are usually said to be ten; see Ms.7.47-48); समानशीलव्यसनेषु सख्यम् Subhāṣ. -8 Close or intent application, assiduous devotion; विद्यायां व्यसनम् Bh.2.62,63. -9 Inordinate addiction. -1 Crime, sin. -11 Punishment. -12 Inability, incompetency. -13 Fruitless effort. -14 Air, wind. -15 Individuality. -Comp. -अतिभारः heavy calamity or distress; सा मुक्तकण्ठं व्यसनातिभारात् (चक्रन्द) R.14.68. -अन्वित, -आर्त, -पीडित a. overtaken by calamity, involved in distress. -आवापः an abode of calamity; व्यसनावाप एतस्मिन् पतितानां स्वकर्मभिः Bhāg.4.22.13. -कालः time of need. -प्रहारिन् a. 1 hurting, attacking, giving trouble. -2 striking (an enemy) in his weak point. -ब्रह्मचारिन् a fellow-sufferer. -वर्गः an aggregate of calamities; प्रकृतिव्यसनवर्गः Kau. A.7. -संस्थित a. one who indulges in any whim.
vyatīpātaḥ व्यतीपातः 1 Total departure, complete deviation. -2 Any great portentous calamity, or a portent foreboding a great calamity. -3 Disrespect, contempt. -4 The seventeenth of the astronomical Yogas. -5 The day of full-moon (when it falls on a Monday.) -6 A malignant or evil aspect of the sun and moon (considered to be inauspicious for the performance of any action).
Macdonell Vedic Search
Results for sun
mitra Mi-trá, m. a sun god, iii. 59, 1-9; vii. 61, 4; 63, 1. 6; n. friendship, x. 34, 14.
kram kram stride, I. P. krá̄mati, Ā. krámate. *ví- stride out, pf. cakrame, viii. 29, 7. abhí ví- spread asunder, develop into: ipf. ákràmat, x. 90, 4.
dham dham blow, I. P. dhámati, ps. dham-yáte, x. 135, 7. ví- blow asunder, iv, 50, 4.
vibhīdaka vi-bhí̄daka, m. a nut used as a die for gambling, vii. 86, 6; x. 34, 1 [probably from ví-bhid split asunder, but the meaning here applied is obscure].
vīrudh vīrúdh, f. plant, ii. 35, 8 [ví asunder + rudh grow].
su su press, V. sunóti, sunuté, V. 14, 13 [Av. hu].
sunvant sunv-ánt, pr. pt. pressing Soma, ii. 12, 14. 15; vi. 54, 6 [su press].
sūnu sū-nú, m. son, i. 1, 9; 85, 1; viii. 48, 4 [Av. hunu, OG. sunu, Lith. sūnù, Eng. son].
sūra sú̄r-a, m. sun, vii. 63, 5 [svàr light].
sūrya sú̄r-ya, m. sun, i. 35, 7. 9; 160, 1; ii. 12, 7; 33, 1; vii. 61, 1; 63, 1. 2. 4; viii. 29, 10; x. 14, 12; 90, 13 [svàr light].
stabh stabh or stambh prop, support, IX. stabhná̄ti, ii. 12, 2. ví- prop asunder, pf. tastambha, iv. 50, 1; vii. 86, 1.
Macdonell Search
Results for sun
aṃśumālin m. sun.
aṃśumat a. radiant; m. sun; N.
agohya fp. not to be hidden (ep. of the sun).
aṅgārin a. just left by the sun.
ajīgarta m. N. of Sunahsepa's father.
atitejas a. very brilliant, very mighty; m. sun; -vin, a. id.
atuṣārakara m. sun.
atyāditya a. surpassing the sun; -½ânanda, m. excessive joy; -½âpanna, pp. very unfortunate; -½âyata, pp. very long, very tall; -½âyus, a. very old; -½ârûdha, pp. hvg. reached a great height;-½ârûdhi, f. ascending too high; -½âroha, m. mounting too high, arrogance; -½ârti, f. violent pain; -½ârya, a. too honourable.
anastamita pp. not set; un ceasing: -ke, (lc.) ad. before sunset.
anudita pp. not risen (sun).
anūru m. (thighless), dawn (personi fied as the sun's charioteer or brother).
abjinī f. lotus plant; lotus pond; -pati, m. sun.
abhitigmaraśmi ad. to wards the sun.
abhīśu m. bridle; ray: -mat, a. ra diant; m. sun.
abhyastam ad. with √ i or √ gâ, set over (ac.); -ita, pp. sleeping at sunset.
abhyarkabimbam ad. to wards the disc of the sun.
ambuja a. aquatic; m. n. (day) lotus: -bândhava, m. sun; -½aksha, a. (î) lotus eyed; -½âsanâ, f. Lakshmî (lotus-seated).
ayana a. going, coming; n. going; way; course; certain Soma sacrifice lasting a year; sun's course from one solstice to an other; half-year; solstice; resting-place.
aruṣa a. (f. árushî) red, ruddy; m. sun, day: pl. m. f. flames (Agni's red horses); f. árushî, dawn.
aruṇānuja m. Garuda; -½arkis, m. rising sun.
aruṇa a. (&asharp;; V. also &isharp;) ruddy; light brown; golden; m. redness; dawn (personi fied as charioteer of the sun); sun; -kara, m. sun; -tâ, f. redness; -psú, a. ruddy.
arka m. ray; sun; sun-god; hymn; singer; kind of tree or shrub; -nandana, m. planet Saturn; -pattra, n. leaf of the Arka; -prabhâ-gâla, n. sun-beams; -ripu, m. Râhu; -vrata, n. manner of the sun.
aryaman m. intimate, comrade; N. of one of the Âdityas, chief of the Pitris; groomsman; sun.
avanti m. pl. N. of a people; -deva, m. N. of a king; -nagarî, f. the city of Uggayinî; -pura, n., î, f. id.; -mâtri, -kâ, f. pl. the divine mothers of the Avantis; -vatî, f. N.; -vardhana, m. N.; -varman, m. N. of a king and of a poet; -sundarî, f. N.; -sena, m., â, f. N.; -svâmin, m. N. of a temple.
aśīta a. not cold, hot; -kara, -marîki, -ruk, -ruki, m. sun.
aśiśira a. hot; -tâ, f. heat; -kara, -kirana, -rasmi, m. sun.
asaṃskāra m. lack of ornament, naturalness; a. lacking ornament; -skrita, pp. unequipped; unconsecrated; unadorned; unrefined, coarse; not having undergone the sacraments: -½alakin, a.having unadorned locks; -stuta, pp. unknown, strange; not agreeing, obstinate; -sthita, pp. not stand ing still, restless; scattered; -sprishta, pp. unattained; -hata, pp. disunited; m. kind of array; -hati, f. non-connexion;-hrita, pp. uninterrupted.
asūrya a. sunless: -ga, a. not mov ing towards the sun.
astasamaya m. time of sunset.
astamaya m. sunset; disappear ance; -ita, pp. having set, gone to rest, died: lc. (sc. sûrye) after sunset.
astagiri m. sunset-mountain.
asta n. home, abode; setting; my thical western mountain behind which sun and moon set: -m, ad. home, with verbs of going= set (stars, sun, moon); go to rest; die.
asaṃjñā f. disunion, discord.
ahar n. day: -ahar, ad. day by day, daily; -âgama, m. day-break; -âdi, m. id.; -divá, a. daily: -m, ad.; -nisa, n. day & night: -m, ad.; -pá ti, m. lord of day; sun.
ahimadīdhiti m. sun; -mayûkha, -rasmi, -rokis, m. id.; -½amsu, m. id.
astābhilāṣin a. verging towards sunset.
ākāśa m. n. clear space, sky; ether as the subtlest element: lc. behind the scenes (of what is said to or by some one off the stage): -ga, a. moving in the air; m. bird; -ga&ndot;gâ, f. the aerial Ganges; -gata, pp. coming from the air (voice); -kârin, a. moving in the air; m. bird; -desa, m. region of the air; -patha, m. path in the air; -pathika, m. wanderer in the sky, ep. of the sun; -bhâshita, n. fictitious conversation of a person on the stage with an absent one; -yâna, n. passage through the air; -vartman, n. path in the air; -sayana, n. sleeping in the open air; -samkârin, m. bird; -½îsa, a. ruling the air only (=quite helpless).
ākṣiptikā f. song sung by a person approaching the stage.
astācala m., -½adri, m. sunset mountain.
ātapa a. causing pain; m. (solar) heat, sunshine: -tra, n. umbrella; -vat, a. irradi ated by the sun; -vârana, n. umbrella; -½a tyaya, m. end of the heat, cool of the evening.
āditya a. belonging to the Âdi tyas; divine; relating to the sun; -kandra, m. du. sun and moon; -prabha, m. N. of a king; -mandalá, n. sun's orb; -vat, ad. like the sun; -varna, a. sun-coloured; -varman, -sena, m. Ns. of kings.
āditya a. belonging to or descended from Aditi; m. son of Aditi; sun: pl. a class of gods; n. N. of a lunar mansion.
ina a. strong, mighty; m. sun.
uttarāyaṇa n. northward course (of the sun); half-year in which the sun moves northwards; commencement of the sun's northward course = winter solstice (in the month Pausha); -½araní, f.the upper fire-stick; -½artha, a. being for the sake of what follows; -½ardhá, n. upper part of the body; &asharp;-vat, a. superior; -½âsâ, f. northern quarter; -½asman, a. having lofty crags; -½âsa&ndot;ga, m. upperor outer gar ment; covering.
udagayana n. sun's northern course; half year from winter to summer solstice; -âvritti, f. sun's turn to the north; -dasa, a. having the seam turned upward or northward; -dvâra, a. having a northern entrance.
udayācala m. sunrise mountain; -½âditya, m. N. of a man; -½anta, a. ending with sunrise; -½âvritti, f. turning towards the rise of the sun.
udaya m. rising; rise (of sun or moon), break (of dawn); gathering (of clouds); N. of the mythical mountain behind which sun and moon are supposed to rise; appearance, arising, production, beginning; consequence, result; success; prosperity; gain; income, revenue; interest; -giri, m. sunrise mountain; -gupta, m. N. of a man; -tata, m. slope of Mount Udaya.
uditi f. sunrise; sunset.
udayorvībhṛt m. sunrise mountain.
udetos ab. inf. with purâ, before sunrise.
upaślokayitavya fp. to be sung of in slokas.
uṣṇāṃśu m. (hot-rayed), sun.
uṣṇa a. hot, warm; deep (sigh): -m, ad. deeply (sigh); n. heat; hot season; -kara, m. sun; -kâla, m. hot season; -kirana, m. sun; -tâ, f., -tva, n. heat; -dîdhiti, -bhâs, -rasmi, -ruki, m. sun; -vârana, n.umbrella; -samaya, m. hot season; -sparsa-vat, a. hot to the touch.
etaśa a. motley, shining; m. dappled horse; sun-horse.
kamala m. n. lotus (called utpala at an earlier stage); â, f. ep. of Lakshmî; sg. & pl. riches; n. water; -ka, n. N. of a town; -garbha, -ga, m. ep. of Brahman; -devî, f. N. of a queen; -nayana, a. lotus-eyed; -nâbha, m. ep. of Vishnu; -netra, n. lotus eyed; -bândhava, m. ep. of the sun; -bhav ana, m. ep. of Brahman; -mati, m. N.; -maya, a. consisting entirely of lotuses; -lok ana, a. lotus-eyed: â, f. N.; -vatî, f. N. of a princess; -vana, n. bed of lotuses: -maya, a. consisting of beds of lotuses; -vardhana, m. N. of a king; -varman, m. N. of a king; -sambhava, m. ep. of Brahman.
upasunda m. N. of a Daitya (younger brother of Sunda).
kalpapāla m. guardian of order, king; -latâ, f. creeper yielding all wishes; -latikâ, f. id.; -vallî, f. id.; -vitapin, -vriksha, m.=Kalpa tree; -satâya, den. Â. appear as long as 100 Kalpas; -sâkhin, m.Kalpa tree; -sundarî, f. N.; -sûtra, n. Sûtra on ritual.
kṣapā f. night: (â)-kara, -krit, m. moon; -kara, m. night-walker, Râkshasa; nocturnal beast or bird; -gala, m. night dew; -½atyaya, m. end of night, day-break; -½apa ha, m. sun; -ramana, m.moon: -sekhara, m. ep. of Siva; -½ardha, n. (?) midnight; -½ava sâna, n. end of night: lc. on the morrow; -½aha, m. (?) day and night.
kharaturagīya a. sexual con- nexion (samparka) between ass and horse; -nakhara, m. N. of a lion; -mayûkha, m. (hot-rayed), sun; -½amsu, m. id.
gabhasti m. arm, hand; ray: -mat, a. radiant; m. sun; -mâlin, m. sun.
gavāmayana n. N. of a sattra lasting a whole year; (m)-pati, m. bull (lord of cows); lord of rays, ep. of the sun or Agni.
gala m. throat, neck: -vârtta, a. living only for his throat (=belly); -sundikâ, f. uvula: du. soft palate; -hasta, m. hand on (=seizure by) the throat.
gaviṣṭha m. sun.
gīta pp. (√ gai) n. song: -ka, n. id.; -kshama, a. capable of being sung; -go vinda, n. Krishna in song: T. of an idyllic drama; -nritya, n. song and dance; -vâd ana, n. song and (instrumental) music.
geya fp. to be sung; *singing (g.); n. song; buzzing, humming.
grahaṇacatura a. expert in seizing; -dvaya, n. eclipse of sun and (or) moon; -sambhava, a. arising from the taking away (of, g.); -½anta, a. done with learning; -½antika, a. id.
graha a. (--°ree;) seizing, holding; gaining; perceiving; m. seizer, esp. Râhu, who seizes and thus eclipses sun and moon; planet (which seizes men by magical influence: generally reckoned to be five in number: Mars, Mercury, Jupiter, Venus, and Saturn, or seven: the same + Râhu and Ketu, or nine: the same + sun and moon); demon of disease; imp; crocodile; booty; vessel (for drawing Soma); draught (of Soma); organ (of which eight are enumerated); seizure, grasp, grip; draught (of a fluid); theft, robbery; insistence on (lc., --°ree;), endeavour; receipt; welcome; mention; perception, understanding.
gharma m. heat (both of sun and of fire); hot season; milk-kettle (for the Asvin sacrifice); hot milk or other hot libation (esp. for the Asvins).
gharmāṃśu m. (hot-rayed), sun.
gharmakāla m. hot season; -kkhe da, m. (end of the heat), rainy season; -gala, n. sweat; -toya, n. id.; -dîdhiti, m. sun; -dúgha, -dúh (nm. -dhúk), a. yielding warm milk; -dyuti, m. sun; -payas, n.sweat; -bhânu, -rasmi, m. sun; -vâri, n. sweat; -sád, a. dwelling in the glow.
ghṛṇi m. heat; sunshine; ray; day.
ghraṃs ghrams, ghraṃsa m. heat of the sun, sunshine.
caṇḍakarāya den. Â. appear like the sun.
caṇḍakara m. (hot-rayed), sun.
caṇḍakarman m. N. of a Râkshasa (acting cruelly); -kirana, m. (hot-rayed), sun; -ketu, m. N.; -kausika, m. N. of a son of Kakshîvat; n. T. of a drama; -ghosha, m. N.; -tâ, f., -tva, n.passionateness; wrathfulness; -dîdhiti, m. (hot-rayed), sun; -pota: -ka, m. N. of an elephant; -prabha, m. N.; -bhuga&ndot;ga, m. N.; -mahâsena, m. N. of a prince; -rava, m. N. of a jackal (yelling fiercely); -rasmi, m.(hot-rayed), sun; -varman, m. N. of a prince; -vikrama, m. N. of a prince; -sîla, a. choleric; -simha, m. N. of a prince; -½amsu, m. (hot-rayed), sun.
carama a. last; outermost; lowest; western: -m, ad. last; in the end; after (g.): (a)-vayas, a. aged; -½akala, m. western (sun set) mountain.
chāyāgraha m. mirror or sun dial; -taru, m. shady tree; -½âtman, m. sha dowed self; -druma, m. shady tree; -dvitîya, a. having a shadow as a second, casting a shadow; -nâtaka, n. kind of play; -máya, a. shadow-like; -yantra, n. sun-dial; -vat, a. shady; -samgñâ, f. Shadow-Samgñâ.
chāya a. giving shade; &asharp;, f. shade, shadow; image, reflexion; reflected light, splendour, glitter; colour; beauty, grace (--°ree;, a, n. in all these meanings compounded with a word in the genitive sense); quantity; mere shade of=a little (--°ree;); Sanskrit translation of a Prâkrit work; Shadow of Samgñâ and wife of the Sun and mother of the planet Saturn.
jagatkāraṇa n. cause of the world; -traya, n. triad of worlds (heaven, earth, and lower regions); -tritaya, n. id.; -pati, m. lord of the world (ep. of Brahman, Siva, Vishnu or Krishna, Agni, and of the Sun); -prakâsa, a. universally known, notorious; -prathita, pp. world-famed; -pra bhu, m. lord of the world; -prasiddha, pp. world-renowned; -prâsâha, a. consisting chiefly of gagatî verses; -srashtri, m. creator of the world, ep. of Brahman; -svâmin, m. sovereign of the world ˙ -svâmitva, n. sovereignty of the world.
jagaccakṣus n. eye of the world, sun.
jagannātha m. protector of the world, ep. of Vishnu and his incarnations; N.; -nivâsa, m. abode=pervader, of the world, ep. of Vishnu or Krishna; -netra, n. eye of the world, ep. of the moon: du. ep. of the sun and moon; -mâtri, f. mother of the world, ep. of Durgâ and of Lakshmî.
jagadguru m. father of the world, ep. of Brahman, Vishnu, and Siva; -dala, m. N. of a prince; -dîpa, m. light of the world, sun; -dhâtri, m. creator of the world, ep. of Brahman and Vishnu; -yoni,f. source of the world, ep. of Brahman, Vishnu or Krishna, Siva, and Prakriti.
jarjara a. decayed; decrepit, frail; ragged; riven; split, broken; dull (sound); torn asunder, disunited; m. split bamboo: -tva, n. decay.
jalayantra n. squirt; water-clock: -ka, n. squirt, -kakra, n. water-wheel, -man dira, n. apartment with shower-bath; -râsi, m. waters; sea, ocean; -ruh, -ruha, m. day lotus (growing in the water); -rekhâ, f. streak on the water; strip of water; -lekhâ, f. id.; -lava-muk, m. (shedding drops of water), cloud; -vat, a. abounding in water; -vâsa, m. abode in the water; a. living in the water; -vâs-in, a. living in the water:(i)-tâ, f. abst. n.; -vâha, a. bearing water: -ka, m. water carrier; -sayyâ, f. lying in the water (as a penance); -samnivesa, m. reservoir, pond; -sûrya: -ka, m. reflection of the sun in the water; -stha, a. being in the water; -sthâna, n. reservoir, lake; -snâna, n. bathe; -hastin, m. (water-elephant), crocodile; -hâra, m. water-carrier; î, f.
jyotiṣkaṇa m. spark; -prabha, m. N. of a Buddha, of a Bodhisattva, and of a prince; -praroha, m. (shoot of light): pl. rays; -mat, a. full of light, radiant, brilliant, heavenly; m. sun; N.: -î, f. a form of trishtubh metre.
tapanīya m. kind of rice; n. puri fied gold: -½upala, m. sun-stone.
tapana a. burning; tormenting; m. sun; N. of a hell: -dyuti, a. shining like the sun.
tapas n. heat; fire (of which there are five, the four directed towards the cardinal points and the sun); torment; penance, self castigation, mortification, religious austerity, devotion; N. of a month(Jan.--Feb.); N. of one of the seven worlds (situated above Ganas).
taraṇa n. crossing, passing over, pas sage of (--°ree;); overcoming; -áni, a. pressing onward, swift; m. sun; -anîya, fp. to be crossed.
tamogā a. moving in darkness; -ghna, a. darkness dispelling; m. sun; -nuda, a. dispelling darkness; m. sun; moon; -&zip;paha, a. dispelling darkness or ignorance; m. moon; -bhûta, pp.involved in darkness or darkness incarnate; stupid, foolish; -mani, m. fire-fly; -maya, a. (î) consisting of or involved in darkness; m. one of the five forms of Avidyâ in the Sâ&ndot;khya; -&zip;ri, m. sun (enemy of darkness): -vivara, n.(?) window; -vâsas, n. garb or robe of darkness.
taruṇa a. (î) young; tender; new, fresh; vivid (feeling); just begun; lately risen (sun); crescent (moon); m. youth; n. sprout, blade: -ka, n. sprout, shoot, blade; -tâ, f. freshness, vigour.
tāpa m. heating (gold as a test); heat; pain, torment (mental and bodily); -aka, a. burning; purifying; tormenting, distressing; -ana, a. (î) burning, tormenting (--°ree;); m. sun; n. burning; mortification;N. of a hell; -anîya, a. golden: -½upanishad, f. T. of various Upanishads.
tigmāṃśu m. (hot-rayed), sun; fire; a&halfacute;âyudha, a. bearing sharp weapons.
tigmakara m. sun (hot-rayed); (á)-tegas, a. keen-edged, sharp-pointed; im petuous, energetic; m. sun; -dîdhiti, m. sun; -dyuti, m. id.; -bhâs, -rasmi, -ruki, m. id.; -vîrya, a. powerful; -sri&ndot;ga,a. sharp horned; (á)-heti, a. bearing sharp missiles.
timirākula a. filled with darkness, affected with cataract; -½ari, m. (foe of darkness), sun: -ripu, m. owl.
tīkṣṇāṃśu a. hot-rayed; m. sun; fire; -½agra, a. sharp-pointed; -½arkis, a. hot-rayed.
tīkṣṇakara m. (hot-rayed), sun; -tâ, f. sharpness; -tva, n. burning heat; -damsh- trá, a. sharp-toothed; m. N.; -danda, a. punishing severely; -dhâra, a. keen-edged; m. sword; -mârga, m. (whose path is sharp), sword; -rasa, m. burning draught, poison: -dâyin, m. poisoner; -rûpin, a. harsh-looking; -vipâka, a. causing a burning during diges tion; -vrishana, m. N. of a bull; (á)-sri&ndot;ga, a. sharp-horned; -hridaya, a. hard-hearted: -tva, n. -ness.
tīvra a. sharp; hot; violent, intense, severe, great, excessive, bad: -tâ, f. severity, violence, intensity; -gati, f. great pace; a. being in an evil plight; -dyuti, m. sun; -½atitîvra, a. excessively severe.
tejodvaya n. sun and moon (the two lights); consisting of light or splendour; -maya, a. (î) brilliant, radiant; powerful; -rûpa, a. formed of pure splendour or radi ance; -vat, a. bright; brilliant; -vritta, n. dignified behaviour, energetic action.
trasa a. moving; n. living creature: (á)-dasyu, m. (at whom demons tremble), N. of a generous prince, favourite of the gods; -renu, m. mote in a sun-beam.
trayīdhāmavat a. whose light consists of the three Vedas; ep. of the sun; -maya, a. (î) consisting of or based on the three Vedas.
trikāla n. the three times: past, present, and future; morning, noon, evening: -m, three times; -gña, a. knowing the three times, omniscient; -darsin, a. id.; -rûpa, a. appearing in the form of the three times (sun); -snây-in, a. bathing morning, noon, and night: (-i)-tâ, f. practice of bathing morning, noon, and night.
trisatya n. triple oath; -samdhya, n. the three diurnal junctures (sunrise, noon, sunset): -m, ad. at the time of the three Sam dhyâs; a. relating to the three Samdhyâs; -savana, a. & n.=tri-shavana; -sâdhana, a. produced or conditioned by three things; (í) suparna: -ka, m. n. N. of the verses RV. X, cxiv, 3-5; a. conversant with these verses; -stana, a. (î) three-breasted; -sthâna, a. having three places; -srotas, f. ep. of the Ganges (triple-flowing).
dakṣiṇāyana n. southern path (i. e. to the realm of death); southerly course of the sun, the half-year in which the sun moves from north to south (from summer to winter solstice);commencement of the sun's southward course = summer solstice (in the month Áshâdha): -samkrânti, f. entrance of the sun on the southerly course, summer solstice.
dakṣiṇāvarta a. turned southward; being on its southern course (sun); m. Deccan.
daśamāsya a. ten months old; -mukha, m. (ten-faced), Râvana: -ripu, m. Râvana's foe, ep. of Râma; -yoganî, f. dis tance of ten yoganas; -ratha, m. N. of several kings, esp. of Râma's father, sovereign of Ayodhyâ; -rasmi-sata, m. (thousand-rayed), sun; -râtra, m. n. period of ten days: á, a. lasting ten days; m. festival of ten days; -a½ri- ka, having ten verses; -rûpa, n. sg. the ten kinds of dramas; T. of a treatise on rhetoric by Dhanamgaya (tenth century): -ka, n. id.; -lakshana-ka, a. having ten characteristics, tenfold; -varsha, -varshîya, a. ten years old; -vârshika, a. (î) id.; lasting ten years; occur ring after ten years; -vidha, a. tenfold; -satá, n. 110; 1000: î, f. 1000; -sata-kara-dhârin, a. having a thousand rays (moon); -sata½ak- sha, a. thousand-eyed (Indra); -siras, a. ten-headed; -sîrsha, a. id.; m. Râvana; -sâhas ra, a. consisting of ten thousand; n. ten thousand.
dikkanyā f. quarter of the sky as a maiden; -karin, m. elephant of the quarters (supporting the earth at one of the four or eight points of the compass); -kântâ, -kâminî, f. quarter of the sky as amaiden; -kakra, n. horizon: -vâla, n. surrounding horizon; -khabda, m. word expressive of direction; -ta- ta, m. brink of the compass, horizon, extreme distance; -pati, m. regent of a quarter; -pa tha, m. horizon, extreme distance; -pâla, m. guardian of a quarter; -prekshana, n. looking about in all directions (in fear); -sundarî, f.=dik-kanyâ.
divaseśvara m. (lord of day), sun.
divasakara m. (day-maker), sun; -kshaya, m. decline of day, evening; -kara, a. moving by day (animal); -nâtha, m. (lord of day), sun; -bhartri, m. id.; -mukha, n. day-break; -vâra, m. week-day; -vigama, m. decline of day; -vyâpâra, m. daily func tions (such as ablutions etc.).
dināgama m. day-break; -½âdi, m. id.; -½adhinâtha, m. sun; -½adhîsa, m. sun; -½anta, m. evening; -½ardha, midday; -½avasâna, n. close of day, evening.
dina n. day: -kara, m. (day-making), sun; N.; -kartavya, n. daily observance; -kartri, m. (day-maker), sun; -kârya, n. daily observance; -krit, m. sun; -kritya, n. =-kârya; -kshaya, m. decline of day, even ing; -naktam, ad. day and night; -nâtha, m. (lord of day), sun; -pati, m. id.; -bhartri, m. id.; -mani, m. id. (gem of day); -mukha, n. day-break.
divākara m. (day-maker), sun; -kîrti, m. Kandâla (so called because allowed to appear in public only during the day-time); -kîrtyã, a. to be recited by day; n. certain chants; m. Kandâla; -kara, a.going about by day; -kârin, a. id.
dīptāṃśu a. id.; m. sun; -½aksha, a. (î) having flaming eyes; m. N. of an owl.
durbhakṣa a. hard to eat; -bhága, a. loathsome, ugly; unpleasant; ill-fated: â, f. ugly woman; -bhaga-tva, n. misfortune; -bhara, a. hard to bear; -support; -satisfy; heavily laden with (--°ree;); -bhâgya, a. unfortunate; -bhâsha, a. using bad language; m. abu sive language; -bhâshita, pp. offensive (lan guage); -bhâshin, a. using abusive language; -bhiksha, n. (m. rare) famine; distress: -tva, n. abst. n., -vyasanin, a. having to cope with famine; -bhida, a. hard to burst; -disperse; -bheda, a. hard to burst, disunite, or sunder; -bhedya, fp. id.
dūrapāra a. whose other bank is distant; -prasârin, a. far-reaching; -ban dhu, a. far from one's kin; -bhâva, m. distance; -vartin, a. being far away, distant; going far beyond; -samstha, a. being at a distance; far-removed; -sûrya, a. having the sun a long way off, remote from the sun; -stha, a. standing at a distance or aloof; being far off: -tva, n. distance; -sthita, pp. being far off, distant.
dineśa m. sun; -½îsvara, m. id.
devaśakti m. N. of a king; -satru, m. foe of the gods, Asura, Râkshasa; -sar man, m. N.; (á)-sishta, pp. taught by the gods; -sunî, f. bitch of the gods, Saramâ; -sesha, n. remnant of a sacrifice to the gods; -samnidhi, m. presence of the gods; -sarasa, n. N. of a locality; -srishta, pp. discharged or created by the gods; -sena, m. N.: &asharp;, f. divine host; N. of Skanda's wife; -smitâ, f. N. of a merchant's daughter; -sva, n. pro perty of the gods; -svâmin, m. N.; (á)-hiti, f. divine ordinance; (á)-hûti, f. invocation of the gods.
dvisaptati f. seventy-two; -sahasra, n. two thousand; -sûrya, a. having two suns.
dhanvantari m. [moving in an arc] N. of a being worshipped as a god; ep. of the sun; N. of the physician of the gods, produced at the churning of the ocean: -yag- ña, m. sacrifice to Dhanvantari.
dhūmaya den.; ps. dhûmyate, be covered with vapour, be obscured (star): pp. dhûmita. abhi, pp. with dis, f. quarter about to be entered by the sun. pra, pp. enveloped in smoke.
nāḍī f. (V. nm. -s), tube (also of the rays of the sun, regarded as hollow and sucking up water); slit, crack; tubular vessel in the body, vein; pulse.
nānā ad. variously, in different places, separately; often, esp. °ree;--, used like an adjec tive, different, various, manifold; -½âkâra, a. various, sundrv; -gati, m. wind; -tva, n. dif ference; manifoldness; -digdesa, m.: ab. sg. from various quarters, from all parts of the world; -devatya, a. addressed to various gods; -desa, m. sg. various regions; -desîya, -desya, a. pl. belonging to various lands; -dhâtu-sata,n. pl. hundreds of various minerals; -dhâtu-samâkîrna, pp. filled with various minerals; -pakshi-gana½âkîrna, pp. filled with flocks of various birds; -pakshi nishevita, pp. frequented by various birds; -mantra½ogha-siddhi-mat, a. possessed of a number of efficacious spells; -mriga-gana, m. pl. flocks of various animals; -rasa, a. having various sentiments (drama); -rûpa, a. hete rogeneous; -½argha-mahâratna-maya, a. consisting of various priceless precious stones; -½artha, a. having different meanings; con taining something different; N. word with several meanings; new sentence; -varna½â kriti, a. of various colours and shapes; -vi dha, a.various, manifold; -strî, f. pl. women of different castes.
nidarśaka a. seeing; announcing; -darsana, a. (î) showing; announcing; teaching; n. seeing, sight; reference to (--°ree;); showing, authority, evidence; instance, example, illustration; symptom; prognostic; system; contradictory instance; -darsin, a. (--°ree;) seeing, understanding; pleasing; -dâghá, m. heat, hot season, summer: -dhâman, m. sun, -½avadhi, m. hot season; -dâna, n. rope, halter; prime cause, original form; cause; a class of Buddhistic works: in. originally, essentially, really; -didrâsu, des. a. sleepy; -didhyâsana, n. profound meditation; -di dhyâsitávya, fp. to be profoundly meditated on; -desa, m. command, order; neighbour hood: e sthâ, be at any one's (d.) command.
nimrukti f. sunset, evening; -mrúk, f. id.
nirākaraṇa n. expulsion; re pudiation of a wife; removal; disproval; -âkaranîya, fp. to be disproved; -âkari shnu, a. repudiating (ac.); seeking to remove from (ab.); forgetful; -âkartavya, fp. to be disproved; -âkartri, m. contemner of (g.); a. disproving; -âkâ&ndot;ksha, a. expecting nothing; having no desires; requiring no supplement; -âkâra, a. formless, bodiless; having no object, vacant; -âkula, a. not crowded, unfrequented; not confused, orderly; unconcerned, calm; -â kriti, a. formless; neglecting one's religious duties; -âkranda, a. unprotected; affording no protection; m. or n. unsheltered place; -âkri yâ, f.expulsion; disproval; -âgas, a. guiltless; -âgraha, a. not obstinately insisting on any thing; -âkikîrshu, des. a. wishing to refute any one (ac.); -âgîvya, a. affording no livelihood; -âdambara, ad. without much talk (°ree;--); -âta&ndot;ka, a. free from ailment or anxiety; causing no ailment or anxiety; -â- tapa, a. sheltered from the heat of the sun, shady; -âtapatra, a. destitute of an umbrella; -âtithya, n. inhospitable (forest); -âdara, a.showing no respect towards (lc.); -âdhi, a. free from care; -ânanda, a. joyless, sad; -ântra, a. disembowelled; -âpad, a. free from adversity; -âbâdha, a. undisturbed; harm less; frivolous, futile; -âmaya, m. health, welfare; a. healthy, well; salubrious; in fallible; -âmarsha, a. putting up with every thing, apathetic; -âmisha, a. fleshless; hav ing no sensual desires: -½âsin, a. not eating flesh, not carnivorous; -âyata-tva, n. lack of extension, shortness; -âyati, a. having no future; -âyâsa, a. involving no trouble; causing no fatigue; -âyudha, a. unarmed; -ârambha, a. unenterprising, inactive; -â lamba, a. having no support; suspended in the air; self-supported, isolated, affording no support; -âlâpa, a. not talking; -âloka, a. devoid of light, dark; blind, foolish; -âvar ana, a. uncovered, manifest; -âsa, a. having given up all hope or expectation, despairing (of, ac. with prati, d., ab., lc., or --°ree;): -kara, a. taking away all hope of, rendering impos sible, -tva, n. hopelessness; -âsa&ndot;ka, a. fear less; not afraid of (lc.); -âsa&ndot;kya, fp. not to be feared; -âsâ, f. renunciation of all hopes: -½âsanna, pp. verging on despair; -âsitva, n. despair; -âsin, a. having renounced all hope, hopeless; -âsis, a. having no desires or hopes; -âsî-bhû, lose all hope; -âsrama, a. being in none of the four stages of a Brâh man: -pada, a. having no hermitages (forest); -âsramin, a. id.; -âsraya, a. shelterless, un supported; independent; unprotected; -âsa, m. expulsion, exclusion, rejection, repudiation; -âstha, a. taking no interest in, not caring about (--°ree;); -âhâra, m. fasting; a. abstaining from food, having nothing to eat: -tâ, f. abst. n.
nṛpāṅgaṇa n. royal court; -½a&ndot; gana, n. id.: â, f. princess, queen; -½âtmaga, m. prince: â, f. princess; -½aryaman, m. sun among princes.
naiṣṭhika a. (î) final, last; definitive, decided, settled; highest, supreme, per fect; thoroughly versed in (--°ree;); having taken the vow of eternal chastity: -sundara, a. supremely beautiful.
paṅkatā f. condition of mud; -magna, pp. sunk in the mire.
pañcaka a. consisting of five; five days old; with sata, n. five per cent; n. the number five (penta/s); (páñka)-kapâla, a. (î) distributed in five dishes; -kritvas, ad. five times; -gavya, n. sg. & pl. five products of the cow (milk, curds, butter, urine, dung); -guna, a. five times greater than (ab.); -grâmî, f. group of five villages; -katvâr imsat, f. forty-five; -kandra, m. N.; -kûda, a. having five tufts of hair; -ganá, m. pl.the five races or kinds: gods, men, Gandharvas and Apsarases, serpents, and Manes; sg. man: î-ya, a. sacred to the five races; -tantra: -ka, n. T. of a collection of fables in five books; -tapas, a. (ascetic) exposing himself to five fires (one at each cardinal point, with the sun above); -taya, a. (î) fivefold; -tâ, f. fivefold amount; dissolution of the body into the five elements, death; -tîrthî, f. the five sacred bathing-places; N. of a Tîrtha; -trimsat: -î, f. thirty-five; -tva, n. fiveness; the five elements, earth, water, five, air, and ether; dissolution into the five elements, death: -m gam, die; -dasá, a. (î) fifteenth; consisting of fifteen; increased by fifteen; î, f.fifteenth day in a half-month; -dasan, a. pl. fifteen; -dasa-vârshika, a. fifteen years old; -dasa½aha, m. period of fifteen days: i-ka, a. lasting fifteen days; -dh&asharp;, ad. in five parts, fivefold; -dhâtu, n. sg. the five elements.
pañcākṣara a. pentasyllabic; -½âkhyâna: -ka, n.=pañka-tantra; -½agni, a. maintaining the five sacred fires; allowing oneself to be scorched by five fires (four kindled towards the quarters, and the sun): -tva, n. aggregate of five fires (i. e. passions); -½a&ndot;ga, n. five limbs, members, or parts (°ree;--); a. (î) consisting of five limbs or parts; -½ât maka, a. consisting of the five elements: -tva, n. abst. n.; -½ânana, m. (five-faced, terrible), lion: î, f. ep. of Durgâ; -½apsaras: -a, n. N. of a lake; -½abda½âkhya, a. lasting for five years; (páñka)-½ara, a. five-spoked.
pataṃga a. flying; m. bird; winged insect; grasshopper, butterfly; esp. moth; sun: -kânta, (pp.) m. sun-stone; -grâma, m. N. of a village.
parigha m. iron gate-bar (with which powerful arms are often compared); bar, obstacle (fig.); iron club, mace encased with iron; streak of cloud across the rising or set ting sun; palace-gate, gate; -ghattana, n. friction; -ghâta, m. removal; -ghâtin, a. transgressing (--°ree;); -gha½upama, a. like iron bars.
paridhāna n. putting on (a gar ment); clothing, dressing; vesture, garment, sp. lower or under garment: -valkala, n. bark for clothing, -vastra, n. upper garment; -dhânî-kri, turn into an under garment; -dhârana, n. suffering, indulging in (g.): â, f. endurance; -dhí, m. (put-round), enclo sure, protection, fence, rampart: also of the ocean as encircling the earth; halo round sun or moon; horizon; circumference; the (three) green sticks surrounding the sacrificial altar; -dhî-kri, put on; -dhûsara, a. quite grey or dusty; -dhvamsa, m. eclipse; distress; dis aster, failure; loss or mixture of caste; -dhvamsin, a.destroying (--°ree;); destructive.
paruṣa a. (â, V. párushnî) knotty (reed); spotted, variegated; dirty; rough, rugged; dishevelled, shaggy; rough (wind), scorching (fire, sun); harsh (tone); severe, hard, rude, abusive (speech, person); n. sg., pl. contumelious speech, abuse: -vakana, n. harsh or contumelious speech; a. speaking harshly or rudely; -vâdin, a. id.; -½akshara, a. rough, harsh (of speeches or persons): -m, ad. rudely, harshly.
pavamāna pr. pt. √ pû; m. wind; god of wind; N. of a certain Agni or of a son of Agni; N. of certain stotras sung by the Sâmagas at the Gyotishtoma sacrifice: -vat, a. accompanied by the Pavamâna stotra; -sakha, m. (friend of the wind), fire; -½uktha, n. series of verses in the midday Pavamâna.
paścimācala m. Western Moun tain (a fabulous mountain behind which the sun is supposed to set: cp. asta½akala); -½ambu dhi, m. western ocean; -½itara, a. (opposite of west), eastern; -½uttara, a. north-western: -pûrva, a. western, northern, or eastern.
pūṣan m. N. of a Vedic deity, keeper of flocks and herds and bringer of prosperity; being a sun-god, he surveys all things and acts as a conductor on journeys and on the way to the next world; sun.
pūrvaśaila m. eastern or sunrise mountain.
pūrvabhāga m. fore or upper part; earlier part (of the day=forenoon, morning); -bh&asharp;g, a. receiving the first share, privileged; excellent; relating to what precedes; -bhâva, m. priority; -bhâvin, a. preceding, prior; -bhâshin, a. speaking first, affable; -bhuk ti, f. priority of occupation, long-continued possession; -bhûta, pp. being before, pre ceding; -bhûbhrit, m. eastern mountain (be hind which the sun rises); former prince.
pūrvākṣara a. accompanied by the previous letter; -½agní, m. original, i. e. domestic, fire; -½a&ndot;ga, n. former body; com ponent of what precedes; m. first day in the civil month; -½akala,m. eastern or sunrise mountain; -½âkârya, m. ancient or former teacher; -½âdya, a. beginning in the east; -½adri, m. eastern or sunrise mountain; -½a dhika, a. greater than before; -½anubhûta, pp. formerly experienced; -½anta, m. end of the preceding word; anticipation; -½apara, a. being before and behind, directed forward and backward; eastern and western; earlier and later; preceding and following, follow ing in succession, relatively connected: -dak shina, a. eastern, western, and southern, -dina, n. forenoon and afternoon, -râtri, f. former and latter half of the night.
pṛṣṭhaka n. back: e kri, put be hind one, disregard, renounce; -ga, a. riding on (g. or --°ree;); -gopa, m. protector of one's rear; -tap, a. letting one's back be scorched (by the sun).
prakāśa a. shining (out), clear, bright; manifest, open, visible, public; produced or occasioned by (--°ree;); generally known, renowned, for (in. or --°ree;), in (--°ree;); having the appearance of, resembling, like (--°ree;): -m or °ree;--, ad. openly, publicly; aloud (dr.); m. lustre, splendour, light (often --°ree; in titles of exegetical works); manifestation; renown; open place, open air; publicity: ab. manifestly, certainly; lc. publicly, openly; aloud; -kâsa-ka, a. (ikâ) clear, bright, shining; generally known, renowned; illuminating; making clear, explaining; expressing, designating; m. illuminator, sun; -kâsa-tâ, f. brightness, lustre; renown; publicity: -m gam, become known; -kâsa-tva, n. manifestation, appearance, renown; -kâsa-devî, f. N.; -kâs-ana, a. illuminating; n. illumination; allowing to appear, manifestation; -kâsa-nârî, f. public woman, prostitute; -kâs-anîya, fp. to be illuminated; -kâs-ayi tavya, fp. to be made clear or evident; to be manifested; -kâsa½âtma-ka-tva, n. luminousness; -kâsa½âtman, a. whose nature is light, luminous; -kâs-i-tâ, f.brightness, light; -kâs-i-tva, n. id.; -kâs-in, a. bright, shining; bringing to light (g.); -kâsî-karana, n. illumination; -kâsî-kri, illuminate; pub lish; -kâsî-bhâva, m. becoming light, dawn; -kâsa½itara, a. reverse of manifest, invisible; -kâs-ya, fp. to be brought to light or manifested: -tâ, f. publicity.
pragraha m. holding forth, stretching out; grasping, seizing; seizure of the sun or moon, beginning of an eclipse; kindness; obstinacy (rare); rein, bridle (ord. mg.); leader, guide; companion, satellite; -grahana, m. leader, guide (only --°ree; a. = led by); n. grasping, seizing; commencement of an eclipse; -grâham, abs. keeping the words separate (i. e. not combining them according to the rules of Sandhi: Br.); -grîva, m.railing or fence enclosing a house.
prajādāna n. procreation of children; -dvâra, n. gate of progeny, ep. of the sun; -dhara, a. maintaining creatures (Vishnu); -½adhyaksha, m. surveyor of creatures, ep. of the sun, Daksha, etc.; -nâtha, m. lord of creatures, ep. of Brahman, Manu, and Daksha; protector of the people, king, prince; -½antaka, m. destroyer of creatures, Yama.
prataṅkam abs. gliding, creeping; -tata, n. (?) high bank; -tatâmaha, m. great grandfather; -tanu, a. very fine, delicate, narrow, slender, thin, emaciated, small, or in significant: -ka, a. very delicate; -tapana, n. warming; -tapta, pp.; n. (?) purified gold; -taptri, m. burner, scorcher; -tam&asharp;m, (spv. ac. f.) ad. especially; -tara, m. crossing over (--°ree;); -tárana, a. (î) furthering, pro moting, increasing;n. crossing over; -tarám, -tar&asharp;m, (cpv. ac.) ad. further, still more; in future; -tarka, m. inference, supposition; -tarkya, fp. conceivable; -tardana, a. de stroying; (á)-tavas, a. vigorous, powerful; -tâná, m. tendril; plant with tendrils, climb ing plant: -vat, a. having tendrils; rami fied; -tânita, pp. treated diffusely; -tâpa, m. heat; splendour; majesty, dignity, su periority (often compared with the heat of the sun); vigour, power, energy; N.; -tâpana, a. making it hot for any one, pressing hard on, harassing, afflicting; n. heating; -tâpa pâla, m. N.; -tâpa-pura, n. N. of a city; -tâpa-vat, a. full of dignity, powerful, ma jestic, glorious (of persons); -tâpa-sîla, m. N. of a prince; -tâpa½âditya, m. Sun of Majesty, N. and ep. of various princes; -tâp itri, m. nm. used as 3 sg. ft. of cs. of pra tap; -tâpin, a. hot, burning, scorching; making it hot for any one, harassing, afflict ing; glorious, majestic; conferring dignity; -tâmra, a. extremely red; -târa, m. crossing over (g.): -ka, a. deceiving, cheating; m. cheat; -târana, n. taking across (water); crossing over (g. or --°ree;)=-tarana; deceiving, cheating: â, f. cheating, fraud; -târanîya, fp. to be deceived or cheated; -târayitri, m. promoter, increaser.
pratibimba (m.) n. reflected disc (of the sun or moon in the water); reflected image, reflexion, shadow, likeness; -bim bana, n. reflexion; comparing; -bimbita, (den.) pp. reflected, in (--°ree;); -bimbî-kri, re flect, resemble (ac.).
prativighāta m. warding off; -vitapam, ad. for every branch; -vidyam, ad. at every doctrine; -vidhâtavya, fp. to be employed; -provided against; n. impl. one should take care; -vidhâna, n.counter action, prevention, precaution against (g. or --°ree;); care or provision for (--°ree;); -vidhi, m. remedy for (--°ree;); -vidhitsâ, f. desire or in tention to counteract; -vidheya, fp. to be done against; -rejected; n. impl. one should take precautions; one should take measures against (lc.); -viparîta, pp. exactly opposite; -vibhâga, m. distribution, apportionment; -virati, ad. on each cessation or disappear ance; -visesha, m.peculiarity, particular circumstance; -viseshana, n. detailed speci fication; -visva, a. pl. all and sundry: lc. in all cases; -visha, a. containing an antidote; -vishaya, m. pl. all objects of sense: °ree;-or -m, ad. with regard to each individual object of sense; -vîta, pp. √ vyâ; -vîra, m. op ponent; equal antagonist; -vrittântam, ad. according to the saying, as they say; -vri sha, m. hostile bull; -vedam, ad. in the case of or for every Veda; -vedântam, ad. in every Upanishad; -velam, ad. at every opportunity; -vesa, a. neighbouring; aux iliary, subordinate, minor; m. neighbour; neighbouring house; -vesin, a. neighbouring; m. neighbour; -vesma, ad. in every house; -vesman, n. neighbouring house; -vesya, m. neighbour; -vaira, n. counter-hostility, re venge; -vodhavya, fp. to be carried home.
pratyavāya m. decrease, diminu tion; reverse, contrary course, opposite con duct; unpleasantness; disadvantage; disap pointment; sin; -½avekshana, n., -½avekshâ, f. looking after, care, attention, trouble; -½avekshya, fp. to be regarded or paid at tention to; -½asta-gamana, n. setting (of the sun); -½astam, ad. with gam, set, cease; -½as tam-aya, m. cessation; -½astra, n. counter missile; -½aha, a.daily: -m, ad. every day.
pratyari m. well-matched foe, adver sary equal to (g.); -½arka, m. mock sun; -½ark ana, n. return of a salutation; -½artham, ad. with regard to anything; -½arthin, a. hostile; rivalling, vying with (--°ree;); m. opponent, ad versary, rival; defendant; (práti)-½ardhi, a. standing at the side of, equal to (g.); -½arp ana, n. re-delivery, restoration; -½arpanîya, fp. to be given back or restored; -½arshá, m. side, slope (of a hill).
pratyāyaka (cs.) a. [√ i] causing to know or comprehend; convincing, cre dible; -½â½ayana, 1. n. setting (of the sun); -½âyana [fr. cs. of √ i], 2. a. convincing, credible; n. elucidation, explanation, demon stration: â, f. convincing; consolation; -½âyay itavya, fp. to be elucidated or demonstrated; -½âyita, (cs. pp.) m. agent.
prajñātman a. whose nature is intellect, being all intellect; -½âditya, m. Sun of Wisdom, ep. of a clever man.
pratyātāpa m. sunny spot; -½âtma, °ree;-or -m, ad. for or in every soul; singly; -½âtmaka, -½âtmika, a. belonging to oneself, severally one's own; -½âtmya, n. likeness to oneself: in. after his own image; -½âdarsa, m. incorrect for pratyâdesa; -½âdâna, n. re covery, re-acquisition; reiteration, repetition; -½âditya, 1. m. mock sun; 2. ad, towards the sun (°ree;--); -½âditsu, des. a. desirous of gaining or regaining; -½âdeya, fp. to be received; -½âdesa, m. injunction, order; repudiation, rejection; refusal; prevention, determent, (deterrent) example; casting into the shade, eclipsing.
prathamaka a. first; -kalpa, m. primary ordinance; -kalpita, pp. first in rank; -garbha, m. first pregnancy; a. f. â, pregnant for the first time; -ga or -g&asharp;, a. first-born; original; firstling; born in the first (i. e. first mentioned) wedlock; -gâta, pp. first-born; -tara, °ree;-or -m, (cpv.) ad. first; -tas, ad. first; forthwith; before, in preference to (g.); be fore, previously to (--°ree;); -darsana, n. first sight (lc. at --): -dina, n. first day of seeing any one (g.); -dugdhá, pp. just milked; -dhâra, m. (?) first drop; -nirdishta, pp. first stated or mentioned; -purusha, m. first (our third) person (gr.); -pravada, a. utter ing the first sound (child); -prasûtâ, pp. f. having calved for the first time; -bh&asharp;g, a. obtaining the first share; -yagñá, m. first sacrifice; -râtra, m. beginning of the night; -vayas-ín, a. young; -vasati, f. original or old home; -vittâ, f.first wife; -samgama, m. N.; -samâvritta, pp. only just turned to wards (lc.); -½âgâmin, a. coming or men tioned first; -½âdesa, m. initial position (of a word); -½abhidheya, n. fundamental meaning: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -½ardha, m. n. first half; -½ava ra-tva, n. higher and lower rank, seniority and juniority; -½astamita, n. recent setting of the sun; -½ahám, ad. on the first day; -½âhâra, m. first employment; -½itara, a. re verse of the first, second.
pauṣṇa a. (î) belonging, relating, or sacred to Pûshan; relating to the sun; n. the lunar asterism Revatî.
prabhā f. (shining forth), splendour, brightness, light; brilliancy, radiant beauty: often --°ree; a. (a) radiant like: -kara, m. sun; N.: du. sun and moon: -deva, m. N., -vardhana, m. N. of a prince,-varman, m. N. of a minister, -svâmin, m. N. of a temple of Vishnu; -bhâga, m. division; -bhâta, pp. (√ bhâ) begun to be light; n. dawn, daybreak: -kalpa, a. nearly grown light, approaching dawn (night), -prâya, a. id.; -bhâ-praroha, m. rising lustre, effulgence; -bhâ-mandala, n. circle or orb of light: -ka, n. id.; -bhâ maya, a. consisting of light, radiant; -bhâ lepin, a. radiant, brilliant; -bhâva, m. might; majesty; dignity; supernatural power; effi cacy; power, over (lc.); splendour: in., ab., -tas,=by means or in consequence of, through; -bhâva-ka, a. prominent, in (lc. or --°ree;); -bhâ vat, a. luminous, splendid: -î, f. N.; -bhâv ana, a. (î) creating, creative; bestowing prosperity; m. creator: â, f. promulgation (of a doctrine); -bhâvayitri, a. raising to power or dignity (ac.); -bhâva-vat, a. power ful; -bhâvita, cs. pp. id.; -bhâvin, a. id.; -bhâsha, n.declaration; doctrine; -bhâsh ana, n. explanation; -bhâshita, (pp.) n. speech; -bhâshin, a. talking, speaking; -bhâsa, m. (radiance), N. of a Vasu; N. of the son of a minister of Kandraprabha; m. n. N. of a place of pilgrimage on the west coast of the Deccan; -bhâsana, n. illumination; -bhâsura, a. of great brilliance; -bhâs-vat, a. brilliant; -bhâs-vara, a. id.
pralaghu a. very small or insignificant (retinue): -tâ, f. excessive smallness; -lap ana, n. prattling, chattering; -lapita, pp. √ lap; n. prattle, chatter; lament; -lab dhavya, fp. to be made sport of, to be de ceived; -lamba, a. hanging down, pendulous; stooping; m. N. of a Daitya slain by Bala deva or Krishna: -tâ, f. pendulousness, -bâhu, a. having pendulous arms, -bhuga, a. id.; -lambin, a. pendulous; -lambha, m.obtainment; deception; -lambhana, n. taking in, deceiving; -laya, m. dissolution, destruction, death; annihilation or end of the world; setting (of stars); cause of dissolu tion; swoon: -ghana, m. cloud producing the dissolution of the world, -m-kara, a. (î) causing destruction, -tâ, f. dissolution: -m gam, be annihilated, -tva, n. id.: â-ya klip, go to ruin, -dahana, m. conflagration causing the destruction of the world, -½anta-ga, a.perishing only at the end of the world (sun).
pravigraha m. distinct separation of words euphonically combined; -ghatana, n. breaking in pieces; -kâra, m.: -nâ, f. dis tinction, species; -kintaka, a. foreseeing; -ketana, n. comprehension; -dalana, n. shattering; -dâra, m. bursting asunder.
prastāra m. strewing, spreading out; abundance; litter, bed of straw; couch; layer; stair (leading down to water); flat surface; table of all the possible combinations in a metre: -pa&ndot;kti, f.combination-pa&ndot;kti, a metre (12+12+8+8 syllables); -stârin, a. spreading out, extending to; -stâva, m. pre liminary mention, allusion, propounding or introducing a topic; subject of conversation, topic; opportunity, occasion, season, proper time; beginning, commencement; introduc tion; -of a Sâman sung by the Prastotri priest: in. at any one's convenience; lc. on a suitable occasion, opportunely, -tas, ad. in the course of (--°ree;); -stâvanâ, f. blazing abroad, through (in.); beginning, commencement; introduction, (dramatic) prologue (the scene between the benediction and beginning of the first act); -stâva-sadrisa, a. suited to the occasion, seasonable, appropriate; -stâvita, cs. pp. commenced, begun; referred to.
prāptaśrī a. possessed of fortune; -sûrya, a. with dis, f. quarter possessing the sun, i. e. in which the sun is at the time.
bandhu m. connexion, relation; kinship, kindred; (maternal) kinsman; relative; friend; husband; --°ree;, relation of=extremely like; friend of=visited by or favourable for; --°ree; a. (û), coming under the head of, i. e. being only in name: -kritya, n. duty of a kinsman; business of a friend, friendly service; -ksít, a. dwelling among kinsmen (RV.1); -gana, m. kinsfolk; relative; friend; -gîva, m. (liv ing in the family), a tree (Pentapetes phoenicea; it has a beautiful red flower which opens at noon and falls off next morning at sunrise): -ka, m. id.; N. of a kakravartin; (ú)-tâ, f. connexion, relation; kinship; -tva, n. kinship, relationship; -datta,pp. given by relatives; m. N. of a man; â, f. N.; -pâla, m. N.; -príkkh, a. seeking one's kin (RV.1); -prabha, m. N. of a fairy; -prîti, f. love of one's friend; -bhâva, m. relationship.
bālātapa m. morning sun, early sunshine (also pl.); -½âditya, m. newly-risen sun; N. of two princes; -½adhyâpa-ka, m. teacher of boys: -tâ, f. tutorship of boys; -½apatya, n. young offspring; -½âmaya, m. children's disease; -½aruna, m. (red of) early dawn; -½avabodhana, a. instruction of the young or inexperienced; -½avastha, a. young, juvenile.
bāla a. young, not yet full-grown; recently risen (sun), early (rays), new, crescent (moon); childish, puerile, foolish; m. child, boy; minor (under sixteen years of age); simpleton, fool; N.: â, f. girl, young woman; cow one year old.
bimba m. n. disc of the sun or moon; sphere, orb, disc, esp. of any rounded part of the body (hips, buttocks); mirror; image, reflexion; object compared (in comparisons: opp. prati-bimba, that with which it is com pared); m. lizard, chameleon; N.; n. fruit of a tree (Momordica monadelpha): as it is of a ruddy colour when ripe, the lips of beautiful women are often compared with it; â, f. N. of a princess.
bradhna a. ruddy; m. sun; N.; n. lead: -bimba, n. disc of the sun; -mandala, n. id.; (á)-loka, m. world of the sun (AV.).
bhaṭṭāra m. [Pr. for strg. base of bhartri], N. of various men: -ka, m. lord, venerable or worshipful person (used of gods, men of rank, or scholars); kind of Saiva-monk; -matha, m. (conj.) N. of acollege; -vâra, m. day of the Lord, Sunday; -½âyat ana, n. house of the Lord, temple.
bhaga m. [dispenser: √ bhag] lord (of gods, esp. Savitri: V.); N. of one of the Adityas bringing welfare and love and instituting marriage; the lunar asterism Phalgunî; sun; good fortune, luck, happy lot (mostly V.); dignity, grandeur (mostly V.); loveliness, beauty; love, affection, amorousness; pudendum muliebre.
bhagavadgīta n. song sung by the Adorable One (Krishna); â, f. pl. (± upanishad) secret doctrine sung by the Ador able One (Krishna), T. of a well-known theosophical poem forming an episode in the Mahâbhârata.
bhānuja m. son of the sun, planet Saturn; -tanayâ, f. daughter of the sun, pat. of the Yamunâ; -tâ, f. condition of the sun; -datta, m. N.; -dina, n. Sunday.
bhānu m. lustre, brightness, light; ray; sun; N.: pl. the sons of Bhânu, the Âdityas.
bhānava a. peculiar to the sun; -îya, a. belonging to the sun, solar.
bhānumat a. luminous, bright, radiant; m. sun; N.: -î, f. N.; -maya, a. consisting of rays; -mitra, m. N.; -ratha, m. N.; -varman, m. N.; -vâra, m. Sunday.
bhāsvat a. (-î) shining, luminous, radiant; m. sun.
bhāskara a. [making light], shin ing, luminous, brilliant; m. sun; N., esp. of a celebrated astronomer (twelfth century a.d.); kind of breach: -nandin, m. son of the sun; -varman, m. N. and ep. of princes; i, m. pat. of the planet Saturn and of the monkey king Sugrîva; î-ya, a. derived from Bhâs kara; m. disciple of Bhâskara.
bhūtejya a. making offerings to spirits; -½îsa, m. lord of creatures, ep. of Brahman, Vishnu, and the Sun; lord of evil spirits, ep. of Siva; -½îsvara, m. id.; -½odana, m. dish of rice eaten to keep offevil spirits; -½unmâda, m. mental aberration due to evil spirits; -½upadesa, m. reference to something already existing; -½upamâ, f. comparison with another being; -½upasarga, m. possession by evil spirits.
bheda m. 1. act. vbl. n. breaking, splitting, cleaving, bursting, piercing, per forating, rending; division, separation; be trayal (of a secret); disturbance, interruption, infringement; sowing dissension, winning over an ally (one of the four Upâyas); lead ing astray, seduction; 2. ps. vbl. n. (being broken etc.), bursting, rupture, breach; in jury, hurt; bursting open, blossoming; sprout ing (of the beard); contraction (of the brows); disunion, dissension, between (in.), in (--°ree;); change, alteration, modification; distinction, difference; 3. concrete: division, part; cleft, fissure, chasm; variety, species, kind.
bhedaka a. breaking, -into or through, piercing; breaking down the dam of (tanks), diverting (water-courses); destroy ing (boundary-marks); leading astray (minis ters); discriminating, distinguishing; differ entiating, determining (meaning); n. adjec tive; -kara, a. (î) breaking down (bridges, --°ree;); sowing dissensions among or in (g. or --°ree;); -kârin, a. causing disunion; making a differ ence, altered; -krit, a.breaking down or into (--°ree;); -tas, ad. separately, singly; ac cording to the difference.
magna pp. (√ magg) sunk, immersed, etc.
maga m. Magus, priest of the sun: pl. a people in Sâkadvîpa chiefly consisting of Brâhmans.
majjan m. [sunk within], marrow; pith (of plants); scurf.
maṇika m. large water-pot: pl. fleshy excrescences on the shoulder of an ani mal; -karnikâ, f. earring of pearls or gems; N. of a sacred pool near Benares; N.; -kâ rá, m. jeweller; -danda, a. having a handle adorned with jewels; -datta, m. N. of a mer chant; -dara, m. N. of a chief of the Yak shas; -darpana, m. jewelled mirror; -dîpa, m. jewel-lamp (in which gems supply the place of the burning wick): -ka, m. id.; -dhanu, m., -dhanus, n. rainbow; -pushpa-ka, m. (gem-flowered), N. of the conch of Sahadeva; -pushpa½îsvara, m. N. of an attendant of Siva; -pûra, n. N. of a town in Kali&ndot;ga situated on the sea-coast (also -pura); -pra dîpa, m. jewel-lamp (=-dîpa); -bandha, m. fastening or putting on of jewels; (place where jewels are fastened), wrist; -bandh ana, n. string or ornament of pearls; wrist; -bhadra, m. N. of a brother of Kubera and prince of the Yakshas; N. of a Sreshthin; -mañgarî, f. rows of pearls; -mandapa, m. hall of crystal, hall resting on crystal columns; -mat, a. jewelled; m. N.; -maya, a. (î) con sisting of jewels: -bhû, a. having floors --; -mâlâ, f. string of jewels, necklace; -yashti, f. id.; -ratna, n. jewel: -maya, a. (î) con sisting of jewels, crystal; -râga, m. colour of a jewel; -varman, m. N. of a merchant; -sri&ndot;ga, m. sun; -syâma, a. blue like a sap phire; -sara, m. string of pearls, pearl necklace; -sûtra, n. string of pearls; -sopâna, n. jewelled or crystal staircase; -stambha, m. jewelled or crystal pillar; -srag, f. wreath of jewels; -harmya, n. crystal palace,N. of a palace.
maṇḍala a. circular, round; n., î, f. (rare), disk, esp. of the sun or moon; orb, circle (in. in a circle), ring, circumference; wheel; charmed circle (of a conjurer); n. orbit (of a heavenly body); n. halo round the sun or moon; n. ball, globe; m. n. circular array of troops; circle=district, province, territory, country; m. n., î, f. circle=group, company, assemblage, troop, multitude, crowd; swarm (of bees); whole body, totality; circle of a king's near and distant neighbours (the relations of whom to one another and to him self he should endeavour to regulate advan tageously; four, six, ten, and twelve such princes are spoken of); n.division or book of the Rig-veda (of which there are ten); m. dog.
madana m. sexual love, passion, lust; m. god of love, Kâma; N.; a plant: -tantra, n. doctrine of sexual love; -damsh- trâ, f. N. of a princess; -damana, m. van quisher of Kâma, ep. of Siva; -dahana,m. burner of Kâma, ep. of Siva; -dvish, m. enemy of Kâma, ep. of Siva; -pâla, m. N. of a prince, the reputed author of various works; -pura, m. N. of a city; -prabhâ, f. N. of a fairy; -mañkukâ, f. N. of a daughter of Madanavega; -mañgarî, f. N.; -maya, a. swayed by love; -maha, m., -mahâ½utsava, m. great festival in honour of Kâma; -mâlâ, f. N.; -mâlinî, f. N.; -mohana, m. con founder of Kâma, ep. of Krishna; -yashti ketu, m. kind of flag; -râga, m. N.; -ripu, m. foe of Kâma, ep. of Siva; -lekhâ, f. love letter; N.; -vega, N. of a prince of the fairies; -salâkâ, f. hooded crow; -sundarî, f. N.; -senâ, f. N.
madhyāditya m. noontide sun: -gate&zip;hani, at midday; â-varsha, n. middle of the rainy season; -½ahna, m. midday: -kâ la, m., -velâ, f., -samaya, m. noontide.
ayugasapti m. sun.
mayūkha m. peg (esp. for stretching a web or skin; V.); ray (C.); kind of Agni: -mâlin, m. (having a wreath of rays), sun; -vat, a. radiant.
marka m. eclipse of the sun (RV.1).
marīcimat a. (--°ree;) having -as rays; m. sun; -mâlin, a. having a wreath of rays (sun); m. sun.
mārtāṇx{093c}ḍa m. (sprung from a life less egg: mrita½anda), bird (RV.); bird in the sky, sun (RV.); statue of the sun-god.
mārtaṇḍa m. (late form of V. mâr tânda) bird in the sky, sun, sun-god; statue of the sun-god: -mandala, n. disc of the sun.
mālopamā f. compound simile (in which an object is compared with several others instead of with one only) or concate nated simile (e. g. &open;as heat on the sun, as the sun on the day, and as the day on the sky, so has valour conferred lustre on thee&close;).
mitra m. [prob. for mit-tra, either fr. √ mith, accompany, or √ mid, be oily, ad here: cp. sneha], companion, friend; N. of an Âditya, generally invoked with Varuna (mostly V.); sun (C.); n.friendship (RV.); friend (ord. mg. and gender; in polity the prince whose territory adjoins that of an immediate neighbour is called a &open;friend&close;); friend=image of: --°ree;,=resembling: -kar man, n. friendly actor service; friendship: -karma kri, conclude friendship with (in.); -kâma, a. wishing for friends; -kârya, n. business of a friend, friendly service; -kriti, f. friendly act; -kritya, n. business of a friend, friendly service; (á)-gupta, pp. guarded by Mitra; m. N.; -tâ, f. friendship; similarity with (--°ree;); -tva, n.id.; -druh, a. (nm. -dhruk) seeking to injure a friend, treacherous; -droha, m. injury of a friend, treachery; -drohin, a. treacherous; -bandhu-hîna, pp. desti tute of friends and relations; -bhâva, m. friendship; -bheda, m. separation of friends, breach of friendship; T. of the first book of the Pañkatantra; -máhas, a. having abun dance of friends (gnly. vc.; RV.); -mitra, n. friend's friend (in polity a prince whose dominions are separated from those of an other by the territories of three other princes); -lâbha, m. acquisition of friends; T. of the first book of the Hitopadesa; -vat, ad. like a friend (ac.); a. possessed of friends; -vat sala, a. devoted to one's friends; -varana, n. choice of friends; -varman, m. N.; -vi dhvasta, pp. ruined by a friend; -vaira, n. dissension among friends;-sarman, m. N. of various men; -samprâpti, f. acquisition of friends, T. of the second book of the Pañka tantra; -saha, m. (indulgent to friends), N. of a prince; -sâha, a. indulgent towards friends; -sneha, m. friendly affection, friend ship; -han, -hana, a. murdering a friend.
mihira m. sun: -kula, m. N. of a prince; -datta, m. N.; -pura, m. N. of a town; -½âpad, f. eclipse of the sun; -½îsvara, m. N. of a temple.
mukta pp. (√ muk) set free, released, from (in., ab.); loosened, detached, fallen or dropped down (fruit); relaxed, languid (limbs); loose (reins); quitted, left free (road), left bare (bank); just left by the sun (cardinal point); abandoned, given up; laid or cast aside (clothes); deposited (flowers); gone, vanished (esp. --°ree;, a.); shed (tears); uttered (sound); sent forth, emitted; thrown down, cast, discharged, hurled; applied (kick); having cast oneself down; delivered from sin or the bonds of existence, emancipated; destitute of (in. or --°ree;); m. N. of a cook.
muktaka a. detached, independent; n. independent sloka (the meaning of which is complete in itself); simple prose (without compound words); -kantha, a. or -m, ad. with krand or rud, shout or cry (with relaxed throat=) at the top of one's voice; -kara, a. open-handed, liberal; -kesa, a. (â, î) having loose or dishevelled hair; -tâ, f., -tva, n. deliverance from the bonds of existence, final emancipation; -nidra, a.awakened; -bandh ana, a. released from bonds; -buddhi, a. having one's soul emancipated; -vasana, m. (having cast aside raiment), Jain monk (=dig-ambara); -sâpa, a. having a curse laid aside, released from a curse;-sikha, a. having the top-knot loosened, having the hair hanging down; -saisava, a. (having left childhood behind), grown up; -samsaya, a. free from doubt, undoubted; -sûryâ, a. f. with dis, quarter just quitted by the sun; -svâmin, m. N. of a temple; -hasta, a. open handed, bountiful, liberal.
mokṣadvāra n. door of salva tion, ep. of the sun; -bhâva, m. deliverance, emancipation.
ya prn. rel. (n. -d) who, that, which, what: nearly always followed by the ordinary correlative tad (± etad or idam) or less frequently idam (m. ayam), adas (m. asau), îdris, tâdrisa, etâvat (tathâ sts. corresponding to the n. yad); occasionally either the rel. or the corr. is dropped. Ya is sts. inaccurately employed in the sense of if any (one). Uses of the relative calling for special mention are the following: 1. Ya is often added (without the copula) to emphasize a subject (e.g. âtma parityâgena yad âsritânam rakshanam, tan nîtividâm na sammatam, protection of dependents at the sacrifice of one's own life is not approved by moralists).Sts. it is thus used without emphasis by the side of a simple subject (e. g. andhah sthaviras ka yah, a blind man and one who is old); rarely a nm. rel. of this kind=an ac. (e.g. sarvân rasân apo heta pasavo ye ka mânushâh, he should avoid selling all sorts of condiments, cattle, and human beings). The n. sg. yad of this emphatic rel. is frequently employed without regard to gender or number, when it may be translated by as for, as regards (e.g. asidhâ râvratam idam manye yad arinâ saha samvâ sah, as for dwelling with an enemy, that I consider as hard as the sword-blade vow); before a noun this yad=that is to say (Br.). Immediately following oratio recta ending with iti yad=at the thought that (cp. cj. yad). 2. Two relatives often occur in the same sentence, when the second may be translated by any (e.g. yad rokate yasmai, bhavet tat tasya sundaram, what pleases any one, that to him is beautiful). 3. The meaning of the rel. when repeated (sts. separated by hi) is generalised, ya ya being=whoever, whichever, whatever (followed by the doubled or single corr. tad). 4. Ya is often combined with other prns.: (a) w. tvam, sa, esha, ayam, asau; (b) w. aham (tvam, etc.): yo &zip; ham, I who=since I, or (after a question) that I; (c) w. tad, any soever: yad vâ tad vâ, any, any kind of; anything; (d) w. tvad=or any other (Br., rare); (e) w. intr. ka + ka (V., C., common), + kid (C., very common), + kid api (C., not common), + kana (E., rare), + vâ (C., rare), or + api (C., late, not yet in Manu), immediately following or sts. sepa rated (m. yah kás ka, kas kid, kas kid api, kas kana, ko vâ, or ko &zip; pi, n. yad kim ka, kim kid, kim kid api, kim kana, kim vâ or kim api), whoever, whatever, any soever, any one, no matter who.
yatrasāyaṃgṛha a. having one's dwelling wherever evening falls; -sâ yam-pratisraya, a. id.; -stha, a. dwelling in which place; -½astamita-sâyin, a. resting wherever sunset overtakes one; -½ikkhaka, a. wherever one likes.
yāmya a. belonging or relating to Yama; southern: in. or lc. in the south; southwards; m. right hand; servant of Yama; ep. of Siva and of Vishnu: â, f. south: -½ayana, n. southerly course of the sun; a½uttara, a. southern and northern; going from south to north.
yugādi m. beginning of (an age=) the world; -½adhyaksha, m. surveyor of a cosmic age, ep. of Pragâpati; -½anta, m. end of the yoke; end of a generation; end of an age or of the world; meridian: -m adhirû- dhah savitâ, the sun has reached the meri dian, it is noon; -½antara, n. another or later generation; second half of the sun's arc divided by the meridian: -m ârûdhah savitâ, the sun has entered the second part of his course, it is past midday.
mitrodaya m. sunrise; welfare of a friend.
raśmi m. cord, rope; trace; rein; whip; measuring cord; line of light; ray; splendour: -kalâpa, m. pearl necklace of fifty-four strings; -mandala, n. wreath of rays; -mat, a. radiant; m. sun; N.; -mâlin,a. having a garland of rays; -muka, m. (diffuser of rays), sun; -vát, a. radiant; m. sun.
ravidina n. Sunday; -nandana, m. son of the sun, planet Saturn; -bimba, n. disc of the sun; -mani, m. sun-stone; -manda la, n. disc of the sun; -ratna, n. sun-stone; -vamsa, m. solar race; -vâra, m., -vâsara, m. n. Sunday; -samkrânti, f. entrance of the sun into a sign of the zodiac; -suta, m. son of the sun=planet Saturn or the monkey Sugrîva; -soma-sama-prabha, a. having lustre resembling that of the sun and moon.
ravi m. sun; sun-god: -kânta-maya, a. consisting of sun-stones; -graha, m.: -na, n. eclipse of the sun; -ga, m. son of the sun, planet Saturn; -tanaya, m. id.; Yama.
rāhusūtaka n. Râhu's (birth =) appearance, eclipse (of sun or moon).
rāhu m. [√ rabh] seizer, N. of a demon, whose head after he had attempted to drink the nectar obtained at the churning of the ocean was cut off by Vishnu, but having be come immortal periodically revenged itself on his betrayers, the sun and moon, by swal lowing them at the times of eclipse; he is also regarded as one of the nine planets; eclipse; moment of occultation; -gata, pp. eclipsed (sun or moon); -grasana, n. being swallowed by Râhu, eclipse; -grasta-nisâ kara, a. whose moon has been swallowed by Râhu (night); -graha, m. demon Râhu; -grahana, n. seizure by Râhu, eclipse (of sun or moon): -darsana,n. eclipse.
rucitā f. taste for, delight in (--°ree;); -deva, m. N.; -dhâman, m. abode of light, sun; -pati, m. lord of light, sun; lord of de light, husband.
lagna pp. √ lag; m. n. point of intersection, point where the sun and the planets rise; horoscope; auspicious or lucky moment for (--°ree;): -kâla, m. auspicious time (for an undertaking); -graha, a.persistent, obtrusive; -dina, n., -divasa, m. auspicious or lucky day (for an undertaking); -velâ, f., -samaya, m. auspicious time (for an undertaking); -½aha, m. auspicious day (for an undertaking).
laṅkā f. N. of the capital of Ceylon; Ceylon (in E. the home of the Râkshasas un der Râvana): -½anila, m. wind from Ceylon, south wind; -½ari, m. foe of La&ndot;kâ, ep. of Râma; -½îsvara, m. ep. of Râvana; -½udaya, m. sunrise in La&ndot;kâ.
lalāṭa n. [later form of rar&asharp;ta] fore head: -tata, m. flat surface of the forehead; -m-tapa, a. scorching the forehead (said of a hot sun), very painful; -patta, m.: -ka, m., -pattikâ, f. flat surface of the forehead; -phalaka, n. id.; -likhita, pp. written by fate on the forehead; -lekhâ, f. lines written by fate on the forehead; (strip of a =) very narrow forehead; -½aksha, a. (î) having an eye in the forehead (Siva).
lokayātrā f. worldly affairs, every-day life; daily bread, maintenance; -raksha, m. protector of the people, king; -rañgana, n. pleasing the world; -rava, m. popular talk; -lokana, n. eye of the world, sun: pl. eyes of men; -vakana, n. popular talk or rumour; -vat, ad. as in ordinary life; -vartana, n. means by which the world exists; -vâda, m. talk of the world, public rumour; -vârttâ, f. public rumour; -vi krushta, pp. publicly decried; offensive to the world; -vigñâta, pp. generally known; -vidvishta, pp. universally disliked; -vidhi, m. creator of the world; order of things pre vailing in the world; -viruddha, pp. no toriously contradictory; -virodha, m. oppo sition to popular opinion; -visruta, pp. generally known; -vistara, m. general pre valence; -vritta, pp. n. general custom, ways prevailing among the people; -vrittânta, m. ways of the world; -vyavahâra, m. id.; ordinary designation; -sruti, f. world-wide notoriety; -samvyavahâra, m. business trans actions with men; -samkshaya, m. destruc tion of the world; -samgraha, m. experience gainedthrough intercourse with the world; gaining influence over men, propitiation of mankind; aggregate of the worlds; -sam grâhin, a. propitiating men; -sampanna, pp. experienced in life; -sâkshika, a. wit nessed by the world: -m, ad. before wit nesses; -sâkshin, m. witness of the world.
lokakaṇṭaka m. thorn=curse of mankind, pernicious man; -kartri, m. creator of the world, ep. of Brahman, Vishnu, or Siva; -kânta, pp. beloved of the world, dear to all mankind; -kâma, a.desirous of a certain world; -kâra, m. creator of the world, ep. of Siva; -krit, m. creator of the world; -kshit, a. inhabiting heaven; -gâ thâ, f. popular (traditional) verse; -guru, m. teacher of the world or people;-kakshus, n. pl. eyes of the people; -kâritra, n. ways of the world; -gít, a. winning territory (Br.); gaining heaven; -gña, a. knowing the world or men: -tâ, f. knowledge of the world; -tattva, n. id.; -tantra, n. course of the world; -tas, ad. from people, from popular talk; in accordance with usage; -traya, n., î, f. the three worlds (heaven, earth, air or lower regions); -dambhaka, a. cheating the people; -dvaya, n. the two worlds (heaven and earth); -dvâra, n. gate of heaven; -nâ tha, m. lord of the worlds, ep. of Brahman, Vishnu, Siva, of the gods, and of the sun; protector of the people, king; N. of Avalo kitesvara; a. protected by mankind; -nind ita, pp.blamed by every one; -pa, m. regent of a world; world-guardian (of whom there are eight); -pati, m. lord of the world, ep. of Brahman or Siva; lord of the people, king; -patha, m. general or usual way; -paddhati, f. id.; -pâlá, m. world-guardian (of whom from Manuonwards four or eight are assumed according as four or eight quarters are counted; exceptionally five); guardian of the people, king; -pitâmaha, m. great forefather of mankind, ep. of Brahman; -punya, N. of a locality; -pûgita, pp. universally honoured; -pravâda, m. common report, popular or current saying; -prasiddha, pp. generally known; -prasiddhi, f. general prevalence: in.according to prevailing usage; -bhartri, m. supporter of the people; -mahesvara, m. great lord of the world, ep. of Krishna, -mâ tri, f. mother of the world, ep. of Gaurî
marīcin m. (radiant), sun.
vasuṃdhara a. holding or con taining treasure; m. N.: â, f. earth; coun try; soil; ground; N.: -dhara, m. moun tain; -dhava, m. spouse of earth, king; -bhrit, m. mountain; -sunâsîra, m. king.
vājin a. V.: spirited, swift (steed; w. ratha, m.=war-chariot); brave, warlike; manly, procreative; C.: winged; having as wings (--°ree;); feathered (arrow; also once swift: -i-tâ, f. feathered condition);m. hero, warrior (V.); steed of a war-chariot (V.); horse, stallion (C.; -i-tâ, f. condition of a horse): pl. coursers=steeds or teams of the gods (V.); the school of Vâgasaneya (so called because the sun in the shape of a horse re vealed certain Yagus verses to Yâgñavalkya).
vārikośa m. (=kosa-vâri) con secrated water used in ordeals; -garbha½u dara, a. (pregnant=) heavy with rain (cloud); -kara, a. aquatic; m. aquatic animal; fish; -ga, m. (produced in the water), shell; n. lotus: -½aksha, a. lotus-eyed; -gâta, (pp.) m. shell; -taramga, m. wave; -tas, ad. by water; -taskara, m. stealer of water, esp. of the sun (which draws up water with its rays); -da, a. giving water or rain; m. rain-cloud: -½âga ma, m. (arrival of clouds), rainy season, -½anta, m. (end of the clouds), autumn; -dha ra, a. bearing or containing water; m. rain cloud; -dhânî, f. reservoir of water, water butt; -dhârâ, f. sg. & pl. torrent of water; -dhi, m. receptacle of water, ocean, sea (four or seven seas are spoken of); -nidhi, m. id.; -pa, a. 1. drinking water; 2. guarding water; -patha, m. water-way; sea-faring: -½upa- gîvin, a. subsisting by maritime trade; -pûr vam, ad. previously pouring out water; -bandhana, n. damming up of water; -bin du, m. drop of water; -mat, a. abounding in water; -maya, a. (î) consisting of water; peculiar to water; -muk, a. discharging water or rain; m. rain-cloud; -yantra, n. water wheel; -ra, m. (giving water), cloud; -râsi, m. volume of water; ocean; -ruha, n. (grow ing in the water), lotus-flower; -vârana, m. water-elephant (a kind of monster); -vâha, a. bringing water; m. rain-cloud; god of rain: -ka, a. bringing water; -vihâra, m. sporting in the water; -saya, a. living in the water; -sambhava, a. produced in or ob tained from water; -stha, a. (situated=) re flected in the water (sun's disc).
vālakhilya a. with mantrâh or rikah, a term applied to the eleven hymns inserted after RV. VIII, 48: pl. or n. sg. the section comprising these hymns; m. pl. a class of Rishis of the size of a thumb and connected with the sun.
vāsara a. (&isharp;) belonging to or ap pearing in the morning (vasar), early (RV.); m. (time of dawn, morning), day (opp. night); day (in general); day of the week: (a)-krit ya, n. daily observances; -mani, m. gem of day, sun; -sa&ndot;ga, m. daybreak; -½adhîsa, m. sun; -½îsa, m. id.; lord of the week (sun, moon, or planet).
vikartana a. dividing; m. sun; n. cutting up; dividing; -kartri, m. trans former; insulter; -karma-krit, a. following unlawful occupations; -karma-kriyâ, f. per formance of unlawful actions; -karman,n. unlawful act or occupation; -karma-stha, a. following an unlawful occupation; -kar sha, m. pulling asunder; separation of semi-vowel combinations, etc.; distance, interval; -karsha- na, n. pulling asunder; drawing (of a bow); searching out, investigation.
vikramatuṅga m. N. of two kings; -nidhi, m. N. of a warrior; -patta na, n. Vikrama's city, Uggayinî; -pati, m. =Vikrama½âditya; -pura, n. N. of a town; -bâhu, m. N. of various kings; -râga, m. N. of a king; -lâñkhana, m.=Vikrama½âditya; -sakti, m. N. of various warriors; -simha, m. N. of various kings; -sena, m. id.; -sthâ na, n. walking-place, promenade; -½a&ndot;ka, m. =Vikramâditya: -deva,m. id.: -karita, n. Adventures of Vikramâ&ndot;ka-deva, T. of a poem; -½âditya, m. Sun of Valour, N. of various kings, esp. of one accounted the conqueror of the Sakas and founder of the Vikrama era (56 b. c.).
vidyut a. (shining asunder), flash ing (V.); f. gleaming weapon (V.); lightning: -kampa, m. quivering of lightning; -pâta, m. stroke of lightning; -puñga, m. N. of a fairy; -prapatana, n. (fall=) stroke of light ning; -prabha, a. shining like lightning; m. N.: â, f. N.; -vat, a. containing or charged with lightning (cloud); m. thunder-cloud.
viyat a. [pr. pt. √ i: going apart, outspread], departing (rare); -yát, n. intermediate region between heaven and earth, sky, atmosphere; ether as an element (rare): (yad)-gata, pp. moving orflying in the air; n-madhya-hamsa, m. sun; n-maya, a. (î) consisting of air.
vibhājaka a. distributing; divid ing; -bhâgya, fp. to be divided; -bhândaka, m. N. of a sage with the pat. Kâsyapa; -bh&asharp;-t, pr. pt. (-î) shining afar; m. N. of a Pra gâpati world; -bhâta,pp. √ bhâ; n. day break; -bhânu, a. shining, beaming (Agni; RV.1); -bhâva, m. ep. of Siva; a represen tation of art as affecting the emotions (rh.); -bh&asharp;van, a. (vc. vas) shining, brilliant; -bhâvana, (cs.) a.developing, manifesting; n. development, creation; manifestation; perception; (causing to be before the mind , reflection on (--°ree;); arousing a certain emotion by a work of art: â, f. representation of effects the causes of which are left to be con jectured; -bhâvanîya, fp. to be perceived; to be convicted; -bhâ-varî, f. (starry) night: -kânta, -½îsa, m. moon; -bh&asharp;-vasu, a. ra diantly bright; m. fire; god of fire; sun; N. of a mythical prince; -bhâvin, a. mighty; causing to appear (--°ree;); arousing an emotion; perceptible, comprehensible; to be attended to; n. imps. one should pay heed to; -bhâ shâ, f. option, optionality: nm. sts.=in. op tionally; -bhâsá, m. N. of one of the seven suns; a certain Râga.
vibhaṅga m. contraction (of the brows); furrow; interruption, stoppage, frus tration; deception; wave; -bhaganîya, fp. to be distributed; -bhaya, n. freedom from danger; a. exposed to no danger; -bhava, a. rich (E., rare); m. omnipresence (rare); development (rare); might, power, majesty, greatness, exalted position (ord. mg.); wealth, property; luxury: -tas, according to rank (dr.); according to one'specuniary circum stances, -mati, m. N. of a princess, -vat, a. wealthy; -bhavin, a. id.; -bh&asharp;, a. shin ing (V.); f. splendour, beauty (C.): -kara, m. (light-maker), sun; king; -bhâgá, m. V.: distribution, apportionment; C.: parti tion of inheritance; division; share, in (--°ree;); portion, constituent part; numerator of a fraction; separation, distinction, difference: in. separately, singly, in detail: -rekhâ, f. boundary line between (g.), -vat-tâ, f. separation, distinction, -sas, ad. part by part, in parts, singly; according to (--°ree;).
virakta pp. (√ rañg) estranged etc.: -prakriti, a. whose principal officers are dis affected, -bhâva, a. disaffected; -rakti, f. indifference, to (lc., upari w. g., prati w. ac.); freedom from worldlyattachment: -mat, a. indifferent, to (lc.); accompanied with free dom from worldly attachment; -rakanâ, f. disposition, embellishment: alakânâm --, neatly arranged locks; -rakayitavya, fp. to be made or formed; -rakita, pp. cs. √ rak: â, f. N.; (ví)-raga, a. free from dust, clean, pure (also fig.); free from passion; -ragas, a. id.; m. N.; -ragas-ka, a. dustless; -ragas karana, n. freeing from dust, cleansing; -ragî kri, free from dust, cleanse; -rañka, -rañki, -rañkya, m. ep. of Brahman; -rata, pp. (√ ram) ceased etc.: -tva, n. cessation; -rata-prasa&ndot;ga, a. having ceased from en gaging in (lc.); -rati, f. cessation; end; desistence or abstention from, renunciation of (ab., lc., --°ree;); -ratha, a. deprived of one's car; -rathî-kri, deprive any one of his chariot; -rathî-bhû, be deprived of one's car; -rapsá, a. (&isharp;) exuberant (RV.); m. abundance (RV.); -rapsín,a. exuberant, vigorous (V.); -rama, m. cessation, abate ment; sunset; abstention from (--°ree;); -rama- na, n. cessation; abstention from (--°ree;).
viroka m. (RV.) effulgence, flush (of dawn); n. (C.) cavity, hole; -rokín, a. shining (RV.); -rókana, a. illuminating (rare); m. sun; sun-god; N. of an Asura; -rokish- nu, a. shining, brilliant; -roddhavya,fp. to be fought with; n. imps. one (in.) should fight; -rodha, m. hostility, quarrel, strife, between (g., rarely in., --°ree;), with (in.± saha, --°ree;); logical contradiction, inconsistency, in compatibility, incongruity; conflict with, in jury of (in. --°ree;, at the cost or to the detri ment of); prevention by (--°ree;, rare); misfor tune (rare); perverseness (rare); -rodhaka, a. setting at variance, stirring up; incom patible with (g., --°ree;); -rodha-krit, a. causing dissensions among, stirring up to revolt; -rodha-kriyâ, f. quarrel; -rodhana, a. op posing; n. quarrelling; resistance, opposition, to (g.); injuring; -rodha½âbhâsa, m. appa rent contradiction (rh.); -rodhi-tâ, f. en mity, strife, between (--°ree;), with (saha); contra dictoriness; -rodhi-tva, n. removal; -rodh in, a. obstructing, disturbing, preventing; dispelling; hostile; contradictory, conflict ing, opposed; m. adversary, enemy; -ro dha½ukti, f. contradiction; -ropana, a. caus ing to heal; n. healing (of a wound); -roha- na, a. causing to heal; n. budding (of plants).
viśvaka m. N. of a protégé of the Asvins; -kartri, m. creator of the universe; -karman, n. every action (only °ree;--); (á) karman, a. accomplishing or creating every thing (V., E.); N. of the architect of the universe, resembling Pragâpati and often not distinguished from him; in C. he is the architect and artificer of the gods, also called Pragâpati, and with the pat. Bhauvana, father of Barhishmatî and Samgñâ; ep. of the sun (rare); -krít, a. creating everything; m. creator of the universe; the architect and artificer of the gods, Visvakarman; (á)-krish- ti, a. dwelling among all men, universally known (RV.); -kshaya, m. destruction of the world; -gata, pp. omnipresent; -guru, m. father of the universe; (á)-kakshas, a. all-seeing (RV.); (á)-karshani, a. = -krishti (RV.); -ganá, m. mankind; -gan&isharp;na, a. containing all kinds of people (V.); ruling all people (V.); benefiting the whole world (V., C.); (á)-ganya, a. containing all men (heaven and earth: V.); universal, dear to all men (V.); universally beneficial (discussion); -gít, a. all-subduing (V., P.); m. N. of an Ekâha in the Gavâmayana rite, the fourth day after the Vishuvat (Br., S., C.); -gîva, m. universal soul; -g&usharp;, a. all-impelling (RV.1); (á)-tas, ad. from or on all sides, everywhere; (á)-to-mukha, a. having a face on every side, facing in all directions; (á) tra, ad. everywhere; always; (á)-thâ, ad. in every way, always (V.); -datta, m. N. of a Brâhman; (á)-darsata, a. visible to all (RV.); -d&asharp;nîm, ad. always (V.); (á)-deva, a. all-divine;m. pl. the All-gods, the Visve devâs; (á)-devya, a. relating, dear etc. to all gods (RV.); (á)-devyâ-vat, a. id.; accompanied by the Visve devâs (Indra); (á)-dh&abrevcirc;, ad. in every way, always (RV.); -dhar ana, n.preservation of the universe; (á) dhâyas, a. all-supporting (RV.); -dhâ-vîrya, a. effective in every way (AV.); (á)-dhena, a. all-feeding (RV.); -nâtha, m. lord of the universe, ep. of Siva; N.; -m-tara, a. all-subduing(Buddha); m. N. of a king with the pat. Saushadmana; -pâvana, a. all-purifying; -pís, a. all-adorned (RV.); -prakâsa, m. All-enlightener, T. of a dictionary; (á) psnya, a. all-nourishing (V.); -bhug, a. all-consuming; (á)-bheshaga, a. (î) all-healing (V.); n. dry ginger (C.); (á)-bhogas, a. all-supporting; -maya, a. containing the uni verse; -maha, m. a kind of personification; -mahesvara, m. great lord of all (Siva); -minvá, a. (RV.) all-moving; all-containing; -mûrti, a. whose body is the universe or having all forms; -m-bhará, a. all-supporting; m. ep. of Vishnu: â, f. earth: -bhug, m. king; -yoni, m. f. source or creator of the universe; -ruki, m. N. of a Dânava; -rûpa, n. sg. all kinds of shapes; (á)-rûpa, a. (â, &isharp;) many-coloured, variegated (V.); wearing all forms, manifold, various; N. of a son of Tvashtri, whose three heads were struck off by Indra; â, f.dappled cow (V.); N. of certain verses (Br.); (á-)vâra, a. containing, bestowing etc. all treasures (V.); -vikhyâta, pp. known in the whole world; -víd, a. all-knowing; -visruta, pp. known in the whole world; (á)-vedas, a.all-knowing; (á)-sam bhû, a. beneficial to all; -súk, a. all-enlightening (RV.1); (á)-skandra, a. all-glittering (RV.); -samvanana, n. means of enchanting all; -samhâra, m. general destruction; -sakha, m. universal friend.
viślatha a. relaxed, loose: -½a&ndot;gam, ad. with languid limbs; -slesha, m. loosening, severance, falling asunder; hiatus (with sandhau or sandhi-); separation (of lovers); -sleshin, a.loosened; separated (from a beloved object).
viṣuvat a. (sharing both sides equally), being in the middle (V.); m. middle day (in a certain annual celebration: Br.); n. equinox (C.): -samkrânti, f. passage of the sun to the next sign at the equinox.
viṣṇu m. [Worker: √ vish] N. of a god of the upper region (personification of the sun) who traverses the world in three strides, companion of Indra, mentioned with the Âdityas, husband of Sinîvâlî (V.); jani tor of the gods (Br.); his head when cut off becomes the sun (Br.). In C. he is the second of the triad, the Preserver, husband of Laksh mî or Srî, and Sarasvatî, father of the god of love, rests on the serpent Sesha, and has Garuda for his vehicle, descends to earth in several Avatârs; N. of a lawgiver.
vihaṃga m. sky-goer, bird; arrow (rare): -ka, m. (little) bird, i-kâ, f. N.; -ham gama, a. moving in the air; m. bird; sun (rare).
vṛddhānuśāsana n. adage of sages; -½arka, m. declining sun; evening hour.
vṛṣākapi m. man-ape or great ape (RV.); ep. of the sun (E.); ep. of fire (C.); hymn ascribed to Vrishâkapi (RV. X, 86; Br., S.).
vena a. (&isharp;) yearning, longing, eager, loving (V.); m. longing, desire, wish (V.); a divine being of the middle region, Indra or the sun (comm.), connected with the navel (Br.); N. of various men, among others of the father of Prithu (C.).
vaikartana a. relating or belonging to the sun (vikartana): -kula, n. solar race.
vaivasvata a. (î) derived from the sun (vivasvat); relating or belonging to Yama Vaivasvata; relating to Manu Vaivasvata; m. pat. of Yama and of a Manu; -îya, a. connected with ManuVaivasvata.
vaiśvānara a. (&isharp;) belonging to all men; universal, dwelling or worshipped everywhere, generally known (Agni, sacri fice; V., C.); consisting of all men, present in full numbers (V.); m. fire; sun, sunlight (V.); intellect conditioned by the aggregate (Vedânta phil.); N.: (a)-datta, m. N.; î-ya, a. relating to or treating of Vaisvânara.
vyaya a. (going asunder), perishable (only with a-vyaya); m. destruction, down fall; disappearance, loss; diminution, failure; abandonment, sacrifice; expenditure or out lay of (money, g. or --°ree;); expense, cost, of (--°ree;), on behalf of (-arthe); means, money (rare); declension (gr.; rare): -ka, a. disbursing; -karman, n. office of paymaster.
vyasana n. [√ 2. as] wagging (of a tail); assiduity, in (lc.; rare); intense at tachment or devotion to, inordinate addic tion to (lc., --°ree;); passion, esp. evil passion, vice; favourite occupation, hobby; calamity, misfortune, disaster, distress, adversity (often pl.), need, evil plight (commonest mg.); de struction (of treasure), defeat (of an army), breaking (of weapons), accident in, evil effect of (--°ree;); setting (of sun or moon): -prasâr ita-kara, a. having the hand outstretched to inflict calamity; -brahma-kârin, m. com panion in misfortune; -vat, a. having suf fered injury in regard to (--°ree;); -½anvita, pp. involved in calamity;-½âpluta, pp. over whelmed with misfortune.
dhāmādhipa m. sun.
śani m. planet Saturn (son of the sun): -vâra, m. Saturday.
śanaiścara a. moving slowly; m. planet Saturn (son of the sun).
śaśikalā f. digit of the moon, crescent; moon; N.; -khanda, m. or n. cres cent; m. N. of a fairy: -pada, m. N. of a fairy; -ga, m. son of the moon, planet Mer cury; -tegas, m. N. of a fairy; -divâkara,m. du. moon and sun.
śākya m. [pat. fr. saka] N. of a warrior tribe in Kapilavastu, which derived its origin from the sun, and in which Bud- dha was born: -pâla, m. N. of a king; -pu trîya, m. Buddhistic monk; -bhikshu,m. Buddhistic mendicant: -kî, f. Buddhistic mendicant nun; -muni, m. Ascetic of the Sâkyas, ep. of Buddha; -sâsana, n. religion of Buddha; -simha, m. Lion of the Sâkyas, ep. of Buddha.
śiśu m. [grower: √ sû] child, infant; young (of animals; also of young plants and the recently risen sun): in cpds. gnly. --°ree;; N. of Skanda; N.
śītodā f. (having cold water), N. of a mythical river; -½upakâra, m. treat ment with cold remedies; -½ushna, a. cold and warm: -kirana, m. du. moon and sun.
śītetara a. reverse of cold, hot: -½arkis, m. sun.
śīlāṅka a. characterised by in tegrity; -½âdhya, a. abounding in integrity, honourable; -½âditya, m. Sun of morality, N. of various kings.
śunaka m. (little) dog; N.: pl. de scendants of Sunaka.
śunaṃhavīyā f. N. of RV. III, xxx, 22 (which commences with the words &open;sunam huvema&close;; Br.).
śaunaḥśepa m. pat. fr. Sunah- sepa; n. story of Sunahsepa.
śaunaka m. pat. (fr. sunaka), esp. of a celebrated grammarian to whom numer- ous (ten) works on the Veda are attributed: pl. his descendants and his school: î-ya, a. composed by Saunaka.
śauṇḍa a. (--°ree;) addicted to liquor (sundâ); passionately fond of, entirely devoted to; skilled in; being the pride of: i-ka, m. distiller or seller of spirituous liquors: î, f. female keeper of a tavern; -in,m.: -î, f. id.
śvan m. dog, f.  sun-&isharp;, bitch.
saṃkranda m. lamentation; battle; -krándana, a. shouting, roaring; m. ep. of Indra; n. battle: -nandana, m. pat. of Ar guna and of the monkey Vâlin; -kramá, m. going together (V.); C.: course, progress; tran sition, transference to (lc.); entry of the sun into a new sign of the zodiac; bridge (ord. mg.); stair (esp. leading down to water); N. of a fairy prince; -krámana, n. entrance, commencement; transition, entrance into (lc., --°ree;); entry of the sun into a new sign of the zodiac; transfer to another world, de cease; -kramî-kri, make a bridge or medium of: gd. by means of (ac.); -krânta, pp. √ kram; -krânti, f. entrance into (lc., --°ree;); transference, communication; passage of the sun to another sign of the zodiac (--°ree;): pa yaso gandûsha-samkrântayah, transfer ence of water to swallowing = water meant for drinking; -krâmin, a.being transferred to others; -krîda, m. play, sport; -krosá, m. shout; -klishta-karman, a. acting with difficulty; -kleda, m. saturation, wetting, with (--°ree;): -bhûta, pp. forming a moist mass (foetus); -klesa, m. pain, suffering; -kshaya, m. decay, loss, complete consump tion or disappearance; drying up (of water); ruin, destruction; end; -kshâlanâ, f. wash ing, ablution; -kshipti: -kâ, f. simple ex pedient (dr.); -kshepa, m. throwing together, destruction (rare); abridgment, compres sion, conciseness, brief exposition; quintes sence of (g.); aggregate (rare): in., ab., °ree;--, -tas, briefly, concisely; in., -tas, in the aggregate; -kshobha, m. jolt, shock, com motion, disturbance; agitation, excitement.
sajya a. [gyâ] furnished with a string (bow); placed on the bowstring (arrow); -gyotis, ad. according to the heavenly bodies =during the twilight (between the disappear ance of the stars and sunrise or sunset and the appearance of the stars; -gyotishi, lc. ad. id.); as long as the sun is above the horizon.
saṃjña a. --°ree; = sam-gñâ (la bdha samgña-tâ, f. recovery of consciousness): -ka, a. --°ree; (ikâ)=sam-gñâ, name; -gñapana, n. strangulation of a sacrificial animal; de ception, fraud; -gñ&asharp;,f. V., C.: agreement, understanding; consciousness, knowledge, clear conception; C.: gesture, sign, with (the hand etc., --°ree;); designation, name, technical term (--°ree; a. a, named, called); N. of a daughter of Tvashtri (Visvakarman), wife of the sun, and mother of Manu, Yama, and Yamî.
sanna pp. (√ sad) sunk down etc.
saṃdhya a. based on euphonic com bination; &asharp;, f. juncture of day and night, morning or evening twilight (ord. mg.); twi light devotions, morning or evening prayers; morning (and evening) twilight of a Yuga or cosmic age; juncture of the day, morn ing, noon, or evening (rare); Twilight (esp. evening) personified as a manifestation of Brahman and mistress of the sun: -m âs, anu½âs, or upa½âs, perform morning or even ing devotions.
saptalokī f. the seven continents, the whole earth; (á)-vadhri, a. bound with seven cords (the soul; P.); m. N. of a man rescued by the Asvins (V.); -varsha, a. seven years old; -vârshika, a. (î) id.;-vimsá, a. twenty-seventh; consisting of twenty-seven; -vimsat, f. twenty-seven; (á)-vimsati, f. twenty-seven (w. app., g., --°ree;); (á)-vidha, a. sevenfold, of seven kinds; -satî, f. seven hun dred; -sapta-ta, a. seventy-seventh; -sap tati, f. seventy-seven: vatsare sapta-sap tatau, in the seventy-seventh year; -sapti, a. having seven steeds; m. sun.
samayācāra m. established usage; â½adhyushita, pp. half-risen (sun); â-vishita, pp. half risen or set; -½ukita, pp. suited to the occasion: -m, ad. as the occa sion requires.
samāsokta pp. concisely ex pressed; contained in a compound; -½ukti, f. concise mode of expression (a figure of speech in which the procedure of something else is attributed to the object in question owing to parallelism in action, gender, or attributes, e. g. &open;how can a wise man think of women till he has accomplished his ambi tion? the sun does not court the evening-glow till he has traversed the whole world&close;).
samudanta a. rising above the edge, about to overflow (V.); -aya, m. union, junction (of forces); combination, aggregate; income, revenue (rare); success (rare): -m kri, collect or assemble (an army); -âkâra, m. presentation, offering, of (--°ree;); good or courteous behaviour; intercourse with (in.); address; -âya, m. combination, collection, aggregate, whole; genus (elephant); -âyin, a. combining, forming an aggregate; -ita mukha, a. with one voice, all at once; -ga, m. round casket; kind of artificial stanza (in which the two halves are identical in sound but different in meaning, e.g. Kirâtâr gunîya XV, 16): -ka, m. n. round casket; -gama, m. rise (of the sun), rising (of dust, of the breast); -danda, a. uplifted (arm); -desa, m. exposition, doctrine; locality, place; -dhata, pp. √ han: -lâ&ndot;gûla, a. cocking his tail; -dharana, n. upraising, extrication; removal; -dhartri, m. deliverer from (the ocean, danger, ab.); extirpator; -dhâra, m. extraction; rescue; removal, destruction; -bandhana, n. hanging up: âtmanah --, hanging oneself; -bodhana, n.resuscitation; -bhava, m. production, origin; appearance: --°ree; a. arising or produced from, being the source of; -bhâsana, n. illuminating; -bhe da, m. development; source; -yama, m. lift ing up; exertion, effort, labour, setting about (d., lc., --°ree;); -yamin, a. exerting oneself, strenuous; -yoga, m. employment, use (rare); preparation, equipment; energy; concurrence (of causes).
saṃprasatti f. soul during deep sleep; -sava, m. admission (=prati-sava); -sâda, m. mental repose (during deep sleep; Br., rare); grace, favour (C.); soul during deep sleep (V., C.); -sâdhya, fp. to be man aged or regulated; -sârana, n. drawing asun der (rare); change of semi-vowel (followed by a) to the corresponding vowel (the a being dropped, gr.: as in vad to ud); -harsha, m. joy; -hâra, m. conflict, fight, with (in. ± saha, --°ree;); blow, thrust (rare); gait (rare); -hrishta-tanûruha, a. having the hair brist ling, thrilled with joy.
sarasīja n. lotus: -lokana, -½îksh ana, a. lotus-eyed; -ruh, n. lotus; -ruha, n. id.: -bandhu, m. sun, -½îkshana, a. lotus eyed.
savitara den. P. appear like the sun (moon).
sahasrāṃśu a. thousand-rayed; m. sun: -sama, a. sun-like; -½akshá, a. thou sand-eyed; m. ep. of Indra; -½âtman, a. having a thousand natures; -½adhipati, m. leader of a thousand men; chief of a thousand villages; -½anîka, m. N. of a prince; (sahásrâ) magha, a. having a thousand gifts; -½âyu, a. living a thousand years (Br.); -½âyudha, a. having a thousand weapons; m. N.; (sahás ra)-½âyus, a. living a thousand years (V.); m. N.; (sahásra)-½argha (or á), a. having a thousandfold value (V.); -½arkis, a. thousand-rayed; m. sun.
sahasra m. (rare), n. thousand (also used to express a large number or great wealth); sp. a thousand cows, -Panas: con strued with an app. (sg. or pl.), g., sg. or pl., --°ree; (rarely °ree;--); in an a. cpd. it is always --°ree;: -ka, 1. n. thousand: --°ree; a. (ikâ) having or amounting to a thousand; 2. thousand-headed; -kara, m. (thousand-rayed), sun: -pan-netra, a. having a thousand hands, feet, and eyes; -kalâ, f. N.; -kirana, m. (thousand-rayed), sun; -kritvas, ad. a thou sand times; (sahásra)-ketu, a. having a thousand forms (RV.1); -gu, a. possessing a thousand cows; thousand-rayed; m. sun; -guna, a. thousandfold: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -gunita, pp. multiplied a thousand times; -kakshu, a. thousand-eyed (AV.); -git, a. con quering or winning a thousand (RV.); (-hás ra)-nîtha, a. having a thousand expedients or shifts (V.); m. N. (C.); -tama, spv. (î) thou sandth; -taya, n. a thousand; -da, a. giving a thousand (cows); (sahásra)-dakshina, a. attended with a fee of a thousand (kine; V.); -dîdhiti, m. sun; (á)-dvâr, a. thousand-doored (RV.1); -dhâ, ad. a thousand-fold; in a thousand ways or parts; -dhî, a. thousand-witted; m. N. of a fish; -nayana, a. thousand-eyed; m. ep. of Indra; -netra, a., m. id.; -pati, m. chief of a thousand (vil lages); -pattra, n. (having a thousand petals), lotus; -pûrana, a. thousandth; receiving a thousand; -poshá, m. thousandfold welfare (V.); a. thriving a thousandfold (S.); -buddhi, a. thousand-witted; m. N. of a fish; -bhakta, n. a certain festival at which thousands are fed; -bhânu, a. thousand-rayed; -bhrishti, a. thousand-pointed (V.); -ma&ndot;gala, N. of a locality; -mukha, a. having a thousand exits; -rasmi, a. thousand-rayed; m. sun; -li&ndot;gî, f. a thousand Li&ndot;gas; -lokana,a. thousand-eyed; m. ep. of Indra; -vartman, a. thousand-pathed; -vâka, a. containing a thousand verses or words; -satá-dakshina, a. attended with a fee of a hundred thousand (cows); -sás, ad. by thousands (referring to a nm., ac., in.); -sîrsha, a. thousand-headed: â, f. a certain verse (according to comm. the hymn RV. X, 90); (hásra)-sri&ndot;ga, a. thou sand-horned (RV.); -saní, a. gaining a thou sand (V.); -sâ, a. id.; -sâvá, m.thousand-fold Soma-pressing.
sāyaṃsūrya m. evening sun: -½ûdha, pp. brought by the evening sun (guest).
sārka a. together with the sun; -&halfacute;argala, a. bolted; barred, impeded (desire).
sita a. [fr. as-ita, black, misunder stood as a negative] white; pale; bright, light (day or month during the moon's in crease); m. bright half (of a lunar month): â, f. sugar.
sukaṇṭha a. (î) sweet-voiced: î, f. N. of an Apsaras; -kathâ, f. beautiful story; -kany&asharp;, f. N. of a daughter of Saryâta and wife of Kyavana (Br., C.); -kára, a. easily done, easy, for (g.), to (inf.): -tva, n. easi ness, feasibleness, -samdhi, a. easily united; -kárman, a. expert (V.); virtuous (C.); m. artificer (V.); -kalatra, n. good wife; -kavi, m. good poet; -kânta, pp. very handsome (youth); -kâlin, m. pl. a class of Manes; -kimsuká, a. adorned with Kimsuka flowers (car of Sûryâ; RV.1); -kîrtí, f. worthy praise (RV.); a. easily praised (RV.); m. N. of the composer of RV. X, 131 and of that hymn; -kukâ, a. f. having beautiful breasts; -ku mâra, a. (î) very tender or delicate; m. tender youth: -tva, n. tenderness, -½a&ndot;gî, a. f. very delicate-limbed; -kula, n. noble family; a. sprung from a noble family: -ga, -ganman, a. id., -tâ, f. noble birth;-kulîna, a. well-born; -kûrkura, m. N. of a demon injurious to children; -krit, a. doing good, benevolent; righteous, pious; m. pl. the Pious deceased, the Fathers who enjoy the reward of virtue in the other world (V.); 1.-kritá, n. good deed, meritorious act, righteousness, virtue, moral merit (V., C.); benefit, bounty, friendly aid, favour (C.); world of virtue, heaven (V., rare); a. well done (RV.1); 2. (sú)-krita, pp. well done, made, orexecuted; well-formed, adorned, fine: w. karman, n. good work; w. loká, m.= sukritasya loka, world of righteousness (V.); -krita-karman, n. good or meritorious act; a. doing good deeds, virtuous; -krita-krit, a. id.; -krita-bhâg, a. meritorious; -krita½ar tha, a. having fully attained one's object; -kriti, f. good conduct; a. righteous, vir tuous; -kritin, a. doing good actions, vir tuous; prosperous, fortunate; cultivated, wise; -kritya, n.good work to be done, duty; good action; -krity&asharp;, f. (RV.) ex pertness; right conduct, virtue; -krishta, pp. well-ploughed; -kéta, a. benevolent (V.); m. N. of an Âditya (V.); -ketú, a. radiant (dawn; RV.1); m. N. of a prince of the Yak shas and of various kings (C.): -sutâ, f. daughter of Suketu, Tâdakâ; -ketri, m. a personification (identified with the sun); -kesa, a. (î) beautiful-haired; -kesânta, a. having fair locks; -komala, a. very soft or tender; -krátu, a. skilful, wise (gods; RV.); -klesa, a. very distressing; -kshatrá, a. (V.) ruling well (gods); conferring power (wealth); -kshatriya, a. good Kshatriya; -kshití, f. (V.) good abode, security, refuge; -kshétra, n. fine field, good soil; a. affording a fair field or dwelling-place; having fair fields; -kshetriy&asharp;, f. desire of fair fields (RV.1); -kshobhya, fp. easily agitated.
sudaṃsas a. performing mighty deeds (RV.); -dáksha, a. very expert or wise (V.); -dákshina, a. (E.) very dexterous; very courteous; having an excellent right hand (RV.): â, f. N. of Dilîpa's wife; -dá tra, a. giving good gifts (V.); -dant, a. (-dat-î) having beautiful teeth; -darpana, a. having a beautiful mirror, reflecting beauti fully; -dársana, a. easily seen, by (in.); good-looking, handsome, beautiful, lovely; m. N. of various men; m. n. Vishnu's discus (disc of the sun): â, f. night of the bright half of the month (V.); N. of a princess (C.); -dasâ½arha-kula, a. belonging to a family worthy of a happy lot and sprung from the noble race of the Dasârhas; -dâna, n. boun teous gift; -d&asharp;nu, a. (f. id.) dripping or be stowing abundantly, bounteous (of various gods; V.); -dâman, a. bestowing abundantly, bountiful (Indra; RV.2); m. N.; -dâminî, f. N.; -dâru, n. good wood; -dâruna, a. very dreadful; -d&asharp;s, m. [√ dâs=√ dâs] faithful worshipper (of the gods; RV.) or a. bountiful √ dâ]; m. N. of a king of the Tritsus (V., C.).
supakva a. well-cooked; thoroughly ripe or mature (also fig.); -pa&ndot;ka, m. (?) good clay; -patha, a. easy to read, legible; -pati, m. good husband; -pattra, a. having beau tiful wings; well-feathered (arrow); having a beautiful vehicle; -pátnî, a. f. having a good husband; -páth, m. good path; -pátha, n. (V.), m. (C.) good road (V., C.); virtuous course (C.); -pathin, m. (nm. -panthâs) good path; -pad, a. (-î) swift-footed (RV.1); -pa p[a]t-aní, f. swift flight (RV.1); -parigñâta, pp. well-ascertained; -parisrânta, pp. com pletely exhausted; -parihara, a. easy to avoid; -parîkshana, n. careful examina tion; -parîkshita, pp.carefully examined; -parus, a. having beautiful knots (arrow); -parná, a. (&isharp;) having beautiful wings (RV.); m. a large bird of prey, vulture, eagle (fig. of sun, moon, and clouds; du. = sun and moon; V.); a mythical bird, identified with Garuda (C.): -ketu, m. ep. of Vishnu Krishna; -paryavasita, pp. well carried out; -paryâpta, pp. very spacious (house); -par van, a. having beautiful joints; having beauti ful sections orbooks (Mahâbhârata); famous; -palâyita, (pp.) n. skilful or opportune re treat; -pâni, V. a. beautiful-handed; dex terous-handed; -pâtra, n. good receptacle, worthy person (esp. to receive gifts); -pârá, a. (RV.) easy to cross; easy to bear; easily passing over (rain); conducting to a pros perous issue (also TS.); m. a certain per sonification: (á)-kshatra, a. easily traversing his realm (Varuna; RV.1); -pârsva, a. hav ing beautiful sides; m. N.; -pippalá, a. bear ing good berries (V.); -pihita-vat, pp. act. having (the ears, ac.) carefully closed: -î, f. =finite vb.; -punya, a. very excellent; n. great religious or moral merit; -putra, m. good son; á, a. having manyor good chil dren (V., E.); -purusha, m. a certain per sonification; -pushkala, a. very abundant; -pushta, pp. well-fed; -pushpa, a. having beautiful flowers; -pushpita, den. pp. adorned with beautiful flowers; -pûgita,pp. highly honoured; (sú)-pûta, pp. well-clarified; -pûra, a. easy to fill; (sú)-pûrna, pp. well filled, quite full; -pûrvam, ad. very early in the morning; -pûrvâhne, lc. early in the forenoon; -pésas, a. well-adorned, beauti ful, fair (V., rarely P.).
sundara a. (î) [perh. for sunara; cp. sû-nára, sû-nríta; Gk. a)-nh/r, a)-n-d-ro/s] beau tiful, lovely, handsome; noble (rare); good, right, correct (act etc.): -ka, m. N.; -kânda, n. beautiful stalk; -tâ, f.beauty; -pura, n. N. of a town; -m-manya, a. thinking oneself handsome; -sena, m. N. of a king.
sunda m. ep. of Vishnu; N. of an Asura, brother of Upasunda.
surayuvati f. celestial maiden, Apsaras; -yoshit, f. id.; -râga, m. king of the gods, ep. of Indra: -tâ, f. Indra's rank, -vriksha, m. Indra's (Pârigâta) tree; -loka, m. world of the gods, heaven: -sundarî, f. Apsaras; -vadhû, f. id.; -vara, m. chief of the gods, ep. of Indra: -nagara, n. Indra's city; -varman, m. N. of a king; -vâhinî, f. celestial Ganges; -vesman, n. house of god, temple; -satru, m. foe of the gods, Asura; -sâkhin, m. tree of the gods (=kal pa-vriksha).
surasakha m. friend of the gods, ep. of Indra: pl. the Gandharvas; -sattama, spv. best of the gods; -sadana, n. house of god, temple; -sadman, n. abode of the gods, heaven; temple; -sarit, f. river of the gods, Ganges: -suta, m. son of the Ganges, Bhîshma; -sindhu, f. river of the gods, Ganges; -suta½upama, a. resembling the sons of the gods; -sundarî, f. a divine beauty, Apsaras: -gana, m. pl. Apsaras-folk; -senâ,f. host of the gods; N.; -strî, f. celes tial woman, Apsaras; -sthâna, n. temple.
sūryā f. female personification of the Sun; hymn of the wedding of Sûryâ (RV. X, 85).
sūrya m. [svar] sun; sun-god; N. (C.): -ka, m. N.; -kara, m. sunbeam; -kân ta, m. (beloved of the sun), sun-stone, sun crystal; -kandra, m. N.; -tapas, m. N. of a sage; -tegas, n. sunshine;(s&usharp;rya)-tvak, a. having a sun-bright skin or covering (RV.); -pâda, m. sunbeam; -putra, m. son of the sun, pat. of the Asvins, planet Saturn, and Yama: î, f. daughter of the sun, the Yamu nâ; -prabha, a. sun-bright; m. N. among others of the king after whom the eighth Lambaka of the Kathâsaritsâgara is called: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -prabhava, a. sprung from the sun (race); -prabhîya, a. belonging to king Sûryaprabha; -prasishya, m. ep. of Ganaka; -bimba, m. or n. disc of the sun; -mandala, n. id.; -matî, f. N. of a princess; -ratha, m. car of the sun; -rasmi, m. sun beam; -ruk, f. sunlight; -vamsa, m. solar race of kings; -vams-ya, a.belonging to the solar race; -varman, m. N. of a Dâmara; -vâra, m. Sunday; -sishya, m. ep. of Yâgña valkya: -½antevâsin, m. ep. of Ganaka; -samkrama, m. entrance of the sun into a new sign of the zodiac; -samkrânti, f. id.; -siddhânta, m. T. of an astronomical trea tise ascribed to the Sun; -suta, m. (son of the sun) planet Saturn; the monkey Sugrîva; -stuti, f., -stotra, n. praise of the sun.
sūra m. Soma flowing from the press (√ 1. su); 2. s&usharp;r-a, m. [fr. svar] sun; (s&usharp;ra)-kakshas, a. bright as the sun (RV.).
sūryoḍha pp. brought by the set ting sun, arriving at sunset (guest); -½udaya, m. sunrise.
sūryāṃśu m. sunbeam; â-kandra más-â (V.) or -au, m. nm. du. sun and moon; -½âtapa, m. heat of the sun: e dâ, expose to the sun; -½apâya, m. departure of the sun, sunset; (s&usharp;rya)-½abhyudita, pp. risen upon while sleeping by the sun (V.); â-vasu, a. whose wealth is Sûrya (Asvins; RV.1); â vid, a. knowing the Sûryâ hymn (RV. X, 85); â-sûkta, n. the Sûryâ hymn (RV. X, 85); a½asta, m. sunset.
saunāga m. pl. school of Sunâga.
saurya a. (â, C.; saur&isharp;, V.) relating to the sun (sûrya), solar: -prabha, a. belong ing to Sûrya-prabha.
saura a. (î) relating or belonging to, derived from, the sun (sûrya), solar; m. wor shipper of the sun; son of the sun, planet Saturn; n. collection of hymns to the sun.
sauṣumṇa m. [sushumna] a kind of sunbeam.
saundarya n. [sundara] beauty, loveliness, gracefulness.
svarṇara m. lord of splendour, ep. of Agni, of the Sun, and of Soma (V.).
svaḥsad a. dwelling in heaven; m. god; -sarit, f. celestial river, Ganges; -sin dhu, f. id.; -sundarî, f. celestial beauty, Apsaras; -strî, f. id.
harit a. [√ 3. hri] yellowish, tawny; greenish (rare, P.); m. (C.) horse of the sun; emerald (rare, P.); f. tawny mare (V.); quarter of the sky (V., C.).
haridaśva m. (having tawny steeds), sun.
Vedic Index of
Names and Subjects
Results for sunResults for sun
ajīgarta sauyavasa This is the name given to the father of Sunahśepa in the famous legend of the Aitareya Brāhmana, perhaps invented for the occasion, as Weber suggests.
adṛṣṭa The unseen ’ is a term used in the Rigveda and the Atharvaveda to designate a species of vermin. The sun is also described as *the slayer of the unseen ’ (adrsta-han) , and as a counterpart a * seen ’ (drsta) is mentioned. In one passage the epithets ‘seen’ and ‘unseen’ are applied to the worm (Krmi), their use being no doubt due to the widespread theory of diseases being due to worms, whether discernable by examination or not.
anas This is the term used to designate the draft wagon, as opposed to the chariot (ratha) for war or sport, with which it is sometimes expressly contrasted, though Indra is once said to be *seated in a wagon’ (anar-viś)B instead of on a chariot. Though Usas, Goddess of Dawn, sometimes rides on a chariot (ratha), the wagon is her characteristic vehicle. Of its con­struction we know little. The bridal wagon on which Sūryā, the daughter of the Sun, was borne in the marriage hymn in the Rigveda had a covering (Chadis).The axle-box (Kha) is also mentioned.In the Atharvaveda Vipatha appears to denote a rough vehicle used for bad tracks.The wagon was usually drawn by oxen (Anadvāh), as in wedding processions.The wagon of Dawn is described as drawn by ruddy cows or bulls.
andhra Is the name of a people, and is mentioned with the Pundras, Sabaras, Pulindas, and Mūtibas, as being the outcasts resulting from the refusal of the fifty eldest sons of Viśvāmitra to accept his adoption of Sunahśθpa. It may fairly be deduced from this statement that these people were recognized as non- Aryan, as the Andhras certainly seem to have been.
ayas The exact metal denoted by this word when used by itself, as always in the Rigveda, is uncertain. As favouring the sense of ‘ bronze ’ rather than that of ‘ iron ’ may perhaps be cited with Zimmer the fact that Agni is called ayo-damstra,‘with teeth of Ayas,’with reference to the colour of his flames, and that the car-seat of Mitra and Varuna is called ayah-sthūna, ‘with pillars of Ayas ’ at the setting of the sun. Moreover, in the Vājasaneyi Samhitā, Ayas is enumerated in a list of six metals: gold (hiranya), Ayas, Syāma, Loha, lead (sīsa), tin (trapu). Here śyāma (‘ swarthy ’) and loha (‘ red ’) must mean ‘iron’ and ‘copper’ respectively; ayas would therefore seem to mean ‘bronze.’ In many passages in the Atharvaveda and other books, the Ayas is divided into two species—the śyāma (* iron ’) and the lohita (‘ copper’ or * bronze ’). In the Satapatha Brāhmana a distinction is drawn between Ayas and lohāyasa, which may either be a distinction between iron and copper as understood by Eggeling, or between copper and bronze as held by Schrader. In one passage of the Atharvaveda, the sense of iron seems certain. Possibly, too, the arrow of the Rigveda, which had a tip of Ayas (yasyā ayo mukham), was pointed with iron. Copper, however, is conceivable, and bronze quite likely. Iron is called śyāma ayas or śyāma alone. See also Kārsnāyasa. Copper is Lohāyasa or Lohitāyasa. The smelting (dhmā ‘ to blow ’) of the metal is frequently referred to. The Satapatha Brāhmana states that if ‘ well smelted ’ (bahu-dhmātam) it is like gold, referring evidently to bronze. A heater of Ayas is mentioned in the Vājasaneyi Samhitā, and bowls of Ayas are also spoken of.
ayāsya áñgirasa This sage appears to be mentioned in two passages of the Rigveda, and the Anukramanī ascribes to him several hymns of the Rigveda. In the Brāhmana tradition he was Udgātr at the Rājasūya or Royal Inauguration Sacrifice, at which Sunahśepa was to have been slain, and his Udgītha (Sāmaveda chant) is referred to elsewhere. He is also referred to several times as a ritual authority. In the Vamśas, or Genealogies of the Brhadaran• yaka Upanisad, he is named as the pupil of Abhūti Tvāstra.
ahan ‘Day.’ Like other peoples, the Indians used night as a general expression of time as well as day, but by no means predominantly.Night is also termed the dark (krsna), as opposed to the light (arjuna), day. Aho-rātra is a regular term for ‘ day and night ’ combined.The day itself is variously divided. In the Atharvaveda a division into ‘ the rising sun ’ (udyan sūryah), ‘ the coming together of the cows’ (sam-gava), ‘midday’ (madhyam-dina),*afternoon ’ (aparāhna), and ‘ sunset ’ (astam-yan) is found. In the Taittirīya Brāhmana the same series appears with ‘ early ’ (prātar) and ‘ evening ’ (sāyāhna) substituted for the first and last members, while a shorter list gives prātar, samgava, sāyam. In the Maitrāyanī Samhitā there is the series ‘ dawn ’ (usas), samgava, madhyamdina, and aparāhna. The morning is also, according to Zimmer, called api-śarvara, as the time when the dark is just past. It is named svasara, as the time when the cows are feeding, before the -first milking at the samgava, or when the birds are awakening. It is also called pra-pitva, according to Zimmer. But Geldner points out that that term refers to the late midday, which also is called api-śarvara, as bordering on the coming night, being the time when day is hastening to its close, as in a race. From another point of view, evening is called abhi-pitva, the time when all come to rest. Or again, morning and evening are denoted as the dawning of the sun (uditā sūryasya)i or its setting (ni-mruc). The midday is regularly madhyam ahnām, madhye, or madhyamdina. Samgava16 is the forenoon, between the early morning (prātar) and midday (madhyamdina). The divisions of time less than the day are seldom precisely given. In the śatapatha Brāhmana, however, a day and night make up 30 muhūrtas; 1 muhūrta=ι5 ksipra; 1 ksipra — 15 etarhi; 1 etarhi= 15 idāni; 1 idāni = 15 breathings; 1 breath¬ing =1 spiration; 1 spiration = ι twinkling (nimesa), etc. In the śānkhāyana Áranyaka the series is dhvamsayo, nimesāh, kāsthāh, kalāh, ksanā, muhūrtā, ahorātrāh. A thirtyfold division of day as well as of night is seen in one passage of the Rigveda by Zimmer, who compares the Babylonian sixty¬fold division of the day and night. But the expression used— thirty Yojanas—is too vague and obscure—Bergaigne refers it to the firmament—to build any theory upon with safety.
ākhyāna In the Aitareya Brāhmana we hear of the śaunahśepa Akhyāna, ‘the story of Sunahśepa,’ which is told by the Hotr priest at the Rājasūya (‘ royal inauguration ’). The series of stories used at the Aśvamedha (‘horse sacrifice’) during the year while the sacrificial horse is allowed to wander at its will is called the ‘cyclic’ (pari-plavam). The Aitareya Brāhmana mentions also Akhyāna-vids (‘ men versed in tales’), who tell the Sauparna legend, elsewhere known as a Vyākhyāna. Yāska, in the Nirukta, frequently uses the term* sometimes in a pregnant sense as denoting the doctrine of the Aitihāsikas or traditional interpreters of the Rigveda.
ājīgarti See Sunahśepa, who bears this patronymic in the Aitareya Brāhmana. He is called an Angirasa in the Kāthaka Samhitā.
āsaṅga plāyogi Is a king who appears in a Dānastuti (‘Praise of Gifts’) in the Rigveda as a generous patron. Owing, however, to the addition of a curious phallic verse to the hymn, and its early misunderstanding, a legend was invented that he lost his manhood and became a woman, but by the intercession of Medhyātithi was transformed into a man, much to the delight of his wife, Saśvatī, whose existence is based on a misunderstanding of the phrase * every woman ’ (saśvatī nārī) in the added verse. Another misunderstanding of the Dānastuti4 gives him a son Svanad-ratha, really a mere epithet, and makes him a descendant of Yadu.
iṭa Appears as Ṛṣi and protege of Indra in one hymn of the Rigveda. Roth however thinks that the word is really part of a verb meaning to 'to err, wander',and that the name is a mere misunderstanding. It is already so regarded in the Anukramanī, but not apparently in the Brhaddevatā
etaśa Is in several passages of the Rigveda, according to Roth the name of a protege whom Indra helped against the sun-god Sūrya. But in all these passages Etaśa seems merely to designate the horse of the sun.
aikādaśākṣa mānutantavya Appears in the Aitareya Brāh¬mana as a king who observed the rule of sacrificing when the sun had risen (udita-homin), and as a contemporary of Nagarin Jāna-śruteya.
kāpileya The Kāpileyas and the Bābhravas are mentioned in the Aitareya Brāhmana as descendants of Devarāta Vaiśvā- mitra, the adoptive name of Sunahśepa.
kutsa Is the name of a hero frequently mentioned in the Rigveda, which, however, gives practically no information about him, for he was no doubt already a figure of the mythic past. He is several times called Arjuneya, ‘descendant of Arjuna,’ and is usually associated with Indra in the exploit of defeating the demon Susna and winning the sun. He is said to have defeated Smadibha, Tugra, and the Vetasus, but, on the other hand, he is several times mentioned with Atithigva and Ayu as being vanquished by Indra, his defeat in one passage being attributed to Tūrvayāna. Elsewhere he appears with Atithigva as a friend of Indra’s. In the later literature he is seldom mentioned except in connexion with the myth of his binding Indra, which is found in the Brāhmanas, and which is based on an obscure verse in the Rigveda. The Kutsas, or descendants of Kutsa, are mentioned in one hymn of the Rigveda.
gāthā In the Rigveda usually means only ‘song,’ ‘verse,’ like Gātu. In one passage, however, it already has a more special sense, as it is classed with Nārāśamsī and Raibhī, a collocation repeatedly found later. The commentators identify the three terms with certain verses of the Atharvaveda, but Oldenberg has shown that this identification is incorrect for the Rigveda. Gāthās are often mentioned elsewhere, and are referred to as metrical in the Aitareya Áranyaka, where the Rc, Kumbyā, and Gāthā are classed as forms of verse. The Aitareya Brāhmana distinguishes between Rc and Gāthā as divine and human respectively. According to the usage of the Brāhmanas and the liturgical literature, as stated by the St. Petersburg Dictionary, the Gāthās are, though religious in content, distinguished from Rc, Yajus, and Sāman as non- Vedic—that is, are not Mantras. This view is consistent with the fact that the phrase Yajña-gāthā, meaning a verse summarizing a sacrificial usage, is not rare. The Satapatha Brāhmana preserves several Gāthās, which generally accord with this description as epitomizing the sacrifices of famous kings, and the Maitrāyanī Samhitā states that a Gāthā is sung at a wedding. Sometimes Gāthā is qualified as Nārāśamsī, where it must be a eulogy of a generous donor.
gāthin Is mentioned as the son of Kuśika and father of Viśvāmitra in the Sarvānukramanī. It is difficult to say whether this tradition is correct; it derives some support from the Aitareya Brāhmana , where reference is made to the divine lore (daiva veda) of the Gāthins, which is said to be shared by Sunahśepa as a result of his adoption by Viśvāmitra. See Gāthina.
gṛtsamada Is the name of a seer to whom the Sarvānu- kramanī attributes the authorship of the second Mandala of the Rigveda. This tradition is supported by the Aitareya Brāhmana and the Aitareya Aranyaka. The Kausītaki Brāhmana speaks of him as a Bhārgava, ‘ descendant of Bhrgu,’ with a variant Bābhrava, ‘ descendant of Babhru,’ but the later tradition keeps to the former patronymic.4 The Grtsamadas are often mentioned in the second Mandala of the Rigveda,5 and are also called Sunahotras,6 but never Gārtsamadas or Saunahotras, and Grtsamada himself never occurs there.
gotra Occurs several times in the Rigveda in the account of the mythic exploits of Indra. Roth interprets the word as cowstall,’ while Geldner thinks ‘ herd ’ is meant. The latter sense seems to explain best the employment which the term shows in the later literature as denoting the £ family or £ clan,’ and which is found in the Chāndogya Upanisad. In the Grhya Sūtras stress is laid on the prohibition of marriage within a Gotra, or with a Sapinda of the mother of the bridegroom—that is to say, roughly, with agnates and cognates. Senart has emphasized this fact as a basis of caste, on the ground that marriage within a curia, phratria, or caste (Varna) was Indo-European, as was marriage outside the circle of agnates and cognates. But there is no evidence at all to prove that this practice was Indo-European, while in India the Satapatha expressly recognizes marriage within the third or fourth degree on either side. According to Sāyana, the Kānvas accepted marriage in the third degree, the Saurāstras only in the fourth, while the scholiast on the Vajrasūcī adds to the Kānvas the Andhras and the Dāksinātyas, and remarks that the Vājasaneyins forbade marriage with the daughter of the mother’s brother. All apparently allowed marriage with the daughter of a paternal uncle, which later was quite excluded. Change of Gotra was quite possible, as in the case of Sunah- śepa and Grtsamada, who, once an Añgirasa, became a Bhārgava.
graha (‘Seizing ’) is a term applied to the sun in the śata­patha Brāhmana, most probably not in the later sense of ‘ planet,’ but to denote a power exercising magical influence. The sense of ‘ planet ’ seems first to occur in the later literature, as in the Maitrāyanī Upanisad. The question whether the planets were known to the Vedic Indians is involved in obscurity. Oldenberg recognizes them in the Adityas, whose number is, he believes, seven : sun, moon, and the five planets. But this view, though it cannot be said to be impossible or even unlikely, is not susceptible of proof, and has been rejected by Hillebrandt, Pischel, von Schroeder,Macdonell, and Bloom­field, among others. Hillebrandt sees the planets in the five Adhvaryus mentioned in the Rigveda, but this is a mere con­jecture. The five bulls (uksānah) in another passage of the Rigveda have received a similar interpretation with equal uncertainty, and Durga, in his commentary on the Nirukta, even explains the term bhūmija, ‘ earth-born,’ which is only men­tioned by Yāska, as meaning the planet Mars.Thibaut, who is generally sceptical as to the mention of planets in the Veda, thinks that Brhaspati there refers to Jupiter; but this is extremely improbable, though in the Taittirīya Samhitā Brhaspati is made the regent of Tisya. A reference to the planets is much more probable in the seven suns (sapta sūryāh) of the late Taittirīya Áranyaka. On the other hand, Ludwig’s efforts to find the five planets with the sun, the moon, and the twenty-seven Naksatras (lunar mansions) in the Rigveda, as corresponding to the number thirty-four used in connexion with light19 (jyotis) and the ribs of the sacrificial horse, is far¬fetched. See also Sukra, Manthin, Vena.
candra Are the names of the * moon,’ the latter occurring from the Rigveda onwards, but the former being first used in this sense by the Atharvaveda. Very little is said about the moon in Vedic literature, except -as identified with Soma,3 both alike being described as waxing and waning. Reference is, however, made to the regular changes of the moon, and to its alternation with the sun,[1] to which it, as Soma, is declared in the Rigveda to be married.[2] Mention is also made of its disappearance at the time of new moon,[3] and of its birth from the light of the sun.8 In the Atharvaveda9 reference is made to demons eclipsing the moon (grahās cāndramāsāh). For the phases of the moon, and the month as a measure of time, see Māsa. For the moon and its mansions, see Naksatra.
cāturmāsya ‘Four-monthly,’ denotes the festival of the Vedic ritual held at the beginning of the three seasons of four months each, into which the Vedic year was artificially divided. It is clear that the sacrifices commenced with the beginning of each season, and it is certain that the first of them, the Vaiśvadeva, coincided with the Phālgunī full moon, the second, the Varuna-praghāsas, with the AsadhI full moon, and the third, the Sāka-medha, with the Kārttikī full moon. There were, however, two alternative datings: the festivals could also be held in the Caitri, the Srāvanī, and Agrahāyanī (Mārgaśīrsī) full moons, or in the Vaiśākhī, Bhādrapadī, and Pausī full moons. Neither of the later datings is found in a Brāhmana text, but each may well have been known early, since the Taittirīya Samhitā and the Pañcavimśa Brāhmana both recognize the full moon in the month Caitra as an alternative to the full moon in the month Phālguna, for the beginning of the year. Jacobi considers that the commencement of the year with the full moon in the asterism Phālgunī, which is supported by other evidence, indicates that the year at one time began with the winter solstice with the moon in Phālgunī, corresponding to the summer solstice when the sun was in Phālgunī. These astronomical conditions, he believes, existed in the time of the Rigveda, and prevailed in the fourth millennium B.C. The alternative dates would then indicate periods when the winter solstice coincided with the Caitrī or the Vaiśākhī full moon. But Oldenberg and Thibaut seem clearly right in holding that the coincidence of Phālgunī with the beginning of spring, which is certain, is fatal to this view, and that there is no difficulty in regarding this date as consistent with the date of the winter solstice in the new moon of Māgha, which is given by the Kausītaki Brāhmana, and which forms the basis of the calculations of the Jyotisa. The full moon in Phālguna would be placed about one month and a half after the winter solstice, or, say, in the first week of February, which date, according to Thibaut, may reasonably be deemed to mark the beginning of a new season in India about 800 B.C. At the same time it must be remembered that the date was necessarily artificial, inasmuch as the year was divided into three seasons, each of four months, and the Indian year does not in fact consist of three equal seasons. The variations of the other datings would then not be unnatural if any school wished to defer its spring festival, the Vaiśvadeva, to the time when spring had really manifested itself. See also Samvatsara.
chandoga ‘metre-singing,’ is the term applied to reciters of the Sāmans, no doubt because these chants were sung according to their order in the Chandaārcika of the Sāmaveda. It is only found in the Satapatha Brāhmana, and often in the Sūtras.
jamadagni Is one of the somewhat mythical sages of the Rigveda, where he is frequently mentioned. In some passages his name occurs in such a way as to indicate that he is the author of the hymn; once he is thus associated with Viśvā- mitra. In other passages he is merely referred to, and the Jamadagnisare mentioned once. In the Atharvaveda, as well as the Yajurveda Samhitās and the Brāhmanas, he is quite a frequent figure. Here he appears as a friend of Viśvāmitra and a rival of Vasistha. He owed his prosperity to his catū- rātra, or ‘four-night’ ritual, with which his family were also very successful. In the Atharvaveda Jamadagni is connected with Atri and Kanva, as well as Asita and Vītahavya. He was Adhvaryu priest at the proposed sacrifice of Sunahśepa.
jahnu Occurs only in the plural in the legend of Sunahśepa, who is said to have obtained, as Devarāta, both the lordship of the Jahnus and the divine lore of the Gāthins. A Jāhnava, or descendant of Jahnu, was, according to the Pañcavimśa Brāhmana, Viśvāmitra, who is said, by means of a certain catū-rātra or four-night ’ ritual, to have secured the kingdom for the Jahnus in their conflict with the Vrcīvants. He is here described as a king. Again, in the Aitareya Brāhmana, Viśvāmitra is addressed as a rāja-putra, ‘prince,’ and Bharata- rsabha, ‘bull of the Bharatas.’ It is therefore clear that the Brāhmanas, though not the Samhitās, saw in him at once a priest and a prince by origin, though there is no trace whatever of their seeing in him a prince who won Brahmanhood as in the version of the later texts.A Jahnāvī is mentioned twice in the Rigveda, being either the wife of Jahnu, or, as Sāyana thinks, the race of Jahnu. The family must clearly once have been a great one, later merged in the Bharatas.
jāhnava ‘Descendant of Jahnu,’ is the patronymic of Viśvā­mitra in the Pañcavimśa Brāhmana. This fact is of some importance as disproving Aufrecht’s theory that the Jahnus were the clan of Ajīgarta, the father of Sunahśepa.
tārkṣya Is mentioned in the Rigveda as a divine steed, apparently the sun conceived as a horse. But Foy, judging by the name, apparently a patronymic of Trksi, who is known from the Rigveda onwards as a descendant of Trasadasyu, thinks that a real steed, the property of Trksi, is meant; but this is not very probable. See also Tāruksya.
tiṣya Occurs twice in the Rigveda, apparently as the name of a star, though Sāyana takes it to mean the sun. It is doubtless identical with the Avestan Tistrya. Later it is the name of a lunar mansion : see Naksatra.
dāya Occurs in the Rigveda only in the sense of ‘reward’ of exertion (śrama), but later it means ‘inheritance’—that is, a father’s property which is to be divided among his sons either during his lifetime or after his death. The passages all negative the idea that the property 0/ the family was legally family property: it is clear that it was the property of the head of the house, usually the father, and that the other members of the family only had moral claims upon it which the father could ignore, though he might be coerced by his sons if they were physically stronger. Thus Manu is said in the Taittirīya Samhitā to have divided his property among his sons. He omitted Nābhānedistha, whom he afterwards taught how to appease the Añgirases, and to procure cows. This is a significant indication that the property he divided was movable property, rather than land (Urvarā). In the Aitareya Brāhmana the division is said to have been made during Manu’s lifetime by his sons, who left only their aged father to Nābhānedistha. According to the Jaiminīya Brāhmana, again, four sons divided the inheritance while their old father, Abhipratārin, was still alive. It is, of course, possible to regard Dāya as denoting the heritable property of the family, but the developed patria potestas of the father, which was early very marked, as shown by the legend of Sunahśepa, is inconsistent with the view that the sons were legally owners with their father, unless and until they actually insisted on a division of the property. Probably— there is no evidence of any decisive character—land was not divided at first, but no doubt its disposal began to follow the analogy of cattle and other movable property as soon as the available supply of arable land became limited. As for the method of division, it is clear from the Taittirīya Samhitā that the elder son was usually preferred; perhaps this was always the case after death. During the father’s life¬time another might be preferred, as appears from a passage of the Pañcavimśa Brāhmana. Women were excluded from partition or inheritance, according to the śatapatha Brāhmana and the Nirukta. They were, no doubt, supported by their brothers; but if they had none they might be reduced to prostitution. Detailed rules of inheritance appear in the Sūtras.
div ‘Sky.’ The world as a whole is regarded as divided into the three domains of ‘earth/ ‘air’ or ‘atmosphere,’ and ‘heaven’ or ‘sky’ (div) or alternatively into ‘heaven and earth’ (dyāvā-prthivī), which two are then considered as com­prising the universe, the atmosphere being included in the sky. Lightning, wind, and rain belong to the atmosphere, solar and The shape of the earth is compared with a wheel in the Rigveda, and is expressly called * circular ’ (pari-mandala) in the Satapatha Brāhmana. When earth is conjoined with heaven, the two are conceived as great bowls (camvā) turned towards each other. In the Aitareya Aranyaka the two are regarded as halves of an egg. The distance of heaven from the earth is given by the Atharvaveda as a thousand days’ journey for the sun-bird, by the Aitareya Brāhmana as a thousand days’ journey for a horse, while the Pañcavimśa Brāhmana whimsically estimates the distance as equivalent to a thousand cows standing one on the top of the other.According to Zimmer, the Vedic poets conceived the atmosphere to be above the earth in its upper division only, but below it in its lower stratum. The evidence, however, for the latter assumption is quite insufficient. The theory of the Aitareya Brāhmana is that the sun merely reverses its bright side at night, turning its light on the stars and the moon while it retraverses its course to the east; and it has been shown that this is probably the doctrine of the Rigveda also. See also Sūrya and Candramās. For the Vedic knowledge of the planets, see Graha. There is no geographical division of the earth in Vedic literature. The Jaiminīya Upanisad Brāhmana states that the centre of the earth is a span north of the Plaksa Prāsravanā, and that the centre of the sky is the constellation of the seven Esis, the Great Bear. For the quarters, see Diś.
divya śvan The ‘ divine dog,’ in one passage of the Athar­vaveda appears to denote Canis major or Sirius. But Bloom­field thinks that the two divine dogs referred to in the Maitrāyanī Samhitā and the Taittirīya Brāhmana are the sun and moon, and that the sun is meant in the Atharvaveda.
dundubhi Apparently an onomatopoetic word, means ‘ drum,’ as used in both war and peace. It is often mentioned from the Rigveda onwards. A special sort of drum was the earth drum,’ made by digging a hole in the ground and covering it with a hide. This was employed in the Mahāvrata, a rite performed at the winter solstice, for the purpose of driving away influences hostile to the return of the sun. A ‘ drum- beater’ is included in the list of sacrificial victims at the Purusamedha or ‘human sacrifice.’
dharma Are the regular words, the latter in the Rigveda, and both later, for ‘ law ’ or ‘ custom.’ But there is very little evidence in the early literature as to the administra­tion of justice or the code of law followed. On the other hand, the Dharma Sūtras contain full particulars.Criminal Law.—The crimes recognized in Vedic literature vary greatly in importance, while there is no distinction adopted in principle between real crimes and what now are regarded as fanciful bodily defects or infringements of merely conventional practices. The crimes enumerated include the slaying of an embryo (
nakṣatra Is a word of obscure origin and derivation. The Indian interpreters already show a great divergence of opinion as to its primary meaning. The śatapatha Brāhmana re­solves it into na-ksatra (‘ no power ’), explaining it by a legend. The Nirukta refers it to the root naks, ‘obtain/ following the Taittirīya Brāhmana. Aufrecht and Weber derived it from nakta-tra, ‘ guardian of night/ and more recently the derivation from nak-ksatra, ‘ having rule over night/ seems to be gaining acceptance. The generic meaning of the word therefore seems to be ‘star/ The Naksatras as Stars in the Rigveda and Later.—The sense of star ’ appears to be adequate for all or nearly all the passages in which Naksatra occurs in the Rigveda. The same sense occurs in the later Samhitās also : the sun and the Naksatras are mentioned together, or the sun, the moon, and the Naksatras, or the moon and the Naksatras, or the Naksatras alone; but there is no necessity to attribute to the word the sense of lunar mansion ’ in these passages. On the other hand, the names of at least three of the Naksatras in the later sense occur in the Rigveda. Tisya, however, does not seem to be mentioned as a lunar mansion. With Aghās (plur.) and Arjunī (dual) the case is different: it seems probable that they are the later lunar mansions called Maghās (plur.) and Phālgunī (dual). The names appear to have been deliberately changed in the Rigveda, and it must be remembered that the hymn in which they occur, the wedding hymn of Sūryā, has no claim to great age. Ludwig and Zimmer have seen other references to the Naksatras as 27 in the Rigveda, but these seem most improbable. Nor do the adjectives revatī (£ rich ’) and punarvasīi (‘ bringing wealth again’) in another hymn appear to refer to the Naksatras. The Naksatras as Lunar Mansions.—In several passages of the later Samhitās the connexion of the moon and the Naksatras is conceived of as a marriage union. Thus in the Kāthaka and Taittirīya Samhitās it is expressly stated that Soma was wedded to the mansions, but dwelt only with Rohinī; the others being angry, he had ultimately to undertake to live with them all equally. Weber hence deduced that the Naksatras were regarded as of equal extent, but this is to press the texts unduly, except in the sense of approximate equality. The number of the mansions is not stated as 27 in the story told in the two Samhitās: the Taittīriya has, and the Kāthaka no number; but 27 appears as their number in the list which is found in the Taittirīya Samhitā and elsewhere. The number 28 is much less well attested: in one passage of the Taittirīya Brāhmana Abhijit is practically marked as a new comer, though in a later book, in the Maitrāyanī Samhitā, and in the Atharvaveda list,27 it has found acceptance. It is perfectly possible that 28 is the earlier number, and that Abhijit dropped out because it was faint, or too far north, or because 27 was a more mystic (3x3x3) number: it is significant that the Chinese Sieou and the Arabic Manāzil are 28 in number.28 Weber, however, believes that 27 is the older number in India. The meaning of the number is easily explained when it is remembered that a periodic month occupies something between 27 and 28 days, more nearly the former number. Such a month is in fact recognized in the Lātyāyana and Nidāna Sūtras as consisting of 27 days, 12 months making a year of 324 days, a Naksatra year, or with an intercalary month, a year of 351 days. The Nidāna Sūtra makes an attempt to introduce the Naksatra reckoning into the civil or solar (sāvana) year of 360 days, for it holds that the sun spends 13J• days in each Naksatra (13^x27 = 360). But the month of 27 or 28 days plays no part in the chronological calculations of the Veda. The Names of the Naksatras.—In addition to the two mentioned in the Rigveda, the earlier Atharvaveda gives the names of Jyesthaghnī (the later Jyesthā) and Vicrtau, which are mentioned as in close connexion, and of Revatīs (plural) and Kyttikās. With reference to possible times for the ceremony of the Agnyādhāna, or Maying of the sacred fires/ the Kāthaka Samhitā, the Maitrāyanī Samhitā, and the Taittirīya Brāhmana mention the Naksatras called Krttikās, Rohinī, Phalgunyas, Hasta; the latter Brāhmana adds Punar- vasū, and in an additional remark excludes Pūrve Phālgunī in favour of Uttare Phālgunī. The śatapatha Brāhmana adds Mrgaśīrsa and Citrā as possibilities. On the other hand, Punarvasū is recommended by all authorities as suitable for the Punarādheya, 'relaying of the sacred fires,’ which takes place if the first fire has failed to effect the aim of its existence, the prosperity of the sacrificer. The Kāthaka Samhitā, however, allows Anurādhās also. In the ceremony of the Agnicayana, or 'piling of the fire- altar,’ the bricks are assumed to be equal in number to the Naksatras. The bricks number 756, and they are equated to 27 Naksatras multiplied by 27 secondary Naksatras, reckoned as 720 (instead of 729), with the addition of 36 days, the length of an intercalary month. Nothing can be usefully derived from this piece of priestly nonsense. But in connexion with this ceremony the Yajurveda Samhitās enumerate the 27, The Taittirīya Brāhmana has a list of the Naksatras which agrees generally with the list of the Samhitās. It runs as follows: Kyttikās, Rohinī, Invakās, Bāhū (dual), Tisya, Aśleṣās, Maghās, Pūrve Phālgunī, Uttare Phālgunī, Hasta, Citrā, Nistyā, Viśākhe, Anūrādhās, Rohinī, Mūlabarhanī, Pūrvā Asādhās', Uttarā Asādhās, Sronā, Sravisthās, Satabhisaj, Pūrve Prosthapadās, Uttare Prosthapadās, Revatī, Aśvayujau, Apabharanīs. In a later book, however, the list grows to 28, and the full moon is inserted after number 14, and the new moon after number, as an attempt to bring the Naksatra (lunar) month into accordance with the Sāvana (solar) month of 30 days. The names in this second list are as in the Samhitās with the following exceptions. The seven stars of the Krttikās are named as Ambā, Dulā, Nitatnī, Abhrayantī, Meghayantī, Varsayantī, Cupunīkā, names found also in the Taittirīya and Kāthaka Samhitās. Beside Mrgaśīrsa, Invakās are also mentioned. Then come Ardrā, Punarvasū, Tisya, Aśresās, Maghās (beside which Anaghās, Agadās, and Arun- dhatīs are also mentioned), Phalgunyas (but elsewhere in the dual, Phalgunyau), Phalgunyas, Hasta, Citrā, Nistyā, Viśākhe, Anūrādhās, Jyesthā, Mūla, Asādhās, Asā(jhās, Abhijit, śronā, Sravisthās, Satabhisaj, Prosthapadās, Prosthapadās, Revatī, Aśvayujau, Bharanyas, but also Apabharanīs. Abhijit, which occurs also in an earlier part of the Brāhmana, is perhaps interpolated. But Weber’s argument that Abhijit is out of place in this list because Brāhmana is here mentioned as the 28th Naksatra, loses some force from the fact (of course unknown to him) that the list in the Maitrāyanī Samhitā contains 28 Naksatras, including Abhijit, and adds Brāhmana at the end as another. In another passage the Taittirīya Brāhmana divides the Naksatras into two sets, the Deva Naksatras and the Yama Naksatras, being 1-14 and 15-27 (with the omission of Abhijit) respectively. This division corresponds with one in the third book of the Brāhmana60 where the days of the light half of the month and those of the dark half are equated with the Naksatras. The Brāhmana treats the former series as south, the latter as north; but this has no relation to facts, and can only be regarded as a ritual absurdity. The late nineteenth book of the Atharvaveda contains a list of the Naksatras, including Abhijit. The names here (masc.), Viśākhe, Anurādhā, Jyesthā, Mūla, Pūrvā Asādhās, Uttarā Asādhās, Abhijit, śravana, śravisthās, śatabhisaj, Dvayā Prosthapadā, Revatī, Aśvayujau, Bharanyas. The Position of the Naksatras.—There is nothing definite in Vedic literature regarding the position of most of the Naksatras, but the later astronomy precisely locates all of them, and its statements agree on the whole satisfactorily with what is said in the earlier texts, though Weber was inclined to doubt this. The determinations adopted below are due to Whitney in his notes on the Sūrya Siddhānta. 1.Krttikās are unquestionably η Tauri, etc., the Pleiades. The names of the seven stars forming this constellation, and given above from Yajurveda texts, include three --------abhrayantī, forming clouds meghayantī, ‘making cloudy’; varsayantī, ‘causing rain’—which clearly refer to the rainy Pleiades. The word krttikā possibly means ‘web/ from the root krt, spin.’ 2. Rohinī, ‘ ruddy,’ is the name of the conspicuously reddish star, a Tauri or Aldebaran, and denotes the group of the Hyades, <* θ y 8 e Tauri. Its identification seems absolutely assured by the legend of Prajāpati in the Aitareya Brāhmana. He is there represented as pursuing his daughter with incestuous intention, and as having been shot with an arrow (Isu Trikāndā, ‘ the belt of Orion ’) by the huntsman ’ (Mrgavyādha, Sirius ’). Prajāpati is clearly Orion (Mrgaśiras being the name of the little group of stars in Orion’s head). 3.Mrgaśīrsa or Mrgaśiras, also called Invakā or Invagā, seems to be the faint stars λ, φ,1 φ2 Orionis. They are called Andhakā, * blind,’ in the śāntikalpa of the Atharvaveda, probably because of their dimness. 4.Ardrā, ‘ moist,’ is the name of the brilliant star, α Orionis. But the names by which it is styled, in the plural as Árdrās in the śāñkhāyana Grhya Sūtra and the Naksatrakalpa, and in the dual as Bāhú, in the Taittirīya Brāhmana, point to a constellation of two or more stars, and it may be noted that the corresponding Chinese Sieou includes the seven brilliant stars composing the shoulders, the belt, and the knees of Orion. 5. Punarvasu, the two that give wealth again,’ denotes the two stars, a and β Geminorum, on the heads of Castor and Pollux. The name is no doubt connected with the beneficent character of the Aśvins, who correspond to the Dioscuri. 6.Tisya or Pusya includes the somewhat faint group in the body of the Crab, 7, δ, and θ Cancri. The singular is rather curious, as primarily one star would seem to have been meant, and none of the group is at all prominent. 7. Aśresās or Aślesās, which in some texts is certainly to be read Aśresās or Aślesas, denotes δ, e, η, p, σ, and perhaps also ζ, Hydrse. The word means ‘embracer,’ a name which admirably fits the constellation. 8. Maghās, the ‘bounties,’ are the Sickle, or α, γ, ζ, μ, e Leonis. The variants Anaghā, the ‘ sinless one,’ etc.,clearly refer to the auspicious influence of the constellation. 9. 10. Phālgunī, Phalgunyau, Phalgū, Phalg-unīs, Phal- gunyas, is really a double constellation, divided into Pūrve, ‘ former,’ and Uttare, ‘latter.’ The former is δ and θ Leonis, the latter β and Leonis. According to Weber, the word denotes, like Arjunī, the variant of the Rigveda, a ‘ bright- coloured ’ constellation. 11. Hasta, ‘hand,’ is made up of the five conspicuous stars (δ> Ί, e, a, β) in Corvus, a number which the word itself suggests. According to Geldner, the ‘ five bulls ’ of the Rigveda are this constellation. 12. Citrā, ‘bright,’ is the beautiful star, a Virginis. It is mentioned in a legend of Indra in the Taittirīya Brāhmana, and in that of the ‘ two divine dogs ’ (divyau śvānau) in the śatapatha Brāhmana. 13. Svāti or Nistyā is later clearly the brilliant star Arcturus or a Bootis, its place in the north being assured by the notice in the śāntikalpa, where it is said to be ‘ ever traversing the northern way ’ (nityam uttara-mārgagam). The Taittirīya Brāhmana, however, constructs an asterismal Prajāpati, giving him Citrā (α Virginis) for head, Hasta (Corvus) for hand, the Viśākhe (α and β Librae) for thighs, and the Anurādhās (β, δ, and 7r Scorpionis) for standing place, with Nistyā for heart. But Arcturus, being 30° out, spoils this figure, while, on the other hand, the Arabic and Chinese systems have respectively, instead of Arcturus, Virginis and κ Virginis, which would well fit into the Prajāpati figure. But in spite of the force of this argument of Weber’s, Whitney is not certain that Nistyā here must mean a star in Virgo, pointing out that the name Nistyā, ‘outcast,’ suggests the separation of this Naksatra from the others in question. 14.Viśākhe is the couple of stars a and β Librae. This mansion is later called Rādhā according to the Amarakośa, and it is curious that in the Atharvaveda the expression rādho Viśākhe, the Viśākhe are prosperity,’ should occur. But probably Rādhā is merely an invention due to the name of the next Naksatra, Anurādhā, wrongly conceived as meaning that which is after or follows Rādhā.’ 15. Anūrādhās or Anurādhā, propitious,’ is β, δ, and tγ (perhaps also p) Scorpionis. 16. Rohinī, ‘ ruddy ’; Jyesthaghnī, * slaying the eldest ’; or Jyesthā, ‘eldest,’ is the name of the constellation σ, α, and τ Scorpionis, of which the central star, a, is the brilliant reddish Antares (or Cor Scorpionis). 17.Vicrtau, ‘ the two releasers ’; Mūla, ‘ root or Mūla- barhanī, ‘ uprooting,’ denote primarily λ and v at the extremity of the tail of the Scorpion, but including also the nine or eleven stars from e to v. 18.19. Asādhās (‘ unconquered ’), distinguished as Pūrvās, ‘ former,’ and Uttarās, ‘ latter,’ are really two constellations, of which the former is composed of γ, δ, e, and η Sagittarii, or of 8 and e only, and the latter of θ, σ, t, and ξ Sagittarii, or of two, σ and ζ, only. It is probable that originally only four stars forming a square were meant as included in the whole constellation —viz., σ and f, with 8 and e. 20. Abhijit is the brilliant star a Lyrse with its two companions e and ζ. Its location in 6o° north latitude is completely discordant with the position of the corresponding Arabian and Chinese asterisms. This fact is considered by Oldenberg to support the view that it was a later addition to the system; its occurrence, however, as early as the Maitrāyanī Samhitā, which he does not note, somewhat invalidates that view. In the Taittirīya Brāhmana Abhijit is said to be ‘over Asādhās, under śronā,’ which Weber held to refer to its position in space, inferring thence that its Vedic position corresponded to that of the Arab Manāzil and the Chinese Sieou—viz., a, β Capricorni. But Whitney argues effectively that the words ‘ over ’ and ‘ under ’ really refer to the place of Abhijit in the list, ‘ after ’ Asādhās and ‘ before ’ Sronā. 21. Sronā, ‘lame,’ or Sravana, ‘ ear,’ denotes the bright star a Aquilai with β below and 7 above it. Weber very need- lessly thinks that the name Sravana suggested two ears and the head between. It is quite out of correspondence with the Manāzil and the Sieou, and is clearly an Indian invention. 22. śravisthās, ‘ most famous,’ or later Dhanisthās, ‘most wealthy,’ is the diamond-shaped group, α, β, δ, and 7, in the Dolphin, perhaps also ζ in the same constellation. Like the preceding Naksatra, it is out of harmony with the Manāzil and Sieou. 23. Satabhisaj or śatabhisa, ‘having a hundred physicians,’ seems to be λ Aquarii with the others around it vaguely conceived as numbering a hundred. 24. 25. Prostha-padās (fem. plur.), ‘ feet of a stool,’ or later Bhadra-padās,100 ‘auspicious feet,’ a double asterism forming a square, the former (pūrva) consisting of a and β Pegasi, the latter (uttara) of γ Pegasi and a Andromedse. 26. Revatī, ‘ wealthy,’ denotes a large number of stars (later 32), of which ζ Piscium, close upon the ecliptic where it was crossed by the equator of about 570 a.d., is given as the southernmost. 27. Aśva-yujau, ‘the two horse-harnessers,’ denotes the stars β and ζ Arietis. Aśvinyau101 and Aśvinī102 are later names. 28. Apabharanīs, Bharanīs, or Bharanyas, ‘ the bearers,’ is the name of the small triangle in the northern part of the Ram known as Musca or 35, 39, and 41 Arietis. The Naksatras and the Months.—In the Brāhmanas the Naksatra names are regularly used to denote dates. This is done in two ways. The name, if not already a feminine, may be turned into a feminine and compounded with pūrna-māsa, ‘the full moon,’ as in Tisyā-pūrnamāsa, ‘the full moon in the Naksatra Tisya.’103 Much more often, however, it is turned into a derivative adjective, used with paurnamāsī, ‘the full moon (night)/ or with amāvāsyā, ‘the new moon (night)/ as in Phālgunī paurnamāsl, ‘the full-moon night in the Naksatra Phālgunī’;104 or, as is usual in the Sūtras, the Naksatra adjective alone is used to denote the full-moon night. The month itself is called by a name derived105 from that of a Naksatra, but only Phālguna,106 Caitra,107 Vaiśākha,108 Taisya,109 Māgha110 occur in the Brāhmanas, the complete list later being Phālguna, Caitra, Vaiśākha, Jyaistha, Asādha, Srāvana, Prausthapada, Aśvayuja, Kārttika, Mārgaśīrsa, Taisya, Māgha. Strictly speaking, these should be lunar months, but the use of a lunar year was clearly very restricted: we have seen that as early as the Taittirīya Brāhmana there was a tendency to equate lunar months with the twelve months of thirty days which made up the solar year (see Māsa). The Naksatras and Chronology.—(i) An endeavour has been made to ascertain from the names of the months the period at which the systematic employment of those names was intro¬duced. Sir William Jones111 refers to this possibility, and Bentley, by the gratuitous assumption that śrāvana always marked the summer solstice, concluded that the names of the months did not date before b.c. Ii8I. Weber112 considered that there was a possibility of fixing a date by this means, but Whitney113 has convincingly shown that it is an impossible feat, and Thibaut114 concurs in this view. Twelve became fixed as the number of the months because of the desire, evident in the Brāhmanas, somehow or other to harmonize lunar with solar time; but the selection of twelve Naksatras out of twenty-seven as connected with the night of full moon can have no chronological significance, because full moon at no period occurred in those twelve only, but has at all periods occurred in every one of the twenty-seven at regularly recurrent intervals. (2) All the lists of the Naksatras begin with Krttikās. It is only fair to suppose that there was some special reason for this fact. Now the later list of the Naksatras begins with Aśvinī, and it was unquestionably rearranged because at the time of its adoption the vernal equinox coincided with the star ζ Piscium on the border of Revatī and Aśvinī, say in the course of the sixth century A.D. Weber has therefore accepted the view that the Krttikās were chosen for a similar reason, and the date at which that Naksatra coincided with the vernal equinox has been estimated at some period in the third millennium B.C. A very grave objection to this view is its assumption that the sun, and not the moon, was then regarded as connected with the Naksatras; and both Thibaut and Oldenberg have pronounced decidedly against the idea of connecting the equinox with the Krttikās. Jacobi has contended that in the Rigveda the commencement of the rains and the summer solstice mark the beginning of the new year and the end of the old, and that further the new year began with the summer solstice in Phālgunī.121 He has also referred to the distinction of the two sets of Deva and Yama Naksatras in the Taittirīya Brāhmana as supporting his view of the connexion of the sun and the Naksatras. But this view is far from satisfactory: the Rigveda passages cannot yield the sense required except by translating the word dvādaśa123 as 4 the twelfth (month) * instead of consisting of twelve parts,’ that is, ‘year/ the accepted interpretation; and the division of the Naksatras is not at all satisfactorily explained by a supposed connexion with the sun. It may further be mentioned that even if the Naksatra of Krttikās be deemed to have been chosen because of its coincidence with the vernal equinox, both Whitney and Thibaut are pre¬pared to regard it as no more than a careless variant of the date given by the Jyotisa, which puts the winter solstice in Māgha. (3) The winter solstice in Māgha is assured by a Brāhmana text, for the Kausītaki Brāhmana12® expressly places it in the new moon of Māgha (māghasyāmāυāsyāyām). It is not very important whether we take this with the commentators as the new moon in the middle of a month commencing with the day after full moon in Taisa, or, which is much more likely, as the new moon beginning the month and preceding full moon in Māgha. The datum gives a certain possibility of fixing an epoch in the following way. If the end of Revatī marked the vernal equinox at one period, then the precession of the equinoxes would enable us to calculate at what point of time the vernal equinox was in a position corresponding to the winter solstice in Māgha, when the solstitial colure cut the ecliptic at the beginning of Sravisthās. This would be, on the strict theory, in the third quarter of Bharanī, 6f asterisms removed from Sravisthās, and the difference between that and the beginning of Aśvinī = if asterisms = 23 (27 asterisms being = 360°). Taking, the starting-point at 499 a.d., the assured period of Varāha Mihira, Jones arrived at the date B.C. 1181 for the vernal equinox corresponding to the winter solstice in Māgha—that is, on the basis of ι° = 72 years as the precession. Pratt arrived at precisely the same date, taking the same rate of precession and adopting as his basis the ascertained position in the Siddhantas of the junction star of Maghā, a Leonis or Regulus. Davis and Colebrooke arrived at a different date, B.C. 1391, by taking as the basis of their calculation the junction star of Citrā, which happens to be of uncertain position, varying as much as 30 in the different textbooks. But though the twelfth century has received a certain currency as the epoch of the observation in the Jyotisa, it is of very doubtful value. As Whitney points out, it is impossible to say that the earlier asterisms coincided in position with the later asterisms of 13J0 extent each. They were not chosen as equal divisions, but as groups of stars which stood in conjunction with the moon; and the result of subsequently making them strictly equal divisions was to throw the principal stars of the later groups altogether out of their asterisms. Nor can we say that the star ζ Piscium early formed the eastern boundary of Revatī; it may possibly not even have been in that asterism at all, for it is far remote from the Chinese and Arabic asterisms corresponding to Revatī. Added to all this, and to the uncertainty of the starting-point— 582 a.d., 560 a.d., or 491 a.d. being variants —is the fact that the place of the equinox is not a matter accurately determin¬able by mere observation, and that the Hindu astronomers of the Vedic period cannot be deemed to have been very accurate observers, since they made no precise determination of the number of days of the year, which even in the Jyotisa they do not determine more precisely than as 366 days, and even the Sūrya Siddhānta136 does not know the precession of the equinoxes. It is therefore only fair to allow a thousand years for possible errors,137 and the only probable conclusion to be drawn from the datum of the Kausītaki Brāhmana is that it was recording an observation which must have been made some centuries B.C., in itself a result quite in harmony with the probable date of the Brāhmana literature,138 say B.C. 800-600. (4) Another chronological argument has been derived from the fact that there is a considerable amount of evidence for Phālguna having been regarded as the beginning of the year, since the full moon in Phālgunī is often described as the ‘ mouth (mukham) of the year.’139 Jacobi140 considers that this was due to the fact that the year was reckoned from the winter solstice, which would coincide with the month of Phālguna about B.C. 4000. Oldenberg and Thibaut, on the other hand, maintain that the choice of Phālguna as the ‘ mouth ’ of the year was due to its being the first month of spring. This view is favoured by the fact that there is distinct evidence of the correspondence of Phālguna and the beginning of spring : as we have seen above in the Kausītaki Brāhmana, the new moon in Māgha is placed at the winter solstice, which puts the full moon of Phālgunī at a month and a half after the winter solstice, or in the first week of February, a date not in itself improbable for about B.C. 800, and corresponding with the February 7 of the veris initium in the Roman Calendar. This fact accords with the only natural division of the year into three periods of four months, as the rainy season lasts from June 7-10 to October 7-10, and it is certain that the second set of four months dates from the beginning of the rains (see Cāturmāsya). Tilak, on the other hand, holds that the winter solstice coincided with Māghī full moon at the time of the Taittirīya Samhitā (b.c. 2350), and had coincided with Phālgunī and Caitrī in early periods—viz., B.C. 4000-2500, and B.C. 6000¬4000. (5) The passages of the Taittirīya Samhitā and the Pañca¬vimśa Brāhmana, which treat the full moon in Phālguna as the beginning of the year, give as an alternative the full moon in Caitra. Probably the latter month was chosen so as to secure that the initial day should fall well within the season of spring, and was not, as Jacobi believes, a relic of a period when the winter solstice corresponded with Caitra. Another alternative is the Ekāstakā, interpreted by the commentators as the eighth day after the full moon in Maghās, a time which might, as being the last quarter of the waning half of the old year, well be considered as representing the end of the year. A fourth alternative is the fourth day before full moon; the full moon meant must be that of Caitra, as Álekhana quoted by Ápastamba held, not of Māgha, as Asmarathya, Laugāksi and the Mīmāmsists believed, and as Tilak believes. (6) Others, again, according to the Grhya ritual, began the year with the month Mārgaśīrsa, as is shown by its other name Agrahāyana (‘ belonging to the commencement of the year ’). Jacobi and Tilak think that this one denoted the autumn equinox in Mrgaśiras, corresponding to the winter solstice in Phālgunī. But, as Thibaut shows clearly, it was selected as the beginning of a year that was taken to commence with autumn, just as some took the spring to commence with Caitra instead of Phālguna. (7) Jacobi has also argued, with the support of Buhler, from the terms given for the beginning of Vedic study in the Grhya Sūtras, on the principle that study commenced with the rains (as in the Buddhist vassā) which mark the summer solstice. He concludes that if Bhādrapada appears as the date of commencing study in some texts, it was fixed thus because at one time Prosthapadās (the early name of Bhadra- padās) coincided with the summer solstice, this having been the case when the winter solstice was in Phālguna. But Whitney155 has pointed out that this argument is utterly illegitimate; we cannot say that there was any necessary connexion between the rains and learning—a month like Srāvana might be preferred because of its connexion with the word Sravana, 4 ear ’—and in view of the precession of the equinoxes, we must assume that Bhādrapada was kept because of its traditional coincidence with the beginning of the rains after it had ceased actually so to coincide. the other astronomical phenomena; the discovery of a series of 27 lunar mansions by them would therefore be rather surprising. On the other hand, the nature of such an operation is not very complicated ; it consists merely in selecting a star or a star group with which the moon is in conjunction. It is thus impossible a priori to deny that the Vedic Indians could have invented for themselves a lunar Zodiac. But the question is complicated by the fact that there exist two similar sets of 28 stars or star groups in Arabia and in China, the Manāzil and the Sieou. The use of the Manāzil in Arabia is consistent and effective ; the calendar is regulated by them, and the position of the asterisms corresponds best with the positions required for a lunar Zodiac. The Indians might therefore have borrowed the system from Arabia, but that is a mere possibility, because the evidence for the existence of the Manāzil is long posterior to that for the existence of the Naksatras, while again the Mazzaroth or Mazzaloth of the Old Testament may really be the lunar mansions. That the Arabian system is borrowed from India, as Burgess held, is, on the other hand, not at all probable. Biot, the eminent Chinese scholar, in a series of papers published by him between. 1839 and 1861, attempted to prove the derivation of the Naksatra from the Chinese Sieou. The latter he did not regard as being in origin lunar mansions at all. He thought that they were equatorial stars used, as in modern astronomy, as a standard to which planets or other stars observed in the neighbourhood can be referred; they were, as regards twenty-four of them, selected about B.C. 2357 on account of their proximity to the equator, and of their having the same right ascension as certain circumpolar stars which had attracted the attention of Chinese observers. Four more were added in B.C. IIOO in order to mark the equinoxes and solstices of the period. He held that the list of stars commenced with Mao (= Krttikās), which was at the vernal equinox in B.C. 2357. Weber, in an elaborate essay of i860, disputed this theory, and endeavoured to show that the Chinese literary evidence for the Sieou was late, dating not even from before the third century B.C. The last point does not appear to be correct, but his objections against the basis of Biot’s theory were rein¬forced by Whitney, who insisted that Biot’s supposition of the Sieou’s not having been ultimately derived from a system of lunar mansions, was untenable. This is admitted by the latest defender of the hypothesis of borrowing from China, Lśopold de Saussure, , but his arguments in favour of a Chinese origin for the Indian lunar mansions have been refuted by Oldenberg, who has also pointed out that the series does not begin with Mao ( = Krttikās). There remains only the possibility that a common source for all the three sets—Naksatra, Manāzil, and Sieou—may be found in Babylonia. Hommel has endeavoured to show that recent research has established in Babylonia the existence of a lunar zodiac of twenty-four members headed by the Pleiades ( = Krttikās); but Thibaut’s researches are not favourable to this claim. On the other hand, Weber, Whitney, Zimmer, and Oldenberg all incline to the view that in Babylonia is to be found the origin of the system, and this must for the present be regarded as the most probable view, for there are other traces of Babylonian influence in Vedic literature, such as the legend of the flood, perhaps the Adityas, and possibly the word Manā.
nakṣatradarśa (£ Gazer at the lunar mansions ’), an ‘ astro­loger,’ is mentioned in the list of victims at the Purusamedha, or 'human sacrifice,’ in the Yajurveda. A notice in the śatapatha Brāhmana indicates that that work regarded the practice of choosing a particular Naksatra under which to set up the sacrificial fires as an idle one, because it decides in favour of choosing the sun as one’s Naksatra.
nimruc ‘Sunset/ is repeatedly mentioned in the Rigveda and later as a division of time.
pataṅga prājāpatya (‘Descendant of Prajāpati ’) is credited by the Anukramanī (Index) with the authorship of a hymn of the Rigveda in which Patañga means the ‘sun-bird.’ He is also mentioned in the Jaiminīya Upanisad Brāhmana.
pitṛ Common from the Rigveda onwards, denotes ‘father, not so much as the ‘begetter’ (janitr) but rather as the pro­tector of the child, this being probably also the etymological sense of the word. The father in the Rigveda stands for all that is good and kind. Hence Agni is compared with a father, while Indra is even dearer than a father. The father carries his son in his arms, and places him on his lap, while the child pulls his garment to attract attention. In later years the son depends on his father for help in trouble, and greets him with joy. It is difficult to ascertain precisely how far the son was subject to parental control, and how long such control continued. Reference is made in the Rigveda to a father’s chastising his son for gambling, and Rjrāśva is said to have been blinded by his father. From the latter statement Zimmer infers the existence of a developed patria potestas, but to lay stress on this isolated and semi-mythical incident would be unwise. It is, however, quite likely that the patria potestas was originally strong, for we have other support for the thesis in the Roman patria potestas. If there is no proof that a father legally controlled his son’s wedding, and not much that he controlled his daughter’s, the fact is in itself not improbable. There is again no evidence to show whether a son, when grown up, normally continued to stay with his father, his wife becoming a member of the father’s household, or whether he set up a house of his own : probably the custom varied. Nor do we know whether the son was granted a special plot of land on marriage or otherwise, or whether he only came into such property after his father’s death. But any excessive estimate of the father’s powers over a son who was no longer a minor and naturally under his control, must be qualified by the fact that in his old age the sons might divide their father’s property, or he might divide it amongst them, and that when the father-in-law became aged he fell under the control of his son’s wife. There are also obscure traces that in old age a father might be exposed, though there is no reason to suppose that this was usual in Vedic India. Normally the son was bound to give his father full obedience. The later Sūtras show in detail the acts of courtesy which he owed his father, and they allow him to eat the remnants of his father’s food. On the other hand, the father was expected to be kind. The story of Sunahśepa in the Aitareya Brāh-mana emphasizes the horror with which the father’s heartless treatment of his son was viewed. The Upanisads insist on the spiritual succession from father to son. The kissing of a son was a frequent and usual token of affection, even in mature years. On the failure of natural children, adoption was possible. It was even resorted to when natural children existed, but when it was desired to secure the presence in the family of a person of specially high qualifications, as in Visvamitra’s adoption of Sunahśepa. It is not clear that adoption from one caste into another was possible, for there is no good evidence that Viśvāmitra was, as Weber holds, a Ksatriya who adopted a Brāhmana. Adoption was also not always in high favour: it may be accidental or not that a hymn of the Vasistha book of the Rigveda condemns the usage. It was also possible for the father who had a daughter, but no sons, to appoint her to bear a son for him. At any rate the practice appears to be referred to in an obscure verse of the Rigveda as interpreted by Yāska. Moreover, it is possible that the difficulty of a brotherless maiden finding a husband may have been due in part to the possibility of her father desiring to make her a Putrikā, the later technical name for a daughter whose son is to belong to her father’s family. There can be no doubt that in a family the father took precedence of the mother. Delbruck explains away the apparent cases to the contrary. There is no trace of the family as a land-owning corporation. The dual form Pitarau regularly means ‘father and mother,’ ‘parents.
pitṛyāṇa The ‘ way of the fathers,’ mentioned in the Rigveda and later, is opposed to the Deva-yāna, or ‘way of the gods.’ Tilak considers that the Devayāna corresponds with the Uttarāyana, ‘northern journey’ of the sun, and the Pitryāna with the Daksināyana, its ‘southern journey.’ He concludes from a passage of the śatapatha Brāhmana, where three of the seasons spring, summer, and the rains are ascribed to the gods, but the others to the Pitrs, or Fathers, that the Devayāna began with the vernal equinox, and the Pitryāna with the autumnal equinox. With this he connects the curious distinction of Deva- and Yama-Naksatras in the Taittirīya Brāhmana. These conclusions are, however, very improbable. C/. Naksatra and Sūrya.
purohita (‘Placed in front,’ ‘appointed’) is the name of a priest in the Rigveda and later. The office of Purohita is called Purohiti and Purodhā. It is clear that the primary function of the Purohita was that of ‘ domestic priest ’ of a king, or perhaps a great noble; his quite exceptional position is shown by the fact that only one Purohita seems ever to be mentioned in Vedic literature. Examples of Purohitas in the Rigveda are Viśvāmitra or Vasiçtha in the service of the Bharata king,.Sudās. of the Trtsu family; the Purohita of Kuruśravana ; and Devāpi, the Purohita of Santanu. The Purohita was in all religious matters the alter ego of the king. In the ritual it is laid down that a king must have a Purohita, else the gods will not accept his offerings. He ensures the king's safety and victory in battle by his prayers ; he procures the fall of rain for the crops j he is the flaming fire that guards the kingdom. Divodāsa in trouble is rescued by Bharadvāja; and King Tryaruna Traidhātva Aikçvāka reproaches his Purohita, Vj?śa Jāna, when his car runs over a Brahmin boy and kills him. The close relation of king and Purohita is illustrated by the case of Klltsa Aurava, who slew his Purohita, UpagfU Sauśravasa, for disloyalty in serving Indra, to whom Kutsa was hostile. Other disputes between kings and priests who officiated for them are those of Janam- ejaya and the Kaśyapas, and of Viśvantara and the śyā- parnas ;lβ and between Asamāti and the Gaupāyanas. In some cases one Purohita served more than one king; for example, Devabhāg a Srautarṣa was the Purohita of the Xufus and the Sfñjayas at the same time, and Jala Jātū- karnya was the Purohita of the kings of Kāśi, Videha, and Kosala. There is no certain proof that the office of Purohita was hereditary in a family, though it probably was so. At any rate, it seems clear from the relations of the Purohita with King Kuruśravana, and with his son Upamaśravas, that a king would keep on the Purohita of his father. Zimmer thinks that the king might act as his own Purohita, as shown by the case of King Viśvantara, who sacrificed without the help of the śyāparṇas, and that a Purohita need not be a priest, as shown by the case of Devāpi and śantanu. But neither opinion seems to be justified. It is not said that Viśvantara sacrificed without priests, while Devāpi is not regarded as a king until the Nirukta, and there is no reason to suppose that Yāska's view expressed in that work is correct. According to Geldner, the Purohita from the beginning acted as the Brahman priest in the sacrificial ritual, being there the general superintendent of the sacrifice. In favour of this view, he cites the fact that Vasiṣtha is mentioned both as Purohita and as Brahman: at the sacrifice of Sunahśepa he served as Brahman, but he was the Purohita of Sudās; Bṛhaspati is called the Purohita and the Brahman of the gods; and the Vasisthas who are Purohitas are also the Brahmans at the sacrifice. It is thus clear that the Brahman was often the Purohita; and it was natural that this should be the case when once the Brahman’s place became, as it did in the later ritual, the most important position at the sacrifice. But the Brahman can hardly be said to have held this place in the earlier ritual; Oldenberg seems to be right in holding that the Purohita was originally the Hotr priest, the singer par excellence, when he took any part at all in the ritual of the great sacrifices with the Rtvijs. So Devāpi seems clearly to have been a Hotr; Agni is at once Purohita and Hotr; and the two divine Hotṛs ’ referred to in the Apr! litanies are also called the ‘two Purohitas.’ Later, no doubt, when the priestly activity ceased to centre in the song, the Purohita, with his skill in magic, became the Brahman, who also required magic to undo the errors of the sacrifice. There is little doubt that in the original growth of the priest¬hood the Purohita played a considerable part. In historical times he represented the real power of the kingship, and may safely be deemed to have exercised great influence in all public affairs, such as the administration of justice and the king’s conduct of business. But it is not at all probable that the Purohita represents, as Roth and Zimmer thought, the source which gave rise to caste. The priestly clcss is already in existence in the Rigveda (see Varṣa).
pedu is the name in the Rigveda of a protágǒ of the Aśvins, who gave him, in order, as it seems, to replace- a bad steed, a mythical horse, hence called Paidva, which probably repre­sents the horse of the sun.
paurṇamāsī Denoting the night of the full moon,’ is celebrated in the Atharvaveda as sacred, while it is repeatedly mentioned later. Gobhila defines it as the greatest separation (vikarsa) of the sun and the moon. Cf, Māsa.
prapitva Is found in several passages of the Rigveda as a designation of time. In one passage the sense is made clear by the context: ‘at the rising of the sun’ (sūra udite), ‘at mid­day’ (madhycimdine divah), and ‘at the Prapitva, bordering on the night’ (apiśarvare). In another passage the sense of ‘late in the day’ also seems adequate, while the phrase abhipitve ahnali, ‘at the close of day,’ also denotes the evening. According to Geldner, the sense of the word is the ‘decisive moment’ in a race or a battle, and so the ‘ end of the day.’ Cf. Ahan
prabudh Occurring in one passage of the Rigveda, is used in the locative parallel with nimruci, ‘at the setting (of the sun),’ and clearly means ‘at the rising (of the sun).’
madhyadeśa The ‘Middle Country,’ is, according to the Mānava Dharma śāstra, the land between the Himālaya in the north, the Vindhya in the south, Vinaáana in the west, and Prayāga (now Allahabad) in the east that is, between the place where the Sarasvatī disappears in the desert, and the point of the confluence of the Yamunā (Jumna) and the Gañgā (Ganges). The same authority defines Brahmarsi-deśa as denoting the land of Kuruksetra, the Matsyas, Pañcālas, and śūrasenakas, and Brahmāvarta as meaning the particularly holy land between the Sarasvatī and the Drṣadvatī. The Baudhāyana Dharma Sūtra4 defines Áryāvarta as the land east of Vinaśana; west of the Kālaka-vana, ‘ Black Forest,’ or rather Kanakhala, near Hardvār; south of the Himālaya; and north of the Pāriyātra or the Pāripātra Mountains; adding that, in the opinion of others, it was confined to the country between the Yamunā and the Gañgā, while the Bhāllavins took it as the country between the boundary-river (or perhaps the Saras-vatī) and the region where the sun rises. The Mānava Dharma śāstra, in accord with the Vasiṣṭha Dharma Sūtra, defines Áryāvarta as the region between the Vindhya and the Himālaya, the two ranges which seem to be the boundaries of the Aryan world in the Kauṣītaki Upaniṣad also. The term Madhyadeśa is not Vedic, but it is represented in the Aitareya Brāhmaṇa by the expression madhyamā pratisthā diś, ‘ the middle fixed region,’ the inhabitants of which are stated to be the Kurus, the Pañcālas, the Vaśas, and the Uśīnaras. The latter two peoples practically disappear later on, the Madhyadeśa being the country of the Kuru-Pañcālas, the land where the Brāhmaṇas and the later Samhitās were produced, bounded on the east by the Kosala-Videhas, and on the west by the desert. The western tribes are mentioned with disapproval both in the śatapatha Brāhmaṇa and the Aitareya Brāhmaṇa, while the tradition of the Brahminization of the Kosalas and the Videhas from the Kuru-Pañcāla country is preserved in the former Brāhmaṇa.
marka Is found in one passage of the Rigveda, where Roth sees in the expression sñro markah the ‘eclipse of the sun.’ Sāyaṇa thinks the meaning is ‘purifying.’
mātariávan Is mentioned in a Vālakhilya hymn of the Rigveda as a sacrificer along with Medhya and Ppçadhra. He seems to be mentioned also in one other passage, possibly in two. In the śāñkhāyana śrauta Sūtra a patron, Pfçadhra Medhya Mātariávan or Mātariśva is created by a misunder­standing of the Rigvedic text.
māsa Denotes a 'month' a period of time repeatedly mentioned in the Rigveda and lateṛ The Characteristic days (or rather nights) of the month were those of new moon, Amā-vasya, 'home-staying (night),' and 'of the full moon,' Paurṇa-māsi. Two hymns of the Atharvveda celebrate these days respectively. A personification of the phases of the moon is seen in the four names Sinīvālī the day before new moon; Kuhū also called Guṅgū, the new moon day;Anumati, the day before full moon; and Rākā, the day of new mooṇ The importance of the new and full moon days respectively. One special day in the month, the Ekāṣṭakā, or eighth day after full moon, was importanṭ In the Pañcaviṃśa Brāhmaṇa there stated to be in the year twelve such, mentioned between the twelve days of full moon and twelve days of new moon. But one Ekāṣṭakā is referred to in the Yajurveda Saṃhitas and elsewhere as of quite special importance. This was, in the accordant opinion of most comentators, the eighth day after the full moon of Magha. It marked the end of the year, or the begining of the new year. Though the Kauṣītaki Brāmaṇa places places the winter solstice in the new moon of Māgha, the latter date probably means the new moon preceding full moon in Māgha, not the new moon following full moon; but it is perhaps possible to account adequately for the importance of the Ekāstakā as being the first Aṣṭakā after the beginning of the new year. It is not certain exactly how the month was reckoned, whether from the day after new moon to new moon—the system known as amānta, or from the day after full moon to full moon—the pūr- nimānta system, which later, at any rate, was followed in North India, while the other system prevailed in the south. Jacobi argues that the year began in the full moon of Phālguna, and that only by the full moon’s conjunction with the Nakṣatra could the month be known. Oldenberg12 points to the fact that the new moon is far more distinctively an epoch than the full moon; that the Greek, Roman, and Jewish years began with the new moon; and that the Vedic evidence is the division of the month into the former (j>ūrva) and latter (apara) halves, the first being the bright (śukla), the second the dark (krsna) period. Thibaut considers that to assume the existence of the pīirnimānta system for the Veda is unnecessary, though possible. Weber assumes that it occurs in the Kausītaki Brāhmaṇa as held by the scholiasts. But it would probably be a mistake to press that passage, or to assume that the amānta system was rigidly accepted in the Veda: it seems at least as probable that the month was vaguely regarded as beginning with the new moon day, so that new moon preceded full moon, which was in the middle, not the end or. the beginning of the month. That a month regularly had 30 days is established by the conclusive evidence of numerous passages in which the year is given 12 months and 360 days. This month is known from the earliest records, being both referred to directly and alluded to. It is the regular month of the Brāhmaṇas, and must be regarded as the month which the Vedic Indian recognized. No other month is mentioned as such in• the Brāhmaṇa literature ; it is only in the Sūtras that months of different length occur. The Sāmaveda Sūtras10 refer to (i) years with 324 days—i.e., periodic years with 12 months of 27 days each; (2) years with 351 days—i.e., periodic years with 12 months of 27 days each, plus another month of 27 days; (3) years with 354 days—i.e., 6 months of 30 days, and 6 with 29 days, in other words, lunar synodic years; (4) years with 360 days, or ordinary civil (sāvana) years; (5) years with 378 days, which, as Thibaut clearly shows, are third years, in which, after two years of 360 days each, 18 days were added to bring about correspondence between the civil year and the solar year of 366 days. But even the Sāmasūtras do not mention the year of 366 days, which is first known to the Jyotiṣa and to Garga. That the Vedic period was acquainted with the year of 354 days cannot be affirmed with certainty. Zimmer, indeed, thinks that it is proved by the fact that pregnancy is estimated at ten months, or sometimes a year. But Weber may be right in holding that the month is the periodic month of 27 days, for the period is otherwise too long if a year is taken. On the other hand, the period of ten months quite well suits the period of gestation, if birth takes place in the tenth month, so that in this sense the month of 30 days may well be meant. The year of 12 months of 30 days each being admittedly quite unscientific, Zimmer23 is strongly of opinion that it was only used with a recognition of the fact that intercalation took place, and that the year formed part of a greater complex, normally the five year Yuga or cycle. This system is well known from the Jyotiṣa: it consists of 62 months of 29£4 days each = 1,830 days (two of these months being intercalary, one in the middle and one at the end), or 61 months of 30 days, or 60 months of 30^ days, the unit being clearly a solar year of 366 days. It is not an ideal system, since the year is too long; but it is one which cannot be claimed even for the Brāhmaṇa period, during which no decision as to the true length of the year seems to have been arrived at. The references to it seen by Zimmer in the Rigveda are not even reasonably plausible, while the pañcaka yuga, cited by him from the Pañcavimśa Brāhmaṇa, occurs only in a quotation in a commentary, and has no authority for the text itself. On the other hand, there was undoubtedly some attempt to bring the year of 360 days—a synodic lunar year—roughly into connexion with reality. A Sāmasūtra27 treats it as a solar year, stating that the sun perambulates each Naxatra in days, while others again evidently interpolated 18 days every third year, in order to arrive at some equality. But Vedic literature, from the Rigveda downwards,29 teems with the assertion of the difficulty of ascertaining the month. The length is variously given as 30 days, 35 days,31 or 36 days. The last number possibly indicates an intercalation after six years (6x6 = 36, or for ritual purposes 35), but for this we have no special evidence. There are many references to the year having 12 or 13 months. The names of the months are, curiously enough, not at all ancient. The sacrificial texts of the Yajurveda give them in their clearest form where the Agnicayana, ‘building of the fire-altar,’ is described. These names are the following: (1) Madhu, (2) Mādhava (spring months, vāsantikāv rtū); (3) Sukra, (4) Suci (summer months, graismāv rtū); (5) Nabha (or Nabhas), (6) Nabhasya (rainy months, vārsikāv rtū); (7) Iṣa, (8) ūrja (autumn months, śāradāυ rtū); (9) Saha (or Sahas),35 (10) Sahasya (winter months, haimantikāυ rtū); (II) Tapa (or Tapas),35 (12) Tapasya (cool months, śaiśirāv rtū). There are similar lists in the descriptions of the Soma sacrifice and of the horse sacrifice, all of them agreeing in essentials. There are other lists of still more fanciful names, but these have no claim at all to represent actual divisions in popular use. It is doubtful if the list given above is more than a matter of priestly invention. Weber points out that Madhu and Mādhava later appear as names of spring, and that these two are mentioned in the Taittirīya Aranyaka as if actually employed; but the evidence is very inadequate to show that the other names of the months given in the list were in ordinary use. In some of these lists the intercalary month is mentioned. The name given to it in the Vājasaneyi Samhitā is Amhasas- pati, while that given in the Taittirīya and Maitrāyaṇī Sarphitās is Sarpsarpa. The Kāthaka Sarphitā gives it the name of Malimluca, which also occurs elsewhere, along with Samsarpa, in one of the lists of fanciful names. The Atharvaveda describes it as sanisrasa, ‘slipping,’ owing no doubt to its unstable condition. The other method of naming the months is from the Nakçatras. It is only beginning to be used in the Brāhmaṇas, but is found regularly in the Epic and later. The Jyotisa mentions that Māgha and Tapa were identical: this is the fair interpretation of the passage, which also involves the identifica¬tion of Madhu with Caitra, a result corresponding with the view frequently found in the Brāhmanas, that the full moon in Citrā, and not that in Phalgunī, is the beginning of the year. In the śatapatha Brāhmaṇa are found two curious expressions, yava and ayava, for the light and dark halves of the month, which is clearly considered to begin with the light half. Possibly the words are derived, as Eggling thinks, from yu, ‘ ward off,’ with reference to evil spirits. The word Parvan (‘ joint ’ = division of time) probably denotes a half of the month, perhaps already in the Rigveda. More precisely the first half, the time of the waxing light, is called pūrva-paksa, the second, that of the waning light, apara-paka. Either of these might be called a half-month (ardha-ināsa).
mitravinda kāśyapa (‘Descendant of Kaśyapa ’) is the name of a teacher, a pupil of Sunītha, in the Varnśa Brāhmaṇa.
yajñagāthā Denotes a verse (Gāthā) containing a maxim as to the sacrifice of any kind or sort, or, as it is expressed in the Mahābhārata, a ‘verse, sung regarding the sacrifice {gāthā yajna-gītā).
yajñagāthā Denotes a verse (Gāthā) containing a maxim as to the sacrifice of any kind or sort, or, as it is expressed in the Mahābhārata, a ‘verse, sung regarding the sacrifice* {gāthā yajna-gītā).
yāma Used in the plural, denotes in one passage of the Atharvaveda, according to Roth, the planets among which the sun (bhaga) wanders. But both Bloomfield and Whitney accept the sense—the regular one in the later language—of 'night watches.’
raśmi In the Rigveda and later regularly denotes a 'ray' of the sun
rāhu The demon that eclipses the sun, seems to be referred to in one passage of the Atharvaveda. The reading here is somewhat uncertain, but Rāhu is probably meant.
rukma In the Rigveda denotes an ornament, probably of gold, usually worn on the breast. Being in several passages used of the sun, it probably had the form of a disk. In the Brāhmanas it designates a gold plate. See also Rajata.
śakvarī Fem. plur., denotes as the Mahānāmnī verses, to wh is sung. This sense seems to certain later.
śaucadratha ('Descendant of śucad-ratha') is the patro­nymic of Sunītha in the Rigveda.
saṃvatsara ‘Year,’ is repeatedly mentioned from the Rigveda onwards. Its duration was, according to the concurrent evidence of the Samhitās and Brāhmaṇas, 360 days, divided into months, being, no doubt, roughly a lunar synodic year, which, however, it exceeded in length by days. As a solar year it appears only in the Nidāna Sūtra of the Sāmaveda, where the sun is stated to spend days in each of the Nakṣatras. The year being obviously out of harmony with the solar year (whether sidereal or tropical), efforts were certainly made to effect an assimilation of the natural and the accepted year. As has been seen (see Māsa), the evidence goes strongly to show that the intercalation was not an easy matter in the Brāh¬maṇa period, though there are traces of what may be re¬garded as a five-yearly or six-yearly intercalation. But there is no conclusive evidence that these periods were really observed. Zimmer,4 indeed, considers that the evidence required is afforded by the lists of the years, which are sometimes enumerated as five : Samvatsara, Parivatsara, Idāvatsara, Idvatsara, and Vatsara ;δ or Samvatsara, Parivatsara, Idāvat- sara, Iduvatsara, Vatsara;® or Samvatsara, Idāvatsara, Iduvat- sara, Idvatsara, Vatsara;7 or Samvatsara, Parivatsara, Idāvat- sara, Anuvatsara, Udvatsara;8 or Samvatsara, Parivatsara, Idāvatsara, Anuvatsara, Idvatsara.9 But it must be noted not merely that the names vary considerably, but that four only are mentioned in some places,10 in others11 three, in others12 two, and in yet others13 six. Moreover, in none of these enumera¬tions is there any reference to the names being connected with a system of intercalation. It is most probable that here we have no more that a mere series of priestly variations of Vatsara, based on the older and more genuine Saipvatsara and Parivatsara as variants of the simple Vatsara, ‘year.’ The key to the invention of the series is probably to be found in passages like that of the Pañcavimśa Brāhmaṇa, where the several Cāturmāsya ( four-monthly ’) sacrifices are equated with the different years. Particularly unjustifiable is the attempt of Zimmer to see in the two-year series a series of two years of 354 days each, with an intercalary month in the second; for the year of 354 days, as such, is not known to have existed before the Sūtra period. Zimmer ® also finds an attempt at intercalation in the famous 12 days in which the Rbhus are said to have slept in the house of Agohya. He thinks that they represent twelve days added at the winter solstice to equate the lunar year of 354 days and the solar year of 366 days ; and from the rever¬ence paid in German antiquity to the ‘ 12 nights,’ he infers that this mode of intercalation is Indo-Germanic. There can be little doubt that this view is wrong, and that the 12 days are merely the ' reflexion of the year ’ (samvatsarasya pratima) in the sense that they represent the twelve months, and have no relation to chronology at all. A reference to the use of Samvatsara alone as the fifth year of the cycle is seen by Shamasastry in the peculiar dating of certain notices in the Baudhāyana śrauta Sūtra, but this view is improbable.
satyaśravas (‘Of true renown’) Vāyya (‘descendant of Vayya’) is the name of a Rṣi in the Rigveda. Ludwig thinks that he was the son of Sunītha śaucad ratha.
sapta sūryāḥ The 'seven suns' referred to in the Samhitās, are named in the Taittirīya Araṇyaka as Aroga, Bhrāja, Paṭara, Patañga, Svarṇara, Jyotiṣīmant, and Vibhāsa, but these occur very rarely even later. Weber at one time thought that the seven planets (see Graha) were meant by the phrase, but later he abandoned the idea. Probably the 'seven rays' of the Rigveda are meant.
sūrya The ‘sun,’ plays a great part in Vedic mythology and religion, corresponding with the importance of the sun as a factor in the physical life of the peninsula. In the Rigveda2 the sun is normally regarded as a beneficent power, a not unnatural view in a people which must apparently have issued from the cold regions of the Himālaya mountains. Its heat is, however, alluded to in some passages of the Rigveda, as well as referred to in the Atharvaveda and the literature of the Brāhmaṇas. In one myth Indra is said to have vanquished Sūrya and to have stolen his wheel: this is possibly a reference to the obscuration of the sun by a thunderstorm. The Aitareya Brāhmaṇa presents a naive conception of the course of the sun, which it regards„ as bright on one side only, and as returning from west to east by the same road, but with the reverse side turned towards the earth, thus at night illumining the stars in heaven. In the Rigveda wonder is expressed that the sun does not fall. There are several references to eclipses in the Rigveda. In one passage Svarbhānu, a demon, is said to have eclipsed the sun with darkness, while Atri restores the light of the sun, a similar feat being elsewhere attributed to his family, the Atris. In the Atharvaveda Rāhu appears for the first time in connexion with the sun. Indra’s defeat of Sūrya may also be explained as alluding to an eclipse; in two other passages such an interpretation seems at least probable. Ludwig not only argues that the Rigveda knows the theory of eclipses caused by an occultation of the sun by the moon, and regards the sun as going round the earth, but even endeavours to identify an eclipse referred to in the Rigveda with one that occurred in 1029 B.C. These views are completely refuted by Whitney. The sun as a maker of time determines the year of 360 days, which is the civil year and the usual year (Saipvatsara) of Vedic literature. This solar year is divided into two halves— the Uttarāyaṇa, when the sun goes north, and the Dakṣiṇā- yana, when it goes south. There can be no doubt that these periods denote the time when the sun turns north from the winter solstice, and when it turns south from the summer solstice, for the Kauṣītaki Brāhmaṇa says so in perfectly clear language. The alternative theory is to regard the periods as those when the sun is in the north—i.e., when it is north of the equator, and when it is in the south, taking as points of departure the equinoxes, not the solstices; but this view has no support in Vedic literature, and is opposed to the fact that the equinoxes play no part in Vedic astronomical theory. There are only doubtful references to the solstices in the Rigveda. The Brāhmanas, and perhaps the Rigveda, regard the moon as entering the sun at new moon. According to Hillebrandt, the Rigveda recognizes that the moon shines by the borrowed light of the sun, but this seems very doubt-ful. See also Aryamṇalj Panthā, Nakṣatra, and Sapta Sūryāh.
sūryanakṣatra Is found in the śatapatha Brāhmana in a passage where Sāyana takes it as denoting a Nakçatra, which gives out rays of light like the sun. But the real sense (as the Kāṇva text helps to show) is that the sacrificer may take the sun for his Nakṣatra—i.e., he may neglect the Nakṣatras altogether and rely on the sun.
sūryacandramasā Denotes ‘sun and moon’ as a pair of luminaries in the Rigveda and later.
saurī Is given by Zimmer as the name of an unknown animal at the Aśvamedha (‘horse sacrifice’) in the Taittirīya Sarphitā. But this is an error: saurī means ‘ dedicated to the sun.’
svar Denotes the ‘sun’ and the ‘heaven of light’ in the Rigveda and later.
svarbhānu asura Is the name, in the Rigveda and later, of a demon supposed to have eclipsed the sun. See Sūrya.
Bloomfield Vedic
Concordance
Results for sunResults for sunResults for sun
adhvaryavaḥ sunutendrāya somam RV.10.30.15c. Cf. adhvaryavo bha-.
asmaddviṣaḥ sunītho mā parā daiḥ MS.4.9.12b: 133.4. See asmān sunīte, and dviṣā sunīte.
asmai sunvate yajamānāya pavate (KA. pinvasva) VS.7.21; VSK.7.8.4; śB.4.2.2.13,14; KA.2.137; Apś.12.15.8.
asmān sunīte mā parādāḥ KA.1.198.12b. See under asmaddviṣaḥ.
asmin sunvati yajamāna āśiṣaḥ svāhākṛtāḥ samudreṣṭhā gandharvam ā tiṣṭhatānu TS.3.5.6.3.
athā sunudhvaṃ savanaṃ madāya RV.4.35.4c.
avitāsi sunvato vṛktabarhiṣaḥ RV.8.36.1a; AB.5.6.10; KB.23.1; śB.13.5.1.19. P: avitāsi Aś.7.12.9 (cf. 7.12.19); śś.10.6.9.
bhavā sunītir uta vāmanītiḥ RV.6.47.7d.
brahmā sunvantam ichati RV.9.112.1d.
deṣṭhaḥ sunvate bhuvaḥ RV.8.66.6d.
divodāsāya sunvate RV.6.16.5b.
divodāsāya sunvate sutakre RV.6.31.4d.
dviṣā sunīte mā parādāḥ TA.4.20.2b. See under asmaddviṣaḥ.
gantāsi sunvato gṛham RV.2.41.2c; ArS.2.6c; VS.27.29c.
indraḥ sunītī saha mā punātu RVKh.9.67.5a; TB.1.4.8.6a.
indrāsi sunvato vṛdhaḥ patir divaḥ RV.8.98.5c; AVś.20.64.2c; SV.2.598c; JB.3.232.
indrāya sunavai (AVP. sunomi) tvā RV.8.91.1d; AVP.4.26.1d; JB.1.220d.
indrāya sunvad ṛṣaye ca śikṣat RV.10.27.22d.
jātavedase sunavāma somam RV.1.99.1a; RVKh.10.127.5d; AB.4.30.12; 32.10; 5.2.16; 8.13; 15.7; 17.15; 19.17; 21.18; ā.1.5.3.13; TA.10.2.1a; MahānU.6.2a; Aś.7.1.14; N.7a (Roth's edition, p. 201); 14.33a. P: jātavedase BṛhPDh.9.327; Rvidh.1.22.4,6. Cf. BṛhD.3.130 (B).
jyeṣṭhā sunakṣatram ariṣṭaṃ mūlam AVś.19.7.3d.
na sunvāna na devayo RV.8.31.16b; TS.1.8.22.4b; MS.4.11.2b: 164.14; KS.11.12b.
ni sunvate vahati bhūri vāmam RV.10.42.8d; AVś.20.89.8d.
pra sunvataḥ śacīpate RV.8.37.1b.
pra sunvata stuvataḥ śaṃsam āvaḥ RV.1.33.7d.
pra sunvānasyāndhasaḥ (SV.JB.PB. sunvānāyāndhasaḥ) RV.9.101.13a; SV.1.553a; 2.124a,736a; JB.3.16; PB.11.5.1.
premaṃ sunvantaṃ yajamānam avatām śś.8.19.1; ... avatu śś.8.16.1; ... avantu śś.8.20.1.
sunīthe śaucadrathe RV.5.79.2a; SV.2.1091a.
yaḥ sunītho dadāśuṣe RV.2.8.2a.
yaḥ sunvate pacate dudhra ā cit RV.2.12.15a; AVś.20.34.18a; AVP.12.15.6a.
yaḥ sunvate stuvate kāmyaṃ vasu RV.8.50 (Vāl.2).1c; AVś.20.51.3c.
yaḥ sunvantam avati yaḥ pacantam RV.2.12.14a; AVś.20.34.15a; AVP.12.15.5a.
yajamānasya sunvataḥ RV.6.54.6b; 60.15b.
yajamānāya sunvate RV.5.26.5a; 8.14.3b; 17.10c; 10.175.4c; AVś.6.6.1d; 54.3d; 7.110.3d; 20.5.4c; 27.3b; SV.2.1186b; MS.4.12.3c: 186.12; KS.6.10c.
yajamāne sunvati dakṣiṇāvati RV.8.96.2c; AVś.20.55.3c.
yat sunvate yajamānāya śikṣathaḥ (RV.10.27.1b, śikṣam) RV.8.59 (Vāl.11).1d; 10.27.1b.
agnim ... puroḍāśān (VSK. purolāśān) badhnann aśvibhyāṃ chāgaṃ sarasvatyai meṣam indrāya ṛṣabhaṃ sunvann aśvibhyāṃ sarasvatyā indrāya sutrāmṇe surāsomān # VS.21.59; VSK.23.58. P: agnim adya Kś.12.6.30; 19.7.11. Cf. sīsena agnim adya.
agnir daivīnāṃ (śB.Kś. ha daivīnāṃ) viśāṃ puraetāyaṃ (Mś. -yaṃ sunvan) yajamāno manuṣyāṇām # śB.3.7.4.10; Kś.6.4.3; Apś.11.19.8; Mś.2.3.6.17. P: agnir daivīnāṃ viśāṃ puraetā MS.3.9.8: 127.3; agnir ha daivīnām Kś.9.8.15. Cf. the ūha Apś.11.19.9.
agnir daivīnāṃ viśāṃ puraeteme sunvanto yajamānā manuṣyāṇām # Mś.7.2.1.44. ūha of prec.
athā sunudhvaṃ savanaṃ madāya # RV.4.35.4c.
adhi vocā nu sunvate # RV.1.132.1e.
adhvaryavaḥ sunutendrāya somam # RV.10.30.15c. Cf. adhvaryavo bha-.
adhvaryavo bharatendrāya somam # RV.2.14.1a; Aś.6.4.10; śś.18.19.5. P: adhvaryavo bharatendrāya śś.9.7.5; 12.4.8. Cf. adhvaryavaḥ sunu-.
apo na vāṃ sunoty akṣṇayādhruk # RV.1.122.9b.
abhi tiṣṭhema pṛtsutīr asunvatām # RV.1.110.7d.
ayaṃ soma indra tubhyaṃ sunve # RV.7.29.1a; 9.88.1a; SV.2.821a; KB.26.11. Ps: ayaṃ soma indra tubhyaṃ sunva ā tu (RV.7.29.1) AB.5.20.8; Aś.8.11.1; ayaṃ somaḥ śś.10.10.4; Lś.4.7.1.
ayaḥśiprā vājinaḥ suniṣkāḥ # RV.4.37.4b.
arcanty arkaṃ sunvanty andhaḥ # RV.5.30.6b.
avitāsi sunvato vṛktabarhiṣaḥ # RV.8.36.1a; AB.5.6.10; KB.23.1; śB.13.5.1.19. P: avitāsi Aś.7.12.9 (cf. 7.12.19); śś.10.6.9.
asunītāya voḍhave # AVś.18.2.56b. See asunīthāya.
asunīte punar asmāsu cakṣuḥ # RV.10.59.6a. P: asunīte śś.16.13.14.
asunīte mano asmāsu dhāraya # RV.10.59.5a; N.10.40a. P: asunīte śś.16.13.14.
asunīthāya voḍhave # TA.6.1.1b. See asunītāya.
asunvato viṣuṇaḥ sunvato vṛdhaḥ # RV.5.34.6b.
asunvantam ayajamānam icha # AVP.5.27.6a; VS.12.62a; TS.4.2.5.4a; MS.2.7.12a: 90.15; KS.16.12a; śB.7.2.1.9; Mś.6.1.5.16. Ps: asunvantam ayajamānam Mś.11.2.9; --11.4.5; 11.7.1.7; asunvantam Kś.17.2.1.
asmaddviṣaḥ sunītho mā parā daiḥ # MS.4.9.12b: 133.4. See asmān sunīte, and dviṣā sunīte.
asmān sunīte mā parādāḥ # KA.1.198.12b. See under asmaddviṣaḥ.
asmin sunvati yajamāna āśiṣaḥ svāhākṛtāḥ samudreṣṭhā gandharvam ā tiṣṭhatānu # TS.3.5.6.3.
asmai brahmaṇe 'smai kṣatrāyāsmai sunvate yajamānāya pavate # VS.7.21; śB.4.2.2.13,14.
asmai sunvate yajamānāya pavate (KA. pinvasva) # VS.7.21; VSK.7.8.4; śB.4.2.2.13,14; KA.2.137; Apś.12.15.8.
ahaṃ bhuvaṃ vasunaḥ pūrvyas patiḥ # RV.10.48.1a; AB.5.21.6; KB.22.4; 26.16. P: ahaṃ bhuvam Aś.6.4.10; 8.7.24; ahaṃ bhuveti sūktena VHDh.7.218. Cf. BṛhD.7.57.
ahā yad dyāvo (AVś. devā) asunītim ayan (AVś. āyan) # RV.10.12.4c; AVś.18.1.31c.
ācitā vasunā saha # AVP.1.100.1b.
āditya nāvam ārukṣaḥ (SMB. ārokṣam) # AVś.17.1.25a; SMB.2.5.14a. P: āditya nāvam GG.4.6.12; KhG.4.1.25. See imāṃ su nāvam, imāṃ nāvam, sunāvam ā ruheyam, and sūrya nāvam.
ādityā rudrā vasavaḥ sunīthāḥ # RV.3.8.8a.
ā no rayiṃ sarvavīraṃ sunotana # RV.10.76.4c.
āpaḥ śikṣantīḥ pacatā sunāthāḥ # AVś.12.3.27d.
ā rodasī vasunā daṃ supatnī # RV.6.3.7d.
ā vaha devān sunvate yajamānāya # Aś.5.3.7. Cf. ā vaha devān throughout.
ichanti devāḥ sunvantam # RV.8.2.18a; AVś.20.18.3a; SV.2.71a.
ina inasya vasunaḥ pada ā # RV.1.149.1b.
indram utsaṃ na vasunaḥ sicāmahe # RV.2.16.7d.
indraḥ śatrūn asunītiṃ nayāti te # AVP.1.74.3c.
indraḥ sunītī saha mā punātu # RVKh.9.67.5a; TB.1.4.8.6a.
indrāgnī somam uśatī sunoti # RV.1.109.4b.
indrāya yatra savanāni sunve # RV.7.97.1c.
indrāya sunavai (AVP. sunomi) tvā # RV.8.91.1d; AVP.4.26.1d; JB.1.220d.
indrāya sunvad ṛṣaye ca śikṣat # RV.10.27.22d.
indrāya somam uśate sunoti # RV.4.24.6b.
indrāsi sunvato vṛdhaḥ patir divaḥ # RV.8.98.5c; AVś.20.64.2c; SV.2.598c; JB.3.232.
ima indrāya sunvire # RV.7.32.4a; SV.1.293a.
imam ādityā vasunā sam ukṣata # AVś.5.28.4a; AVP.2.59.2a.
ihāyam astu puruṣaḥ sahāsunā # AVś.8.1.1c.
uta vāmasya vasunaś ciketati # RV.8.1.31c.
udneva kośaṃ vasunā nyṛṣṭam # RV.4.20.6d.
ubhā te pūrṇā vasunā gabhastī # RV.7.37.3c.
ubhā hi hastā vasunā pṛṇasva # VS.5.19c; TS.1.7.13.4c; śB.3.5.3.22c. See hastau pṛṇasva.
ubhe te asya vasunā nyṛṣṭe # RV.3.55.20b.
ṛjūyate yajamānāya sunvate # RV.10.100.3b.
kakṣīvate vṛcayām indra sunvate # RV.1.51.13b.
kadā havaṃ maghavann indra sunvataḥ # RV.8.3.14c; AVś.20.50.2c.
kośa iva pūrṇo vasunā # SMB.2.4.12a. Cf. GG.4.5.33; KhG.4.1.17. Cf. kośaṃ na.
kośaṃ na pūrṇaṃ vasunā nyṛṣṭam # RV.10.42.2c; AVś.20.89.2c. Cf. kośa iva.
gantāsi sunvato gṛham # RV.2.41.2c; ArS.2.6c; VS.27.29c.
gabhīravepā asuraḥ sunīthaḥ # RV.1.35.7b; TB.2.8.6.2b.
jātavedase sunavāma somam # RV.1.99.1a; RVKh.10.127.5d; AB.4.30.12; 32.10; 5.2.16; 8.13; 15.7; 17.15; 19.17; 21.18; ā.1.5.3.13; TA.10.2.1a; MahānU.6.2a; Aś.7.1.14; N.7a (Roth's edition, p. 201); 14.33a. P: jātavedase BṛhPDh.9.327; Rvidh.1.22.4,6. Cf. BṛhD.3.130 (B).
jyeṣṭhā sunakṣatram ariṣṭaṃ mūlam # AVś.19.7.3d.
tad u śreṣṭhaṃ savanaṃ sunotana # RV.10.76.2a.
tam it pṛṇakṣi vasunā bhavīyasā # RV.1.83.1c; AVś.20.25.1c.
tasmai somaṃ madhumantaṃ sunota # RV.10.30.3d.
tīvrān somāṃ āsunoti prayasvān # RV.10.42.5b.
tebhiḥ svarāḍ asunītim etām # RV.10.15.14c. See tebhyaḥ etc.
tebhyaḥ svarāḍ (VSK. svarāl) asunītir no adya (VS.VSK. asunītim etām) # AVś.18.3.59c; VS.19.60c; VSK.20.60c. See tebhiḥ etc.
trir ā sāptāni sunvate # RV.1.20.7b; AB.5.21.12.
tvam agne śaśamānāya sunvate # RV.1.141.10a.
dadhāma yajñaṃ (AVP. bhāgaṃ) sunavāma somam # AVP.1.96.1c; KS.40.5c; Apś.16.34.4c.
dive-dive saubhagam āsunvanti # RV.4.54.6b.
divodāsāya sunvate # RV.6.16.5b.
divodāsāya sunvate sutakre # RV.6.31.4d.
dīdayad it tubhyaṃ somebhiḥ sunvan # RV.6.20.13c.
duro yavasya vasuna inas patiḥ # RV.1.53.2b; AVś.20.21.2b.
durṇāmā ca sunāmā ca # AVś.8.6.4a.
deṣṭhaḥ sunvate bhuvaḥ # RV.8.66.6d.
dviṣā sunīte mā parādāḥ # TA.4.20.2b. See under asmaddviṣaḥ.
dhūrṣu yujyadhvaṃ sunuta # RV.10.175.1c.
na vocāma mā sunoteti somam # RV.2.30.7b.
na sunvāna na devayo # RV.8.31.16b; TS.1.8.22.4b; MS.4.11.2b: 164.14; KS.11.12b.
ni sunvate vahati bhūri vāmam # RV.10.42.8d; AVś.20.89.8d.
padmaprabhe padmasundari dharmarataye svāhā # MahānU.4.10.
pavamānaḥ saṃtaniḥ sunvatām iva # SV.2.721c. See prec. but one.
punar brahmāṇo (AVś. brahmā) vasunītha (AVś. vasunītir; KS.8.14b, vasudhītam; KS.38.12b, vasunītha; MS. vasudhīte) yajñaiḥ (AVśṃS.KS.8.14b, agne) # AVś.12.2.6b; VS.12.44b; TS.4.2.3.4b; MS.1.7.1b: 108.9; KS.8.14b; 38.12b; śB.6.6.4.12.
pūrvo devā bhavatu sunvato rathaḥ # RV.1.94.8a; AVP.13.5.8a. Cf. BṛhD.3.126 (A),127.
prajñātāro na jyeṣṭhāḥ sunītayaḥ # RV.10.78.2c.
praty etā vāmā sūktāyaṃ sunvan yajamāno 'grabhīd (śś. agrabhīd) uta pratiṣṭhotopavaktar (śś. -vakta) uta no gāva upahūtāḥ (śś. upahūtā utopahūtaḥ) # KB.13.8; śś.7.6.6. See next, and uta no gāva.
praty etā sunvan yajamānaḥ sūktā vāmāgrabhīt, uta pratiṣṭhotopavaktar uta no gāva upahūtā upahūtaḥ # Aś.5.7.5. See under prec.
pra sunvataḥ śacīpate # RV.8.37.1b.
pra sunvata stuvataḥ śaṃsam āvaḥ # RV.1.33.7d.
pra sunvānasyāndhasaḥ (SV.JB.PB. sunvānāyāndhasaḥ) # RV.9.101.13a; SV.1.553a; 2.124a,736a; JB.3.16; PB.11.5.1.
prācī vāśīva sunvate mimīta it # RV.8.12.12c.
prāśūnām asti sunvatām # RV.8.32.16b.
premaṃ sunvantaṃ yajamānam avatām # śś.8.19.1; ... avatu śś.8.16.1; ... avantu śś.8.20.1.
brahmā sunvantam ichati # RV.9.112.1d.
bhadrā śaktir yajamānāya sunvate # RV.1.83.3d; AVś.20.25.3d; AB.1.29.13.
bhavā sunītir uta vāmanītiḥ # RV.6.47.7d.
bhūri jyotīṃṣi sunvataḥ # RV.8.62.12d.
mahāṃ asunvato vadhaḥ # RV.8.62.12c.
maho arbhasya vasuno vibhāge # RV.7.37.3b.
no nir bhāg vasunaḥ sādanaspṛśaḥ # RV.9.72.8c.
ya ādṛtyā śaśamānāya sunvate # RV.8.66.2c; SV.2.38c.
ya indrāya sunavat somam adya # RV.4.24.7a.
ya indrāya sunavāmety āha # RV.4.25.4c; 5.37.1d.
ya indrāya sunutha somam adrayaḥ # RV.10.76.8b.
yajamānasya sunvataḥ # RV.6.54.6b; 60.15b.
yajamānāya sunvate # RV.5.26.5a; 8.14.3b; 17.10c; 10.175.4c; AVś.6.6.1d; 54.3d; 7.110.3d; 20.5.4c; 27.3b; SV.2.1186b; MS.4.12.3c: 186.12; KS.6.10c.
yajamāne sunvati dakṣiṇāvati # RV.8.96.2c; AVś.20.55.3c.
yajñapriye yajamānāya sukrato (KS. sunvate) # RV.10.122.6b; KS.12.14b.
yat tvā sunvanta īmahe # RV.8.13.5b.
yat sunvate yajamānāya śikṣathaḥ (RV.10.27.1b, śikṣam) # RV.8.59 (Vāl.11).1d; 10.27.1b.
yadā kadā ca sunavāma somam # RV.3.53.4c.
yadā gachāty asunītim etām # RV.10.16.2c; TA.6.1.4c. See yado gachāty.
yado gachāty asunītim etām # AVś.18.2.5c. See yadā gachāty.
yad vaḥ śrāntāya sunvate # RV.8.67.6a.
yad vāsi sunvato vṛdhaḥ # RV.8.12.18a; AVś.20.111.3a.
yaṃ te sunoti bhāvayuḥ # RV.10.86.15d; AVś.20.126.15d.
yam ādityāso nayathā sunītibhiḥ # RV.10.63.13c.
yamāya somaṃ sunuta (AVś. somaḥ pavate) # RV.10.14.13a; AVś.18.2.1a; TA.6.5.1a. P: yamāya somam VHDh.8.68.
yas tvāyantaṃ vasunā prātaritvaḥ # RV.1.125.2c; N.5.19c.
yaḥ sunītho dadāśuṣe # RV.2.8.2a.
yaḥ sunvate pacate dudhra ā cit # RV.2.12.15a; AVś.20.34.18a; AVP.12.15.6a.
yaḥ sunvate stuvate kāmyaṃ vasu # RV.8.50 (Vāl.2).1c; AVś.20.51.3c.
yaḥ sunvantam avati yaḥ pacantam # RV.2.12.14a; AVś.20.34.15a; AVP.12.15.5a.
cakartha maghavann indra sunvate # RV.8.100.6b.
sunīthe śaucadrathe # RV.5.79.2a; SV.2.1091a.
yuvām indrāgnī vasuno vibhāge # RV.1.109.5a.
ye arvāvati sunvire # RV.8.93.6b; 9.65.22b; AVś.20.112.3b; SV.2.513b.
Dictionary of Sanskrit Search
"sun" has 12 results
asunUṅādi affix अस् ( असुन् ) by सर्वधातुभ्योSसुन् वक्तव्यः Uṅ. Sū.628; confer, compare न वेत्तीति नवेदाः। वेतिरसुन्प्रत्ययान्तः Kāś. on P.VI.3.75.
īyasunthe same as ईयस् which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
kasunaHemacandra's grammar. He lived in the 16 th century A. D.
kasunkṛt affix अस् found in Vedic Literature, in the sense of the infinitive: e. g. ईश्वरो विलिखः (विलि-खितुम्) confer, compare P. III.4.13, 17. The word ending in this कसुन् becomes an indeclinable: cf क्त्वातोसुन्कसुनः P.I.1.40.
ḍumsunUnadi affix उम्स् added to the root पा to form the word पुंंस्: confer, compare पांते डेम्सुन् Unadi Sutra IV.177.
tosunkrt affix तोस् in the sense of the infinitive ( तुम् ) seen in Vedic Literature; e. g. ईश्वरोभिचरितो:. The word ending with तोसुन् becomes an indeclinable.
nandasundaraa Jain grammarian who wrote a gloss (अवचूरि) on the हैमशब्दानुशासनवृत्ति.
puṇyasundaragāṇia jain grammarian who has written a commentary work । on the धातुपाठ of हेमच​न्द्र.
sādhusundaraa scholar of grammar who was a pupil of साधुकीर्तिप्रवर and who wrote a short work on grammar named उक्तिरत्नाकर.
udayakīrtiauthor of a treatise giving rules for the determination of the pada or padas of roots; the treatise is named पदव्यवस्थासूत्रकारिकाटीका He was a Jain grammarian, and one of the pupils of Sādhusundara.
padakāraliterally one who has divided the Samhitā text of the Vedas into the Pada-text. The term is applied to ancient Vedic Scholars शाकल्य, आत्रेय, कात्यायन and others who wrote the Padapātha of the Vedic Samhitās. The term is applied possibly through misunderstanding by some scholars to the Mahābhāsyakāra who has not divided any Vedic Samhitā,but has, in fact, pointed out a few errors of the Padakāras and stated categorically that grammarians need not follow the Padapāțha, but, rather, the writers of the Padapāțha should have followed the rules of grammar. Patañjali, in fact, refers by the term पदकार to Kātyāyana, who wrote the Padapātha and the Prātiśākhya of the Vājasaneyi-Samhitā in the following statement--न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः। पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम्। यथालक्षणं पदं कर्तव्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III.1. 109; VI. 1. 207; VIII. 2.16; confer, compare also अदीधयुरिति पदकारस्य प्रत्याख्यानपक्षे उदाहरणमुपपन्नं भवति ( परिभाषासूचन of व्याडि Pari. 42 ) where Vyādi clearly refers to the Vārtika of Kātyāyana ' दीधीवेव्योश्छन्दोविषयत्वात् ' P. I. 1.6 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). I. The misunderstanding is due to passages in the commentary of स्कन्दस्वामिन् on the Nirukta passage I. 3, उब्वटटीका on ऋक्प्रातिशाख्य XIII. 19 and others where the statements referred to as those of Patañjali are, in fact, quotations from the Prātiśākhya works and it is the writers of the Prātiśākhya works who are referred to as padakāras by Patañ jali in the Mahābhāsya.
saṃskṛtamañjarīa short handbook on declension and case-relations written by a grammarian named Sadhusundara, who lived in the beginning of the eighteenth century.
Vedabase Search
Results for sun
ā-arkam as long as the sun shinesSB 10.14.40
ā-arkam as long as the sun shinesSB 10.14.40
ā-udaya-adreḥ from the mountain where the first appearance of the sun is visibleSB 4.16.20
ā-udaya-adreḥ from the mountain where the first appearance of the sun is visibleSB 4.16.20
ā-udaya-adreḥ from the mountain where the first appearance of the sun is visibleSB 4.16.20
adhīśvaraiḥ by the various features of the sun-god, who are their controllersSB 12.11.27-28
ādibhiḥ and so on (sun, water, poison, etc.)SB 11.15.29
āditya (like) the sunSB 10.68.14-15
āditya sunsSB 10.89.48-49
āditya the sunSB 6.3.14-15
āditya-gatam in the sunshineBG 15.12
āditya-gatam in the sunshineBG 15.12
āditya-varṇam luminous like the sunBG 8.9
āditya-varṇam luminous like the sunBG 8.9
āditya-vat like the rising sunBG 5.16
āditya-vat like the rising sunBG 5.16
ādityaḥ sun-godSB 5.1.30
ādityaḥ the sunSB 10.42.23
SB 5.16.1
SB 5.21.8-9
SB 5.23.7
ādityaḥ the sun-godSB 3.26.64
ādityam the sun-godSB 5.21.15
ādityam unto the sunSB 1.14.12
ādityam with the sunSB 10.25.25
ādityasya of the sun (Sūrya Nārāyaṇa)SB 5.22.1
ādityasya of the sun-godSB 12.11.45
ādityāya appearing as the sun-godSB 12.6.67
ādyāḥ beginning with the sun and followed by the other planetsSB 8.18.5
ahaḥ-patiḥ the sunSB 8.10.25
ahaḥ-patiḥ the sunSB 8.10.25
ahani in the daytime, in the sunlightSB 10.13.45
ajaḥ the unborn (sun-god)SB 10.56.8
amatam misunderstoodSB 10.87.30
aṃśumān the brilliant sunSB 3.21.52-54
anugāyadbhiḥ vibrating songs sung by themSB 10.10.2-3
anugīyate are sungSB 12.12.50
anusavanam at each of the junctures of the day (sunrise, noon and sunset)SB 12.6.68
arka and like the sunSB 10.76.24
arka and the sunCC Adi 5.36
SB 10.18.5
arka by the sunSB 12.4.32
arka like the sunSB 10.27.2
SB 10.46.32-33
SB 10.62.4
SB 10.64.9
SB 6.9.13-17
arka of sunsSB 8.6.1
arka of the scorching heat of the sunSB 5.10.17
arka of the sunBG 11.17
SB 10.22.30
SB 11.2.54
SB 11.24.28
SB 12.4.32
arka of the sunSB 12.4.32
SB 3.21.51
SB 7.12.20
arka sunSB 3.30.22
arka the sunSB 1.11.27
SB 10.46.9-13
SB 10.77.35
SB 10.85.7
SB 11.15.8-9
SB 11.16.23
SB 11.17.26
SB 11.3.55
SB 12.8.7-11
SB 12.9.8-9
SB 2.5.30
SB 4.22.52
SB 7.12.2
arka the sun globeSB 1.7.30
arka who is like the sunSB 10.14.24
arka-ābham effulgent like the sunSB 3.21.9
arka-ābham effulgent like the sunSB 3.21.9
arka-dhāmabhiḥ appearing like the sunshineSB 9.15.29
arka-dhāmabhiḥ appearing like the sunshineSB 9.15.29
arka-dṛk appear like the sunSB 8.24.50
arka-dṛk appear like the sunSB 8.24.50
arka-gabhastibhyaḥ from the rays of the sunshineSB 5.22.8
arka-gabhastibhyaḥ from the rays of the sunshineSB 5.22.8
arka-kara-āraktam appearing like the sunshineSB 10.12.20
arka-kara-āraktam appearing like the sunshineSB 10.12.20
arka-kara-āraktam appearing like the sunshineSB 10.12.20
arka-kirīṭa-juṣṭaḥ with a helmet as dazzling as the sunSB 4.7.20
arka-kirīṭa-juṣṭaḥ with a helmet as dazzling as the sunSB 4.7.20
arka-kirīṭa-juṣṭaḥ with a helmet as dazzling as the sunSB 4.7.20
arka-maṇḍalam the sun globeSB 4.11.5
arka-maṇḍalam the sun globeSB 4.11.5
arka-netra eyes shining like the sunSB 7.9.15
arka-netra eyes shining like the sunSB 7.9.15
arka-pakvam food ripened naturally by the sunshineSB 7.12.18
arka-pakvam food ripened naturally by the sunshineSB 7.12.18
arka-prabhavaḥ the product of the sunSB 12.4.33
arka-prabhavaḥ the product of the sunSB 12.4.33
arka-sambhavaḥ derived from the sun-godSB 9.12.2
arka-sambhavaḥ derived from the sun-godSB 9.12.2
arka-varcasā as brilliant as the sunSB 11.17.46
arka-varcasā as brilliant as the sunSB 11.17.46
arka-vat as the sunSB 7.13.22
arka-vat as the sunSB 7.13.22
arka-vat like the sunSB 4.8.38
arka-vat like the sunSB 4.8.38
arkābhyām and by the sunSB 5.26.14
arkadine on SundaySB 4.12.49-50
arkaḥ sun-godSB 4.16.14
arkaḥ the sunSB 1.5.7
SB 10.63.35-36
SB 11.26.34
SB 11.3.9
SB 12.12.48
SB 12.4.20-21
SB 2.5.11
SB 3.8.14
SB 4.16.20
SB 7.2.35
ārkam of the sunSB 11.22.31
arkam the sunCC Adi 2.21
SB 1.9.42
SB 10.70.7-9
SB 11.12.22-23
SB 12.6.66
SB 3.17.17
SB 3.27.10
SB 4.2.5
arkasya of the sunSB 5.22.12
arkasya of the sun globeSB 5.22.8
arkasya of the sunlikeCC Madhya 24.1
arkāt from the sunSB 5.22.13
arkavat exactly like the sunSB 5.22.12
arkavat like the sunSB 11.7.51
SB 3.27.1
arke in the sunSB 11.29.13-14
arke the sunSB 3.14.9
aruṇa like the morning sunSB 3.25.35
aruṇa-īkṣaṇaḥ with bright eyes resembling a morning sunriseSB 4.21.15
aruṇa-īkṣaṇaḥ with bright eyes resembling a morning sunriseSB 4.21.15
aruṇa-locana eyes red like the morning sunSB 1.9.24
aruṇa-locana eyes red like the morning sunSB 1.9.24
aruṇa-oṣṭha lips pinkish like the rising sunSB 4.8.46
aruṇa-oṣṭha lips pinkish like the rising sunSB 4.8.46
aruṇa-udaya before sunriseCC Madhya 6.219
aruṇa-udaya before sunriseCC Madhya 6.219
aryamaṇaḥ as powerful as the sunSB 1.18.23
aryamṇaḥ of the sunSB 3.32.20
asau like the sunIso 16
asau the sunSB 2.3.17
SB 2.6.17
SB 8.21.30
asta haya the sun sets in the eveningCC Madhya 20.390
asta haya the sun sets in the eveningCC Madhya 20.390
asta-girim the mountain behind which the sun setsSB 10.38.24
asta-girim the mountain behind which the sun setsSB 10.38.24
astamaya sunsetSB 5.21.7
ātapa by the glaring sunSB 10.15.48
ātapa dried in the sunshineCC Antya 10.27
ātapa heat of the sunSB 10.22.31-32
ātapa strong sunshineSB 10.3.33
ātapa the heat of the sunSB 12.2.10
ātapām sunshineSB 1.11.13
ātapām the heat of the sunSB 10.69.1-6
ātapatraiḥ with umbrellas for protection from the sunshineSB 8.10.13-15
ātape in the full heat of the sunSB 10.21.16
atha now (after hearing the history of the dynasty of the sun)SB 9.14.1
ayanam the demigod in charge of the passing of the sunSB 7.15.50-51
ayanam the movement of the sun in six monthsSB 3.11.11
ayane on the day when the sun begins to move north, or Makara-sańkrānti, and on the day when the sun begins to move south, or Karkaṭa-sańkrāntiSB 7.14.20-23
bha-gaṇāḥ the luminaries, like the sun, the moon, Venus, Mercury, Mars and JupiterSB 5.23.3
bha-gaṇāḥ the luminaries, like the sun, the moon, Venus, Mercury, Mars and JupiterSB 5.23.3
bhagavān the Supreme Personality of Godhead, represented as the sunSB 5.8.19
bhānoḥ of the sunCC Antya 3.62
SB 11.28.34
SB 5.22.7
bhānuḥ the sunSB 12.2.29
bhānunā by the brilliant sunSB 6.13.19-20
bhāskara sunCC Adi 4.171
bhāskaraḥ the sunSB 10.70.15
SB 3.29.5
SB 4.10.15
SB 6.1.15
bhāskaraḥ the sun-godSB 9.24.35
bhāskaram the sunSB 12.10.11-13
SB 3.11.29
bhāsvān the illuminating sunBs 5.49
CC Madhya 20.304
bheda-bhramam the misunderstanding of differentiationCC Madhya 8.195
bheda-bhramam the misunderstanding of differentiationCC Madhya 8.195
bhidā-bhrama differences from misunderstandingSB 4.31.16
bhidā-bhrama differences from misunderstandingSB 4.31.16
brāhme muhūrte during the most suitable period of the day for spiritual activity, before sunriseSB 10.70.4-5
brāhme muhūrte during the most suitable period of the day for spiritual activity, before sunriseSB 10.70.4-5
caitanya-udaya-acalaḥ Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, who is like the eastern horizon, where the sun risesCC Madhya 24.1
caitanya-udaya-acalaḥ Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, who is like the eastern horizon, where the sun risesCC Madhya 24.1
caitanya-udaya-acalaḥ Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, who is like the eastern horizon, where the sun risesCC Madhya 24.1
caṇḍa of the sunSB 10.18.6
candra-āditya-uparāge at the time of the eclipse of either the moon or the sunSB 7.14.20-23
candra-āditya-uparāge at the time of the eclipse of either the moon or the sunSB 7.14.20-23
candra-āditya-uparāge at the time of the eclipse of either the moon or the sunSB 7.14.20-23
candra-arkābhyām by both the moon and the sunSB 8.9.24
candra-arkābhyām by both the moon and the sunSB 8.9.24
candra-arkau both the moon and the sunSB 8.9.26
candra-arkau both the moon and the sunSB 8.9.26
chāyā Chāyā, another wife of the sun-godSB 6.6.41
dakṣiṇa-ayanam the sun passes to the southern sideSB 5.21.6
dakṣiṇa-ayanam the sun passes to the southern sideSB 5.21.6
dakṣiṇa-ayanam when the sun passes on the southern sideBG 8.25
dakṣiṇa-ayanam when the sun passes on the southern sideBG 8.25
dakṣiṇena to the right (being forced by wind blowing to the right, the sun moves to the right)SB 5.21.8-9
deva of the demigod (the sun-god Sūrya)SB 10.56.45
devam the sun-godSB 9.24.33
devīm exalted SunītiSB 4.12.33
dhūpe in the sunshineCC Antya 20.109
dik-devatāḥ the demigods in charge of different directions, like the sun and the moonSB 5.14.9
dik-devatāḥ the demigods in charge of different directions, like the sun and the moonSB 5.14.9
diva-ākara sunSB 4.12.25
diva-ākara sunSB 4.12.25
dyuman O Lord, who appear exactly like the sun, illuminating the darkness of this world of ignoranceSB 10.2.31
dyumaṇim up to the sunSB 8.10.38
dyutim the sunshineBG 11.17
eṣaḥ the sun globeSB 5.21.3
eṣaḥ this (the sun)SB 5.21.8-9
etaiḥ by all these (witnesses, beginning from the sun-god)SB 6.1.43
gāi is sungCC Adi 2.9
gāila has sungCC Antya 19.101
gāoyāiyā causing to be sungCC Madhya 3.115
gaura-prabhu Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, GaurasundaraCC Antya 2.81
gaura-prabhu Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, GaurasundaraCC Antya 2.81
gaura-rāya GaurasundaraCC Adi 17.135
gaura-rāya GaurasundaraCC Adi 17.135
gaura-sańge with GaurasundaraCC Adi 5.11
gaura-sańge with GaurasundaraCC Adi 5.11
gauracandra Gaurasundara (Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu)CC Adi 10.11
gauraḥ Lord Śrī GaurasundaraCC Adi 17.4
gauraḥ Śrī GaurasundaraCC Madhya 23.1
gaurahari Śrī Gaurasundara, Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Madhya 25.164
gaviṣṭhaḥ the sun in the skySB 1.10.36
geyāni to be sung aboutSB 10.37.15-20
gharma-vṛṣṭi the scorching heat of the sun and torrents of rainCC Antya 20.24
gharma-vṛṣṭi the scorching heat of the sun and torrents of rainCC Antya 20.24
gīta being sungSB 10.21.5
gītā is sungSB 12.8.6
gīta sungSB 10.14.47
gītā sungSB 10.60.44
gīta sungSB 12.11.25
SB 4.30.6
gītāḥ sungSB 10.83.5
gītaḥ sung aboutSB 10.90.26
gītam sungSB 10.86.21
SB 11.23.5
gītām sungSB 11.23.61
gītam sungSB 4.24.79
gītayā being sungSB 3.14.6
gīyamāna being sungSB 10.66.23
gīyamānāḥ being sungSB 10.52.23
gīyamānam which was being sungSB 10.54.59
gīyatām should be sungSB 10.47.14
gīyate is sungSB 12.13.18
SB 7.1.4-5
go-pati of the sun-godCC Madhya 19.98
go-pati of the sun-godCC Madhya 19.98
go-patiḥ the sunSB 11.7.50
go-patiḥ the sunSB 11.7.50
gobhiḥ by the sunshineSB 8.21.30
gopatiḥ the sunSB 1.12.10
guḥ whose rays (the sun)SB 10.76.17
ikṣvāku Mahārāja Ikṣvāku, in the dynasty of the sunSB 2.7.23
ikṣvāku-kule in the dynasty of Ikṣvāku (grandson of Vivasvān, the sun-god)SB 10.51.14
ikṣvāku-kule in the dynasty of Ikṣvāku (grandson of Vivasvān, the sun-god)SB 10.51.14
inaḥ Sūrya, the sun-godSB 10.6.21
iva aṃśumān like the sunSB 9.16.23
iva aṃśumān like the sunSB 9.16.23
jaguḥ sung of the gloriesSB 7.4.14
jala-agni-sūryaiḥ by severe austerities such as keeping oneself in water, in a burning fire or in the scorching sunSB 5.12.12
jala-agni-sūryaiḥ by severe austerities such as keeping oneself in water, in a burning fire or in the scorching sunSB 5.12.12
jala-agni-sūryaiḥ by severe austerities such as keeping oneself in water, in a burning fire or in the scorching sunSB 5.12.12
jala-agni-sūryaiḥ by worshiping water, fire or scorching sunshineCC Madhya 22.52
jala-agni-sūryaiḥ by worshiping water, fire or scorching sunshineCC Madhya 22.52
jala-agni-sūryaiḥ by worshiping water, fire or scorching sunshineCC Madhya 22.52
jāla-arka of sunshine through the holes of a window screenSB 3.11.5
jāla-arka of sunshine through the holes of a window screenSB 3.11.5
jaya gaura-bhakta-vṛnda all glories unto the devotees of Lord GaurasundaraCC Madhya 1.7
jaya gaura-bhakta-vṛnda all glories unto the devotees of Lord GaurasundaraCC Madhya 1.7
jaya gaura-bhakta-vṛnda all glories unto the devotees of Lord GaurasundaraCC Madhya 1.7
jaya gaura-bhakta-vṛnda all glories unto the devotees of Lord GaurasundaraCC Madhya 1.7
jyotiḥ the luminaries in the sky, such as the sun, the moon and the starsSB 10.1.43
jyotiḥ the sunSB 2.10.21
jyotiḥ the sunraysSB 11.14.45
jyotīṃṣi the sun, moon and other celestial luminariesSB 11.2.41
jyotiṣām of the luminaries like the sun and moonSB 6.12.33
jyotiṣām of the sun and other luminariesSB 6.1.4-5
jyotiṣi in the luminaries, specifically in the sunSB 7.12.29-30
jyotiṣi in the sunSB 7.12.26-28
jyotiṣi within the sunSB 11.14.45
kāma-arka-tapta-kumudinī exactly like lilies becoming very hot in the sun of lusty desireCC Antya 19.38
kāma-arka-tapta-kumudinī exactly like lilies becoming very hot in the sun of lusty desireCC Antya 19.38
kāma-arka-tapta-kumudinī exactly like lilies becoming very hot in the sun of lusty desireCC Antya 19.38
kāma-arka-tapta-kumudinī exactly like lilies becoming very hot in the sun of lusty desireCC Antya 19.38
kiraṇa a ray of sunshineCC Madhya 20.108-109
kiraṇa of sunshineCC Madhya 18.112
kiraṇa the sunshineCC Adi 5.36
kiraṇe by the rays of sunshineCC Madhya 13.169
koṭī sūrya hundreds of thousands of sunsCC Antya 6.44
koṭī sūrya hundreds of thousands of sunsCC Antya 6.44
koṭi-sūrya-sama equal to the shining of millions of sunsCC Madhya 11.95
koṭi-sūrya-sama equal to the shining of millions of sunsCC Madhya 11.95
koṭi-sūrya-sama equal to the shining of millions of sunsCC Madhya 11.95
kṛṣṇa-dyumaṇi the Kṛṣṇa sunSB 3.2.7
kṛṣṇa-dyumaṇi the Kṛṣṇa sunSB 3.2.7
kṛṣṇa-gītaiḥ with the song sung by Lord Kṛṣṇa (the Bhagavad-gītā)SB 11.31.21
kṛṣṇa-gītaiḥ with the song sung by Lord Kṛṣṇa (the Bhagavad-gītā)SB 11.31.21
loka-alokayoḥ antarāle between the countries full of sunlight and those without sunlightSB 5.20.34
loka-alokayoḥ antarāle between the countries full of sunlight and those without sunlightSB 5.20.34
loka-alokayoḥ antarāle between the countries full of sunlight and those without sunlightSB 5.20.34
lokāḥ higher planetary systems like heaven, the moon, the sun and BrahmalokaSB 7.7.40
maṇḍalam the sun globeSB 12.11.17
mat-gīta sung by meSB 4.24.77
mat-gīta sung by meSB 4.24.77
mat-gītam the song composed by me or sung by meSB 4.24.76
mat-gītam the song composed by me or sung by meSB 4.24.76
mitra-putrī the daughter of the sun-godCC Madhya 3.28
mitra-putrī the daughter of the sun-godCC Madhya 3.28
mitraḥ the sun-godSB 3.6.20
mitrera of the sun-godCC Antya 18.98
naidāghikam due to the summer sunSB 3.14.49
nanda-sunandaka-ādayaḥ Nanda, Sunanda and the othersSB 10.34.4
nanda-sunandaka-ādayaḥ Nanda, Sunanda and the othersSB 10.34.4
nanda-sunandaka-ādayaḥ Nanda, Sunanda and the othersSB 10.34.4
nandaḥ sunandaḥ the associates of Lord Viṣṇu such as Nanda and SunandaSB 8.21.16-17
nandaḥ sunandaḥ the associates of Lord Viṣṇu such as Nanda and SunandaSB 8.21.16-17
nandam sunandam garuḍam named Nanda, Sunanda and GaruḍaSB 11.27.28
nandam sunandam garuḍam named Nanda, Sunanda and GaruḍaSB 11.27.28
nandam sunandam garuḍam named Nanda, Sunanda and GaruḍaSB 11.27.28
nidāgha-dagdhasya of one scorched by the heat of the sunSB 5.12.2
nidāgha-dagdhasya of one scorched by the heat of the sunSB 5.12.2
nimlocati the sun setsSB 5.21.8-9
pañca-agnīn five fires (the overhead sun and fires burning on four sides)SB 11.18.4
pañca-agnīn five fires (the overhead sun and fires burning on four sides)SB 11.18.4
parigīta sungSB 6.3.27
parivartamānam moving around the sun and moonSB 5.24.3
parjanyaḥ the sunSB 10.20.5
patańgaḥ sunSB 5.1.30
patańgaḥ the sunSB 2.1.30
pāṭayām āsa tore him asunderSB 10.72.43
pāṭayām āsa tore him asunderSB 10.72.43
prabhā sunshineSB 4.31.16
prabhā the sunshineSB 9.15.40
pracarati the sun movesSB 5.22.6
prasvāpayati the sun causes to sleep (as at midnight)SB 5.21.8-9
pratapatram an umbrella as protection from the sunSB 10.35.12-13
priyavrata-ratha-caraṇa-parikhātaiḥ by the ditches made by the wheels of the chariot used by Priyavrata Mahārāja while circumambulating Sumeru behind the sunSB 5.16.2
priyavrata-ratha-caraṇa-parikhātaiḥ by the ditches made by the wheels of the chariot used by Priyavrata Mahārāja while circumambulating Sumeru behind the sunSB 5.16.2
priyavrata-ratha-caraṇa-parikhātaiḥ by the ditches made by the wheels of the chariot used by Priyavrata Mahārāja while circumambulating Sumeru behind the sunSB 5.16.2
priyavrata-ratha-caraṇa-parikhātaiḥ by the ditches made by the wheels of the chariot used by Priyavrata Mahārāja while circumambulating Sumeru behind the sunSB 5.16.2
puṇya-ślokasya of one whose glories are sung by Vedic hymnsSB 1.14.1
puṇya-ślokasya of one whose glories are sung by Vedic hymnsSB 1.14.1
purāṇa-arkaḥ Purāṇa or Vedic literature that shines like the sunCC Madhya 24.321
purāṇa-arkaḥ the Purāṇa which is brilliant like the sunSB 1.3.43
puruṣaḥ the universal form, including all the demigods, like the sun and moonBG 8.4
puṣkaraḥ Puṣkara, a son of SunakṣatraSB 9.12.12
puṣpavantau the sun and moon togetherCC Adi 1.2
CC Adi 1.84
CC Madhya 1.2
raśmi-mayān brilliant as sunshineSB 4.15.18
raśmi-mayān brilliant as sunshineSB 4.15.18
ravau the sunSB 10.80.39
SB 3.4.2
raveḥ for the sunSB 10.54.46
raveḥ of the sunSB 10.71.17
SB 10.74.4
SB 11.28.25
SB 4.31.5
raveḥ on the appearance of the sunSB 10.3.47
raveḥ up to the sunSB 1.11.4-5
ravi the sunSB 10.83.36
ravi-kara sun raysSB 1.9.33
ravi-kara sun raysSB 1.9.33
ravi-maṇḍale of the sun discSB 1.4.15
ravi-maṇḍale of the sun discSB 1.4.15
ravi-nandanam unto Vaivasvata Manu, son of the sun-godSB 9.1.19
ravi-nandanam unto Vaivasvata Manu, son of the sun-godSB 9.1.19
ravi-ratha-cakram the wheel of the chariot of the sun-godSB 5.21.13
ravi-ratha-cakram the wheel of the chariot of the sun-godSB 5.21.13
ravi-ratha-cakram the wheel of the chariot of the sun-godSB 5.21.13
raviḥ sunBG 13.34
raviḥ the sunBG 10.21
SB 10.56.4
SB 10.70.32
SB 11.7.33-35
SB 12.4.8
raviḥ the sun-godSB 12.6.73
SB 4.14.26-27
raviḥ the sunshineSB 10.2.17
raviḥ devaḥ the sun-godSB 10.56.9
raviḥ devaḥ the sun-godSB 10.56.9
ravim the sunSB 1.11.9
SB 12.4.33
SB 7.3.15-16
SB 8.18.21
ravim the sun-godSB 9.24.32
ṛta-satya-netram He is the origin of whatever truth is pleasing (sunetram)SB 10.2.26
ṛta-satya-netram He is the origin of whatever truth is pleasing (sunetram)SB 10.2.26
ṛta-satya-netram He is the origin of whatever truth is pleasing (sunetram)SB 10.2.26
rudra-gītam the song sung by Lord ŚivaSB 4.25.2
rudra-gītam the song sung by Lord ŚivaSB 4.25.2
rudra-gītena by the song sung by Lord ŚivaSB 4.30.10
rudra-gītena by the song sung by Lord ŚivaSB 4.30.10
sa-arkaḥ together with the sunSB 10.77.35
sa-arkaḥ together with the sunSB 10.77.35
sa-patnyāḥ of her co-wife (Sunīti)SB 4.8.10
sa-patnyāḥ of her co-wife (Sunīti)SB 4.8.10
saḥ he (the sun-god)SB 9.24.35
saḥ the sun-godSB 5.21.19
sahasra-arka a thousand sunsSB 3.20.16
sahasra-arka a thousand sunsSB 3.20.16
saṃvarta-arkaḥ the sun at the time of destructionSB 7.3.3
saṃvarta-arkaḥ the sun at the time of destructionSB 7.3.3
saṃvatsaraḥ orbit of the sunSB 3.11.14
sandhyā at sunrise, noon and sunsetSB 11.17.34-35
sandhyā at the three junctures of the day (dawn, noon and sunset)SB 11.27.11
sandhyām the rituals of sunsetSB 10.69.25
sandhyayoḥ at sunrise and sunsetSB 6.18.51
sańgīyate is sungSB 12.3.15
śarat-arka of the autumn sunSB 10.20.42
śarat-arka of the autumn sunSB 10.20.42
śarat-arka-jam due to the sun in the autumn seasonSB 10.20.38
śarat-arka-jam due to the sun in the autumn seasonSB 10.20.38
śarat-arka-jam due to the sun in the autumn seasonSB 10.20.38
śaśi-sūryayoḥ of the moon and the sunBG 7.8
śaśi-sūryayoḥ of the moon and the sunBG 7.8
sauraḥ of the sun-godSB 12.11.27-28
sauraḥ rathaḥ the chariot of the sun-godSB 5.21.12
sauraḥ rathaḥ the chariot of the sun-godSB 5.21.12
saurī the sun-godSB 9.15.40
savitā sunBs 5.52
savitā the sunSB 11.11.12-13
SB 8.18.6
savitā the sun-godSB 10.56.7
SB 8.18.14
savitaḥ O lord of the sunSB 12.6.68
savitari the sunSB 10.39.32
savitṛ of the sunSB 11.3.40
savitrā with the sun-godSB 8.10.29
savituḥ from the sunSB 8.3.22-24
savituḥ of the sunSB 4.31.16
savituḥ of the sun-godSB 5.21.16
savituḥ Savitā (the sun-god)SB 10.58.20
savituḥ the sun globeSB 5.24.1
savituḥ to the sunSB 6.16.46
savituḥ yathā as by being face to face with the sunSB 10.10.41
savituḥ yathā as by being face to face with the sunSB 10.10.41
ślokyaḥ one who is worthy of being sungSB 1.17.30
soma-sūryayoḥ of the moon-god and the sun-godSB 10.1.1
soma-sūryayoḥ of the moon-god and the sun-godSB 10.1.1
soma-sūryayoḥ of the sun-god and the moon-godSB 12.2.25
soma-sūryayoḥ of the sun-god and the moon-godSB 12.2.25
śrutadevaḥ sunandanaḥ Śrutadeva and SunandanaSB 10.90.33-34
śrutadevaḥ sunandanaḥ Śrutadeva and SunandanaSB 10.90.33-34
sunakṣatraḥ SunakṣatraSB 9.12.12
SB 9.22.43
sunakṣatrāt from SunakṣatraSB 9.22.43
sunāmā SunāmāSB 9.24.24
sunanda SunandaSB 1.14.32-33
SB 2.9.15
SB 4.12.22
sunanda-ādi-anugaiḥ by His followers, like SunandaSB 8.22.15
sunanda-ādi-anugaiḥ by His followers, like SunandaSB 8.22.15
sunanda-ādi-anugaiḥ by His followers, like SunandaSB 8.22.15
sunanda-kumuda-ādayaḥ headed by Sunanda and KumudaSB 7.8.37-39
sunanda-kumuda-ādayaḥ headed by Sunanda and KumudaSB 7.8.37-39
sunanda-kumuda-ādayaḥ headed by Sunanda and KumudaSB 7.8.37-39
sunanda-mukhyāḥ the associates of the Lord headed by SunandaSB 8.20.32-33
sunanda-mukhyāḥ the associates of the Lord headed by SunandaSB 8.20.32-33
sunanda-nanda-ādi-anugaiḥ by associates like Sunanda and NandaSB 4.7.25
sunanda-nanda-ādi-anugaiḥ by associates like Sunanda and NandaSB 4.7.25
sunanda-nanda-ādi-anugaiḥ by associates like Sunanda and NandaSB 4.7.25
sunanda-nanda-ādi-anugaiḥ by associates like Sunanda and NandaSB 4.7.25
sunanda-nanda-pramukhāḥ headed by Sunanda and Nanda, the chief of Lord Viṣṇu's associates from VaikuṇṭhaSB 4.19.5
sunanda-nanda-pramukhāḥ headed by Sunanda and Nanda, the chief of Lord Viṣṇu's associates from VaikuṇṭhaSB 4.19.5
sunanda-nanda-pramukhāḥ headed by Sunanda and Nanda, the chief of Lord Viṣṇu's associates from VaikuṇṭhaSB 4.19.5
sunanda-nanda-pramukhaiḥ headed by Sunanda and NandaSB 10.39.53-55
sunanda-nanda-pramukhaiḥ headed by Sunanda and NandaSB 10.39.53-55
sunanda-nanda-pramukhaiḥ headed by Sunanda and NandaSB 10.39.53-55
SB 10.89.54-56
sunanda-nanda-pramukhaiḥ headed by Sunanda and NandaSB 10.89.54-56
sunanda-nanda-pramukhaiḥ headed by Sunanda and NandaSB 10.89.54-56
sunanda-nandau ūcatuḥ Sunanda and Nanda saidSB 4.12.23
sunanda-nandau ūcatuḥ Sunanda and Nanda saidSB 4.12.23
sunanda-nandau ūcatuḥ Sunanda and Nanda saidSB 4.12.23
sunandanaḥ SunandanaSB 12.1.21-26
sunandāyām on the bank of the River SunandāSB 8.1.8
sunandena with Sunanda, His clubSB 10.67.18
sunaya-ātmajaḥ the son of SunayaSB 9.22.42
sunaya-ātmajaḥ the son of SunayaSB 9.22.42
sundarācale to Sundarācala, the Guṇḍicā templeCC Madhya 14.120
sundarānanda SundarānandaCC Adi 11.23
CC Antya 6.61
sunīteḥ of SunītiSB 4.12.41
sunīthā of Sunīthā, Vena's motherSB 4.14.10
sunīthā SunīthāSB 4.13.18
sunīthā Sunīthā, the mother of King VenaSB 4.14.35
sunīthā-ātmaja of the son of Sunīthā, VenaSB 4.13.24
sunīthā-ātmaja of the son of Sunīthā, VenaSB 4.13.24
sunīthaḥ from Subala will come SunīthaSB 9.22.49
sunīthaḥ SunīthaSB 9.17.8
SB 9.22.41
sunīthām of the name SunīthāSB 4.14.2
sunītiḥ Queen SunītiSB 4.8.15
SB 4.9.41
sunītiḥ SunītiSB 4.8.8
sunītiḥ Sunīti, the real mother of Dhruva MahārājaSB 4.9.49
sunītim SunītiSB 4.12.32
sunṛtāyāḥ of SunṛtāSB 8.13.29
sūrya (like) the sunSB 10.68.50-51
sūrya and sunBG 11.19
sūrya as the sunSB 4.22.1
sūrya like the sunCC Madhya 23.5
SB 10.50.11
sūrya of sunsBG 11.12
SB 10.66.39
sūrya of the sunCC Madhya 20.387
SB 10.59.7
SB 10.82.1
SB 11.16.34
SB 5.20.43
sūrya sunCC Adi 1.102
CC Adi 2.19
CC Adi 7.60
sūrya sunsCC Adi 1.85-86
sūrya the sunCC Adi 1.97
CC Adi 2.13
CC Adi 2.27
CC Adi 5.118
CC Madhya 1.280
CC Madhya 3.110
SB 10.20.47
SB 10.50.20
SB 10.59.15
SB 10.7.35-36
SB 10.81.21-23
SB 11.14.36-42
SB 11.2.25
SB 3.8.31
sūryā the sunSB 5.24.2
sūrya the sun-godCC Adi 2.25
SB 10.56.5
sūrya to the sunSB 10.57.40
sūrya vinā without the sunCC Madhya 25.117
sūrya vinā without the sunCC Madhya 25.117
sūrya yena exactly like the sunCC Madhya 20.159
sūrya yena exactly like the sunCC Madhya 20.159
sūrya-ādīnām headed by the sunSB 5.22.2
sūrya-ādīnām headed by the sunSB 5.22.2
sūrya-ādīnām of the sun planetSB 5.20.37
sūrya-ādīnām of the sun planetSB 5.20.37
sūrya-ahe on the day of the sun (Sunday)CC Antya 20.157
sūrya-ahe on the day of the sun (Sunday)CC Antya 20.157
sūrya-aṃśa part and parcel of the sunCC Madhya 20.108-109
sūrya-aṃśa part and parcel of the sunCC Madhya 20.108-109
sūrya-ātmanaḥ in His personal expansion as the sun-godSB 12.11.27-28
sūrya-ātmanaḥ in His personal expansion as the sun-godSB 12.11.27-28
sūrya-candra the sun and the moonCC Adi 1.88-89
sūrya-candra the sun and the moonCC Adi 1.88-89
sūrya-kanyāyām in the womb of the daughter of the sun-godSB 9.22.3
sūrya-kanyāyām in the womb of the daughter of the sun-godSB 9.22.3
sūrya-maṇḍala the sun globeCC Adi 5.34
sūrya-maṇḍala the sun globeCC Adi 5.34
sūrya-maṇḍalāt from the sun globeSB 7.10.58
sūrya-maṇḍalāt from the sun globeSB 7.10.58
sūrya-maṇḍale the sun globeSB 5.7.13
sūrya-maṇḍale the sun globeSB 5.7.13
sūrya-raśmibhiḥ with the dazzling illumination of the sunshineSB 8.10.13-15
sūrya-raśmibhiḥ with the dazzling illumination of the sunshineSB 8.10.13-15
sūrya-rathasya of the chariot of the sun-godSB 5.20.30
sūrya-rathasya of the chariot of the sun-godSB 5.20.30
sūrya-sama like the sun planetCC Madhya 22.31
sūrya-sama like the sun planetCC Madhya 22.31
sūrya-śata hundreds of sunsCC Madhya 8.18
sūrya-śata hundreds of sunsCC Madhya 8.18
sūrya-sūtam the chariot driver of the sun-godSB 6.6.21-22
sūrya-sūtam the chariot driver of the sun-godSB 6.6.21-22
sūrya-udaya haite beginning from the sunriseCC Madhya 20.389
sūrya-udaya haite beginning from the sunriseCC Madhya 20.389
sūrya-udaya haite beginning from the sunriseCC Madhya 20.389
sūrya-upama compared to the sunCC Madhya 18.112
sūrya-upama compared to the sunCC Madhya 18.112
sūrya-upama like the sunCC Antya 1.173
sūrya-upama like the sunCC Antya 1.173
sūrya-vaṃśa of the dynasty of the sun-godSB 12.12.22
sūrya-vaṃśa of the dynasty of the sun-godSB 12.12.22
sūrya-vaṃśam